Multidisciplinary Discourses and Psychology

Multidisciplinary Discourses
and
Psychology

Editor-in-chief
DR. CHARULATA S. PRADHAN
Dept. of Psychology
Kohinoor Arts, Commerce and Science College,
Khultabad, Dist. Aurangabad (MS)

CO-EDITOR
Dr. Shaikh Mohd. Arif
Assistant Professor,
Dept. of Physical Education

Ms. Pradnyaa S. Kale
Dept. of Psychology

Mr. M.K. Rakhonde
Dept. of Psychology

ISBN 978-93-82504-47-4

Multidisciplinary Discourses and Psychology

Copyright
Kohinoor Shikshan Sanstha,
Aurangabad (MS)

Publisher :
New Voices Publication,
Aurangabad - 431001 (MS)
www.newvoicespublication.com.
Mob. 9890450746

Year of Publication : 2014

ISBN 978-93-82504-47-4

DTP :
Yajuwendra Wankar
Mob. 9763830016

Disigning :
Well Done Graphics
Manzoorpura, Aurangabad - 431001 (MS)
Mob. 9595335538

Printer :
Omkar Printers,
CIDCO, Aurangabad - 431001 (MS)
Mob. 9423744183

Price : ` `` ` 300/-

Note : The views expressed by the authors in their research papers
in this book are their own. The Editor/Publisher is not responsible for them.
Author is responsible all grammatical error.
Subject to Aurangabad (MS) Jurisdiction.

MESSAGE

I am glad to know that Dept. of Psychology, Kohinoor Arts I am glad to know that Dept. of Psychology, Kohinoor Arts I am glad to know that Dept. of Psychology, Kohinoor Arts I am glad to know that Dept. of Psychology, Kohinoor Arts
Commerce Commerce Commerce Commerce a aa and Science College, Khultabad nd Science College, Khultabad nd Science College, Khultabad nd Science College, Khultabad is is is is organizing a organizing a organizing a organizing a N NN National ational ational ational
C CC Conference sponsored by UGC on "Modern Approaches & Innovation in onference sponsored by UGC on "Modern Approaches & Innovation in onference sponsored by UGC on "Modern Approaches & Innovation in onference sponsored by UGC on "Modern Approaches & Innovation in
Psychology" on 17 Psychology" on 17 Psychology" on 17 Psychology" on 17- -- -18 February 2014. 18 February 2014. 18 February 2014. 18 February 2014.
This conference will be an exc This conference will be an exc This conference will be an exc This conference will be an exciting and congenial opportunity for iting and congenial opportunity for iting and congenial opportunity for iting and congenial opportunity for
delegates to discuss and explore innovative Psychology applications. The delegates to discuss and explore innovative Psychology applications. The delegates to discuss and explore innovative Psychology applications. The delegates to discuss and explore innovative Psychology applications. The
congress Program feature several outstanding speakers from a congress Program feature several outstanding speakers from a congress Program feature several outstanding speakers from a congress Program feature several outstanding speakers from all ll ll ll India India India India
who are leader in various faculties. who are leader in various faculties. who are leader in various faculties. who are leader in various faculties.
The Theme of the conference is challeng The Theme of the conference is challeng The Theme of the conference is challeng The Theme of the conference is challenging to the ing to the ing to the ing to the A AA Academic and cademic and cademic and cademic and
research scholars. I understand that a good number of delegates from research scholars. I understand that a good number of delegates from research scholars. I understand that a good number of delegates from research scholars. I understand that a good number of delegates from
all over the over the country would be participating in this national all over the over the country would be participating in this national all over the over the country would be participating in this national all over the over the country would be participating in this national
event event event event and discuss ways and means to promote the strengthen programs and discuss ways and means to promote the strengthen programs and discuss ways and means to promote the strengthen programs and discuss ways and means to promote the strengthen programs
of Education. I expect th of Education. I expect th of Education. I expect th of Education. I expect that the outcomes of conference will be of great at the outcomes of conference will be of great at the outcomes of conference will be of great at the outcomes of conference will be of great
importance to the participants. importance to the participants. importance to the participants. importance to the participants.
I send my I send my I send my I send my W WW Warm arm arm arm G GG Greeting reeting reeting reetings ss s and hope that participants will seriously and hope that participants will seriously and hope that participants will seriously and hope that participants will seriously
discuss improvements needed in teaching learning process, modernizing discuss improvements needed in teaching learning process, modernizing discuss improvements needed in teaching learning process, modernizing discuss improvements needed in teaching learning process, modernizing
curricular to take care o curricular to take care o curricular to take care o curricular to take care of ff f recent tre recent tre recent tre recent trends in interdisciplinary and nds in interdisciplinary and nds in interdisciplinary and nds in interdisciplinary and
multidisciplinary research. multidisciplinary research. multidisciplinary research. multidisciplinary research.
I congratulate organizers for their efforts and wish the NCMAIP a I congratulate organizers for their efforts and wish the NCMAIP a I congratulate organizers for their efforts and wish the NCMAIP a I congratulate organizers for their efforts and wish the NCMAIP a
grand success. grand success. grand success. grand success.
With Regards...! With Regards...! With Regards...! With Regards...!

MAZHAR KHAN
Secretary
Kohinoor Shikshan Sanstha,
Aurangabad

FROM THE DESK OF CONVENER FROM THE DESK OF CONVENER FROM THE DESK OF CONVENER FROM THE DESK OF CONVENER

Dear Dear Dear Dear Colleagues and Friends Colleagues and Friends Colleagues and Friends Colleagues and Friends, ,, ,
Warm Greetings Warm Greetings Warm Greetings Warm Greetings

I would like to Welcome all the delegates from different esteemed I would like to Welcome all the delegates from different esteemed I would like to Welcome all the delegates from different esteemed I would like to Welcome all the delegates from different esteemed
institutions to "National Conference on "Modern Approaches & institutions to "National Conference on "Modern Approaches & institutions to "National Conference on "Modern Approaches & institutions to "National Conference on "Modern Approaches & Innovation Innovation Innovation Innovation
in Psychology" on behalf of Kohinoor Arts, Commerce and Science in Psychology" on behalf of Kohinoor Arts, Commerce and Science in Psychology" on behalf of Kohinoor Arts, Commerce and Science in Psychology" on behalf of Kohinoor Arts, Commerce and Science
College Khultabad. College Khultabad. College Khultabad. College Khultabad.
The conference is a reflection of our objective to reach out to The conference is a reflection of our objective to reach out to The conference is a reflection of our objective to reach out to The conference is a reflection of our objective to reach out to
Psychologist, interested in close understanding of this issue from Psychologist, interested in close understanding of this issue from Psychologist, interested in close understanding of this issue from Psychologist, interested in close understanding of this issue from
multidisciplinary discourses multidisciplinary discourses multidisciplinary discourses multidisciplinary discourses. . . .
The aim of NCMAIP is to provide platform for scientific discussion. The aim of NCMAIP is to provide platform for scientific discussion. The aim of NCMAIP is to provide platform for scientific discussion. The aim of NCMAIP is to provide platform for scientific discussion.
Our tremendous intellectual energy is realized through such scientific Our tremendous intellectual energy is realized through such scientific Our tremendous intellectual energy is realized through such scientific Our tremendous intellectual energy is realized through such scientific
Endeavors and many remedies to the problems could be reached. Endeavors and many remedies to the problems could be reached. Endeavors and many remedies to the problems could be reached. Endeavors and many remedies to the problems could be reached.
By organizing this National Scientific Expression we want to create By organizing this National Scientific Expression we want to create By organizing this National Scientific Expression we want to create By organizing this National Scientific Expression we want to create
an Academic and scientific framework where there will be presented the an Academic and scientific framework where there will be presented the an Academic and scientific framework where there will be presented the an Academic and scientific framework where there will be presented the
most important results of some individual or collective studies and most important results of some individual or collective studies and most important results of some individual or collective studies and most important results of some individual or collective studies and
researches, to reunite specialists from the conne researches, to reunite specialists from the conne researches, to reunite specialists from the conne researches, to reunite specialists from the connection domains of ction domains of ction domains of ction domains of
Psychology to allow the expression, at the highest quality standards of Psychology to allow the expression, at the highest quality standards of Psychology to allow the expression, at the highest quality standards of Psychology to allow the expression, at the highest quality standards of
the accumulated experiences of the practitioners from a directive the accumulated experiences of the practitioners from a directive the accumulated experiences of the practitioners from a directive the accumulated experiences of the practitioners from a directive
perspective but also the multidisciplinary view points. perspective but also the multidisciplinary view points. perspective but also the multidisciplinary view points. perspective but also the multidisciplinary view points.
I hope your scholarly gracious presence wil I hope your scholarly gracious presence wil I hope your scholarly gracious presence wil I hope your scholarly gracious presence will make this conference l make this conference l make this conference l make this conference
a grand success. a grand success. a grand success. a grand success.
With Best Wishes. With Best Wishes. With Best Wishes. With Best Wishes.
Dr. Baig Akhtar Mirza Dr. Baig Akhtar Mirza Dr. Baig Akhtar Mirza Dr. Baig Akhtar Mirza
Convener Convener Convener Convener
NCMAIP NCMAIP NCMAIP NCMAIP

EDITOR'S NOTE

Psychology is the connection of applied, educational and theoretical science. It is the
study of behavior and the mental operations of people. It is also in reference to the usage and
application of skill, knowledge and understanding various activities undertaken by humans and
how they are used through daily activities. It can be applied to various area of the life of human.
Man has always accepted the challenges of unbridling the mystery of nature through his
mental process. This leads to the birth of various branches of knowledges. The horizons of
human knowledge drastically expanded in 21
st
century. It paved the way to interdisciplinary
studies. But the most modern studies are intensely striving for multidisciplinary approaches
towards a single thought, action or thing. In order to make perfect modification, usage and
knowledge of tools, machines, techniques, crafts, system and methods of organization, in order
to solve a problem, improve a pre-existing solution to problem, achieve a goal, handle an
applied input/output relation or perform a specific functions multidisciplinary approach is
highly needed. This views will definitely take research in all the sphere of life to the next level.
Haward University ; U.S.A. took the initiation and started school of Liberal Arts, where one can
undertake the multidisciplinary studies. Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Marathwada University,
Aurangabad also planned to start it from next academic year.
The topic "Modern Approaches and Innovation in Psychology : Multidisciplinary School"
proved a thought provoking attempt as some original and Innovative scientific studies and
researches came forward from all disciplines. Performing Arts, History, Science, Social Sciences,
Home and Food Science, Education, Nano Technology, Law, Commerce & Management and
many other subjects showed close scientific relation with Psychology. The paper published in
this book converted the National conference into International one. Research Papers from
various university faculties of Bangladesh, Iraq and multidisciplinary approach made this book
unique one. The innovative papers give new insights which proved necessity of multidisciplinary
approach. The original thoughts, researches and views given in the research papers will boost
the new researches enthusiast scholars, students, teachers, to undertake new studies.
This book is collection of the papers of an National conference on Modern Approaches
and Innovation in Psychology; multidisciplinary school
It is my duty to express my sincere thanks to Chairman and Secretary of Kohinoor
Shikshan Sanstha for providing me an opportunity to organize NCMAIP. I also express the sense
of gratitude towards all the paper presenters who made this conference a grand success.

Dr. Charulata Pradhan
Kohinoor NCMAIP ISBN 978-93-82504-47-4
Multidisciplinary Discourses and Psychology i
INDEX

LIBRARY & INFORMATION SCIENCE
Page No.
1 V.B. Chanshetty
Stress Management Of Library & Information Science Professionals.
01
2 Sharnabasappa Biradar
Job Satisfaction and Job Analysis of Library Professionals
04
3 Bhagyashree V. Tamhanae
Stress Management of LIS Professionals
08
4 Kuldeep P.Pawar
Stress Management of Library & Information Resource Center in Digital Environment
11
5 Dr. Madansing D. Golal
Job Satisfaction among Librarians in Colleges: A Case Study
15
6 Syeda Sarwat F.
Changing Trends of Traditional Libraries towards Electronic Library: Psychological Impact
of ICT on Users
19
7 Ghule Pravin Keruji
Stress Among College Librarian and Information Professionals in a Agasti College, Akole
22
8 Mr. Kumbhar K.N.* Dr. Bidwe H.S.**
Overview of stress on Librarian
25
9 S. B. Rengunthwar
28

HOME SCIENCE

10 Dr. Ragini R. Padhye
Problems of the Generation Gap
30
11 Dr. Manisha P. Wanjari
Nutritional Therapies for Mental Disorders
33
12 Smt. Sakhalkar Meena Narhar
A study of youths changing attitudes towards marriage - becoming a socio-psychological
problem.
36
13 Dr.Nuzhat Sultana M.B
Prevalence of Anemia and Its Impact on the Health Status of Rural and Urban
Adolescents Girls.
38
14 Pawal Ayodhya Dattatraya
Malnutrition
43
15 Kshitija B. Deshpande
Autism - A Behavioural Problem
44
16 Dr.Khandat M.S.
A Study on Decision Making Pattern of Urban Working and Non-working Women in home
activities in Beed city of Maharashtra State
46
17 Salma K. Shaikh* J.V. Nikalje**
How Diet and Nutrition Affect Mental Health
49

FOOD SCIENCE

18 Jaysheela Baswant Manohar
Childhood Obesity In India
50

PERFORMING ARTS : DANCE

19 Dr. Jayant Shevtekar
Dance Psychology
52

PERFORMING ARTS : DRAMA

20 Dr. Chandrashekhar B. Kanse
Theatre to Understand the Psychological Objectives In Education

54
Multidisciplinary Discourses and Psychology ii

LAW

21 M. Madhuri Irene
Advocacy- An Agile Psychology
55
22 Sanjay S. Bang
A Critical Study of the Psychology of the Legislature for enacting the laws related to
woman and children
58
23 Shaikh Tarnnum Yusuf
The Functions of Psychology and Law In Modern Society
61
24 Joshi P.M.
Influence of Psychological & Social Factors on Adolescence Resulting in Crime
64
25 Ansari Zartab Jabeen
Law, Morality and Psychology
66
26 Pramod J. Herode
A Role of Lawyer in Trial: A Psychologist
69
27 Patil Kailash Laxman
Morality and Human Psychology with reference to the Law of the Land
71
28 Dr. D. M. Jadhav
Judicial Activism Social and Psychological Dimensions of Justice
73
29 Shirin Syed Ahmed Hussain
The Importance of Psychology in Framing of Law
75
30 Sabhia Kulsum Y. Shaikh
Role of Advocates as Psychologists in Conciliation Proceedings
77
31 P.S.JOSHI
Justice, Judicial Activism and Psychology
79

COMMERCE

32 Somappa Badiger* Dr. Jeelanbasha V.**
Empirical Study on management of Stress among Government College Students (With
Special Reference to Hospet City)
81
33 Ms.Asha Shinde
Present Status of E-Commerce in Global Market (With special reference to the e-payment
system)
85
34 Dr Memon Ubed Yusuf
Psychological Approach towards Entrepreneurial Education & Learning.
91
35 Dr. Kotgire Manisha
Organizational Performance -Effectiveness of Training
95
36 Gaikwad Chakradhar P.
Human Development Psychology
97
37 Dr. Vasundhara Maturkar* Kuldip Patil**
An Innovative study of Consumer Psychology
99
38 Mrs. Manisha S. Vaidya
Behavioral Finance: Traits of Investors Behavior
101
39 Dr.Bhagwan D.Sangle
The Misinformation Effect in Financial Markets- An Emerging Issue in Behavioral Finance
103
40 Prof. S.P. Budhawant
Psychology effects on Indian Economy
105
41 Prof. Sanjay B.Shinde* Dr.Chopade B.B** Prof.Thube B.G***
Abraham Harold Maslow and his hierarchy of needs Theory
107
42 Suresh G. Sonawane * Dr. Ganesh N. kathar**
Marketing strategies in Business
110
43 Arvind W Ubale* Dr. P.Y. Harkal.**
Organizing Call Centre Agents: Emerging Issues
112
44 Rumana .S.Khan
Changing Psychology of Women towards Entrepreneurship Leading To Economic
Development

116
Multidisciplinary Discourses and Psychology iii

MANAGEMENT

45 Hameed M.S. Ahmed
Impact of Human Capital on Organizational Performance in Republic of Yemen
119
46 Inamdar Aqeela Muzaffar
Modern Approaches to Stress Management
122

ECONOMICS

47 Jadhav Jyoti Sahebrao
Poverty In Maharashtra
124
48 Dr.Beelkis Hasanali Patel
Women Empowerment in India
126
49 Khan Fauzia Bano Quasim Khan
Economics And Psychology
130
50 Gaikwad Ramesh Jalba* Dr. Ubale Sonal Ashok**
Causes And Effects Of Poverty : Indian Experience
132

HISTORY

51 Bhuktar A.B.
Rise of Nazism and Social Psychology
135

POLITICAL SCIENCE

52 Prof. Kedar Nath Bishoyi
Role of Good Governance: An alternative vision to curb Naxal Movement
137
53 Dr. F.S. Pathan
Iraq and Psychological Politics
140
54 Dr. Manjiri Karekar
Educational Problems and Reservation for Muslim Minority in India
142

GEOGRAPHY

55 Dr. Vanmala R. Tadvi
Effect of Built Environment On Childrens Health
145

ZOOLOGY

56 Dr. Nandini Vaz Fernandes* Ms. Regina Fernandes**
Genetic Counseling for Breast Cancer
147
57 Pathan T.D. * Charjan A.P.** Jadhav T.J. ***
Poverty and Alcoholism A Big Constrains in Tuberculosis control.

150
58 Jadhav T.J. * Pathan T.D. **
Effect Of Organic Pesticides (Endosulphan And Thimet) On Histological And
Histophthological Profile Of Ovary Of Fresh Water Fish: Barbus Ticto.
152

BOTANY

59 Dr. Deepak Devilal Pardhe
The Psychological and Physiological Effects of Human-Plant Interaction on Human Well
Being
155

PHYSICS

60 P.R.Maheshmalkar* S. V. Kshirsagar**
Correlations Between Music, Noise and Human Mind
157
61 Mohd. Khizar Syed* Dr.Chishty Syed Qadeeruddin** Dr. Afzal Hussain***
Psychophysics
159

CHEMISTRY

62 Syed Yousuf Hussain
Dopamine : A Neurotransmitter
161

MATHEMATICS

63 Mohmed Zafar Mohmed Saber
The Effects of Psychological Methods to Develop the Mathematical Problem Solving
162

Multidisciplinary Discourses and Psychology 1
Research Paper Library & Information Science

ABSTRACT Stress is the changes which our bodies experience as we adjust to our continually changing
environment. It has been an integral part of our daily life since prehistoric times and Library & Information science
personnel are not exception to this. Thus we cannot avoid stress in our life; rather the best policy is to manage it properly to
increase our efficiency. This article attempts to define stress in the light of LIS profession. It describes about the types of
stress in libraries and its reasons. Also critically analyses the best ways to manage the stress of LIS professionals.

INTRODUCTION
Generally stress is the changes, which our
bodies experience as one, adjust to the continually
changing environment. It has both physical and
emotional effects on us and can create positive or
negative feelings. As a positive influence, stress can
help compel us to action, result in a new
awareness and an exciting new perspective. As a
negative influence, it can result in feelings of distrust,
rejection, anger, and depression, which in turn can
lead to frustration to work and also several health
problems such as headaches, high blood pressure,
heart disease etc. The library environment has
changed drastically over the past few decades. With
the development & application of information
technologies, the library environment has shifted
from the traditional library to computerized library,
then automated library and more recently digital
library. With such changes, the structure and nature of
library & information science professionals has also
changed in a dynamic way. The library & Information
Science professionals experience stress as they
readjust their lives with the changing library
environment, job rotation, job promotion etc, the in
adjusting to such changing library job environment,
stress will help or hinder us depending on how we
react to it.
2. TYPES OF STRESS IN LIBRARIES
The stresses can be broadly divided into
following types.
2. A. Technological Stress:
The development and application of
information technologies in libraries is the major stress
for LIS professionals. Due to rapid change in computer
hardware & software, obsolescence of existing
hardware & software is a common phenomenon in
almost all libraries. Further due to financial,
technological constraints, it is difficult to keep pace
with the changing technologies. Besides the change in
information storage media, form print to electronic,
then digital Medias have resulted in the storage space
facilities.
2. B. Job Security Stress:
The application of Information
Communication Technologies has compelled the LIS
professionals to acquire new knowledge along with the
traditional library functions and services. On the
contrary, there is limited scope for them to undergo
in service training program, higher studies,
refresher courses etc, which has increased a
considerable amount of stress among professionals.
Further, with the increasing intrusion and
appointment of IT/Computer Science people into
the LIS profession have created fear among LIS
professionals about their job security in future.
2. C. Physical Stress:
The working condition of LIS has changed the
physical structure of the job environment. Due to this
sitting in front of computers for a long hour, working in
air-conditioned environment etc have also resulted in
the physical stress and illness.
Stress is not necessarily negative for
performance of the individuals. Some level of stress is
desirable to generate enthusiasm, creativity and
productivity. Stress could be beneficial or detrimental.
A beneficial stress motivates the employees. This type
of stress is called Easters. The detrimental stress is
that which makes one irritable, loses the spirit of work.
This type of stress is called Distress.
3. REASONS OF STRESS IN LIBRARIES
Stress can be derived from three sources such
as physical, mental and situational. Physical stress
can be brought on by overwork, lack of rest and poor
diet. Mental stress can be traced to a persons
V.B. Chanshetty V.B. Chanshetty V.B. Chanshetty V.B. Chanshetty
HKES Basaveshwar College Of Education Bidar Karnataka
Stress Management of Library & Information
Science Professionals.
mental state of mind, which involves expectation,
fears, regrets etc. Situational stress is derived from
the interaction with the outer world like interaction
with modern technologies, role as a library manager
etc. During the past few years, libraries, like many
other institutions, have been experiencing change
at an accelerating rate. The digital library
environment has exhibited a drastic change in the
function & services of libraries. Accordingly the library
& Information Science professionals have exposed to
a considerable amount of stress in their day-to-day
work. Different events which are responsible for stress
factors are as discussed below.
3. A. Technological Change:
The information and communication
technology (ICT) is a fast changing phenomena.
Accordingly the application of ICT in libraries is also
changing at an alarming rate, which creates stress
among library professionals.
3. B. Changing Library Environment:
Many libraries have migrated from older
manual system to automated systems and more
recently to newer more sophisticated digital library
systems. Staff members must unlearn old habits
and procedures and learn to understand the new
system
3. C. Change in Type of Document: In addition
to hard copy, most libraries are now acquiring at
least some materials in alternative formats, such as
CD-ROM or electronic documents or digital format.
These materials, which were once handled on an ad
hoc basis, must now be incorporated into the normal
acquisitions workflow.
3. D. Change in Library Physical facility:
Problems or changes in physical facilities
have become a vital problem in today's libraries.
With the increased use of electronic formats, the
library authorities are reluctant to expand facilities to
cope with increasing space requirements. Some
libraries are actually moving into new facilities with
less space Or losing space to other functions. But the
hybrid type of libraries having both print and non-print
documents face much problems relating to change in
physical facilities of the library.
3. E. Changing users demand:
With the development of various micro
subjects, information explosion, time bound academic
programs etc users attitude towards pin pointed
information have changed. Accordingly the
acquisition, organization and retrieval of
information in quickest possible time have given a
tremendous amount of stress in the mind of library
professionals.
3. F. Reduce staff strength: Restructuring,
layoffs, loss of staff positions, and doing more with
fewer people have become increasingly common
which has been a source of stress with the increasing
workload.. Further problems such as illness, disability,
or death of a member of the library community have a
growing impact on co-workers.
4. HOW TO MANAGE STRESS IN A BETTER WAY
Identifying stress and being aware of its effect
on our lives is not sufficient for reducing its harmful
effects. Just as there are many sources of stress,
there are many possibilities for its management.
However, all require work toward change: managing
the source of stress positively and/or changing
the library & Information Science professionals
reaction to it. Therefore the professionals should
proceed stepwise in the following ways for better
stress management with the ever-changing library job
situation.
4.1. Become aware of the stressors and its
emotional and physical reactions.
(a) It is necessary to notice the distress,
which arises due to change in library
environment i.e. From manual to digital.
Further the stress should neither be ignored
nor should anybody gloss over the problems.
(b) Determine the events from the group of
events, which distress professionals and what
it means to them.
(c) Determine the body responds of the
professionals to this stress. Are they become
nervous or physically upset? If so, decide in
what specific ways it responds.
4.2. Recognize what you can change.
(a) Determine whether avoiding or eliminating
them completely can change stressors?
(b) Determine whether managing the stress over a
period of time instead of on a daily or weekly
basis can reduce intensity of stressors
(c) Decide whether exposure to stress can be
shorten by taking a break, leave the
physical premises, remaining absent in job at
certain intervals etc.
(d) Decide whether the time and energy necessary
to make a change can be devoted (goal setting,
time management techniques, and delayed
gratification strategies etc are helpful for a
change) through motivation, training,
performance appraisal etc.
4.3. Reduce the intensity of your emotional
reactions to stress.
The stress reaction is triggered by the
perception of danger, which may be physical and
emotional. Hence different matters such as whether
professionals view the stressors in exaggerated terms
and/or taking a difficult situation and making it a
disaster, whether the professionals expect to please
everyone, whether they are over reacting and viewing
things as absolutely critical an urgent etc.
In such situation it is better to adopt more
moderate views, try to see the stress as
something the professionals can cope with rather than
something that overpowers them. Further they should
try to temper their excess emotions and put the
situation in perspective.
4.4. Maintain the emotional reserves.
To maintain the emotional reserves, some
skills need to be developed by the library &
information Science professionals. Also realistic goals
should be pursued which are meaningful to them
rather than goals set up by others that they do not
share.
4.5. Learn to moderate your physical reactions to
stress.
Physical exercises, well balanced diet etc
helps to overcome the physical stress. Relaxation
techniques can build the physical reserves. Also
nicotine, excessive caffeine, and other stimulants
should be avoided. Further mix leisure with work.
5. CONCLUSION
One reality of the twenty-first century is
that LIS professionals are faced with constant
challenges in their working environments. This is
particularly true for LIS professionals not only
because of the role they play inside their libraries
but because users expectations always seems to
exceed librarys capacity in terms of documents,
infrastructure facilities, finance, staff etc. In this context
the LIS professionals have two choices, either to
manage and/or control the events that impact their
work and produce stress, or to allow stress to manage
them.
Today's fast-paced library environment
called upon to do more than what the
Professionals did in the past both in their personal or
professional lives. Couple this with the fact that they
often have fewer resources to help them and it is
easy to see how opportunities for stressful situations
can and do grow exponentially.
It is simply not possible to remove all
sources of stress in workplace but, the library
managers can manage stress among their teams
which will help to reduce some of its consequences,
such as: poor morale, reduced performance and team
conflict. The best way to manage stress is create a
supportive culture; appreciate people's differences;
recognize the signs of stress; resolve issues as they
arise; consider teambuilding; enable autonomy; and
have a contingency plan.

REFERENCES

1. Brook, A. (1978, "Coping with the stress of change", Management International Review, Vol. 18 No. 3, pp. 9-15.
2. Elliott, R. (1990, "The challenge of managing change", Personnel Journal, Vol.
3. No. 3, pp. 40-9.
4. Budd, J. (1995, Coping with mutiny: workplace stress demands a responsive management", Industry Week, Vol. 244 No.
18, p. 29.
5. Riggs, D.J. (1997), Whats in store for academic libraries? Leadership and management issues", Journal of Academic
Librarianship, Vol. 23, pp. 2-8.
6. Pores, N.O. And Johannes C.G. (2003), "Library directors under cross pressure between new public management
and value-based management", Library Management Vol. 24 No. 1, pp. 51-60.

ABSTRACT The present study examines the issues related to the job satisfaction of the library professionals. Job
satisfaction is a very important attribute which is frequently measured by organizations. The most common way of
measurement is the use of rating scales where librarians report their reactions to their jobs. Questions relate to rate of pay,
work responsibilities, variety of tasks, promotional opportunities the work itself and co-workers. There is a need to study the
job satisfaction of the librarians because the nature of job is changing. The job satisfaction is the condition of establishing a
healthy organizational environmental in an organization. Normally this depends on the economical, social and cultural
conditions.

1. INTRODUCTION
In early preliterate days, work has been mans total
way of life. It was not separated from other spheres of
life. The incentive for work was immediate satisfaction
of needs. But as society changed, magic and aesthetic
considerations were stripped from work. In ancient
days manual work was thought to be monotonous,
having brutalizing effect on human mind. It was to be
avoided by elites. The higher castes in India also
looked upon work with similar disregard.
Job satisfaction of the librarian naturally depends on
the economically, social and cultural conditions. A
librarian who cannot get a sufficient wage will be faced
with the problem of maintaining his or her family life.
This problem puts the librarian far from being satisfied.
Especially the social facilities are sufficient because of
the economic conditions. Low wages, lack of status
and social security affect motivation. Job satisfaction
cannot be talk of where there is absence of motivation.
Job satisfaction of the librarian who has an important
place in the information
Society will affect the quality of the service he
renders. In this respect, the question of how the
material and moral element affect the job satisfaction
of the librarians gains importance.
Job satisfaction has been defined as a pleasurable
emotional state resulting from the appraisal of ones
job; [1] an affective reaction to ones job;[2] and an
attitude towards ones job. Weiss has argued that job
satisfaction is an attitude but points out that
researchers should clearly distinguish the objects of
cognitive evaluation which are affect (emotion), beliefs
and behaviors. This definition suggests that we form
attitudes towards our jobs by taking into account our
feelings, our beliefs, and our behaviors.
2. SCOPE OF THE STUDY
In the presence scenario there is a need to study
the job satisfaction of the Library professionals
because, job nature are changing in the current
information technology era, remuneration structure,
rewards are changing to current position, expectations
of the library professionals at present seems to be
changing.
3. OBJECTIVES
This study attempts to observe the job
satisfaction of the library professionals working in the
colleges imparting management education. The
following objectives were fixed.
i To know the level of job satisfaction of library
professionals with various qualifications, gender,
marital status;
ii To find the category wise job satisfaction level;
iii To find the job satisfaction is responsible for
desirable life style;
iv To find the working condition of library
professionals involved in the job satisfaction;
v To find the level of job satisfaction of library
professionals with various organization;
vi Scope of freedom, decision making, and initiatives
are how to influence in the job satisfaction of library
professionals.
4. LITERATURE REVIEW
Julie Parmer and Dennis Easts 1989 study of
support staff in twelve Ohio libraries used the JSS as
its basis and found that overall these workers
considered themselves basically satisfied [3]. They
were strongly satisfied in the areas of supervision,
coworkers, work, benefits, and pay, but were
dissatisfied with operational procedures,
communication, contingent rewards, and opportunities
for promotion.
The relevance of job satisfaction and motivation are
very crucial to the long-term growth of any educational
system around the world. They probably rank
alongside professional knowledge and skills, center
competencies, educational resources and strategies
as the veritable determinants of educational success
and performance. Professional knowledge, skills and
center competencies occur when one feels effective in
ones behavior. In other words, professional
Sharnabasappa Biradar Sharnabasappa Biradar Sharnabasappa Biradar Sharnabasappa Biradar
Bilal College of Education For Women, Near Shapur gate
Hyderabad Road Bidar, Karnataka

Job Satisfaction and Job Analysis of Library
Professionals
knowledge, skills and competencies can be seen when
one is taking on and mastering challenging tasks
directed at educational success and Performance [4].
Donna K. Fitch used the Job Descriptive Index in her
1990 survey of Alabama professional job satisfaction.
Though her study broke satisfaction down into
components similar to those of the JSS, she made
more of an effort to look at how institutional differences
such as size of university and extent of library
automation [5] affected job satisfaction. Again, she
found that pay and promotion were the least satisfying
areas. Fitchs findings are somewhat difficult to
compare with those of Parmer and East or Voelck,
however, because she was testing significantly
different variables that, as she concluded, tended to
have minimal effect on job satisfaction.
5. RESEARCH APPROACH
A questionnaire survey to study the job satisfaction
among library professionals working in colleges.
Primary data collected from the questionnaire. 65
questionnaires were randomly distributed. Out of 65
questionnaires 58 were received. In the 58, 3 were not
fully completed; we take the sample size as 55
questionnaires for this analysis. The collected primary
data were keen into system by using the MS-Excel to
analyze data and to generate tables.
6. DATA ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION
The researcher analysis and interprets the data
collected. The data were collected through
questionnaire method. After verifying the questionnaire
for completeness and editing the entries, the
researcher analyzed the data using Excel. The data
are presented in the form of tables.
6.1 Socio Demography Data
After careful observation was made, the socio
demography information table divided in five sections.
i.e. Professionals designation, Educational
qualification, Distribution of gender, Age group and
Professional experience.
Table 1 Socio Demography Information

Table 1 shows that 45% of the respondents
are library assistants, 31% are assistant librarians and
remaining 24% are librarians. In educational
qualification represents 46% of the respondents have
completed MLISc degree only, 36% of the
respondents have completed MLISc with M.Phil.
Degree, and the remaining 18% of the respondents
are completed the bachelor degree. In the third section
of gender distribution 44% of the female respondents
are involved. Age group wise the following observation
studied. Most of the respondents under 36 to 45 age
group, 27% from the middle age group, 22% from the
senior professionals other 16% from the young age
group. Finally in the professional experience 36% of
the respondents are from below 10 years experience,
20% are from 16 to 20 years experience, 18% are
from 11 to 15 years experience, 8% professionals
have vast experience and the remaining 10% are from
11 to 15 years experience.
6.2 Economic Advantages
Table 2 Economic Advantages

Table 2 shows that 11% of the respondents are
extremely satisfied with the economic advantage
given to them. 22% and 49% of the respondents say
that it is very satisfying and moderately satisfying.
11% and 7% of the respondents are poorly satisfying
and not at all satisfied respectively. It is seen from the
above table that as far as economic advantages are
concerned nearly half of the professionals feel that it is
only moderately satisfying.
6.3 Co-operation with Higher Authorities
A questionnaire was asked that whether their
higher authorities are co-operative, helpful and
inspiring people for better and sincere work.
The Table 3 shows that 24% of the respondents
strongly agree that there authority is co-operative
helpful and inspiring people, etc. 63% of the
respondents are agree with higher authorities co-
operation, etc. Remaining 4%, 7% and 2% of the
respondents have given the following opinion i.e.
poorly agree, slightly agree and disagree
respectively that their higher authorities are co-
operative, helpful and inspiring people for better and
sincere work.
Table 3 Co-operation with Higher Authorities

6.4 Profession with Family
Table 4 Profession with Family

The Table 4 shows whether the profession gives
sufficient time and opportunities to spend with their
family. 9% and 47% of the respondents have given the
opinion of very easily and easily have time to spend
to their family after the profession respectively. 36%
and 4% each spend their family without difficulty, with
difficulty, and not at all after their work respectively.
Majority of the respondents spend the time with their
family after the profession.
6.5 Profession with Overtime
Profession is so observing that even in the
absence of over time allowance, they willing to work on
Sundays, Holidays etc., and also at late hours.
Table 5 Profession with Overtime

The Table 5 shows that 36% and 26% of the
respondents work on holidays and Sundays without
remuneration now and then and frequently. 18% of
the respondents work always and 7% work under
compulsion and 13% of the respondents are never
work in absence of overtime allowance on Sundays,
holidays, etc.
6.6 Working Condition
The working conditions like comfortable seating,
adequate temperature, and humidity, hygienic and
healthy environment of the work place are shown in
the table below

Table 6 Working Condition

The Table 6 shows the majority of the respondents
(67%) say their working condition is satisfactory. 16%
and 13% say their working condition is very
satisfactory and only lightly satisfactory respectively.
Other respondents are unsatisfied with their working
condition.
6.7 Professional Status
Library professionals status recognize by their family
members, relatives and friends as follows

Table 7 Professional Status

The Table 7 shows 45% of respondents say their
job is satisfied by their family members, relatives and
friends. 29% of the respondents say pleasing, 22% of
the respondents feel very pleasing and 2% each of
the respondents feel displeasing and somewhat
displeasing respectively. The status of library
professionals is of debate for a long period. Some of
the professionals feel their status is not satisfied
compared with IT era. Using the recent information
communication technology, professionals improve their
knowledge for status.

7. FINDINGS
The following observations were found from this study:
i Professional designation represents 45% of the
respondents are library assistants.
ii In educational qualification represents 46% of the
respondents have completed MLISc degree only.
iii In the gender distribution 44% of the female
respondents are involved.
iv Most of the respondents under 36 to 45 age group.
v In the professional experience, majority of the
(36%) respondents are from below 10 years
experience.
vi 49% of the respondents feel moderately satisfying
with the economic advantages.
vii 63% of the respondents are agree with their higher
authorities are co-operative, helpful and inspiring
people for better sincere work.
viii Majority of the respondents spend their time with
their family after profession.
ix 7% of the respondents are work under compulsion.
x Library working condition is 67% satisfactory by the
respondents response.
xi 45% of the respondents feel their professional
status is recognized by the family members,
relatives and friends.
8. CONCLUSION
After the observations, it may be concluded that the
job satisfaction of library professionals is related to an
individuals expectation of different types of the
profession and perception of how much is attained.
The aspiration varies of various aspects from
individuals, and within the same individual at different
periods. Age, education, experience, job level may be
associated with higher aspiration lending to
satisfaction or dissatisfaction. This is depending on the
perceived potentiality of the job fulfill those aspirations.

REFERENCES

[1] Colleen Parmer and Dennis East, Job Satisfaction among Support Staff in Twelve Ohio Academic Libraries, College &
Research Libraries, Vol. 54, January 1993, pp. 43-57.
[2] Donna K. Fitch, Job Satisfaction among Library Support Staff in Alabama Academic Libraries, College & Research
Libraries, Vol. 51, July 1990, pp.313-320.
[3] V.F. Filak and K.M. Sheldon, Student Psychological Need Satisfaction and College Teacher-Course Evaluations,
Educational Psychology, Vol. 23, No. 3, 2003, pp. 235-247.
[4] H.M. Weiss, Deconstructing Job Satisfaction: Separating Evaluations, Beliefs and Affective Experiences, Human
Resource Management Review, Vol. 12, 2002, pp.173 -194.
[5] A.P. Brief and H.M. Weiss, Organizational Behavior: Affect in the Workplace, Annual Review of Psychology, Vol. 53,
2001, pp.279-307.


ABSTRACT Stress is the changes which our bodies experience as we adjust to our continually changing environment. It
has been an integral part of our daily life since prehistoric times. Library & Information science personnel are not exception
to this. Thus we cannot avoid stress in our life; rather the best policy is to manage it properly to increase our efficiency.
Contemporary libraries are under serious threat due to the increasing pressure of achieving higher level of performance in
this competitive global environment. Academic libraries are facing many challenges posed by the contemporary environment,
most of which are the result of ICT and digital revolution. The paper discusses the impact of emerging changes on academic
libraries. It discusses the need for acquiring core competencies and new skills to manage the modern day academic libraries

KEYWORDS : Stress Management in Libraries, Library Management, LIS Professionals

1. INTRODUCTION
help compel us to action, result in a new awareness
and an exciting new perspective. As a negative
influence, it can result in feelings of distrust, rejection,
anger, and depression, which in turn can lead to
frustration to work and also several health problems
such as headaches, high blood pressure, heart
disease etc. The library environment has changed
drastically over the past few decades. With the
development & application of information technologies,
the library environment has shifted from the traditional
library to computerized library, then automated library
and more recently digital library. With such changes,
the structure and nature of library & information
science professionals has also changed in a dynamic
way. The library & Information Science professionals
experience stress as they readjust their lives with the
changing library environment.
2. Changing Role of Academic Libraries
Academic libraries have always been regarded
to be the nerve center of universities or colleges as
these are responsible to support the teaching,
research and other academic programs of the
university / college. Now these libraries are passing
through a phase of great transition being influenced by
social, political, economic and technological
developments that are taking place in the society. The
era is over when academic librarians were involved in
housekeeping jobs like classification and cataloging,
etc. Now they have to act as the knowledge navigators
and change facilitators to fulfill the users specialized
needs. For this, it has become essential to use cutting
edge technology tools and techniques. The re-
engineering of the teaching and learning framework is
under way in the progressive universities worldwide.
This provides a window of opportunity for their libraries
to demonstrate their existing and potential contribution
to educational change (Bundy 393). Todays
environmental pressures are forcing libraries to focus
on accelerating technology, innovation, technical
complexities, social and legal issues, cost, risk,
competence, skills of staff and technology itself.
Therefore, the library professionals have to act in a
proactive manner to support the twenty-first century
educational change.
Effects of Change on Academic Libraries
Current developments are directly affecting the
knowledge, competencies and skill requirements of the
information professionals to do their job effectively.
These changes are occurring at such a fast pace that
each day new skills and approaches are required to
handle the information and unfurl the new ideas. The
changing perception of users and the technological
advancements have forced the library and information
professionals to enhance their knowledge and acquire
new competencies, skills and develop themselves in
accordance to the new environment to avoid becoming
obsolete and outdated. Thus, it has become imperative
to have generic and traditional skills in addition to
acquisition of ICT skills, which must be continuously
updated. All this demands for environmental scanning,
Market responsiveness, fast developments, high level
of creativity, innovation, collaboration and efficiency.
Thamhain , who is mastering the field of
management has given few characteristics of todays
technology-based business environment, which are
equally applicable in library environment. These are as
follows:
Complex library system and cross-functional linkages
Resource constraint, tough performance
requirements
Bhagyashree V. Tamhanae Bhagyashree V. Tamhanae Bhagyashree V. Tamhanae Bhagyashree V. Tamhanae K.P. B. Hinduja College of Commerce, Mumbai, Maharashtra
High task complexities, risks, and uncertainties
Fast-changing multidimensional user needs
Intense competition in open global markets
Collaboration in need of dealing with different
organizations cultures and values
Need for continuous improvements, upgrades, and
enhancements
Need for multidimensional skills, ability to deal with
changing virtual learning environment
Increasing impact of IT on service delivery mode
(Use of new means such as instant messaging, virtual
reference desk, ask a librarian, Wikis, blogs,
podcasting, etc.)
3. TYPES OF STRESS IN LIBRARIES
The stresses in digital library environment can
be broadly divided into following types.
3.1.Technological Stress:
The development and application of information
technologies in libraries is the major stress for LIS
professionals. Due to rapid change in computer
then digital medias have resulted in the storage space
facilities.
3.2.1 Job Security Stress: The application of
Information Communication Technologies has
compelled the LIS professionals to acquire new
knowledge along with the traditional library functions
and services. On the contrary, there is limited scope
for them to undergo in service training programme,
higher studies, refresher courses etc, which has
increased a considerable amount of stress among
professionals. Further, with the increasing intrusion
and appointment of IT/Computer Science people into
the LIS profession have created fear among LIS
professionals about their job security in future.

3.3.Physical Stress:
The Digital Library Environment has changed the
sitting in front of computers for a log hour, working in
Stress is not necessarily negative for performance of
the individuals. Some level of stress is desirable to
generate enthusiasm, creativity and productivity.
Stress could be beneficial or detrimental. A beneficial
stress motivates the employees. This type of stress is
called Eustress.The detrimental stress is that which
makes one irritable, loses the spirit of work. This type
of stress is called Distress.
4. REASONS OF STRESS IN LIBRARIES
as physical, mental and situational. Physical stress can
be brought on by overwork, lack of rest and poor diet.
Mental stress can be traced to a persons mental state
of mind, which involves expectation, fears, regrets etc.
Situational stress is derived from the interaction with
the outer world like interaction with modern
technologies, role as a library manager etc. During the
past few years, libraries, like many other institutions,
have been experiencing change at an accelerating
rate.
The digital library environment has exhibited a
drastic change in the function & services of libraries.
Accordingly the library & Information Science
professionals have exposed to a considerable amount
of stress in their day-to-day work. Different events
which are responsible for stress factors are as
discussed below.

4.1.Technological Change:
The information and communication technology (ICT)
is a fast changing phenomena. Accordingly the
application of ICT in libraries is also changing at an
alarming rate, which creates stress among library
professionals.
4.2.Changing Library Environment:
Many libraries have migrated from older manual
system to automated systems and more recently to
newer more sophisticated digital library systems. Staff
members must unlearn old habits and procedures and
learn to understand the new system
4.3.Change in Type of Document:
In addition to hard copy, most libraries are now
acquiring at least some materials in alternative
formats, such as CD-ROM or electronic documents or
digital format. These materials, which were once
handled on an ad hoc basis, must now be incorporated
into the normal acquisitions workflow.
4.4.Change in Library Physical facility:
Problems or changes in physical facilities have
become a vital problem in today's libraries. With the
increased use of electronic formats, the library
authorities are reluctant to expand facilities to cope
with increasing space requirements.
Some libraries are actually moving into new
facilities with less space or losing space to other
functions. But the hybrid type of libraries having both
print and non-print documents face much problems
relating to change in physical facilities of the library.
4.5.Changing users demand: With the development
of various micro subjects, information explosion, time
bound academic programs etc users attitude towards
pin pointed information have changed. Accordingly the
acquisition, organization and retrieval of information in
quickest possible time have given a tremendous
amount of stress in the mind of library professionals.
4.6. Reduce staff strength:
Restructuring, layoffs, loss of staff positions, and doing
more with fewer people have become increasingly
common which has been a source of stress with the
increasing workload. Further problems such as illness,
disability, or death of a member of the library
community have a growing impact on co-workers.
5. HOW TO MANAGE STRESS IN A BETTER
WAY
effects. Just as there are many sources of stress, there
are many possibilities for its management. However,
all require work toward change: managing the source
of stress positively and/or changing the library&
Information Science professionals reaction to it.
Therefore the professionals should proceed stepwise
in the following ways for better stress management
with the ever-changing library job situation.
(a) It is necessary to notice the distress, which arises
due to change in library environment i.e. from
manual to digital. Further the stress should
neither be ignored nor anybody should gloss
over the problems.
(b) Determine the events from the group of events,
which distress professionals and what it
means to them.
(c) Determine the body responds of the professionals
to this stress. Are they become nervous or
physically upset? If so, decide in what specific
ways it responds.
(a) Determine whether avoiding or eliminating them
completely can change stressors?
(b) Determine whether managing the stress over a
period of time instead of on a daily or weekly
(c) Decide whether exposure to stress can be shorten
by taking a break, leave the physical premises,
remaining absent in job at certain intervals etc.
(d) Decide whether the time and energy necessary to
make a change can be devoted (goal setting,
time management techniques, and delayed
gratification strategies etc are helpful for a
change) through motivation, training,
performance appraisal etc.
things as absolutely critical and urgent etc. In such
situation it is better to adopt more moderate views, try
to see the stress as something the professionals can
cope with rather than something that overpowers
them. Further they should try to temper their excess
emotions and put the situation in perspective.
skills need to be developed by the library & information
Science professionals. Also realistic goals should be
pursued which are meaningful to them rather than
goals set up by others that they do not share.
stress.
techniques can build the physical reserves. Also
nicotine, excessive caffeine, and other stimulants
should be avoided. Further mix leisure with work.
5. CONCLUSION
Today's fast-paced library environment called
upon to do more than what the Professionals did in the
past both in their personal or professional lives. Couple
this with the fact that they often have fewer resources
to help them and it is easy to see how opportunities for
stressful situations can and do grow exponentially.
One reality of the twenty-first century is that LIS
professionals are faced with constant challenges in
their working environments. This is particularly true for
LIS professionals of digital Library Environment, not
only because of the role they play inside their libraries
them. It is simply not possible to remove all sources of
stress in the digital library workplace but, the library
conflict. The best way to manage stress in digital
library environment are: create a supportive culture;
appreciate people's differences; recognize the signs of
stress; resolve issues as they arise; consider
teambuilding; enable autonomy; and have a
contingency plan.

REFERENCES

1. Pors, N.O. and Johannsen, C.G. (2003), "Library directors under cross pressure between new public management and value-based
management", Library Management Vol. 24 No. 1, pp. 51-60.
2. Riggs, D.J. (1997), "What's in store for academic libraries? Leadership and management issues", Journal of Academic Librarianship,
Vol. 23, pp. 2-8.
4. Elliott, R. (1990, "The challenge of managing change", Personnel Journal, Vol. 69 No. 3, pp. 40-9.
5. Budd, J. (1995, "Coping with mutiny: workplace stress demands a responsive management", Industry Week, Vol. 244 No. 18, p. 29.
6. http://eprints.rclis.org/8152/1/stress_management.pdf.
7. http://crl.du.ac.in/ical09/papers/index_files/ical-55_200_422_3_RV.pdf.

ABSTRACT Stress is the changes which our bodies experience as we adjust to our continually changing environment. It
has been an integral part of our daily life since prehistoric times and Library & Information science personnel are not
exception to this. Thus we cannot avoid stress in our life; rather the best policy is to manage it properly to increase our
efficiency. This article attempts to define stress in the light of LIS profession. It describes about the types of stress in libraries
and its reasons. Also critically analyses the best ways to manage the stress of LIS professionals in digital library environment.

KEYWORDS : Stress Concept , Management, Library Resource Center, Reason of Stress Mgt

1. INTRODUCTION :
help compel us to action, result in a new awareness
and an exciting new perspective. As a negative
influence, it can result in feelings of distrust, rejection,
anger, and depression, which in turn can lead to
frustration to work and also several health problems
such as headaches, high blood pressure, heart
disease etc. The library environment has changed
drastically over the past few decades. With the
development & application of information technologies,
the library environment has shifted from the traditional
library to computerized library, then automated library
and more recently digital library. With such changes,
the structure and nature of library & information
science professionals has also changed in a dynamic
way. The library & Information Science professionals
experience stress as they readjust their lives with the
changing library environment, job rotation, job
promotion etc, the in adjusting to such changing library
job environment, stress will help or hinder us
depending on how we react to it.
2. Basic Concept of Stress Management:
The term or concept of stress is defined in widely
varying ways in the popular press and among
researchers and clinicians who have studied the
phenomenon (Bailey, 1985; Cherniss, 1980; Farber,
1983; Freudenberger et al., 1980; Maslach, 1982).
Some treat it as an intrinsically painful or negative
phenomenon and one to be avoided, while others
consider it to be potentially either positive or negative
depending on the situation. The definition on which this
article is based considers stress to be a persons
psychological and physiological response to the
perception of a demand or challenge. The nature and
intensity of this response depends on the meaning one
gives to the demand or challenge and on ones
assessment of the resources that are available for
meeting it.
This conception of stress has a number of
important elements. First, stress is not something out
there or inherent in stressful things or situations.
Rather, stress is within the person-i.e., a response.
The source of the demand or challenge is referred to
as a stressor. A stressor with negative meaning (the
source of undesirable stress) for one person may
cause a completely different response in another.
Another element in this definition of stress is the
importance of the persons perception or way of
thinking about the situation. Surely, few normal
persons would wish to be without demands or
challenges; these can be part of the joy and verve of
life. However, some demands will be perceived as
potentially harmful or uncomfortable, and the response
to these demands will be an attempt at avoidance or
reduction. Likewise, one will sometimes feel that one
has adequate skills and other resources to deal with a
demand, and the response may be one of pleasurable
anticipation. On the other hand, a feeling of not having
adequate resources to meet a demand can be an
occasion of worry or other painful response. Such a
painful or negative response is often called strain or
distress.
3. Sources of Stress in the Library:
From this conception of stress and burnout, one
can see that stress may be either functional or
Kuldeep P.Pawar Kuldeep P.Pawar Kuldeep P.Pawar Kuldeep P.Pawar
Government College of Education, Parbhani, Maharashtra.
Stress Management of Library & Information Resource
Center in Digital Environment
dysfunctional in the workplace. Logic would predict,
and there is some research to show (e.g., McGrath,
1976), that performance and productivity will improve
with increasing stress to a certain level, after which
increased stress will cause lowered performance. The
interactions among individuals, organizations, and jobs
that produce stress and distress in the workplace are
very complex. Each employee is unique with regard to
the meanings one attaches to stressors, perceptions of
available resources, and the coping strategies and
skills one can and will use. Each organization is,
likewise, unique with regard to the stressors it contains
or produces and its approaches to helping employees
manage and cope with stress.
There is a large body of literature on sources of
stress in the workplace which includes public service
organizations (Beech et al., 1982; Brief et al., 1981).
Reports to this author from some 850 library staff
members from all types of libraries and library
positions confirm that the library workplace has much
in common with jobs in other organizations (Bunge,
1987). The following discussion will cite sources of
stress in the library workplace.
Certainly one of the chief causes of stress is work
overload of a quantitative or qualitative nature. In many
libraries budget cutbacks and staff shortages have
caused staff members to feel that there is always more
work to do than there is time to do it (quantitative
overload). For example, public services staff members
express this in terms of too many
Requests for service to allow thorough or
adequately tailored responses to any of them.
Technical services staff members feel the pressure of
never seeing the in basket or the shelf of materials to
be processed diminish or of always having to
accomplish special projects without reductions in
regular work expectations.
In addition to the sheer quantity of work, library
staff members may feel a qualitative overload. For
example, they often feel that their job requires
knowledge and skills that they do not have, that the job
contains elements that are inappropriate, or that the
job is frustratingly fragmented or complex. Reference
librarians report feelings of inadequacy regarding their
knowledge of information sources and technology,
impatience with hon reference duties such as dealing
with problem patrons and maintaining photocopy
machines, and con- flicks between on-desk and off-
desk duties. Technical services and support staff feel
qualitative overload in terms of lack of knowledge and
skill (in computer use, for example) to do their jobs, or
of always having to balance a variety of disparate
tasks, some of which they may feel are inappropriate
to their positions.
What might be called work under load can also be
a source of stress for library staff members. Some
library jobs, especially for support staff, can be
repetitive, unchallenging, and lacking in meaningful
stimulation. Reference librarians frequently report
being disappointed that so many reference questions
they receive are routine or even trivial. Technical
services librarians often feel that their jobs allow too
few opportunities for them to use their creativity and
the skills they have acquired through training.
Another broad category of stressors in the library
workplace is interpersonal relationships. Relationships
with library patrons are an obvious source of stress for
public services staff members. On the one hand, there
can be great intensity in relationships between
librarians and the people they try to help, sometimes
leading to feelings of inadequacy and frustration when
the help cannot be fully responsive to the patrons
needs. On the other hand, patrons can sometimes be
rude or ill-behaved, can seem to expect miracles, can
steal or mutilate materials, or can otherwise cause
stress for the public services librarian.
Library staff members are also distressed at a lack of
respect and recognition in their interpersonal
relationships. Public services librarians and
administrators usually report this as a lack of
recognition of the librarys role and value by people
outside the library. Technical services librarians and
support staff more frequently report feelings of lack of
appreciation and respect from others within the library.
4. Types of Stress in Libraries:
The stresses in digital library environment can
be broadly divided into following types.
4.1. Technological Stress:
The development and application of information
technologies in libraries is the major stress for LIS
professionals. Due to rapid change in computer
then digital Medias have resulted in the storage space
facilities.
4.2. Job Security Stress:
The application of Information Communication
Technologies has compelled the LIS professionals to
acquire new knowledge along with the traditional
library functions and services. On the contrary, there is
limited scope for them to undergo in service training
programme, higher studies, refresher courses etc,
which has increased a considerable amount of stress
among professionals. Further, with the increasing
intrusion and appointment of IT/Computer Science
people into the LIS profession have created fear
among LIS professionals about their job security in
future.
4.3. Physical Stress:
The Digital Library Environment has changed the
sitting in front of computers for a log hour, working in
Stress is not necessarily negative for performance of
the individuals. Some level of stress is desirable to
generate enthusiasm, creativity and productivity.
Stress could be beneficial or detrimental. A beneficial
stress motivates the employees. This type of stress is
called Eustress. The detrimental stress is that which
makes one irritable, loses the spirit of work. This type
of stress is called Distress.
5. Reasons of Stress in Libraries:
as physical, mental and situational. Physical stress can
be brought on by overwork, lack of rest and poor diet.
Situational stress is derived from the interaction with
the outer world like interaction with modern
technologies, role as a library manager etc. During the
past few years, libraries, like many other institutions,
have been experiencing change at an accelerating
rate. The digital library environment has exhibited a
drastic change in the function & services of libraries.
Accordingly the library & Information Science
of stress in their day-to-day work. Different events
which are responsible for stress factors are as
discussed below.
5.1. Technological Change:
The information and communication technology (ICT)
application of ICT in libraries is also changing at an
alarming rate, which creates stress among library
professionals.
5.2. Changing Library Environment: Many libraries
have migrated from older manual system to automated
systems and more recently to newer more
sophisticated digital library systems. Staff members
must unlearn old habits and procedures and learn to
understand the new system
5.3. Change in Type of Document:
In addition to hard copy, most libraries are now
formats, such as CD-ROM or electronic documents or
digital format. These materials, which were once
handled on an ad hoc basis, must now be incorporated
5.4.Change in Library Physical facility:
Problems or changes in physical facilities have
become a vital problem in today's libraries. With the
increased use of electronic formats, the library
authorities are reluctant to expand facilities to cope
with increasing space requirements. Some libraries are
actually moving into new facilities with less space or
losing space to other functions. But the hybrid type of
libraries having both print and non-print documents
face much problems relating to change in physical
facilities of the library.

5.5.Changing users demand:
With the development of various micro subjects,
information explosion, time bound academic
programmes etc users attitude towards pin pointed
information have changed. Accordingly the acquisition,
organization and retrieval of information in quickest
possible time have given a tremendous amount of
stress in the mind of library professionals.
5.6. Reduce staff strength:
Restructuring, layoffs, loss of staff positions, and doing
more with fewer people have become increasingly
common which has been a source of stress with the
increasing workload. . Further problems such as
illness, disability, or death of a member of the library
community have a growing impact on co-workers.
6.How To Manage Stress in the better way :
effects. Just as there are many sources of stress, there
are many possibilities for its management. However,
all require work toward change: managing the source
of stress positively and/or changing the library &
Information Science professionals reaction to it.
Therefore the professionals should proceed stepwise
in the following ways for better stress management
with the ever-changing library job situation.

(a) It is necessary to notice the distress, which
arises due to change in library environment i.e.
from manual to digital. Further the stress
should neither be ignored nor should anybody
gloss over the problems.
(b) Determine the events from the group of
events, which distress professionals and what
it means to them.
(c) Determine the body responds of the
professionals to this stress. Are they become
nervous or physically upset? If so, decide in
what specific ways it responds.
(a) Determine whether avoiding or eliminating them
completely can change stressors?
(b) Determine whether managing the stress over
a period of time instead of on a daily or weekly
(c) Decide whether exposure to stress can be
shorten by taking a break, leave the physical
premises, remaining absent in job at certain
intervals etc.
(d) Decide whether the time and energy
necessary to make a change can be devoted
(goal setting, time management techniques,
and delayed gratification strategies etc are
helpful for a change) through motivation,
training, performance appraisal etc.
things as absolutely critical and urgent etc. In such
situation it is better to adopt more moderate views, try
to see the stress as something the professionals can
cope with rather than something that overpowers
them. Further they should try to temper their excess
emotions and put the situation in perspective.
skills need to be developed by the library & information
Science professionals.
stress.
techniques can build the physical reserves.
7. Conclusion:
One reality of the twenty-first century is that
LIS professionals are faced with constant challenges in
their working environments. This is particularly true for
LIS professionals of digital Library Environment, not
only because of the role they play inside their libraries
them.
Today's fast-paced library environment called
upon to do more than what the Professionals did in the
past both in their personal or professional lives. Couple
this with the fact that they often have fewer resources
to help them and it is easy to see how opportunities for
stressful situations can and do grow exponentially.
It is simply not possible to remove all sources
of stress in the digital library workplace but, the library
conflict. The best way to manage stress in digital
library environment are: create a supportive culture;
appreciate people's differences; recognize the signs of
stress; resolve
Issues as they arise; consider teambuilding; enable
autonomy; and have a contingency plan.

REFERENCES

1. Pors, N.O. and Johannsen, C.G. (2003), "Library directors under cross pressure between new public management and
value-based management", Library Management Vol. 24 No. 1, pp. 51-60.
2. Riggs, D.J. (1997), "What's in store for academic libraries? Leadership and management issues", Journal of Academic
Librarianship, Vol. 23, pp. 2-8.
4. Elliott, R. (1990, "The challenge of managing change", Personnel Journal, Vol. 69 No. 3, pp. 40-9.
5. Budd, J. (1995, "Coping with mutiny: workplace stress demands a responsive management", Industry Week, Vol. 244 No.
18, p. 29.

ABSTRACT The objective of the present paper is to highlight the concept of Job Satisfaction, Library, College
Libraries, Dr.Babasaheb Ambedkar Marathwada University [BAMU] and to specify objectives, hypothesis, limitations,
methodology and conclusion of the study

KEYWORDS : College Library, Job Satisfaction, Marathwada, BAMU, ICT & Library Automation

1. INTRODUCTION
The job satisfaction is the condition of
establishing healthy organizational environment in an
organization. Job satisfaction has been of interest to
organizational researchers, due to its relationships with
job performance and/or organizational commitment. Job
satisfaction has been an important topic over the years. It
is of importance as job satisfaction is believed to
contribute to job performance as well as work
commitment. An employee who is satisfied with his job
would perform his duties well and be committed to his job,
and subsequently to his organization.
Job satisfaction naturally depends on the
economical, social and cultural conditions in a given
country. Existing economical problems of the developing
countries affect the budgets of the libraries. In parallel,
wages and status are low. The statuses of librarians in
developing countries are not defined. Promotion depends
not on the objective criteria but the personal choices of
the administrators. Especially the social facilities
(transportation services, consumer cooperatives, cash
boxes, etc.) are insufficient because of the economic
conditions. This also affects the job satisfaction
negatively.
2. PROPOSED RESEARCH
Job satisfaction is critical to the retention and
recruitment of college librarians. This study examines job
satisfaction of college librarians in Arts, Commerce and
Science Colleges affiliated to BAMU. Job satisfaction is
one of the more widely discussed topics in the literature
and the workplace. Job satisfaction of the librarians, who
have an important place in the information society, will
affect the quality of the service they render. The job
satisfaction is the condition of establishing a healthy
organizational environment in an organization.
Individuals want to maintain statute, high ranks
and authority by giving their capabilities such as
knowledge, ability, education, health etc. to their jobs for
which they spend most of their time. The individuals who
cannot meet their expectations with regard to their jobs
become dissatisfied. Thus, this dissatisfaction affects the
organization for which s/he works. Job satisfaction is very
important for a person's motivation and contribution to
production. Job satisfaction may diminish irregular
attendance at work, replacement of workers within a cycle
or even the rate of accidents
2.1 Statement of Research Title Present research
focuses on the study Job Satisfaction level of college
librarians affiliated to Dr.Babasaheb Ambedkar
Marathwada University (BAMU). Hence the present
research Job Satisfaction Level of College Librarians: A
Case Study has been undertaken.
2.2 Explanation of the Concepts
2.2.1 Job Satisfaction A pleasurable or positive
emotional state resulting from an appraisal of ones job or
job experiences (Locke, 1976).
2.2.2 College College is an educational institute which
imparts education to graduate, undergraduate and
postgraduate students, and professional community with
the help of various teaching aids and faculty to improve
all round development of personality of the student
admitted in the college.
2.2.3 College Libraries Libraries constituted by the
educational authorities in the campus of college to fulfill
the information needs of students and the faculty related
to their subject by providing reading material like books,
journals, non book material etc. and services regarding
the curriculum.
2.2.4 Marathwada Marathwada is one of the six
divisions of Maharashtra state which includes, eight
districts i.e. Aurangabad, Jalna, Beed, Parbhani, Hingoli,
Nanded, Latur and Osmanabad.
2.2.5 BAMU Marathwada University established in
August 1958 was renamed in 1994 as Dr. Babasaheb
Ambedkar Marathwada University (BAMU) is located at
Aurangabad. The jurisdiction of BAMU is Aurangabad,
Jalna, Beed & Osmanbad districts.
3. AIMS & OBJECTIVES
Present study has been undertaken with a view.
1. To review the current developments in the field of
Job Satisfaction.
2. To study the extent of Job Satisfaction Level of
Librarians in Arts, Commerce & Science Colleges
affiliated with BAMU.
3. To identify the needs and requirements of College
Librarians.
4. Find out the Job Satisfaction Level of College
Librarians.

Dr. Madansing D. Gol Dr. Madansing D. Gol Dr. Madansing D. Gol Dr. Madansing D. Golw ww wal al al al

SSVSS Kolhapurs Law College, Osmanabad, Maharashtra

Job Satisfaction among Librarians in Colleges: A
Case Study
4. HYPOTHESIS
The science faculty students of university lack
sophisticated skills that are needed to exploit the librarys
research potential.
1. Majority of the librarians realize the need for Staff
training.
2. Awareness of use of ICT / Library Automation is
prominent.
3. Most of the Librarians Satisfied with Library
Profession.
5. SCOPE & LIMITATION The present study is
limited to Arts, Commerce and Science Colleges affiliated
to Dr.Babasaheb Ambedkar Marathwada University,
Aurangabad. The main focus of this study is to identify
the needs & requirements of librarians'. While colleges of
all other faculties including Pharmacy, Engineering etc. of
other have been excluded from the present study.
6. METHODOLOGY Present study was done with
the help of survey method. This method plays a
significant role in research as can be seen from the
statement. The survey method is one of the most
effective and sensitive instruments of research survey
research can produce much needed knowledge (Kasyap,
1969). The steps in the methodology include:
6.1 Data collection Data are raw materials of
reflection until by comparison, contrast an evaluation they
are stepped up to successively higher levels of
generation. (Das, 1986). To know the level of librarians
covered, a structured questionnaire was designed and
factual questions, opinion questions were asked. The
questionnaire consisted of 5 sections; in all 5 sections
there are 41 questions. It was estimated that it would take
about 10 to 15 minutes of user time for responding to the
questionnaire.
6.2 Data Analysis and Interpretation
The rich & wide variety of quantitative data
obtained had been checked & tabulated before
processing & analysis were carried out. Tables & Graphs
have been generated.
6.2.1 Year of Establishment
As it is assumed that the year of establishment
indicate the history and development of the institution
hence an attempt has been made to find out the
chronological distribution of the colleges surveyed, which
has been presented in
Table 6.2.1
Table 6.2.1 Distribution of ACS Colleges by Year of
Establishment
Categories
Year of
Establishment
Govt. Granted
Non
Granted
Total
Before 1947
01 -- -- 01
1947-1957 -- 02 -- 02
1957-1967 -- 08 -- 08
1967-1977
-- 22 -- 22
1977-1987
-- 04 -- 04
1987-1997 -- 29 -- 29
1997-2007
-- 13 22 35
2007 on
world
-- -- 03 03
Total- 01 78 25 104
It can be seen from Table No. 6.2.1 that before
the independence only one Government College was in
existence in Aurangabad. Before the establishment of
BAMU 2.56% colleges were in existence in four districts,
after the foundation of BAMU in the year 1958 the
number of colleges established during the year 1957-
1967, were 10.26 %. In the year 1967-1977, 28.21%
colleges were established, further during 1977-2007
about 46 colleges were established by private
management While during 1997-2007 and onwards 25
private unaided colleges established by private
management This shows that there is strong trend of
commercialization of education, hence mushroom growth
of private non grant and permanent non grant colleges is
seen during 2000-2010.Hence it is clear that the growth in
number of the colleges has increased after the
establishment of the BAMU.
6.2.2 Status and Location
The Maharashtra Government permitted, to the
private institution to establish the aided and non aided
colleges in the region, hence an attempt was made to find
out the district wise granted & non granted ACS colleges
which has been presented in Table No. 6.2.2
Table No.6.2.2 Status and Location wise distribution
of ACS Colleges
Rural Urban
Districts
Granted
Non
Granted Granted
Non
Granted
Total

Aurangabad 12 12 10 01 35
Jalna 09 03 05 -- 17
Beed 20 10 06 -- 36
Osmanabad 13 -- 03 -- 16
Total-
54 25 24 01 104
The Table No.6.2.2 reveals that out of 104
colleges 78 (75%) granted and non grant colleges are
located in rural area of the four districts, while 25
(24.04%) granted colleges and non grant colleges are
located in the urban area, And one 0.96% were
government college, It is clear that majority of the
colleges are located in rural area than the urban area. It
can be further noted that 68.27% are combine from
Aurangabad and Beed districts only.
6.2.3 Access to Collection
The collected data has been analyzed and
calculated in Table 6.2.3
Table No.6.2.3 Access to Collection
Access Facility
Districts
No of Colleges
Open Close
Total
Aurangabad 35 1 34 35
Jalna 17 -- 17 17
Beed 36 -- 36 36
Osmanabad 16 -- 16 16
TOTAL 104 1 103 104
The Table No.6.2.3 shows that only one
Government College from Aurangabad, i.e. 0.96%
libraries was providing open access to the collection.
While 99.04% college Libraries from the four districts
were providing close access facility to the students. All
the college librarians further informed that they have
given open access facility to the staff and faculty, as well
as for research students in some what extent.
6.2.4 Total Staff in college library
The more the number of staff members working
in the library reduces the chance of vandalism. Hence an
attempt was made to find out the number of staff
members working in the college libraries. The collected
data analyzed and presented in Table No. 6.2.4
Table No. 6.2.4 Number of Staff working in the
Library.
Number of staff Respondents Percentage
1 - 2 19 18.3
3 - 5 26 25.0
6 - 10 41 39.4
11 - 15 12 11.5
16 - 20 5 4.8
20 & Above 1 1.0
Total 104 100
It can be observed from Table and Figure 6.2.4
that of the total 104 respondents 45 (43.3%) librarians
were working with one to five staff members and 41
(39.4%) librarians were working in college libraries with
six to ten supporting staff members. While 18 (17.3%)
respondents indicated that they were working with eleven
to twenty staff members.
6.2.5 Library Staff & Computer Literacy
The data collected was analyzed to know the
how many library staff was familiar with Computer. The
analyzed data is presented in table no.6.2.5
Table No.6.2.5 Library Staff & Computer Literacy
Colleges Yes Percentage No Percentage
Govt. 1 0.96 0 0.00
Granted 50 48.08 28 26.92
Non Granted 18 17.31 7 6.73
Total 69 66.35 35 33.65
It can be pointed out from Table no.6.2.5 that of
the surveyed 104 libraries 69 (66.35%) staff aware about
computer literate, while 35 (33.65%) were illiterate.
6.3 Job Satisfaction
6.3.1 Qualification & Job
Figure No.6.3.1 Qualification & Job

It can be noted from Figure No. 6.3.1 that of the
surveyed 104 libraries 54 (51.92%) staff was getting job
as per qualification, while 50 (48.08%) were not satisfied
with Qualification & Job Level.
6.3.2 Payment & Job
Figure No.6.3.2 Payment & Job

It can be noted from Table No.6.3.2 that of the
surveyed 104 libraries 76 (73.08%) staff was getting
salary as per job, while 28 (26.925%) were not satisfied
with Salary & Job Level.
6.3.3 Job Work & Stress
Figure No. 6.3.3 Job Work & Stress

It can be noted from Figure No.6.3.3 that of the
surveyed 104 libraries 50 (48.08%) staff was felt that job
work & stress as per qualification, while 54 (51.92%) were
not satisfied with job work & stress.
6.4 Job Security & Satisfaction
Table No.6.4.1 Job Security & Job Satisfaction
Colleges Yes Percentage No Percentage
Govt. 1 0.96 0 0.00
Granted 32 30.77 46 44.23
Non
Granted 7 6.73 18 17.31
Total 40 38.46 64 61.54
It can be Pointed out from Table 6.4.1 that of the
surveyed 104 libraries 40 (38.46%) librarians was sure
about job security & job satisfaction, while 64 (61.54%)
not sure about job security & job satisfaction.
6.5 Rate the Satisfaction Level
Table No.6.5.1 Rate the Satisfaction Level
Colleges
Fully
Satisfied
Partially
Satisfied Unsatisfied Total
Govt. 1 0 0 1
Granted 31 27 20 78
Non
Granted 7 12 6 25
Total 39 39 26 104
It can be Pointed out from Table No.6.5.1 that of
the surveyed 104 libraries 39 (37.50%) librarians was
rated fully satisfied, 39 (37.50%) librarians was rated
partially satisfied, while 26 (25.00%) rated the level
unsatisfied.
6.6 Rate the Job Satisfaction Level
Table No. 6.6.1 Rate the Job Satisfaction Level
Colleges
Fully
Satisfied
Partially
Satisfied
Unsatisfie
d
Tota
l
Govt. 1 0 0 1
Granted 43 21 14 78
Non
Granted 13 8 4 25
Total 57 29 18 104
It can be Pointed out from Table No.6.6.1 that of
the surveyed 104 libraries 57 (54.81%) librarians was
rated job satisfaction level as fully satisfied, 29 (27.88%)
librarians was rated job satisfaction level as partially
satisfied, while 18 (17.31%) rated the job satisfaction
level as unsatisfied.
7. CONCLUSIONS
Some of the major findings are given below
Based on analysis of data following conclusions
were drawn.
The total 104 respondents 42 (40.4%) librarians indicated
that they were never offered staff training on library
security, while 47 (45.2%) respondents had received staff
training occasionally or once in a year and the 15 (14.5%)
librarians had opined that the staff training on security by
arranging orientation is given in every six months.
Therefore, it can be stated that Majority of the
librarians realize the need for Staff training.
(Hypothesis No.1) is valid.
The colleges surveyed from four districts 66.35% colleges
having automated, while 33.65% were not automated or
in the process of automation. Therefore, it can be stated
that Awareness of use of ICT / Library Automation is
prominent (Hypothesis No.2) is valid.
The surveyed 104 libraries 86 (85.58%) staff were
acknowledge about profession, while 15 (14.42%) were
suggested another profession. Therefore, it can be stated
that Most of the Librarians Satisfied with Library
Profession. (Hypothesis No.3) is valid.
The surveyed 104 libraries 65 (62.50%) librarians was
aware about future work environment & job satisfaction,
while 39 (37.50%) not aware about future work
environment & job satisfaction. Therefore, it can be stated
that Most of the Librarians Satisfied with Library
Profession. (Hypothesis No.3) is valid.
sure about job security & job satisfaction, while 64
(61.54%) not sure about job security & job satisfaction.
rated fully satisfied, 39 (37.50%) librarians was rated
partially satisfied, while 26 (25.00%) rated the level
unsatisfied. Therefore, it can be stated that Most of the
Librarians Satisfied with Library Profession.
rated job satisfaction level as fully satisfied, 29 (27.88%)
librarians was rated job satisfaction level as partially
satisfied, while 18 (17.31%) rated the job satisfaction
level as unsatisfied. Therefore, it can be stated that Most
of the Librarians Satisfied with Library Profession.

REFERENCES

ACRL (2004). Inf ormation literacy competency standards for higher education. http://www.ala.org/ala/acrl/acrlstandards/standards
guidelines. htm (accessed on 9
th
October, 2013).
ALA (1989). American Library Association Presidential Committee on Inf ormation Literacy Final Report. Chicago: American Library
Association.
Bawden, D. (2001). Information and digital literacies: a revi ew of concepts. Journal of Documentation. 57(2). 218-259.
http://gti1.edu.um.es:8080/jgomez/hei/intranet/bawden.pdf (accessed on 21
th
October, 2013).
Beatty, Susan and Mountifield, Hester (2005). Collaboration in an information commons: Key elements f or successful support of e-
literacy. Journal of eLiteracy. 2. 232-248.
Bruce, C.S. (2002). Inf ormation literacy as a catalyst for educational change: a background paper. White Paper prepared for UNESCO,
the U.S. National Commission on Libraries and Inf ormation Science, and the National Forum on Information Literacy, for use at the
Inf ormation Literacy Meeting of Experts, Prague, The Czech Republic. http://www.nclis.gov/libinter/inf olitconf&meet/papers/bruce-
fullpaper.pdf (accessed on 14
th
October, 2013).
CILIP (2005). Information Literacy: Definition, CILIP, London. www.cilip.org.uk/prof essionalguidance/inf ormationliteracy/definition/
(accessed on 4
th
October, 2013).
Faust, Judith (2001). Teaching information literacy in 50 minutes a week: The CSUH experience. Journal of Southern Academic and
Special Librarianship.
Fortier, John D. (1998). Wisconsins Model Academic Standards f or Information and Technology Literacy. West Indies.
Grafstein, Ann (2007). Information literacy and Technology: An examination of some issues. Portal: Lib. and the Academy. 7(1). 51-64.
Joint, Nicholas (2005). eLiteracy or Inf ormation Literacy: Which concept should we prefer? Library Review. 54(9). 505-507.
Kane, Sally (2009). E-Document. http://legalcareers.about.com/od/glossary/g/E-documents.htm (accessed on 20
th
October, 2013).
Karisiddappa, C.R. and Iqbalahmad, Umarfaruk Rajgoli (2005). Need for Information Literacy activities in the changing higher education
environment in India. In Madhusudhan M. (Ed). 51
st
All India Library Conf erence of Indian Library Association on Libraries, Information
Literacy and Lifelong Learning. Kurukshetra.
Kasyap, M M (1969). Planning of survey Library Herald, 2 (1&2), 195-199.
Martin, A. and Rader, H. (2003) Inf ormation and IT Literacy: enabling learning in the 21st century. London: Facet.
Seetharama, S. (1999). Inf ormation management: Tools and techniques. In: National Workshop on Inf ormation Management including
ISO 9000 QMS, held at Documentation Research and Training Centre, Bangalore.
Singh, Jagtar (2008). Sense-making: Inf ormation literacy f or lifelong learning and knowledge management. DESIDOC Journal of Library
and Information Technology. 28(2). 13-17.
UNESCO (2003). The Prague Declaration: Towards an Inf ormation Literate Society. UNESCO: Paris.

ABSTRACT This paper dealt with the psychological impact of information communication technology (ICT) on users
as well as on traditional libraries, and how traditional library uses the communication technology like internet, web,
computers and hardware component and became a Electronic Library. It means that ICT changes the users behavior and
this behavior changes the whole face of Traditional Library to Digital Library, as its resources changes to e-resources,
books changes to e-books, journals changes to e-journals, reference services changes to e-reference all its sections and
services are influenced by the users demands of electronic sources. And also paper discusses the need, features, Advantages,
disadvantages, objectives of Digital Library in the scenario of users expectations and of users demands and how ICT
affected their information seeking behavior pattern.

KEYWORDS : Psychological Impact, ICT, Digital Library, Traditional Library,
E-resources. Information seeking behavior

1. INTRODUCTION
Libraries are the social institute where
information and knowledge is disseminated the users
whenever user needs it. The information generation is
much faster due to the applications of technologies. The
growth of knowledge is doubling very fast and in different
format and there is a need to transfer the information to
the users according to their changing behavior.
Application of technologies brought drastic
changes in the activities and functions of libraries as well
as there is a change in users behavior also. It consist the
select, collect, organize, process and retrieve and
disseminate the information faster and easier to the user
community, for these purpose libraries and librarians
adopt the Application of Information Communication
Technology (ICT). And ICT has changed the traditional
activities of libraries, ultimately the traditional role of the
librarian have also changed in ICT. The library
environment has been leading towards digital and
concept of electronic library i.e. the paperless
documentation and information service has been taking
place. Libraries are now automated i:e all the
housekeeping operations are now performed by using
computers online access to e-books, e-journals, e-
knowledge PDF documents, teletext, teleconference,
bulletin boards, etc.
Thats why the role of libraries and librarians is
absolutely crucial towards its users behavior in the new
digital and web environment where there are great
quantities of information but finding the quality in the huge
hay stock is a difficult task and to provide the quality
information to its users very fast and quick.
For this purpose digital library is the best option to fulfill
the need of users community as compare to traditional
library by using ICT.
2. PSYCHOLOGICAL IMPACT OF TECHNOLOGY
Web technology changes the users information
process activity as a result we need a technology to
libraries and this technology called ICT & ICT has
changed libraries to a great extent. It has affected all the
spheres of library activities from collection development to
circulation and housekeeping operations. The enormous
amount of information available in various formats has the
libraries and this has led the librarian to manage these
resources and later to the need of his her users.
Information explosion is the main cause for the changing
environment and it has a great psychological impact on
the users.
Now a days, internet caf is everywhere in the
city. So majority of the users are using internet for
fulfillment of their information requirement.
India there 121 Million (10.2%) Indian library
professionals cannot escape from information technology.
E-resources were also increasing tremendously
day by day. E-resources are cheaper than printed
material and it directly affect the library, users used
library when there is a need of information but users
have the internet on their hand so users think twice to go
to library as a result library loses its customers i.e. users
or readers thats why libraries should adopt the web
technology and acquire new services to its user to avoid.
It means that there is tremendous change in printing &
publishing trend and reading trends.
2.1 CHANGING TRENDS OF LIBRARY: IMPACT
OF ICT
Libraries are changing i:e from traditional to
electronic / digital library. The trends (face) changes in
the context of ;
Types of Information
Way of Information provision
Syeda Sarwat F. Syeda Sarwat F. Syeda Sarwat F. Syeda Sarwat F.
SSVSS Kolhapurs Law College, Osmanabad, Maharashtra

Changing Trends of Traditional Libraries towards Electronic
Library: Psychological Impact of ICT on Users
Information services via web technology
And Library users
2.2 TRADITIONAL LIBRARY
Traditional libraries were performing best in the
manual system, and library collections are print based
and their management is by and large manual. But
growth in information limited, budget is limited, varied
information need do not perform the activities well as a
result there is a change in system. And it replaced with
new electronic services introduced to library to meets the
users demand.
2.3 DIGITAL LIBRARY
According to E.A. Fox, The Digital Library may
be defined as New way of carrying out the functions of
libraries encompassing new types of information
resources, new approaches to acquisition, new methods
of storage and preservation, new approaches to
classification and cataloguing, intensive use of electronic
systems and networks and dramatic shifts in intellectual,
organizational and electronic practices.
C. Jankiraman A digital library is a library in
which collections are stored in digital formats and
accessible by computers.
2.3.1 Components of Digital Library
Hardware Requirements
1) Computer servers
2) Networks
3) LAN/WAN
4) Converters
5) Scanners
6) Internet Connectivity
7) Storage media
8) Multimedia Interface
9) UPS
Software Requirement
Liner Operating Systems
Digital Library Software
Greenstone
Fedora
D-space
Editing Software
E-print
2.3.2 Factors of change to digital libraries
The limited buying power of libraries, complex
nature of recent document, storage problem etc are some
of the common factor which are influencing to change to
digital mode, some other factors are
Information explosion
Searching problem in traditional libraries and it
irritate the users
Low cost of technology : It can be easily realized
that the cost of technologies is much more less
than that of traditional libraries.
Environmental factor : the use of digital libraries
is the cleanest technologies.
Psychological factor : Change in psychology /
behavior of users.
2.3.3 Characteristics of Digital Libraries
Digital Library has the following important
characteristics :
Network Accessibility
User friendly interface
Advanced search and retrieval
Supporting multimedia content
Accessibility from anywhere, home, school,
libraries, during travel etc.
Availability for long time.
Greater opportunity for publishing etc.
2.3.4 OBJECTIVES
The primary objective of Digital Library include
:To collect, store, organize and access information in
digital form.
To meet the requirements of patrons by providing
better services.
To have large digitized database accessible to
multiple users at the same time.
To save time of library staff by avoiding routine
jobs.
To minimize massive storage and space
problems of large libraries.
To reduce cost involved in various library
activities.
All these objectives satisfy the users needs.

2.3.5 Functions of Digital Libraries
The important functions of digital libraries are
which is appreciate by the users.
To enable one to perform searches that is not
practical manually.
To preserve unique collections through
digitization.
To manage contents from multiple locations.
To enable greater access to information.
To provide means to enrich the teaching and
learning environment.
To protect owners of information.

2.4 IMPACTS OF DIGITAL LIBRARY : POSITVE
Provides facility for the downloading and printing.
Provides multiple accesses.
Provides access to more information than
physically acquired information.
Saves the cost and manpower required for
publishing and bringing out new edition.
Makes sharing of information resources possible.
Supports multimedia contents.
Supports both formal and informal learning.
Saves the space, which is required for physical
documents.
NEGATIVE
A digital library is not less expensive because
large costs incur for the conversion of prints materials into
digital format, for the technical skills of staff, and for the
costs of maintaining online access. It is hampered by
copyright law, because works cannot be shared over
different periods of time in the manner to a traditional
library. Digital libraries are wholly dependent on cheap,
abundant sources of electricity; a secondary form of
energy which is produced primarily from fossil fuels and
to a lesser extent from nuclear and green sources.
Without electricity, the content cannot be accessed. The
traditional library after serving the society for centuries
together shall diminish.
3. CHANGING EXPECTATIONS OR CHANGING
BEHAVIOUR OF USERS
To meet the requirement of the users there is a need of
Digital Library. (DL) to fulfill the demand of users which
are as follows :
1. User wants to overcome the information
explosion and explosion of publication.
2. To overcome the searching problem in traditional
library. In this library it is not easy to find the pin
point information to the right user at the right
time.
3. Low cost of technology : Technology is
decreasing and efficiency is increasing in DL.
4. Demand of New Generation : Today users are
demanding information in electronic form and in
minimum time.
4. Changing Role / Behavior of Library
Professional in Digital Age :
The role of library professional are
changed because of the changing behavior of the users
and because of web technology or Internet. The ready
availability of information on the Internet, and its
widespread use, really presents Librarians with an
opportunity, not a threat. Librarians now face difficulties
and complicity challenges due to new trends in
information access.
In the present technological / Internet
era information specialists have to work as e-information
resources in which various professional groups are
expected to map strategies that lead to produce, manage,
maintain and service the information. information
professional has to work as :
Librarian : In additional to being library
manager, they also act as collection development,
technical processors and so on, taking care of information
quality.
Information Manager : To meet information
need of the user they should know how to manage and
deliver appropriate information services.
5. Skills, knowledge, competencies required for
LIS Professionals :
The basic goal of library to provide
access to information to those who need it. The activities
includes Available technology, and need of an evolving
information society. Information activities have been
guided by the developments in the field of storages,
presentation and archiving of knowledge, collection
development and organization of knowledge, information
explosion and computers in information retrieval.
Librarian and information professional involved in
information gathering, storage, retrieval and
dissemination on one hand and on the other hand the
computer specialists who supports the library and
informational professionals in this endeavor. For
successful implementation of it is essential that LIS
professionals are well trained and possess requisite
knowledge and skills in this respect.
CONCLUSION
The present study conclude that advanced
technology like ICT totally changed the libraries and
information centres which forced to move from traditional
form of information towards the Digital form thats why
traditional libraries changing their roles towards the
digital library. This paper also concluded that there is a
need of developing the Digital Libraries advantages over
traditional, besides these changes the need of users are
change and library professional roles are also changed
due to impact of ICT and due to the users behavior.
So there is a need to collect proper information at
economical way and also organize the information
resources systematically and provided value added
services to the users. This is achieved when libraries
become ICT tuned and redesigned the library as Digital
Library.

REFERENCES

1. Veer, D.K., Proceeding of National Conference on Redesigning Libraries and Information Centers organized by Degloor College
Degloor, Nanded.
2. Sharma C.K. (ed) (2011). Enhancing Users Satisfaction through I.T. Application in Libraries Agra. Y.K. Publications.
3. Ashok Babu, T and Ramaiah, L.S. : Developing Cyber Libraries Allied Publishers, New Delhi.
http://www.digitallibary.

INTRODUCTION :-
The whole population of workers in Agasti
College Akole are being faced with many stress factors
to cope with or managed. These factors include work-
related, domestic, after-job age or retirement
problems, etc. These factors are currently reducing
their lifespan to the extent that the average life
expectancy in this college is dropping every day.
Airninja ( 2007 ) reported a drop from 51.56 to 47.44
between the years 2000 to 2007. This is 30% below
the 67.2 world average of life expectancy. Librarian
and Information managers are not left out in this
situation.
Since issues of changes and demands of life,
life cycle transition, beliefs, culture and environment
are all associated with stress. Problem of stress and its
management can therefore be conveniently viewed in
an anthropological discuss. Thus in this work an
anthropological approach of study will be adopted in
looking at the problem of stress among librarian in the
Agasti College Library system Akole.
Agasti College Akole Library System
Agasti College, Akole Library System was
established of the 1972. This is the first College library
in Akole. The library is also largest College Library in
the Akole taluka.
There are over 10 staff working in the library
out of which about 2 are library professional while the
others are non academic staff.
Currently the library server over 6000 students
of the college, about 175 staff of the College.
The Condition has over stretched the usage of
the facilities and also poses high stress implications on
the staff. This can be noticed from the Library statistics
on the number of users patronizing the library per day,
the level of usage of the materials consulted and the
number of slips for outside users counted per day.
When all these are compared with the limited material
sources in the library and the number of available staff
on ground, an air of stress is definite noticed.
Purpose of the Study
The purpose of this study is therefore to
identify the perceived area and causes of stress
among the librarians of the Agasti College, Akole
Library System, find out how these librarians are
managing their stress and then identify the support
system available.

Limitations of the Study
The study is limited to the library staff of Agasti
College, Akole.
Literature Review and Theoretical Framework
Burge ( 1987 ) provide the result from his
stress management workshops using group interview
to collect data from people participating in the
workshop from different kinds of libraries, as well as
people holding different positions in the libraries. His
findings revealed that different groups of librarians
often had similar feelings regarding job satisfaction
and stress. He went further to reveal that cataloguers
for example expressed that they did not get recognition
for their efforts. But instead received complaints
regarding subject headings that were not useful and
that processing was not done quickly enough.
Methodology.
In this study, because of the anthropological
approach of study adopted, qualitative method of data
collection was used while group and personal interview
was employed as data collection instrument. Some of
the questions posed to the group and individuals
interviewed was base on the following headings:
1) Demographic Information of Respondents.
2) Working Environment.
3) Personal or Internal Factors.
4) Home-Work Interface.
5) Professional / Academic Demands.
6) Management Problem
7) Job Security.
8) Job Satisfaction.
9) Coping Strategy.
Gender and Status of the sample interviewed
was also carefully considered in the choice of the
sample so as to have the feelings from every gender
and cadres of the staff. Because the study was
conducted in the same college it is easier to carry out
the interview among the group and individuals but in
order to extract the mind of the sample used and for
the richness of the data collected , each interview was
given a good time. The analysis of the data collected
was purely descriptive.
Findings
From the group and individual interviews
conducted the following issues can be noticed as
summary of all the responses gathered on the
following headings as it affects issues on stress among
librarian in the Agasti College, Akole.
Ghule Pravin Keruji Ghule Pravin Keruji Ghule Pravin Keruji Ghule Pravin Keruji
Shri. Jagdishprasad Jhabarmal Tibrewala University,
Rajasthan
Stress Among College Librarian and Information
Professionals in a Agasti College, Akole
Demographic Data
It is observed that work-related stress was
associated with age. Many younger librarian show
more level of work related stress than the older
librarians. Many of the younger librarians show more
dissatisfaction about the work place environment than
the older ones. A newly employed librarian expressed
that " I dont know how I will continue to cope with a
library environment where I can't satisfy my client
always ". While and older librarian expressed that "
things are improving with the new introduction of IT in
the library processes and generally things are not all
that bad compared with the past period".
Work Environment
When interviewed about the work-
environment stress they perceived in their work-place,
the respondents declared that there are inadequate
working tools and resources. One of the respondents
declared that they dont have enough and adequate
working tools in their own unit.
Other stress factors declared in the work
environment included ergonomic problem i.e. poor
design of instrument used in the work-place affecting
their physical health.e.g.some data entry staff
complain of development of eye problem because of
constantly facing the computer screen developing
continuous pain in the neck due to carriage of books.
Personal or Internal Factors
Some individuals recognized the fact that
there are different levels of individual stress coping
capacity. This they express that it determine the
different response of deferent staff to work place
problem or stress.
Home work Interface
Some individual declared that a times home
problems and demands erode with their work-place
demands causing stress. Some mention the problem
of widowhood among the library staff. This was
confirmed by the fact that a good number of staff in the
library are widow or widowers. One of them described
the trauma of widowhood and declared that : it is not
easy for an individual to carry the burden of two
people.
Professional / Academic Demand
Some individual especially the academic staff
expressed the stress imposed on them in the process
of fulfilling the processional demand in giving services
and at the same time fulfilling the publication demand
as a criterion for promotion. The interface between
these two demands poses a serious stress on
academic librarian. One of them expressed that " it is
not fare on them to require the same number of journal
publication with the classroom lectures as criteria for
promotion while the expectation on their eservices is
still very high ".

Job Security
It was observed that no librarian in the Agasti
Library, Akole system exercises any fear about the
security of their job
Job Satisfaction
Most of the staff interviewed show that they
have some level of job satisfaction. However more
males show job dissatisfaction than the female staff.
The older staff also shows more job satisfaction than
the younger staff.
Management Problem
Most of the staff interviewed declared that
there is no communication problem between the
management and the staff though some complained
that they have no say in the management of the
library. One of the discussants expressed that " every
issue is discoursed and finalized at the management
meeting". This comprised of very few top senior
officers of the library and they expressed that this may
be stressful when they want to air their view about the
smooth running of the library.
Managing Stress in a Better Way
Routray and Satpathy ( 2007 ) Declared that
identifying stress and being aware of its effect on our
lives require work towards change.i.e.managing the
source of stress positively and / or changing the library
and information science professionals reaction to it.
From the above findings it is glaring that better
stress management with the ever changing library job
situation must involve both the individual workers and
the organization effort.
Workers Role
The Individual library and information workers
role in avoiding and managing their stress is very
important this will involve three important approaches
i) Identify ii) Evaluate iii) Manage.
i)Identify
It is important for the library and information
workers to identify their stressors and the source of the
stress. If the stressor and its source are not identified it
can be difficult to evaluate.
ii)Evaluate
1) Evaluate the sources of the stressor by
getting to know how the stress was
created or formed.
2) Measure the severity and intensity of the
symptoms of the stress. i.e determining
your body response to this stress. Find out
if you are nervous or upset with it.
iii)Manage.
In the face of the situation in the library and
information profession, It can be suggested that the
best approach to manage the work place stress in the
library is to reduce its effects and to avoid possible
stress factor completely as much as possible. These
can be achieved by
Changing your perception and beliefs as a librarian
about the profession and its stress area. It is logical to
note that if the nature, practice and role in a profession
are always changing its stress area will be changing
also. It is therefore good to constitute a positive
perception and beliefs about the stress area in
librarianship. While you are honest and objective with
yourself, It is helpful to perceive youre so called
problems in the library to be challenges which are
always never last. However these challenges should
neither be ignored nor glossed over.
Organizational Role
Library and Information organization can play
a major role in reducing, removing or avoiding
workplace Stress for librarian and other
information professionals.
Role Characteristics
This is a situation in which workers are made
to develop a well defined sense of their job
responsibilities, functions and job descriptions.
Library organizations should help employees to
focus more on the responsibilities or functions.
Situation in which workers have a well defined
sense of their job responsibilities and description
always lead to a decrease in the amount of role
ambiguity and conflict encountered
Job Characteristics
This involves organizational strategies in which the
design of the job is manipulated to respond to any
potential stress discovered. This involves:
Job redesign which involves changing some
aspects of the tasks that are part of a particular job.
Often the focus of the redesign is to improve efficiency
or effectiveness on the job.
Interpersonal Relationship
The quality of relationship that employees
have at work has consistently linked to job stress (
Payne 1980). This can be true of librarianship and
information and information profession. These
relationships have been understood to be of three
types relationship with co-workers/ work groups
relationship with supervisors/ leaders and relationship
with clients/ customers.
Organizational Structure and Climate
A number of characteristics associated with an
organization have been linked to occupational stress
employee that have more direct control of their work
no matter what level they occupy in the organization
enjoy their jog and have less stress. Also it was also
found that the culture of an organization.
Human Resource Management Systems
The human resource management system of an
organization evolve from the old personnel function,
which now reflect a shift from placement of employees
alone to a broader focus on employees training,
compensation, rewards and benefits and benefits.
This has become a very important role I dealing
with workplace stress in the library and information
profession.
Conclusion
The paced library environment has called for more that
what the processionals did in the past both in their
personal or professional lives, coupled with the fast
development of information technology now being
introduced in the procession. These has turned the
library and information professional a stress high risk
profession. It is simply not easy to remove all sources
of stress in the library and information work-place but
the organizational manages can manage stress
among their teams which will help to reduce some of
its consequences in Agasti College, Akole. Such best
management practices includes creating efficient
human resource management systems, having good
understanding of the work place stress and creating an
effective supportive culture for workers.

REFERENCES

Bunge, Charles (1987 ), " Stress in the Library. " Library Journal Vol.112.no.15 ( September 15 ) pp.47-51,
Covey, S.R (1989 ). The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People : Powerful Lessons in Personal Change. London Simon and Schuster.
Hack, Mary; John W. Jones and Tina Roose (1984 ).," Ocupational Burnout among Librarians " Drexel Library Quarterly Vol.20.No.2
( Spring )pp.46-72.
Kinman, Gail (1989), Pressure Points : A Survey in to the causes and Consequences of occupational stress in UK academic and
related staff. London : Association of University Teachers.pp.1-20.
Lehnert,Paul (2002 ), " Stress Management " Baylor Health Care System.
Newe, Juliet (1995). " Work Related Stress among the Library and Informaiton Work Force" Library Review Vol.44 no.6 p.30-37.
Payne R (1980 ). " Organizational Stress and Support ", In C.L. Cooper and R Payne ( eds ) Current Concerns in Occupational
Stress. New York : John Wiley.

INTRODUCTION:-
Librarians are traditionally working as acquisition,
Cataloguing, Bibliographies, Classification, adopted
transaction systems, dissemination, storage of
documents, bindings, daily facing staff management, they
have lack of organization support, economic problems,
they follow better security systems, this huge work also
completed by librarian and they have urge to adopt
modern technology. Modern technological inventions
impact on social changes, these day today social
changes yielding huge information or documents.
Therefore, librarians also must need to use modern
technologies to save time and retrieve information from
huge storage. New era also requires providing modern
services as internet service, Browsing Service, Digital
Information, e-journals to the user, it is not possible
without using computer or modern technologies. The
Modern Librarians has a very important role to play in the
process of communication of information in todays world
by using modern technologies/ Computers and digital
tools. The concept and role of Librarian is changed to
Information Manager. In this context the role of librarian
is of much suffer from already workload. How will they
match their time after working and managing all these
works? When should they go to trainings of new
technologies/ Computer hardware and software?
Librarians not only facing day today all these above
problems but also they facing new urge of technological
changes and use of computers. Todays librarians are
suffering from stress.
Currently the library services students, staff and
research fellows with text and other modern resources.
This condition has over-stretched the usage of the
facilities and also poses high stress implications on the
staff. This can be noticed from the library statistics on the
number of users patronizing the library per day, the level
of usage of the materials consulted and the number of
slips for outside users counted per day.
Todays everyone has in burden or stressful life
due to faster life style, technological changes and use of
computer also affected to each and every field. Employee
has various problems to use these technologies. These
problems are budget availability, trained staff members,
softwares, technician, technological durability, illiteracy of
technology. These all technological changes are
increased stress and burden on librarians and other
professionals at workplace.
Definition:-
Stress can be broadly defined as the negative
reaction people have to aspects of their environment as
they perceive it. Stress is therefore a response to a
stimulus and involves a sense of an inability to cope. We
each perceive, interpret, cope with and react to the world
differently, but a stress reaction is an unpleasant state of
anxiety.
Two things should be kept in mind: firstly, being
stressed is a 'state' - and therefore not permanent in all
but the most extreme cases; secondly, when we are
stressed, or under the influence of stress, we are less
likely to behave in the rational way we do when we are
calm.
How we manage pressure is influenced by many
factors, some past, and some current; how we learned,
how others behaved around us when we were young,
what behaviors were rewarded and what punished. We all
cope better when we have support and when we have
resources such as time, equipment, know-how and
control.
Causes of short-term stress include tough
deadlines, having to carry out tasks we find very difficult,
having to do many things at once, or having to act in
difficult circumstances or under external pressures - for
instance, when under extra emotional strain or feeling low
or upset.
Stress generally comes from aspects of personal lives;
bereavement is a major cause of stress, as is loss of any
kind, including through divorce or separation. Other life
events which are stress-inducing include being ill or
illness of a partner or family member, unemployment,
financial pressure, running a business and indebtedness.
Being stressed may not be articulated by everyone in the
same way: for instance, although we all experience stress
through loss, people will explain the experience
differently, cope with it differently, acknowledge it
differently and recover from it in many different ways.
The word Stress was originally adapted from
physics by Walter Connon. It is most commonly used as a
metaphor with a wide range of individualized,
Kumbhar K.N. Kumbhar K.N. Kumbhar K.N. Kumbhar K.N.
Dr. Bidwe H.S. Dr. Bidwe H.S. Dr. Bidwe H.S. Dr. Bidwe H.S.
Badrinarayan Barwale Mahavidyalaya, Jalna, Maharashtra
Shivchhatrapati Mahavidyalaya, Pachod, Tq.Paithan,
Maharashtra
Overview of stress on Librarian
contextualized and momentary meanings attributed to it.
As the case is with many expressions, there is no single,
generally agreed upon definition. So the word Stress
has numerous different meanings withi9n scientific
contexts as well as in everyday life. Furthermore, the
word Stress is commonly used in popular cultures to
describe numerous self diagnosed physical and mental
ailments, the severity of which often depends on
subjective perceptions. One important distinction,
however, may be to clarify if stress is a cause (Stressors)
or an effect (stress response) of a certain event.

Objectives of the Study:
The present study investigation deals to study
the following objectives.
i) To describe librarian problems
increasing stress.
ii) Find out what kind of health problems
facing by librarians.
iii) To suggest some stress preventive
ideas to librarians.
Method
Present study has discussed types of stress,
various reasons about rising stress and some
suggestions are given in descriptive form.
Sources of stress on Librarian
In general, stress is related to both external and internal
factors. Major two types of stress for librarian. These are:
External stress factor:
External factors include the physical environment,
including your job, your relationships with others, your
home, and all the situations, challenges, difficulties, and
expectations you're confronted with on a daily basis.
Internal stress factor:
Internal factors are body's ability to respond to, and deal
with, the external stress-inducing factors. Internal factors
which influence your ability to handle stress include your
nutritional status, overall health and fitness levels,
emotional well-being, and the amount of sleep and rest
you get.
External stress factors:
1. Physical Environment
2. Social Interaction
3. Organizational stress factor
4. Major life events
5. Daily hassles
6. Library staff
7. Library users
8. Higher Authorities
9. Infrastructure
10. Computerization
11. Information technology

Internal Stress factors:
1. Life Style Choices
2. Negative self talk
3. Mind traps
4. Personality traits
Causes of Workplace Stress -
Various researches indicate different causes of
workplace stress. Some of them are as follows, these are
common to many:
High workloads, intense pressure, constant
deadlines
Lack of Control over work demands,
conflicting demands
Powerlessness - a sense that nothing can
be done about it
Poor communication /consultation and/or
information sharing
Lack of feedback on performance & feeling
undervalued
Management style, inflexible working
arrangements & unpredictable hours
Uncomfortable work environments;
frustration with faulty equipment
Interpersonal conflict
Change and uncertainty
Symptoms of stress:
Stress can marked itself in a variety of
emotional, behavioral, and even physical
symptoms and the symptoms of stress vary
enormously among different individuals.

Common physical symptoms:
1. sleep disturbances or changes in sleeping
habits,
2. muscle tension, muscle aches, headache,
3. gastrointestinal problems,
4. fatigue
Emotional and behavioral symptoms:
1. nervousness,
2. anxiety,
3. changes in eating habits, overeating
4. loss of enthusiasm or energy,
5. mood changes, bad temper, depression.
Effect of stress:
It is also known that people under stress have a
tendency to engage in unhealthy behaviors, such as
excessive use or abuse of alcohol and drugs, cigarette
smoking, and making poor exercise and nutritional
choices.
Effect of stress on health:
Digestive disorders
User
Skin Complaints psoriasis
Headaches and migraines
Pre menstrual syndrome
Depression
Stress prevention remedies
There are healthy ways to overcome stress -
good lifestyle, diet, social team spirit, meaningful work
which can widen our social ties - as well as unhealthy
ways to react - such as over- or under- eating, excessive
drinking, angry outbursts, defensiveness - which can lead
to lack of quality sleep, decreased exercise and social
isolation.
Change your life style and thinking
Change you behavior
Be assertive, firm
Get organized
Ventilation
Humor, fun
Diversion and distraction, (hobby and
entertainment)
Exercise: Exercise on a regular basis
helps to turn down the production of
stress hormones.
Relax
Stay Healthy
Cultivate a positive attitude.
Manage your time
For centuries in Eastern religious traditions, the
benefits of meditation and other relaxation techniques
have been well known. Now, Western medicine and
psychology have rediscovered that particular wisdom,
translated it into simple non-spiritual methods, and
scientifically verified its effectiveness. Thus, one or two
20-30 minute meditation sessions a day can have lasting
beneficial effects on health. Indeed, advanced mediators
can even significantly control their blood pressure and
heart rate as well.
Conclusion
Now a days LIS professionals are faced with
constant changes and challenges in their working
environments. They are playing their roles inside libraries
with users high expectations always seems to exceed
librarys capacity in terms of documents, infrastructure
facilities, finance, staff etc. In this context the LIS
professionals have impact their work and produce stress.
It is simply not possible to remove all sources of
stress in the library workplace but, the library managers
can manage stress among their teams which will help to
reduce some of its consequences, such as: poor morale,
reduced performance and team conflict. The best way
to manage stress in library environment are: to
create a supportive culture; to appreciate people's
differences; to recognize the signs of stress; to resolve
issues as they arise and make strategy to reduce
stress, etc.

REFERENCES

i) Mishra, Girishwar, Psychological Perspectives on Stress and Health, - 1999, Ist Ed., New Delhi,
Concept Publishing Company, P.1-352
ii) Joshi, C. P., A study of Stress and Burnout, -1999, 1
st
Ed., Jaipur, Printwell publishers Distributors,
P.1-197
iii) Burns, steven. The medical sans of stress, depression, anxiety, sleep problem and drug use, -1997,
2
nd
Ed, illustrated Burns Kimbarley,
iv) Routray, Brjalaxmi. And Satpathi, Sunil kumar.- Stress management of Library and information science
professionals in Digital environment, paper.
v) http://www.medicinenet.com/stress/page10.htm


.
INTRODUCTION
Libraries in recent years have undergone
several changes in terms of collection organizations
and services. New technologies have entered into
libraries and have affected its every activities and the
process is going on. In this ever changing library
situation it is quite common for LIS professionals to be
under pressure and stress. Hence stress management
of LIS professionals has become quite essential for
every library.
Generally stress is the changes which our
bodys experience, as one adjusts to the continually
negative feelings. As a positive influence stress can
help to compel professionals to action result in a new
awareness and an exciting new perspective.
As a negative influence, it can result in feelings of
distrust rejection and depression, which is turn can
lead to frustration to work and also several health
problems such as headaches, high blood pressure
heart disease, even the cardiac arrest etc.
The library environment has changed
drastically over the past few decades with the
development and application of information
technologies .The library environment has shifted from
the traditional library to computerized library then
automated library and more recently digital library with
such changes ,the structure and nature of library and
information science professionals has also changed in
a dynamic way.
The library and information science
professionals seldom experience stress as they read
just their lives with the changing library environment,
job rotation, job promotion etc. in adjusting to such
changing library job environment ,stress will help
hinder us depending on how we react to it.
Types of stress in libraries
1] Job security stress
The application of information communication
technologies has compelled the LIS professionals to
acquire new knowledge along with the traditional
library functions and services. On the contrary, there is
a limited scope for them to undergo in-service training
program me, higher studies, Refresher course etc.
which has increased a considerable amount of stress
among professionals further, with the increasing
intrusion and appointment of IT/ computer science
people into the LIS profession have created fear
among LIS professionals about the job security in
future.
2]Technological stress
The development and application in
information technologies in libraries in major stress for
LIS professionals. Due to rapid change in computer
hardware and software coupled with obsolescence of
existing hardware and software is a common
phenomenon in almost all libraries further due to
financial and technological constraints .It is difficult to
keep pace with the changing technologies. Besides the
change in information storage media, from print to
electronic then digital medias have resulted in the
great deal.
3]Mental stress
Almost all libraries suffer from shortage of staff
libraries are neglected units in every organization and
hence can rarely able to bring attention of the
authorities, who usually compares libraries with office.
Under such circumstances, to manage a library with
shortage of staff creates mental stress, more
particularly for the head of the library.
4] Physical stress
The library environment has changed the
physical structure of the job environment .Due to
constant sitting in front of computers for a long hour
working in air conditioned environment increasing
workload etc. have also resulted in the physical stress
and illness stress is not necessarily negative for
performance of the individuals some level of stress is
desirable to generate enthusiasm, creativity and
productivity or detrimental.
A beneficial stress motivates the employs this type of
stress called Eustress.
S. B. Rengunthwar S. B. Rengunthwar S. B. Rengunthwar S. B. Rengunthwar
Kohinoor Arts,Commerce &Sci. College Khultabad
Tq.Khultabad Dist.Aurangabad, Maharashtra

The detrimental stress is that which makes one
irritable, loses the spirit of work. This type of stress is
called Distress.
CAUSES OF STRESS IN LIBRARIES
Stress can be derived from three sources such as
physical ,mental and Situational.
Physical stress can brought on by overwork ,lack of
rest and poor diet.
Situation stress is derived from the interaction with the
outer world like interaction with modern technologies
role as a library manager etc. During the past few
years libraries like many other institutions have been
experiencing change at an accelerating rate. The
digital library environment has exhibited a drastic
change in the function and services of libraries.
Accordingly ,the library & information science
of stress in their day-to-day work.
Different events which are responsible for stress
factors are as discussed below.
1. Technological change
The information and communication technology [ICT]
application of ICT in libraries is also changing stress
among library professionals.
2. Changing library Environment
Many libraries have migrated from conventional
manual systems and more recently to sophisticated
digital library systems.
3. Change in type of Document
In addition to hard copy most libraries are now
formats, such as CD-Rom or electronic documents or
digital format. These materials ,which were once
handled on and how basis must now be incorporated
4.Change in library Physical Facility
o Problems or changes in physical facilities have
become a vital problem in today
o Libraries with the increased use of electronic
formats, the library authorities are
o Reluctant to expand facilities with less space or
losing space to other functions.
o But the Hybrid type of libraries having both print
and non print documents face
o Acute problems relating to change in physical
facilities of the library.
5.Changing users Demand
With the development of various micro subject
information explosion, time bound academic
programmers etc. users attitude towards pin pointed
Information have changed. Accordingly the acquisition
organization and retrieval of information in quickest
possible time have given a tremendous amount of
stress in the mind of library professionals.
6. Reduce staff strength
Restricting ,layoffs, loss of staff positions and
doing more with fewer people have become
increasingly common which has been a source of
stress with the increasing workload.
7. Lack of proper coordination among staff
Being a service unit, library staff needs to be
work in a team spirit . There must be proper
coordination and understanding among the head and
sub-staff and also among the same category of staff.
When the head of the library fails to create a ideal
work situation ,it creates stress among the library staff.
Conclusion
It is fact that during recent years LIS
professionals are faced with constant challenges in
their working environments. This is not only because of
the role they play inside their libraries but because
users expectations always seems to exceed librarys
capacity in terms of documents infrastructure facilities
finance, staff etc.
In this context the LIS professionals have two choices,
either to manage and / or control the events that
impact their work and produce stress or to allow stress
to manage them.

REFERENCES

1. Pors,N.O. and johannsen,G.G. [2003] Library directors undercross pressure between new public management and
value-based management, Library management vol.24 No.1,pp 51-60.
2. Brook,A [1978] Coping with the stress of change management International Review Vol.18 No.3 pp.9-15.
3. Elliott,R. [1990] The challenge of managing change, personnel journal vol.69 No.3 pp 40-90.
4. Riggs, D.J. [1997] whats in store for academic issues Journals of academic librarianship vol.23 pp.2-8.
5. Chandrakanta swain, [2012] New approach to library management p.2832.
Research Paper Home Science

ABSTRACT Generation gap can be defined as the differences found between members of different generations. More
specifically, the word generation gap can be used to describe the differences in actions, beliefs, tastes, etc. between members
of younger generations when compared to members of older generations. The problem of generation gap is as old as times
unknown. Generation gap is nothing but certain psychological and emotional gap between parents or elder people and the
younger ones. Bulging generation gap creates misunderstanding and lack of attachment between the parents and children.
Generation gap is the result of the fast paced development of the society. In earlier times two or three generations
lived in the same lifestyle and environment as the development was slow. But today, nearest past is very much outdated and
the world is more advanced each day. Parents do not even know many of the modern technologies and equipments children
use. Being up to date is the only way to cope up with the generation gap. When you are asked a doubt by your children, and if
your answer is that you do not know, then you may be counted an outdated man or person of the gone age. To avoid this
situation, try to be current and updated with information and technologies. Never make your kids feel that you think in some
old fashion. When children express their feelings, understand them in the modern world context. The success of parenting lies
in how effectively you avoid the generation gap or ignore the differences with kids.
There are no technical solutions to resolve this knotty problem. If you want to resolve the problem and be at peace
then both the generations must be willing to solve the problem. If the older generation is unable to accept the changes then the
younger generation should compromise to a greater extent . Realization and a high level of understanding is one of the
optimal solutions to combat the problem.

Generation gap means difference in attitude,
or lack of understanding between younger and older
generation. This generation gap has always been
there but these days it has reached an explosive
stage. The values and patterns of life have changed to
a great extent. Today, everybody likes to live and
behave in his own way. This attitude has widened the
generation gap, which can never be filled. It is now
destroying family life completely. Parents look after
their children and make all sorts of sacrifices to bring
them up. Naturally, they feel they have a right over
them. They want their children to follow their
instructions as they have certain expectations from
them. But the children, when they grow up, want
complete freedom in their thoughts and actions and
unfortunately their thoughts and actions are just
opposite to those expected by the parents. They revolt
when any kind of restrictions are imposed on them.
Consequently, the family breaks up and everything
gets ruined.
So it is not only the responsibility of the
younger but also of the elders to fill this gap with their
love, affection and trust. The problem, in fact, has
grown and intensified due to the rise in complexities of
life. These complexities have arisen in the wake of
modernism where everything allied to tradition and
custom was to be turned upside down. The problem
arises mainly when parents forget how they behaved,
what problems they encountered and what feelings
they felt when they were children-especially teenagers.
When the children enter the stormy teens the problem
of generation gap comes out with greater intensity than
ever. Children too fail to see their parents point of view
and blindly stick to breaking rules. For them, at this
age, their friends suddenly become important
dislodging the parents from the vantage point. This
causes great anxiety to parents and the friction
increases between the children and the parents.
At this time, grandparents can play a
constructive role in order to bridge the gap of thought,
attitude, and approaches to life. Generation gap is not
that serious a problem if families can learn to sit and
talk over dinner or sit in the living room over a cup of
hot comforting coffee and talk the things out, ironing
the differences and sharing the experiences. When
this communication barrier is transcended and the ice
broken, the problem does not remain that serious
anymore. Talking it out calmly and coolly, with the idea
of sorting things out, changing for each other and
changing for better can be the most helpful instrument
in bridging the generation gap. Family outings,
vacations, tours, picnic-outings, often with the family
etc. can be effective ways to initiate intimacy between
parents and children. Watching movie and discussing
Dr. Ragini R. Padhye Dr. Ragini R. Padhye Dr. Ragini R. Padhye Dr. Ragini R. Padhye

Late Laxmibai Deshmukh Mahila Mahavidyalaya, Parli-
Vaijnath . Dist Beed, Maharashtra

Problems of the Generation Gap
them, putting forth the different viewpoints can be a
beginning to inculcate the habit of a healthy dialogue
between members of the family. Such small things and
steps can do wonders in initiating a healthy family
atmosphere and reducing friction between two
generations that are right in their own respects. Their
only fault is that they are viewing the same object from
opposite directions. Age, time and experience or the
lack of it, forces them to do so.
INDIAN PERSPECTIVE
Most of our parents were born during the
phase of independence and post-independence. The
period after independence was critical in India and
many people faced economic crisis during this period.
Our parents have personally viewed and experienced
the pain of starvation and the hardships involved to
earn daily bread. They have compromised most of
their desires and strived to bring up their families that
suffered from economic crises. They were mere
listeners to their parents because they consumed a
days bread only when their parents labored for long
hours. After compromising for a long period they killed
most of their burning desires and led an austere life.
They began to develop interest towards religious
activities and spirituality after they lost their longing for
a settled and an economically stable life. Constant
struggle in life led them towards interest in spiritual
activities.
When we were born rapid changes in
economy took place in our nation. When we were
growing up, the radical policies of economic
liberalization led to a lot of progress in the nation. The
Indian markets began expanding and the riches of
India were then discovered. We witnessed a lot of
economical and cultural changes around us but they
still remained only dreams. The rapid change in the
economy, moreover affected the richer segment of the
society. We also viewed the rich people in our nation
often visiting the places of luxury such as clubs, pubs,
restaurants and commuting through splendid cars. But
neither the people of our generation compromised
much in terms of economy and education because our
nation was rapidly progressing then. We moderately
compromised towards our desires perhaps because
our desires did not suit the traditions and culture of our
religion.
The kids of the present generation are born
when the technology is operated through the foot.
Today our nation has made tremendous progress in
the field of science and technology compared to the
yesteryears. Due to the emergence of IT industries in
India and the concept of outsourcing most of the
parents earn high income and are able to spend
lavishly for their kids. The children are customized to a
comfortable life since childhood and are unable to view
the hardships of life. They do not understand the pain
their grandparents underwent to earn a degree and
daily bread. They know how to operate a laptop and a
system by using key commands and innovative
software but do not know the dedication involved in the
development of such necessary gadgets. There are
several problems that lead to this conflicting problem.
The people of all the three mentioned generations
have been brought up in an entirely different way. Due
to the difference in bringing up, their mental framework
differs from each other. Psychological and behavioral
patterns are formed on the basis of circumstances one
undergoes. When the people of the different
generations meet each other they often are induced to
difference in opinion, communication gap, conflicts etc.
Due to the difference in mental framework the
likes and dislikes also differ from each other. In this
way both the generations cannot live in peace with
each other and they are unable to respect the likes
and opinions of each other. The frequency of thoughts
flow from opposite directions in a parallel manner.
When the thought process from the two generations is
so different, then love cannot be expressed even if it
exists between the two. Both of them are unable to find
a proper channel to express their feelings also. In this
way gap is created between the two. The problem of
generation gap creates negative consequences and
the two parties begin to drift away from each other
emotionally.
Generation gap occurs between parents and
children or between in-laws. It also occurs between
teachers and students but the degree of gap is less
because they do not spend much time with each other.
This problem leads to communication gap and the
two parties are unable to understand the channel for
communication.
Due to emotional incompatibility arguments
over silly matters and conflicts begin to occur
frequently. The peace in the house is disturbed. In the
extreme cases the parties even decide to abandon
each other. The children decide to leave the house of
the parents due to lack of emotional space constantly.
The daughter-in-law may provoke her husband to
abandon her mother-in-law for disability to cope up
with unreasonable demands. There are no technical
solutions to resolve this knotty problem. If you want to
resolve the problem and be at peace then both the
generations must be willing to solve the problem. If
one is unable to accept the changes then the other
should compromise to a greater extent which may not
be possible.
Realization and a high level of understanding
is one of the optimal solutions to combat the problem.
Both the generations should discuss openly
about their childhood and the happy and sad incidents
that took place during their childhood days. This
activity not only creates bondage but also opens the
doors for understanding. The two can understand the
lifestyle of each other. Knowing the childhood of each
other helps them understand the physiological patterns
formed by each other also. Both the generations
should not develop a very high feeling about
themselves. They should understand that they both
have their limitations since they are human-beings.
They should understand that they both depend upon
each other at some point or the other.
They both should realize the peace that can
be built by a means of co-operation. When both the
parties are co-operative they can complete the tasks
very peacefully. This problem commonly occurs
between mother-in-law and daughter-in-law. The
mother-in-law should realize that her daughter-in-law is
customized to the atmosphere of education and
profession and hence suddenly coping up the
domestic activities is not an easy task for her. At the
same time the daughter-in-law should also realize that
her mother-in-law was not enough lucky to be
educated by her parents and hence she cannot be
professionally competent and understand the
professional world.
Both the generations should realize the theory
of limitations and both of them cannot be satisfied as
per their wants. Nobody in the world is satisfied
according to their wants because human wants are
only unlimited. They should realize the easiness of
expecting and difficulty of implementing. Especially in
the initial stage when a mother-in-law and daughter-in-
law meet each other they cannot live with peace with
each other because both of them come from different
worlds.
Everybody should develop the attribute of
respecting each other. When one learns to respect the
other peace can be established between the two
generations. A mother-in-law should realize that the
woman of today struggle with pain to earn bread for
their family. The daughter-in-law at the same time
should realize that her mother-in-law once underwent
a lot of pain to bring up her family and she has once
undergone many economic and social hardships.
To build a close relationship with each other,
the two generations can arrange periodically, activities
such as going out for a cinema, hotelling, shopping
and many other fun-filled activities. They can also
celebrate the birthday of each other.
Both the generations should purposely spend
time with each other whenever they are free. This
activity creates an emotional bondage very quickly.
If both the generations are interested in the topic of
spirituality then the formula works wonderfully because
both the parties require spirituality in life to create
peace.

REFERENCES

1. www.prokerela.com
2. www.nativeenglish.com
3. www.fullonknowledge.com
4. www.Indiastudychannel.com

ABSTRACT According to the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders. Major depression, bipolar
disorder, schizophrenia, and obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD) are among the most common mental disorders that
currently plague numerous countries and have varying incidence rates. Though some of this difference may be attributable to
the manner in which individual healthcare providers diagnose mental disorders.Whichshow that a lack of certain dietary
nutrients contribute to the development of mental disorders. Supplements that contain amino acids also reduce symptoms,
because they are converted to neurotransmitters that alleviate depression and other mental disorders. Based on emerging
scientific evidence, this form of nutritional supplement treatment may be appropriate for controlling major depression,
bipolar disorder, schizophrenia and anxiety disorders, eating disorders, attention deficit disorder/attention deficit
hyperactivity disorder (ADD/ADHD), addiction, and autism. The aim of this manuscript is to emphasize which dietary
supplements can aid the treatment of the four most common mental disorders currently affecting America and other
developed countries: major depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, and obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD).
Such noncompliant patients who have mental disorders are at a higher risk for committing suicide or being
institutionalized. One way for psychiatrists to overcome this noncompliance is to educate themselves about alternative or
complementary nutritional treatments. Although in the cases of certain nutrients, further research needs to be done to
determine the best recommended doses of most nutritional supplements, psychiatrists can recommend doses of dietary
supplements based on previous and current efficacious studies and then adjust the doses based on the results obtained..

INTRODUCTION
Currently, approximately 1 in 4 adult
Americans have been diagnosed with a mental
disorder, which translates into about 58 million affected
people. In addition, mental disorders are among the
leading causes for disability in the US as well as other
countries. Common mental health disorders include
mood disorders, anxiety disorders such as post-
traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), panic disorders,
eating disorders, attention deficit disorder/attention
deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADD/ADHD), and autism.
However, the four most common mental disorders that
cause disabilities are major depression, bipolar
disorder, schizophrenia, and obsessive compulsive
disorder (OCD).
Typically, most of these disorders are treated
with prescription drugs, but many of these prescribed
drugs cause unwanted side effects. These side effects
can be so severe and unpleasant that many patients
become noncompliant and, in cases of severe drug
toxicity, the situation can become life threatening.
Researchers have observed that the prevalence of
mental health disorders has increased in developed
countries in correlation with the deterioration of the
Western diet. Previous research has shown nutritional
deficiencies that correlate with some mental disorders.
The most common nutritional deficiencies
seen in mental disorder patients are of omega-3 fatty
acids, B vitamins, minerals, and amino acids that are
precursors to neurotransmitters. Compelling population
studies link high fish consumption to a low incidence of
mental disorders; this lower incidence rate has proven
to be a direct result of omega-3 fatty acid intake. One
to two grams of omega-3 fatty acids taken daily is the
generally accepted dose for healthy individuals, but for
patients with mental disorders, up to 9.6 g has been
shown to be safe and efficacious. Western diets are
usually also lacking in fruits and vegetables, which
further contributes to vitamin and mineral deficiencies.
This article will focus on the nutritional deficiencies that
are associated with mental disorders and will outline
how dietary supplements can be implemented in the
treatment of several disorders. The mental disorders
and treatments covered in this review do not include
the broad and complex range of disorders, but
however focuses on the four most common disorders
in order to emphasize the alternative or
complementary nutritional options that health care
providers can recommend to their patients.
Major Depression
Major depression is a disorder that presents
with symptoms such as decreased mood, increased
sadness and anxiety, a loss of appetite, and a loss of
interest in pleasurable activities, to name a few.
Patients who are suffering from major depression have
a high risk for committing suicide so they are usually
treated with psychotherapy and/or antidepressants. As
reported in several studies, the amino acids
tryptophan, tyrosine, phenylalanine, and methionine
are often helpful in treating many mood disorders,
including depression.
Tryptophan is a precursor to serotonin and is
usually converted to serotonin when taken alone on an
empty stomach. Therefore, tryptophan can induce
Dr. Manisha P. Wanjari Dr. Manisha P. Wanjari Dr. Manisha P. Wanjari Dr. Manisha P. Wanjari
Kohinoor Arts, Commerce & Science Collage Khultabad.
Dist. Aurangabad, Maharashtra

Nutritional Therapies for Mental Disorders
sleep and tranquility and in cases of serotonin
deficiencies, restore serotonin levels leading to
diminished depression. Tyrosine is not an essential
amino acid, because it can be made from the amino
acid phenylalanine. Dietary supplements that contain
tyrosine and phenylalanine lead to alertness and
arousal. Methionine combines with ATP to produce S-
adenosylmethionine (SAM), which facilitates the
production of neurotransmitters in the brain.
Since the consumption of omega-3 fatty acids
from fish and other sources has declined in most
populations, the incidence of major depression has
increased. Several mechanisms of action may explain
how eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA) which the body
converts into docosahexaenoic acid (DHA), the two
omega-3 fatty acids found in fish oil, elicit
antidepressant effects in humans. For example,
antidepressant effects may be due to EPA being
converted into prostaglandins, leukotrienes, and other
chemicals the brain needs. Other theories state that
EPA and DHA affect signal transduction in brain cells
by activating peroxisomal proliferator-activated
receptors (PPARs), inhibiting G-proteins and protein
kinase C, as well as calcium, sodium, and
potassiumiron channels. Consuming omega-3 fatty
acid dietary supplements that contain 1.5 to 2 g of EPA
per day have been shown to stimulate mood elevation
in depressed patients.
In addition to omega-3 fatty acids, vitamin B
(e.g., folate), and magnesium deficiencies have been
linked to depression. In addition, the results of several
case studies where patients were treated with 125 to
300 mg of magnesium with each meal and at bedtime
led to rapid recovery from major depression in less
than seven days for most of the patients .
Bipolar Disorder
Some biochemical abnormalities in people
with bipolar disorder include oversensitivity to
acetylcholine, excess vanadium, vitamin B
deficiencies, a taurine deficiency, anemia, omega-3
fatty acid deficiencies, and vitamin C deficiency.
Bipolar patients tend to have excess acetylcholine
receptors, which is a major cause of depression and
mania. A double-blind, placebo controlled study that
involved controlling elevated vanadium levels showed
that a single 3 g dose of vitamin C decreases manic
symptoms in comparison to placebo.
Taurine is an amino acid made in the liver from
cysteine that is known to play a role in the brain by
eliciting a calming effect. A deficiency of this amino
acid may increase a bipolar patient's manic episodes.
In addition, eighty percent of bipolar sufferers have
some vitamin B deficiencies. Another well-known
factor for mental disorders is that cells within the brain
require omega-3 oils in order to be able to transmit
signals that enable proper thinking, moods, and
emotions. Numerous clinical trials, including double-
blind, placebo controlled studies have been performed
which show that 1 to 2 grams of omega-3 fatty acids in
the form of EPA added to one's daily intake decreases
manic/depressive symptoms better than placebo.
Some of the more common side effects include a
dulled personality, reduced emotions, memory loss,
tremors, or weight gain. Therefore, lithium orotate can
be used in much lower doses (e.g. 5 mg) with
remarkable results and no side effects. In addition,
lithium orotate is available without a prescription,
unlike lithium carbonate, which is considered a
prescription drug by the Food and Drug Administration
(FDA). Studies have also shown that the amino acid-
derivative, taurine, as an alternative to lithium, blocks
the effects of excess acetylcholine that contributes to
bipolar disorder.
Schizophrenia
Schizophrenia is a mental disorder that
disrupts a person's normal perception of reality.
Schizophrenic patients usually suffer from
hallucinations, paranoia, delusions, and
speech/thinking impairments. These symptoms are
typically presented during adolescence. Specifically,
an impaired synthesis of serotonin in the central
nervous system has been found in schizophrenic
patients.
The most consistent correlation found in one
study that involved the ecological analysis of
schizophrenia and diet concluded that increased
consumption of refined sugar results in an overall
decreased state of mind for schizophrenic patients, as
measured by both the number of days spent in the
hospital and poor social functioning. That study also
concluded that the dietary predictors of the outcome of
schizophrenia and prevalence of depression are
similar to those that predict illnesses such as coronary
heart disease and diabetes.
Eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA), which is found
in omega-3 fish oils, has been shown to help
depressive patients and can also be used to treat
schizophrenia. Furthermore, studies suggest that
supplements such as the commercially available
VegEPA capsule, when taken on a daily basis, helps
healthy individuals and schizophrenic patients maintain
a balanced mood and improves blood circulation. The
VegEPA capsule contains:
280 milligrams of EPA from marine omega-3 fish oil
100 milligrams of organic virgin evening primrose
omega-6 oil
1 milligram of the anti-oxidant vitamin E
An outer capsule made out of fish gelatine
For schizophrenic patients, docosahexaenoic acid
(DHA) supplements inhibit the effects of EPA
supplements so it is recommended that the patient
only takes the EPA supplement, which the body will
convert into the amount DHA IT needs.
Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder
Obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD) is an
anxiety disorder that causes recurring stressful
thoughts or obsessions that are followed by
compulsions, which are repeated in an uncontrollable
manner as a means of repressing the stressful
thought. It is well documented that selective serotonin
reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) help patients with OCD.
A commercially available supplement called
Amoryn has recently proven to help patients suffering
from depression, anxiety, and OCD. Two double-blind,
placebo-controlled studies were recently performed
that compared the affects of a 900 mg daily dose of St.
John's wort extract to 20 mg daily doses of Paroxetine
(Paxil) or Fluoxetine; which are both SSRIs used to
treat OCD. In comparison to patients taking Paxil,
those who took the St. John's wort supplement
showed a 57% decrease in OCD symptoms and were
47% less likely to exhibit side effects. These results
clearly depict how the use nutritional supplements can
be effective treatments for mental disorders.
Conclusion
Here we have shown just a few of the many
documented nutritional therapies that can be utilized
when treating mental disorders. Instead, the
companies that funded most clinical research spent
their dollars investigating synthetic drugs they could
patent and sell; these drugs however usually caused
adverse side effects.
Others rather use prescription drugs that the drug
companies and the FDA researches, monitors and
recalls if necessary. However, for some patients,
prescription drugs do not have the efficacy of
nutritional supplements and they sometimes have far
more dangerous side effects. So for clinicians to avoid
these supplement therapies because of a lack of
knowledge and unwillingness to use treatments not
backed by drug companies and the FDA, they are
compromising their patients' recovery due to their own
laziness or selfishness.
For example one study listed several methods
of treatment, none of which include natural
compounds, for OCD patients that include: megadoses
of SSRIs, intravenous chlomipramine, oral morphine,
deep brain stimulation, and functional neurosurgery.
Another example of the literature scaring clinicians
away from supplement therapies is an article that
warns patients about the dangers of consuming high
amounts of omega-3 fatty acids. Numerous studies
have shown that up 2 grams of EPA (omega-3 fatty
acid) taken daily is sufficient for decreasing symptoms
of several mental health disorders with no side effects
Proper medical diagnosis and a clear description of all
possible treatment options should always be the first
plan of action when treating mental disorders.
However, the final decision on whether or not to try
nutritional supplements as a treatment must be based
on the patient preferences. It will take some time for
clinicians to become educated on all the options
available, but this is an important task that should not
be ignored.
Those with influence in this field should
continue to examine natural treatments on the
scientific level in order to increase the availability of
grant money for this type of research. This will lead to
a surge of researchers who will submit proposals for
grants enabling laboratories to further investigate the
hypothesis that proper nutrition contributes to better
mental health.
Psychiatrists treating patients with mental disorders
should be aware of available nutritional therapies,
appropriate doses, and possible side effects in order to
provide alternative and complementary treatments for
their patients. As with any form of treatment, nutritional
therapy should be supervised and doses should be
adjusted as necessary to achieve optimal results.
Abbreviations
ADD: attention deficit disorder
ADHD: attention deficit hyperactivity disorder
CSF: cerebrospinal fluid
DHA: docosahexaenoic acid
EPA: eicosapentaenoic acid
FDA: Food and Drug Administration
GABA: gamma-aminobutyric acid
OCD: obsessive-compulsive disorder
PPARs: peroxisomal proliferator-activated receptors
PTSD: post-traumatic stress disorder
SAM: S-adenosylmethionine
SSRI: selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors

REFERENCES

1. Kessler RC, Chiu WT, Demler O, Walters EE: Prevalence, severity, and comorbidity of twelve-month DSM-IV disorders in the
National Comorbidity Survey Replication (NCS-R).
2. Murray CJL, Lopez AD: The Global Burden Of Disease. World Health Organization 1996, :270.
3. American Psychiatric A: Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders.
Fourth edition, text revision Washington DC 2000.
4. Waring WS: Management of lithium toxicity.
Toxicol Rev 2006, 25(4):221-230. PubMed Abstract | Publisher Full Text
5. Vieta E, Rosa AR: Evolving trends in the long-term treatment of bipolar disorder.
World J Biol Psychiatry 2007, 8(1):4-11. PubMed Abstract | Publisher Full Text
6. Young SN: Clinical nutrition: 3. The fuzzy boundary between nutrition and psycopharmacology.
CMAJ 2002, 166(2):205-209. PubMed Abstract | Publisher Full Text | PubMed Central Full Text
7. Wurtman R, O'Rourke D, Wurtman JJ: Nutrient imbalances in depressive disorders. Possible brain mechanisms.
Ann N Y Acad Sci 1989, 575:75-82. PubMed Abstract | Publisher Full Text
8. Hibbeln JR: Fish consumption and major depression.
The Lancet 1998, 351(9110):1213. Publisher Full Text
9. Yaryura-Tobias JA,Bhagvan HN:L-tryptophan in obsessive-compulsive disorder
10. Hoes MJ: L-tryptophan in depression

ABSTRACT Youth is threshold of adulthood and important period of change in attitudes, behavioral patterns etc. It is
necessary to know the views of young people on marriage for they are the ones who would be shaping the new patterns of all
interpersonal relationships and behavior in the near future. In any progressive country it is the youth especially educated
youth, which is most likely to affect peoples ways of thinking, feeling and doing. Objectives: 1. to find out the attitudes
regarding necessity of marriage. 2. To get acquainted with the views of the youth regarding necessity of children.
Methodology: For the present study random sample selected 50 males and 50 females college going students with the age
ranging from 20 to 25 years of Kallam city dist. Osmanabad were selected for study and self administered MAS used to collect
data. It consists highly sensitive Yes doubtful and No types of statements related to marriages. Respondents
wholeheartedly agreed marriage for sexual gratification, off springs social stability but youth also liberal for cohabitation,
divorce, being single..

KEYWORD : Youth, Marriage, Attitude.

Concept of Marriage:-
Marriage for a man or woman contribute to the
overall maturity, fulfillment and happiness of the
individual, whatever the back ground, nature of work or
mental make-up of the person, The psychological
make-up of man is such that, he is willing to give up
promiscuity for socially approved sex within marriage
and live with one woman who would be his constant
companion and helpmate.
The average human being wants to marry and
is willing to go through the joy and trials of married life
for happiness and security for the good family and for
the interest of community.
The importance of the marriage transcends
not only the entire family but also the past ancestral
line as well as the future generation.
Burgess and Locke distinguish marriage and
mating; animals mate but man marriages. This
indicates that marriage is more than a sexual
relationship involves complex of role relationships
which are allowed or expected in a culture.
Marriage is essential to society not only for
projecting the human race, but for nurturing and
developing a society with healthy traditions and values.
Landis in 1954 observes, Marriages and
family are not optional, they are necessary, they need
mans deep needs, at provides for the reliable
satisfaction of certain vital personal needs-both
Physical and Psychological.
Men and women may many basically for a
stable permanent association based on mutual
affection, on love and companionship, the freedom and
privilege of sexual relationship and the establishment
of a home and family youth youth is early part of life
or the threshold us adulthood, This period is important
period of change with which youth makes changes in
attitudes towards their life style, behavior patterns as
well as in their body and nature they leave behind
childish things and adopt new changing behavioral
patterns, trying to crave for self indentify. In this
socialization process, heterosexual relationship is also
included. During this period, youth also ponder over
marriage institution and forms self opinion about it.
Life Style Choice:-
At some point, usually in early adulthood or
even before through some time much later, many of us
make a very basic life style, choice to marry or not to
marry since there are a number of different non
married life styles as well as number of different types
of marriages nor is it always a rational choice made
only by the individuals most direct by affected Parents
or other circumstances such as total physical
repulsiveness might make our choices for us.
Attitudes towards marriages have undergone
changes in recent years, with shifts towards an
increased acceptance of non-traditional family forms.
Todays youths are developing increasingly favorable
attitudes toward non-traditional material and family
values and behaviors, such as cohabitation /Live in
relationship, divorce, and remaining single and
premarital sex, marriage in same sex.
Aim of Study:-
Attitudes towards marriage are being studied
as they are central interests in the life of all men and
women they are most fundamental for the existence
organization and functioning not only of social life in a
society, but also for the creation, substance and
continuation of the every human being who constitute
society It is essential to know the attitudes of young
people towards basic social institution marriage,
because it is the attitudes that suggest future trends of
the social behavior, inter personal relationships and
possible direction of change.

Sakhalkar Meena Narhar Sakhalkar Meena Narhar Sakhalkar Meena Narhar Sakhalkar Meena Narhar S.M.D.M.M. Kalamb, Dist. Osmanabad, Maharashtra

A Study of Youths Changing Attitudes towards Marriage -
becoming a Socio-Psychological Problem.
*Objectives:-
1. To find out the youths attitudes regarding
necessity of marriage.
2. To get acquainted with the views of youth
regarding necessity of children.
3. To find out the importance of marriage in
relation to personality, and social stability.
* Methodology:-
Present study is conducted in Kallam city of
Osmanabad district Random sample of unmarried
college student, age ranging from 20 years to 25 years
is taken for this study i.e. 50 male and 50 female
students
Self administered MAS used to collect data it
consists highly sensitive Yes, Doubtful, and NO
type statements related to marriage.
*Result and discussion:-
Table 1:
Mean age of Male and Female respondents:
Male Female
Mean Age in
Years
22.74 22.12
This average age cannot be called as fully matured or
completely immature age
Table 2:
Educational status of the respondents
Faculty Male Female
Commerce 14 06
Arts 02 17
Science 10 06
D.T.Ed. 12 14
Polytechnic. 12 07
Total 50 50
Table 3:
Caste family type Joint Nuclear
Other Male 30 14
Female 13 21
Open Male 2 4
Open Female 7 9
Total 52 48
52% respondents belongs to joint family 48%
respondents belongs to nuclear family
Table 4:
Score of the attitudes Marriage gives
sexual gratification
Scores in percentage Respondents
yes indecisive No
Observed
value
Male 74 % 08% 18% X2
Female 78% 14% 08% 0.65*
*Denotes in significance at 0.5 % level
There is no significant difference in attitudes of
male and female

able 5:
Score of Attitude marriage is must for
each individual
Scores in percentage
yes indecisive No
Male 32 10 08
Female 40 06 04

Through there are positive attitudes towards
marriage for sexual gratification, satisfaction of
parenthood, social stability, respondent wont feel, it is
must for each and every individual.
*Attitudes towards necessity of children- for
these statement children are necessary in life for
happiness, continuing chain of heritage, protection in
old age, only 39 female and 38 male agreed whole
heartedly.
* Attitudes towards marriage for personality
development- 74% of male 80% of female agreed that
marriage plays an important role in personality
development of an individual.
* Alternative or option for marriage- 41%
respondents agreed that marriages may disturb their
freedom 40% respondents suggested that contract
marriage or without marriages 19% of the total
respondents wont think about necessity of marriages.
Finally study says that youth have mere
relaxed attitude to marriage and singleness, live in
relationship in the society is increasingly recognized by
them.
Conclusion:-
The study of attitude is not only important from
purely sociological point of view; it has a great practical
importance in matters of life too.
An attitude is thus, not the actual behavior, it is
only a tendency, and may differ significantly from the
actual behavior of a person. That is only a probability
and not the defacto-actuality.
L.L.Bennard It is preparatory to and indicative
of more complete adjustment.
Throughout the study, it is observed that caste
religion and type of family does not influence the
attitude.
Most of the youth have opined that for
complete sexual gratification, satisfaction of
parenthood and for social stability marriage is must
But their views differed in matters of option for
marriages or being single. Both the respondents
shows liberal views for traditional marriage and it may
cause for social and psychological changes in
behavior of individual
Suggestions:
Same study can be prosecuted on a large sample with
more variables like caste, religion, area educational
status marital status etc.

REFERENCES

1. Dr.Bajpal S.R. 1985 Methods of social survey and Research
2. Atteestroup- marriage and family-A developmental approach
3. Kapur Promilla Marriages and working women in India.
4. WWW.healthymarriageinfo.org.

ABSTRACT Iron deficiency is one of the most prevalent micronutrient deficiency found in developing countries.
Nutritional anemia can result in lifelong disadvantages including low productivity, decreased immune system mental ability
etc. A sample of 250 adolescent girls of age group of 13 to 18 years was selected randomly from rural areas of Beed district.
The experimental group A received dietary supplementation (ground nut & jaggary Ladu) for ninety days. Whereas group C
not received any supplementation and treated as control group. These samples were examined anthropometrically,
biochemical & Clinical before & after supplementation. Anthromentrilcal data show that experimental group result was better
or good as compared to control group. Out of 250 adolescent girls 95% had hemoglobin level below 9gm. i.e. These
adolescent girls were anemic. Rural adolescent girls were found to consume a monotonous meal and subsisted mainly on
cereals. Poverty, illiteracy & poor food consumption pattern speaks for nutritional anemia. The rural areas are alarming &
no. of deficiency diseases is seen. To solve this problem nutrition education, food fortification & food based approaches are
the most effective measures to address the micro nutrient deficiency like iron.

KEYWORD : Prevalence, Anemia, Rural, Urban, Health Status.

India is a land of rural community and women
constitute nearly half of its population. According to
various survey reports, the female adolescents
constitute nearly one tenth of total Indian population.
(NIPCCD 1966), WHO 1996, Report of Government of
India 2001,and the quality of this group is more
significant in the context of national development.
Indian studies on anemia in adolescent girls
revealed that > 70% of adolescent girls in low income
communities had Hb levels <110 g/L. When WHO cut
off of 120 g/L was applied, the prevalence was even
higher (8090%) 3. Anemia is an indicator of both poor
health and poor nutrition.(De Betonist &etal
2008)Interventions for anemic adolescent girls should
raise their iron stores and sustain their hemoglobin at
normal levels. This will not only improve their
phyortification, diet, antihelminthic treatment and
supplementation. According to
Gillespie(Gillespie,s2001)iron and folate
supplementation is one of the most important
nutritional interventions for adolescent girls. Studies
with multiple micronutrient deficiencies have shown
improvement in linear growth, psychomotor functions,
and correction of biochemical abnormality when more
than one nutrient was supplemented (Indian nutrition
profile1998, Kurzkmgalloway 2000)
The anthropometrical measurements of Indian
adolescent girls were lower when compared with well
to do groups (Chaturvedi et al 1994) It is due to the
development process of adolescence exert
significantly increased demands of both micro and
macro nutrients , (Sokarjo et al 2004 Lopez martos
2004). Many studies revealed that these girls receive
inferior quality of diet. (Ghosh 1985 Gupta 1986,
Bardhan 1987) Therefore adolescent girls were more
likely to intake less quantity of energy, carbohydrates,
iron, calcium and niacin.(Woodward 1985, NNMB
1975-80, pushpamma 1982, Seshadri 1992 Yeguang
Jun 1995).
The increase need for iron during adolescent
period on one hand and the difficulty in meeting iron
requirement on the other hand make adolescent girls
in particular more prone to iron deficiency anemia. An
eleven country study found that more than 40% of
adolescents in Asian countries including India were
anemic (Hb < 115 g/l Kurz 1996). The percent
prevalence of anemia among in adolescent girls was 4,
12, 23 in upper middle and poor socioeconomic groups
respectively (Khanduja and Agarwal 1969 , Khanane
and Ghonekar 1997). The micronutrient deficiency
(iron deficiency) in female adolescents can seriously
affect their health (WHO 2006) i.e. growth,
development and functional capacities of adolescents
girls. Moreover it is clinically manifested by rapid
exhaustion, muscular weakness, anorexia (Leibel
1977, Oppernheimer et al 1983) These symptoms can
also affect on physical work output ( Ohiral et al 1981).
Any deprivations during adolescence are
believed to adversely affect the outcome of pregnancy,
resulting in high maternal mortality, low birth weight,
and poor nutritional status of the infants (Harrison et al
1985, Naeya et al 1981, Brabian etal 1992). From four
methods, recently many investigators have proved that
dietary supplementation is the most useful method of
reducing the problem of anemia in adolescent girls.
To combat the anemia problem with the help
of dietary supplementation the present study work is
carried out. .
Dr.Nuzhat Sultana M.B Dr.Nuzhat Sultana M.B Dr.Nuzhat Sultana M.B Dr.Nuzhat Sultana M.B Saw. K.S.K College Beed, Maharashtra.

Prevalence of Anemia and its Impact on the Health Status of Rural
and Urban Adolescents Girls.
Objectives:-.
1) To know the dietary pattern of rural and urban
adolescent girls.
2) To know the socioeconomic status of rural and
urban adolescent girls.
3) To study the prevalence of anemia in rural and
urban adolescent girls.
4) To study the impact of supplementation on
growth status of rural and urban adolescent
girls.
Methodology: - The present study was carried out in
the different rural and urban schools and colleges of
Beed district. Five hundred rural adolescent girls in the
age of 12 to 16 years belonging lower, middle and high
income group were selected. A socioeconomic and
dietary survey was carried out with the help of
questionnaire cum interview schedule. All the
information related to religion education monthly
income, family type, and dietary habit etc. was
collected and manipulated in the table form. But only
two hundred fifty (250) rural and (250) urban
adolescent girls were selected for dietary
supplementation programme. These girls were divided
in to two groups. In group (A) 125 rural and 125 urban
adolescent girls were treated as experimental sample,
but in group C one hundred and twenty five rural and
125urban adolescent girls were treated as control
sample. Dietary supplementations i.e. (groundnut and
jaggary Ladu 150gm) were provided to experimental
samples for ninety days. But control sample did not
receive any dietary supplementation. Height, weight
and mid arm circumferences of group A and group C
samples were measured before and after
supplementation.
Hb level of all selected samples (250) were
also analyzed before and after supplementation
programme.
Result and discussion: -
The result of socio economic survey revealed
that maximum no. (48%) of study samples were in the
age 14 to 15 years. It was noted that 23% of the
adolescent girls were in the tenth std. It was observed
that 57.5% adolescent girls were belonging to nuclear
family system. Majority of the head of families (father)
i.e. 68.5% were working in there agriculture field and
only 8.5% were engaged in service. Therefore 51%
families were having their monthly income less than
2500/- only 20 % families having their income above
15000. The backward character of agriculture and
existence of industrial activities are the main reason for
poor condition of rural families. These families were
spending major part of their monthly income on farm
cultivation and only few families were spending their
income on education
Anthropometrical measurements:
Two hundred fifty rural (125) and urban (125)
adolescent girls were selected for the study. The
anthropometrical data i.e. age, weight and mid arm
circumference of these girls were noted down-
Table No. 1 Mean age of rural and urban adolescent
girls:
Age (In
years)
No. of
Girls
(Rural
areas)
Percentage No. of
girls
(Urban
areas)
Percentage
1213 56 37.33 52 34.6
1314 53 34.75 36 28.8
1415 31 19.9 35 20
1516 10 6.6 12 8
Total 125 100 125 100
37.33
34.6 34.75
28.8
19.9 20
6.6
8
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e
1213 1314 1415 1516
Age
% of rural area girls
% of Urban area girls

Above result indicated that 37.33% rural &
34.6% of urban adolescent girls were belonging to the
age between 12 to 13 years. Whereas 34.75% rural
and 28.8% urban adolescent girls were between the
age of 13 to 14 years. While 19.9% rural and 20.0%
urban adolescent girls were between the age of 14 to
15 years. But only 6.6% rural and 8% urban
adolescent girls were belonging to age of 15 to 16
years.
Table No 2: No of Adolescent girls as related to
Menarche:
Age in
years
No. of rural
adol. girls AM
% No. of urban
adol.girls AM
%
1314 56 44.8 54 43.20
1415 46 34.4 37 29.60
1516 23 20.8 34 27.20
Total 125 100 125 100
AM = Attended Menarche
44.8
43.2
34.4
29.6
20.8
27.2
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
P
e
rc
e
t
a
g
e
1314 1415 1516
Age in years
% of rural adolescent girls
% of Urban adol escent gi rls

The above result shows that maximum no. of
adolescent girls (i.e. rural 44.8% and urban 43.20%)
were attended their menarche at the age of 13 to 14
years. Whereas 34.4% rural and 29.60% urban
adolescent girls were attended their menarche in the
age of 15 to 16 years.
Table No 3: Mean weight gain of rural and urban
adolescent girls:
Rural Girls (Wt. in Kg.) Urban Girls (Wt. in Kg.) Grou
p Before
Supplement
.
After
Supplement
.
Bef ore
Supplemen
t
After
Supplement
.
Grou
p A
32.46
5.58
37.42
5.66
32.22
4.63
36.23
4.95
Grou
p C
32.06
1.67
33.60
1.82
31.15
2.80
31.4
3.75
Table value of T at 0.05 level is = 2.78 under t=4.60
30
32
34
36
38
Group A Group C
Rural Girls
Befor
Urban Girls
Befor
Rural Girls
After

Statistically the mean weight of rural and urban
adolescent girls before supplementation of group A and C
was 32.46 5.58 and 32.06 1.67kg respectively. The mean
wt. of urban adolescent girls of group A and C before
supplementation was 32.22 4.63kg and 31.15 2.80 kg.
Respectively. But after supplementation the increase in wt. of
group-A in rural adolescent girls was 37.42 5.66 kg and in
Group C 33.60 1.82 kg. In urban adolescent girls, the
increase in wt. of group A was 36.23 4.95 and in group C
was 31.4 3.75 kg.
Thus it seems that the body weight of group-A was
definitely increased significantly after supplementation as
compared to control group C.
Table No 4: Mean height of rural and urban adolescent
girls:
Urban Girls (Ht. in Cms.) Rural Girls (Ht. in Cms.) Grou
p Before
Supplement
.
After
Supplement
.
Bef ore
Supplemen
t
After
Supplement
.
Grou
p A
142.75
6.64
143.60
5.50
143.11
2.21
144.21
1.20
Grou
p C
141.89
5.63
142.01
1.62
142.50
2.16
142.89
1.68
Table value oft for 5% level is = 2.31 t = 3.71
The mean of height of the urban and rural
adolescent girls in Group A and Group C before and
after supplementation is presented statistically in the
above table. The mean height of rural adolescent
before supplementation of group A and C was 142.75
6.64 cm and 141.89 5.63 cm. respectively and the
mean height of urban adolescent girls before
supplementation of group A and C was 143.11 2.21
and 142.50 2.16 cm respectively. After
supplementation the increase in height in rural and
urban girls of group Awas 143.60 5.50 and 144.21
1.20 respectively and group-C was 142.01 1.62
and 142.89 1.68 respectively.
Table No 5: Mean mid arm circumference before & after
supplementation:
Supple
Ment
Rural samples
of Group A
Rural
samples of
Group C
Urban
samples
Group A
Urban
samples
Group C
Before 23.91 0.86 22.46 1.54 24.31 0.45 22.89 2.56
After 25.59 3.67 23.01 1.32 26.0 1.12 24.80 0.23
Under if 0 = t = 1.86 Table value of T at 5% level is = 2.90
The statistical data indicated that before
supplementation the midarm circumference of rural
adolescent girls of group. A was 23.91 0.86cm, and
group C was 22.46 1.54 cm. After supplementation
the mean increase in midarm circumference in rural
adolescent girls was 25.59 3.67. In Group A and in
group C it was 23.01 1.32 cm before supplement in
urban adolescent girls the mid arm circumferences of
group A was 22.89 cm but after
supplementation group A was 26.0 1.12 and group C
was 24.80 0.23cm respectively.
Table No 6: The Mean and Chi-square table
Supplement Urban Rural
Group A Group C Group A Group C
Bef ore 142.75 141.89 143.11 142.50
After 143.60 142.01 144.21 142.89
X
2
0.005 0.0001 0.008 0.001
X
2
0.01 df = 3
The mean of height of the urban and rural
adolescent girl in Group A and Group C before and
after supplement is presented chi-square, value 0.01
has slightly different but calculated value is 0.01 levels
& 0.05 levels is insignificant. From above statistical
data and values it will suggested that the period of
supplement should be increased i.e. more the 90 days.
So that it will show positive effects in the adolescent
girls.
Bio-Chemical Measurements:-
Table No 7: Anemia in Rural and Urban adolescent
girls
Hb
(gm/dl
)
Grade of
Anemia
No. of
girls
(rural
areas
)
Percentag
e
No. of
girls
(urba
n
areas)
Percentag
e
<7 Severe 02 0.8 05 04
7 9 Moderat
e
48 38.4 65 52
9-11 mild 60 48 45 36
<11 Normal 15 12 10 08

0
20
40
60
80
Rural
Urban

The above table represents the anemia in rural
and urban adolescent girls. 0.6% and 4% of severe
anemia was found in urban and rural adolescent girls
respectively whereas 52% in urban and 38.4% in rural
adolescent were having moderate type of anemia.
While 36% urban and 48% rural adolescent girls were
having mild type anemia. Only 8% and 12% urban and
rural girls were having normal grade anemia. Thus it
seems that the percentage of anemia is more in urban
adolescent girls as compared to rural adolescent girls.
Table No 8: Condition of anemia in rural and urban
adolescent girls before and after supplementation:
Group A (N=125) Group C (N=125) Condition
of
Anaemia
Bef ore
suppl.
After
Suppl.
ementation
Before
suppl.
After
Suppl.
period
Normal 15 (12%) 70 (56%) 10 (8%) 08 (6.4%)
Mild 20 (16%) 49 (39%) 15 (8%) 18
(14.4%)
Moderate 70 (56%) 21 (16.8%) 75 (60%) 71
(56.8%)
Severe 20 (16%) 10 (8%) 50 (24%) 53
(42.4%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Befor
Suppl
A
After
Suppl
A
Befor
Suppl
C
After
Suppl
C
Normal
Mild
Moderate
Severe

Before supplementation the normal mild, moderate and
severe condition of anemia in group A was 12%, 16%, 56%
and 16% respectively. But after supplementation only 8% &
16.8% were having severe & moderate anemic condition and
39.2% samples were having mild anemia. But majority of
them that is 56% samples were normal.
On the other hand group C before supplementation 8%
adolescent girls were normal and 8%, 60% & 24% samples
were having mild, moderate and severe type of anemia. But
after completion of ninety days supplementation programme
only 6.4% adolescent girls remained normal and 14.4%,
56.8% and 42.4% adolescent girls were having mild,
moderate and severe type of anemia.
Food Consumption Survey:
Daily intake of nutrients by rural and urban adolescent
girls
Nutrients Urban Rural
Calories (kcal) 79.48% 76.92%
Protein (gm) 55.22% 53.73%
Calcium (mg) 32.50 % 29.66%
Iron (mg) 53.71% 50.00%
Vitamin A (mg) 62.50% 58.33%
Vitamin B1 (mg) 75.00% 75.00%
Vitamin B2 (mg) 90.00% 65.00%
Vitamin B3 (mg) 75.00% 89.28%
Vitamin C (mg) 60.00% 60.00%
The above table represents the percentage
intake of calorie by urban sample was 79.48% and
rural sample was 76.90%. The daily intake of protein
percentage by urban adolescent girls was 55.22% and
by rural adolescent girls was 53.73%. It is 50% less
than the RDA by ICMR. But the daily intake of calcium
by urban and rural adolescent girls was 32.50% and
29.60% respectively. Which was very deficient than
RDA by ICMR. The daily intake of iron percentage was
53.71% by urban and 50% by rural adolescent girls.
The intake of both minerals is very inadequate as
compared to RDA by ICMR. The daily intake of
Vitamin A percentage was low i.e. 62.50 % 58.33% by
urban and rural adolescent girls respectively. But in the
case of vitamin B complex group i.e. vitamin B1, B2,
B3 the percentage intake by urban and rural
adolescent girls was nearer to RDA by ICMR. The
percentage daily intake of vitamin B1 by urban
adolescent girls was 62.50 and by rural adolescent
girls was58.33, which was nearer to fifty percent as
recommended by ICMR. The daily intake of vitamin B2
was 90 percent by urban samples while rural samples
it was65 percent. The daily intake percentage of
vitamin B3 by urban adolescent girls was 75 and by
rural adolescent girls was89.28.
The percentage intake of vitamin C by urban
and rural adolescent girls was 60, which was 40%
deficient as compared to RDA by ICMR. It may be due
to inadequate consumption of citrus fruits in their daily
diet.
Percentage distribution daily intake of nutrients by
rural and urban adolescent girls.

0
20
40
60
80
100
C
a
l
o
r
i
e
P
r
o
t
e
i
n
C
a
l
c
i
u
m
I
r
o
n
V
i
t
a
m
i
n

A
V
i
t
a
m
i
n

B
1
V
i
t
a
m
i
n

B
2
V
i
t
a
m
i
n

B
3
V
i
t
a
m
i
n

C
Urban
Rural

The study data suggests that anemia might be
one manifestation of overall dietary inadequacy and
consequent of under nutrition. Since it is possible that
dietary supplementation can be helpful to improve the
Hb level and the nutritional status of rural adolescent
girls.
Conclusion:
It was found that dietary supplementation of
iron has the advantage of producing rapid
improvement in Hb status of the adolescent girls it may
be said that to change the dietary pattern of rural
adolescent girls it is very important to start iron
supplementation for these girls before adolescent
period which can store the iron for present as well as
future demands.
Recommendation:
The following recommendation can be made in
the light of the result of the present study.
1. Educational status of Adolescent girls can be
improved by motivating them to providing
those educational services at home,
community and national level.
2. The nutritional status of rural adolescent girls
is very low, Hence health and nutrition
education should be provided with the help of
low cost recopies by involving health agencies,
Mahila Mandals or social organizations etc.
3. There is a need to improve female literary and
encourage, the informal girls in vocational
teaching.
4. Knowledge about use of locally available foods
in daily life should be given involving them in
I.C.D.S. programmes.
Further detail investigation can be done in this area
and a package of various nutrition education aids can
be developed and implemented.

REFERENCES

1. A balk hail B. Shawky S. (2002) prevalence of daily breakfast intake, from deficiency anemia and awareness of being anemic among saudi school
students, Ind J. food sc. & Nutr. 2002:53:519-528
2. De Betonist B, McLean E, Egli I, Cogswell M. Worldwide prevalence of anemia 19932005: WHO global database on anemia, Geneva: World Health
Organization 2008.
3. Kanani S, Ghanekar J. Anemia and the adolescent girl: a review of some research evidence and intervention strategies. Department of Foods and
Nutrition, M.S. University of Baroda and UNICEF, India 1997.
4. Gillespie S. In: Major Issues in Control of Iron Deficiency Micronutrient Initiative, Ottawa, Canada 1998.
5. Bhandari N, Bahl R, Taneja S. Effect of micronutrient supplementation on linear growth of children. Br J Nutr 2001; 85:131137.
6. Brabin I, Brabin BJ. The cost o successful adolescent growth and development in girls in relation to iron and vitamin A status. Am.J. clin Nutr 1992: 55:
955-8.
7. Gopalan, C. (1989) Growth of afflint Indian girls during adolescence. NFI, Scintific report 10:32-42.
8. Harriso, KA, Fleming AF, Briggs ND, Rossiter Ce, Growth (1985) during pregnancy in Nugerian Prignigravidae, Br. J. obstet. Gyaaecol, 92 (Sppls) 32-
39.
9. India nutrition profile New Delhi; Govt. of India ministry of Human resource. Development, Department of women and chil development, 1998: 1-25.
10. Kanani S, Ghanekar J. Anaemia and adolescent girls. A review of research evidence and intervention strategies. (1997). Department of food and
nutrition. MS. University of Baroda and UNICEF, India.
11. Khanduja PC, Agarwal K.N. and Taneja (1969) Haematological Values of School Children in different Socio economic group, Ind. Paediate 6:571-586.
12. Kurz km, Galloway R. (2000) Improving adolescent iron status before child bearing. J nutrition 2000, 130 suppl: 5437-9.
13. Lopez MA, Martos FC. (2004)Iron availability An updated review, Int. J. food Sc. And Nutr 2004,55(8): 597-606.
14. MFI (1989) Growth of affluent Indian Girls during Adolescence NFI. Scientific Rport. 10.
15. Naeya RL. Teenazed and pretecnazed pregrancies Consequences of the fetal maternal competition for nutrients. Paediatrics 1981:67:146-150.
16. Narasinga Rao and Nageswara Roa (1982) use of common salt fortified with iron in the control and prevention of Anemia. A collaborative study. Report
of working group on fertification of salt with iron. Am.J. clin. Nutr. 35, 1442-1451.
17. Neinstein I.S Sachek I.E. Nutrition. In: Neinstein L.S. ed. Adolescent health care a practical guide, Philadelphia; lippin cott Williams and wilkins, 2002:
170-85.
18. NIPCCD (1995) Statistic on children in India. National institure of public cooperation and child development. Poket book., 6
th
revised Edn.
19. NMMB (1975-80) national Nutrition monitoring Bureau Report for the means 1975-80, 1980.
20. Ohira, Y, N.R. Edgerton. G.W. gardner, Gurnawardena, K.A. Sence Miratne B. I kawa, S (1981) work capacity after iron. Treatment as a function of Hb
and iron deficiency, J. Nutritional Sciences and Vitaminology 27:87.
21. Oppenheimer,s and Hendrick Se, R (1983) The clinical effects of Iron deficiency and iron supplementation. Nutrition Abstracts and Reviews. 53: 585-93.
22. OU machigui A. prepregmency and prograncy nutrition and its impact on womens health Nutr. Rev 2002:60 suppl: 564-7.
23. Pushpamma P/ Geervani,P; /Devi, N (1982) Food intake, Nutrient Adequacy and anthropometry of adolescents in Andhra Pardesh. Indian .J, Med. Res.
75:61-67.
24. Qamra, J. Mehta, D, Patel, S (1985) A study of nutritional status of adolescent girls (5 to 16 years) proc. Nutr. Soc. India 47:140
25. Rajeshwari, K. and Vijayalakshimi, V, (2006)Nutritional status of pre-adolescents (9-12 years) by anthropometry. J. Res. Angrau, 2006, 34, 32-36.
26. Raman,L (1990) Nutritional problems of adolescent girls. Proc. Nutr. Soc. India; 36:34.
27. Schebendac. J. Shanker IR, Nutrition ,(1992) In: Friedman SB, Fisher m. Schenberg sk, eds. Comprechensive adolescent health care, missiori, st.
Louis, quality medical publishing inc, 1992; 206-13.
28. Seshadri, S and Kanari S. (1992_ Dietary and Nutrient indadequacies and their implications for adolescent growth proc. Of national workshop on
adolescence Need for ontical Appraisal, Agarkar Research Institute, Pune.
29. Soekarjo DD, pee SD Kurin JA, Schreurs, WHP Schultink W, Muhilal and Bleiom MW(2004). Effectivenes of weekly Vitamin A (10000 IU) and iro (60mg)
supplementation for adolescent boys and girls through schools in rural and urban Eaxt Javam Indoneisia. Eur.J. Clin Nutri 2004: 58:927-937.
30. Tripathe, A.M. Agarwal K.N, katiyar G.P and Agarwalm D.K. (4984) Nutrition in adolescence. Proc. Nutr Soc. India,30:63-76.
31. Varma, S and Bajaj, S (1984) Nutritional profile of school children, pro. Nutr. Soc. India. 30: 101.
32. Venkaiah K. Damay dnthi K. Nayak MU. Vijayaraghavarn K. Diet and Nutritional status of rural adolescent in India Nutrition 2003: 14: 1-4.
33. WHO, (2006) Global database on iron deficience and anemic micronutrient dificeince information system, world health ogranisation, Geneva, 2006.
34. Leibel, R.L (1977) Behanioural and Biochemical Correlates of iron deficiency. J. Arm. Dietet. ASSOC. 71:398.

INTRODUCTION:
Malnutrition is the insufficient, excessive or
imbalanced consumption of nutrients. The World Bank
estimates that India is ranked second in the world of
the number of children suffering from malnutrition.
Over 200 million children in developing countries under
the age of five years are malnourished. In Bangladesh
47% of the children exhibit a degree of malnutrition.
Malnutrition remains a major risk limiting the
development potential and active learning capacity of
India children. Madhya Pradesh, Jharkhand and Bihar
have very high rates of under malnutrition. Mizoram,
Sikkim, Manipur, Kerala, Punjab and Goa have lowest
percentage of under malnutrition.
Studies show that Hindu or Muslim
background in India tend to be more malnourished
than others . In scheduled castes, scheduled tribes or
other backward casts are also at increased risk of
malnutrition. In particular children of scheduled tribes
have the poorest nutritional status and the highest
wasting.
OBGECTIVES:
1) To find out causes of malnutrition.
2) To find out the effects of malnutrition.
CAUSES OF MALNUTRITION:
1)Agricultural productivity -
Agricultural production varies with the season
and long term environmental conditions families selling
crops may find themselves paid fluctuating prices
depending on a variety of factors beyond their control,
while those who need to buy food may encounter
exorbitant.
2)Poverty and food prices-
The economist Amartya Sen, observed that
malnutrition is more related to problems of food
distribution, poverty and purchasing power.

3) Dietary practices-
The lack of breastfeeding, lack of knowledge
about nutritious diet and leads to malnutrition in
infant and children. A poor diet can have an injurious
impact on health causing deficiency diseases. Vast
population residing in rural areas are deprived of an
adequate access to health services.
EFFECTS OF MALNUTRITION:
Malnourished children often suffer the loss
of previous mental capacities. Every second new born
in India is at risk of reduced learning capacity due to
iodine deficiency. Recent researches indicate a link
between malnutrition in early life and the development
later in life of chronic conditions like coronary Heart
disease, Diabetes and High Blood pressure. The UN
estimates that 2.1 million Indian children die before
reaching the age of 5 every year and four every minute
mostly preventable illness such as diarrhea, typhoid,
malaria, measles and pneumonia. Every day 1000
Indian children die because of diarrhea alone. Under
nutrition is found mostly in rural areas and 10% of
villages and districts. In 2006 more than 26 millions
died of hunger or diseases due to deficiencies in
micronutrients. . Malnutrition contributes to more than
half of the nearly 12 million under 5 deaths in
developing countries each year. According to the
World Health Organization malnutrition is by far the
biggest contributor to child mortality.
CONCLUSION:
Many common health problems can be prevented with
a healthy diet. Education of nutrition is essential to all
the people .To avoid malnutrition nutritious diet should
be provide from the pregnancy period.

REFERENCES

1. Anupam Rani(2010)-Food, Nutrition and Dietetics, Murari Lal and Sons, New Delhi.
2. Dr. Ashok Kumar Sharma(2012)-Human , Nutrition and Dietetics , Oxford Book Company,Jaipur.
3. Dr. Sujata Jha & Dr. Bandana Singh(2011)-Child Nutrition Effect of Feeding on Child Health, Agrawal Publishing
House, Jaipur

Pawal Ayodhya Dattatraya Pawal Ayodhya Dattatraya Pawal Ayodhya Dattatraya Pawal Ayodhya Dattatraya Arts & Science College, Gadhi, Tq. Georai Dist. Beed,
Maharashtra
Malnutrition

Autism is a brain disorder that often makes it
hard to communicate with and relate to others. With
autism, the different areas of the brain fail to work
together.
Most people with autism will always have
some trouble relating to others. But early diagnosis
and treatment have helped more and more people who
have autism to reach their full potential.
Autism tends to run in families, so experts
think it may be something that you inherit. Scientists
are trying to find out exactly which genes may be
responsible for passing down autism in families.
Autism is part of a spectrum of disorders
defined by varying degrees of impairments in social
communications and interaction. These impairments
can manifest themselves in problems with eye contact,
limited facial expression, a restricted range of interests
including repetitive behaviors, and preoccupation with
unusual things such as the train schedule or the
location of every police station in the city. Individuals
with autism often have severe language deficits
characterized by problems with the use of language for
social purposes. Autistic disorder is at the severe end
of the spectrum termed the pervasive developmental
disorders (PDD) or autism spectrum disorders. These
terms include high functioning autism and Aspergers
disorder which are not accompanied by language
delays or mental retardation. This group of disorders is
3-4 times more common in boys than girls and affects
between 1-2 thousand individuals. A majority of
children with autistic disorder are mentally retarded,
but up to 30% are in the average or above average
range of intelligence.
Several features may help identify children
between the ages of two and three who may be at risk
for autism: lack of a social smile, poor social
interactions, preference for aloneness, lack of
appropriate gestures such as pointing and showing
objects, minimal or nonexistent imaginative play and
the need for sameness. In addition, delays in language
development should never be neglected. Any of these
concerns should prompt a parent to request an
evaluation.
A small number of cases have an underlying
medical disorder such as tuberous sclerosis or Fragile
X. However, as with many disorders, in most cases we
do not know what causes autism. We do know that
there is a strong genetic component and that
psychological factors are not a cause. There have
been some excellent studies that clearly indicate
autism is not caused by vaccinations such as the
measles, mumps and rubella (MMR) vaccine or by
thimersol (a mercury preservative) that has been used
in the past as a preservative in vaccinations. There is
also no evidence that other environmental issues such
as food allergies can cause or trigger the onset of
autism.
Genetic factors play an important role. Some
relatives of children with autism may have mild
problems with socialization and language.
A majority of children with PDD have some form of
learning difficulty. Symptoms of impulsivity, ADHD,
anxiety and depression can be present as well. A small
minority of children with autism will develop epilepsy in
adolescence.
The best treatment for children with autism is
intensive, targeted education. In a large percentage of
children with autism, other symptoms may interfere
with their ability to utilize these interventions. These
symptoms include oppositional, impulsive, aggressive
and self injurious behaviors along with anxiety,
obsessive-compulsive symptoms. Recent research
has shown that medications can often be of help in
reducing these distressing symptoms.
It is important to identify children with autism
as early as possible and provide them with a
specialized program. There are special schools and
programs within the public education sector. One of
the most important aims of these programs for young
children is to help increase interest in other people.
Next is an emphasis on learning language, and finally
the use of functional assessments and treatments of
Kshitija B. Deshpande Kshitija B. Deshpande Kshitija B. Deshpande Kshitija B. Deshpande
Laxmibai Deshmukh Mahila Mahavidyalaya.
Parli Vaijnath, Maharashtra
Autism - A Behavioural Problem
behaviors. These are all variations of a type of
treatment called applied behavioral analysis (ABA).
It appears that the diagnosis of all the
pervasive developmental disorders is increasing.
Several studies in different communities in the US and
Europe have examined this phenomena. The most
likely explanation for this increase in not that the
number of children with this disorder are increasing but
that the we are more aware of the diagnosis and so
are identifying more individuals than we did previously.
While some of the features of autism are lifelong, the
best predictor of how well children will do as an adult is
their verbal IQ.
According to the guidelines of the National
Institute of Child Health and Human Development
(NICHD) a doctor should immediately evaluate a child
if s/he:
Does not babble or coo by 12 months of age
Does not gesture (point, wave, grasp, etc.) by 12
months of age
Does not say single words by 16 months of age
Does not say two-word phrases on his/her own
(rather than just repeating what someone else
says) by 24 months of age
Has any loss of any language or social skill at any
age
There is no medical test that results in the diagnosis,
but the evaluation of a child includes many
components. Careful history gathering and observation
are critical, and a psychiatric and neuropsychological
evaluation should be included. Often a neurological
evaluation and genetic testing/counseling may be
useful.
Treatment for autism involves special
behavioral training. Behavioral training rewards good
behavior (positive reinforcement) to teach children
social skills and to teach them how to communicate
and how to help themselves as they grow older.
With early treatment, most children with autism learn to
relate better to others. They learn to communicate and
to help themselves as they grow older.
Depending on the child, treatment may also
include such things as speech therapy or physical
therapy. Medicine is sometimes used to treat problems
such as depression or obsessive-compulsive
behaviors.
Exactly what type of treatment your child
needs depends on the symptoms, which are different
for each child and may change over time. Because
people with autism are so different, something that
helps one person may not help another. So be sure to
work with everyone involved in your childs education
and care to find the best way to manage symptoms.

REFERENCES

WEB LINK : 1) http://www.nichd.nih.gov/
2) http://www.webmd.com/depression/default.htm
1) Williams, D. (1994) Nobody Nowhere: The Autobiography of an Autistic Avon Books
2) Brill, M. (1994) - Keys to Parenting a Child with Autism, Barrons Educational Series
3) Amenta, C. (1992) - Russell is Extra Special: A Book About Autism for Children, Magination Press
4) Werlin, N. (1994)- Are You Alone on Purpose?, Houghton Mifflin Co

INTRODUCTION
The constitution of India has guaranteed the
right of equality to all its citizens irrespective of their
sex, caste, creed and religion. Indian democracy, right
from the days of independence, has been thriving on
these basic principles for the last more than five
decades. The national movement under the leadership
of Mahatma Gandhi was one of the
first attempts to draw Indian women out of the
restricted circles of domestic life into equal role with
men. Writing in Young Indian in 1918, Gandhiji said,
woman is the companion of man gifted with equal
mental capacities. She has the right to participate in
the minutest details of the activities of man. She has
the same right of freedom and liberty as he.
Women contribute more than half of the duties
and responsibilities of the family but are hardly
empowered to participate in decision making. They
were not given any rights, they were supposed to do
domestic work and to look after children.
Methodology
The study was conducted during the year 2011-12 in
Beed district of Maharashtra State. The main focus of
this investigation was to study the decision making
pattern of urban working and non-working women in
home activities
Objective -
The study was conducted to assess the status of
mental health of working and non working women. The
random sample consist of 70 working and 70 non
working women of urban area from Beed city. The
study emphasis on the influence of socio economic
status on mental health status of working and non
working women
Result and discussion
Table no1. Employment details of working women
n=70

Name of organization Frequency Percentage
School 14 20
College 16 22.85
Bank 15 21.44
Non-government
organizations 8 11.43
Government servant 17 24.28

Table 2 Distribution of respondents according to
their profession
Name of
profession
Frequency

Percentage
Administrator 9 12.86
Teaching staff

27 38.57
Supporting staff 34 48.57
Table no3 Socio personal details of sample
population
Working
women
(N=70)
Non working
women
(N=70)
Sr.
no
Category
Frequ
ency
% Freque
ncy
%
Young (below
35)
27 38.58 29 41.43
1

Middle (35 -55) 41 58.57 37 52.86
Old(above 35) 2 2.85 4 5.71
Primary (1-4
std )
0 0 4 5.71
2 Middle (5-7 std) 0 0 11 15.71
High school 7 10 23 32.86
H.S.C 8 11.43 9 12.86
Graduation 55 78.57 23 32.86
Married 63 90 66 94.30
3 Unmarried 4 5.72 1 1.40
Widow 3 4.28 3 4.30
Joint 19 27.14 36 51.43
4 Nuclear 51 72.86 34 48.57
Extended 0 0 0 0
Small(below 5) 24 34.29 22 31.43
5 Medium (5-7) 41 58.57 32 45.71
Large (above 7) 5 7.14 16 22.86
Low(below 1
lks)
14 20 33 47.14
6 Medium(1
1.75 lks)
40 57.14 25 35.72
High(above
1.75lks)
16 22.86 12 17.14
Low 8 11.43 12 17.14
7 Medium 27 38.58 45 64.29
High 35 50 13 18.71
Low 3 4.30 5 7.14
8 Medium 20 28.57 18 25.71
High 47 67.14 47 67.14
Age - Majority of the respondents were found to be
middle aged followed by young age group (Table 3).
Middle and young aged women are generally
Dr.Khandat M.S. Dr.Khandat M.S. Dr.Khandat M.S. Dr.Khandat M.S.
Saw K.S.K.College Beed, Maharashtra
A Study on Decision Making Pattern of Urban Working and Non-Working
Women in Home Activities in Beed City of Maharashtra State
enthusiastic, innovative, more strength, vigor,
challenging, interested to earn more and to develop
their personality. And unlike in the earlier days, the
present day young generation is not adjusted with their
traditions and customs which burry their hidden
potential talents. In recent years there are lots of
efforts from both government and non-governmental
organizations towards empowering women. These
women can also influence their family members
regarding their participation in home activities. The
findings of the study are in line with the findings of
Chaudhari et al. (1998), and Cherian and Vats (2001).
Education
Perusal of data in the Table 4 brought to focus
that majority of the working and nonworking women
were educated. This can be justified as education
plays a very crucial role in the social and economic
development of women. For this the probable reasons
for good literacy might be that the women and child
welfare department and education department are
putting maximum efforts to provide good education to
all women by starting many schemes and
programmes. Since the selected respondents were
from urban area, exposure to various media which
make them aware about the advantages of education
for the overall development of the family. The result
was in confirmation with the result of Devi and Rayalu
(2003)
Marital status
The critical evaluation of the results (Table 4)
predicted that a large percentage of the working and
non-working women belonged to the age group of 36
to 55 years, i.e., middle age group and were married.
The reason could be attributed to this finding might be
our tradition and custom towards getting married at a
certain age. The findings were inconsonance with the
findings of Cherian and Vats (2001) and Devi and
Rayalu (2003).
Family type
According to the results presented in the Table
4, 72.86 per cent of the working women belonged to
nuclear type of family. Because the tradition of having
joint family system is decreasing year after year,
people would prefer to live in nuclear families for the
sake of better harmony and for better satisfaction of
basic needs, less responsibility, privacy etc. Further,
migration in search of children education, job
motivates many to have nuclear.
families - On the other hand, most of the non-working
women belonged to joint family. Joint
family system is the representative family type in rural
and urban India since centuries.Hence, people in India
believe in cooperative living and sharing the
responsibilities.
Family size
The results (Table 4) brought to light that
majority of the working and non-workingwomen
belonged to medium size family. It may be because of
the realization of the advantages of small family in
terms of educating their children, for saving money,
assets etc.
Annual family income The findings of the result
showed that 57.14 per cent of working women had
medium level of income followed by high level income
(22.86%). This might be due to the earnings through
different occupations. Since most of them are staying
in nuclear family, they spend money economically and
save money in different saving schemes to increase
their family income. Among non-working women, 47.14
per cent of the women had low level of income
followed by medium level income (35.72%) because of
the single income from their husband and they are
living in joint family where expenditure is more. Social
participation Perusal of results (Table 4) stated that
50.00 per cent of the working women had high level of
social participation followed by medium level of social
participation and majority of then on-working women
had medium level of social participation followed by
high level of
social participation.
The plausible reasons might be that they are
staying in urban area which makes them aware of
different organizations such as Mahila mandal,
cooperative society, school etc.They are interested to
participate in such organizations to get the recent and
updated information regarding home related fields like
housekeeping, nutritious recipes, methods of cooking,
education of children etc.
Mass media participation
The findings in the Table 4 showed that
majority of the working and non-working women had
high level of mass media participation followed by
medium level of mass media participation. The main
reasons for this might be they are staying in urban
area which make them more exposure to all types of
mass media such as Cable TV, DTH, DISH TV, Radio
and print media. Since they are educated, they can
read all types of print media like daily newspapers,
magazines, journals etc. Further, they belonged to
medium level of family income that makes them to buy
all the mass media and their interest to watch, to listen,
to read such mass media.
Table no 4 List of activities where in respondents
get cooperation
From Husbands From Family
Members
Working
(n=50)
Nonworking
(n=30)
Working
(n=20)
Nonworking
(n= 40 )
Sr,nos

Activities
Nos % Nos % Nos % Nos %
1 Cooking
at home
35 70 15 50 10 50 38 95
2 Cleaning 10 20 5 16.67 15 75 22 55
3 Shoping
for home
48 96 30 100 18 90 35 87.50
4 Washing
clothes
0 0 0 0 20 100 30 75
5 Leaving
at work
place
42 84 0 0 16 80 0 0
6 Care of
children
20 40 22 73.34 16 80 40 100
7 Children
studies
50 100 25 83.34 15 75 35 87.50
8 Elderly
care
50 100 30 100 15 75 40 100
9 Social
visits
35 70 15 50 12 60 35 87.50
10 Office
work
45 90 0 0 15 75 0 0
11 Attending
functions
to gether
42 84 20 66.67 18 90 38 95
Table 4 indicates that cent per cent of the working
women were getting cooperation from their husband in
children education and care of old persons. More than
90.00 per cent of them were getting cooperation in official
work and shopping whereas it was 80.00 per cent in
attending marriage ceremonies and other social gathering
and leaving at bus stand. About 70per cent of them were
getting cooperation in cooking and social visits from their
husbands.
Incase of washing clothes, cent per cent of the
women were getting cooperation from their family
members whereas it was nil from their husband. From
family members the working women were getting
cooperation in the home activities like shopping, attending
marriage ceremonies and other social gatherings
(90.00%), leaving at bus stand and care of children
(80.00%). About 75.00 per cent of the women were
getting cooperation in cleaning house, children education,
care of old persons, official work from family members.
Half of the women were getting cooperation from their
family members in case of cooking. About 60.00 per cent
of the women were getting cooperation from family
members in social visits.
Non-working women
It is witnessed from the data presented in Table 4
that cent per cent of the nonworking women were getting
cooperation from their husbands in the activities like
shopping and care of old persons. About 83.34 per cent
of the women were getting cooperation in children
education. Whereas it was 73.74 per cent in care of
children 66.67 per cent of the women were getting
cooperation in attending social gatherings and marriage
ceremonies from their husband. Half of the women were
getting cooperation from husband in case of cooking and
social visits.
Table no 5 Occupational constraints faced by the
working women N=70
Sr.no Constraints Frequency %ge
1 Problem during Travelling 53 75.41
2 Long working hours with
limited payments
47 67.14
3 Long hours of work with no
stipulated time
47 67.14
4 Ill treatment on the work
place
40 57.14
Table 5 explained the various occupational constraints
faced by the working women. A close examination of
Table 5 revealed that around 78.00 per cent of the
women opined that they were facing problem during
traveling. Equal percentage (67.14%) of the women faced
the constraints such as long working hours with limited
payment and long hours of work with no stipulated time.
Majority of the women (57.14%) were facing the
constraint of ill treatment on the work place.
Conclusion
This study has brought out the emerging role of the
home maker in the family decisions. The Joint decisions
were more in the home activities. In some areas/activities
the wife was taken independent decisions. So the
government is taking adequate steps to organize the
women into viable groups and exposing them to the
various development programmes and womens share in
them.
. The present study revealed that most of the
respondents were educated and had lesser participation
in decision making. So there is a need to impart better
skills and technical know how which increase their
confidence about their role in decision making and to
improve their social status by increasing their social
awareness.
. It was observed from the study that most of the
working and non-working women were facing constraints
in the home activities. So all the family members should
be cooperated with them in all steps of life

REFERENCES

1. Chaudhari, M.R., NagalwadE, L.D. AND KOHALE, S., 1998, Decision making on f arm aspects by f arm women. Maharashtra Journal
of Extension Education, 17: 274-278.
2. Cherian, a. And Vats, A., 2001, Decision making pattern of rural women regarding f arm,animal husbandry, home and family related
decisions of Hill, Bhabur and Tarai zone of Uttar Pradesh state. Rural India, 64(11-12): 228-234
3. Devi, M.S. And Rayalu, T.R., 2002, A study on differences between self and joint decisions in personal aff airs, childrens affairs and
household aff airs f or both
4. working and non-working women in urban families. Indian Psychological Review, 58(2): 103-112

Many of us already know that when we make
healthy food choices we tend to feel better and when we eat
heavy, sugary foods we can feel tired or sluggish, therefore it
should come as no surprise that there is considerable
evidence to suggest that nutrition can have an impact on
mental health as well as physical health this is especially true
for young people for- Better Mental Health outcomes were
found in those who had a higher intake of fresh fruit and leafy
green vegetables. Over consumption of sugar alone can
Negatively Impact young peoples mental health in a sample
of 5,498 youth aged 15-16 in also. Norway researchers
found a strong association between sugary soft drink
consumption and mental health problems in a related study
researches found a positive association between
consumption of sugary soft drinks and sweet foods and risks
for suicidal behaviors among adolescents aged 12-19 in
Jiangusu Province, China.
Certain foods and dietary supplements such as fish
fruits and vegetables and over the counter vitamins and
supplements can have a positive impact on young peoples
mental health for example omega- 3 fatty acids which are
found in fish and fish oil are beneficial as neural functioning
and that fish oil may after a safe and effective prevention
strategy in young people who are at a high risk of developing
Psychosis. Vitamin 'D' is another supplement that can
positively affect mental well being. Multiple studies have
linked vitamin 'D' deficiency to cognitive impairment,
depression, disorder, and schizophrenia, therefore many
mental health professionals and physicians recommend
regular vitamin 'D' intake.
Following an extensive review of the literature on
the benefits of nutrition and diet on mental health.
Nutrition is especially important during adolescence
due to rapid growth and development the onset of many
psychiatric illnesses which coincide with adolescence may
be diminished by recommended dietary habits additionally
behavior patterns acquired during this time are likely to
influence long term behaviors however getting young people
to eat healthier is not always easy.
Dietary modifications that increase nutrition can be
introduced quickly with minimal to no health risks and could
offer significant improvement in physical health self esteem
and qualities of life. Although getting young people to eat
health fully can sometimes be challenging putting in the effort
to help young people eat better can improve their physical
and mental well being.
Parents and caregivers can help young people
make healthy food choices by keeping fruits and vegetables
stocked at home while limiting access to high fat and sugary
foods. Parents and caregivers could also try to get young
people involved in grocery Shopping and meal preparation to
help build cooking skills and increase engagement in their
health. Although parents and caregivers are the primary
influences over adolescent food choice the eating habits of
siblings and friends are also influential so its important to
consider their involvement when encouraging a young
person to adopt healthful eating practices.
To help young people develop a deeper relationship
with their food. Parents and care givers could take their
youth to farmer's markets where young people can meet the
people growing their food.
Changing one's diet to include healthier food
choices can be challenging especially for young people it can
take months or even years. Encouraging, Celebrating the
modeling these behaviors as well as teaching adolescents
how to make quick tasty, healthy foods could be quite
beneficial especially as they transition into adulthood.
Obviously the suggestions mentioned above require extra
time, effort and planning and many parents care givers and
adolescent have busy lives. However putting in the effort to
encourage adolescents to make smart food choices can help
them build healthy habits that could have a positive impact
on their physical and mental health.
Rainbow Diet
And Omega-3 Food Sources.
Food for
supplement
Improvement in
mental health
conditions
Good Sources
Fish and Fish
oil Omega 3
Fatty Acids
Psychosis Fish oil supplements
containing omega-3 f atty
acids or cold deep sea
water fish such as
salmon and walnuts
Vitamin 'D' Cognitive
impairment
depression,
bipolar disorder,
Schizophrenia
Vitamin 'D' dietary
supplements limited of
unprotected exposure to
natural sunlight and
vitamin 'D' forf eited
foods such as orange
juice, milk and yougurt.
High intake of
fresh fruit,
leafy greens
and other
vegetables
General Positive
mental health
out comes
Apple, oranges, brries,
bananas, spinach,
tomatoes, carrots etc.

REFERENCES

1. Walsh R- ( 2011) " Life style and mental health".
2. Keldar, S.H. Perry ( 1994) " Longitudinal tracking of adolescent physical activity and food choice." American Journal of public health.
3. Back man D.R. haddad E.H. lec. L.W. Johnsaon (2002) "Psychological predictions healthy dietary behavior in adolescents "Journal of
Nutritional Education and behaviors."
Salma K. Shaikh Salma K. Shaikh Salma K. Shaikh Salma K. Shaikh
J.V. Nikalje J.V. Nikalje J.V. Nikalje J.V. Nikalje
Arts, Commerce & Science College, Badnaupur Dist: Jalna
Maharashtra
How Diet and Nutrition Affect Mental Health
Research Paper Food Science

Obesity is a state in which there is a
generalized accumulation of excess adipose tissue in
the body leading to more than 20% of the desirable
weight. Over weight is condition where the body weight
is 10-20% greater than the mean standard weight for
age, height and sex. Obesity invites disability, disease
and premature death. Excess body weight is a
hindrance, leading to breathlessness on moderate
exertion and predisposes a person to diseases like
atherosclerosis, high blood pressure, stroke, diabetes,
gall bladder diseases and osteoarthritis of weight
bearing joints and varicose veins. Obesity is a chronic
disease.
Usually Obesity is due to positive energy
balance. That is, the intake of calories is more than the
expenditure of calories.
Causes of Obesity:
a) Genetic: Genes involved in weight gain
increases the susceptibility or risk of an individual to
the development of obesity when exposes to an
adverse environment. Several investigators have
shown that there is a high correlation between obesity
in parents and their children. By age 17, children of 2
obese parents are 3 times as fat as normal of 2 lean
parents. If both the parents are of normal weight only
7% of children will be obese. If one parent is obese the
incidence of obesity in children is 40% and it climbs to
80% if both parents are obese.
b) Physiological factors: (Age and Sex): It can
occur at any age in either sex as long as the persons
is under positive energy balance. Studies conducted at
nutrition foundation of India have shown more females
than males are found to be over weight in all age
groups.
Eating habits: Certain type of eating habits may lead
to obesity.
1- Some may eat faster taking less time for chewing,
therefore they tend to consume more food.
2- People who eat outside home more frequently are
prone to obesity.
3- People who eat more junk food (high fat, high
carbohydrate) may become obese.
4- Non-inclusion of fruits and vegetables and non-
vegetarian diet favour weight gain.
5- People who like eat processed, concentrated and
high fat food are susceptible to obesity.
6- Some may eat more food when they are unhappy
as a compensation mechanism.
c) Physical Activity: Obesity is found in persons
who lead sedentary lives and pay less importance to
physical education. Though obesity can occur at any
age, this is more common during middle age when
physical activity decreases without corresponding
decrease in food consumption.
Stress: Food is one of the many stimulants of
endorphin, Feel good neurotransmitter, self
gratification, self punishment, depression, anxiety and
stress may lead to excess caloric intake.
d) Physical Activity: Increased mechanization
and improved transport and working facilities have
reduced physical energy and promoted sedentary
living. Reduced energy expenditure in adults has been
shown to correlate with subsequent weight gain. A
major reduction in activity without a compensatory
decrease in habitual energy intake may also be the
cause of increased adiposity e.g. weight gain in
athletes when they retire.
Diet planning: The diet should be well balanced,
nutritionally adequate and based on the basic food
groups. The desirable rate of weight loss is 0.5-1
kg/week or 2-4 kgs per month.
The requirement for various nutrients are as
follows.
A) Energy: The level of energy intake is adjusted
to meet individual weight reduction requirement. One
kg of adipose tissue provides an energy of 7000 Kcal.
Hence a decrease of 1000 Kcal daily is required to
lose about 1 kg a week and a reduction of 500 Kcal
daily brings about a weight loss of kg/week.
Energy required for present weight:
Maintenance = BMR + Life style factors

Jaysheela Baswant Manohar Jaysheela Baswant Manohar Jaysheela Baswant Manohar Jaysheela Baswant Manohar

Smt. Ratnaprabhadevi Mohite-Patil College of Home
Science for Women, Akluj, Maharashtra
Childhood Obesity In India
Life Style Life Style Factor
Sedentary
Moderate
Heavy
30% of BMR
40% of BMR
50% of BMR
Daily Energy Requirement based on Body weight
and Activity:
Energy requirement (Kcal / kg Ideal Body
weight / Day)
Activity Obese Normal Under
weight
Sedentary
Moderate
Heavy
25-25
30
35
30
35
40
35
40
45-5
B) Protein: It is advisable to give slightly higher
than normal protein as it gives a feeling of satiety and
also helps to maintain (BM and therefore BMR.
Approximately 20% of total energy must be provided
from proteins. These should include good quality
protein in the form of low fat milk and products, lean
meats, egg white, whole pulses and whole cereals.
C) Fat: 15-20% of total energy should be
provided by fats. Fats low in SFA, high in PUFA with
appropriate 6/3 ratio is beneficial. Fish oil rich in 3 fatty
acids lowers plasma triglyceride level. Consumption of
MUFA : PUFA : SFA in the ratio of 1 : 1 : is
desirable. Total visible fat intake recommended / day,
10 gm (2 tsp) equivalent to mustard oil / corn / olive oil
/ canola (1 tsp) Desi Ghee / Butter ( tsp).
D) Carbohydrates: 60-65% of total calories
should be provided by carbohydrates. These should be
mainly in complex form like starches and dietary fibers.
Simple forms like sugar should be limited. Dietary fiber
provided bulk and satiety.
Minerals and Vitamins: Reducing diets should
provide adequate amounts of essential nutrients like
minerals and vitamins to maintain a good nutritional
status. Fruits and vegetables should be amply included
in the meals, as they are low energy, a good source of
vitamins and minerals provide roughage which helps to
relieve constipation

REFERENCES

1 Food, Nutrition and Health, Dr. Shashi Goyal, Pooja Gupta, S. Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi.
2 Dietetics, B. Srilakshmi, New Age International P limited, Publishers.
3 |...| + +. |.. .. .+.-..
Research Paper Performing Arts : Dance

ABSTRACT In dance, psychology is worked as therapy. Therapy is a treatment by which how the concept and basic
elements of that art is accepted and conceives in a right manner. In dance we know that Body and mind are inseparable. We
also realize that the best performance is the unity of body, mind and spirit. The treatment of psychological process goes slowly
so that confusion should not be in understanding. When the concept and basic principles are clearly understood then the
performance is powerful Performer has to think about self awareness, self renewal so that self management is possible.
When you learn any art you should have clarity, for what you are doing so. You should also know the challenges to overcome;
even your commitment towards art should be sincere and true. Performer needs psychological treatment for Relaxation,
visualization, focusing for positive Affirmation. It has been observed that psychological process or treatment enhances your
perform

We have got various traditions and not one
tradition. There are various ways & means to preserve the
traditions. In performing Arts dance is one of the art
through which culture and tradition not only preserved but
also studied scientifically & artistically. India is the only
country where in we can find various types of classical &
folk dances. Dance is most expressive performing art
which gives at most pleasure & satisfaction.
When we think about dance with psychology it is
very necessary to understand why psychology is needed
to dance as an art. Dance includes tal, laya, yoga,
anatomy & physiology, science, literature, music and so
on. Dance requires intention, motivation, concentration
Determination, dedication & devotion for perfect
presentation. This requires self confidence for creative
communication. This is not so easy, but can be possible
through proper training. This training is a part of making
yourself all rounder. Awareness, attentiveness, Attitude &
approach will make dancer vision clear. To understand
the depth of the art is not so easy but through learning
process dancer can achieve successfully his dream
target. Control on Body and mind makes your path clear if
you get acquainted with art whole heartedly. Dance
psychology is a part of it.
The dance training is a part of psychological
process. While learning dance, simultaneously
psychology teaches you the basic principles and related
education so that presentation should be natural. Your
thinking should be always positive so that dance will be
enjoyed by both dancer & Audience.
Psychology is training as well as a process in
which mind, Brain & Body has been considered for
development. Every human being has his own thought,
own identity and his own ideology. He behaves according
to what he thinks. From childhood he receives training of
how to behave in all respect. His training makes him to
overcome with his own way. Here the surroundings of all
the factors make his base for good living. It is very
necessary to observe & experience by keeping your Ears
& Eyes open & to receive & conceives what is going on.
Human being learns many thing if he has
positive instinct to do so. No doubt Inspiration, motivation,
positivity, Attitude, Approach, will make your path in right
direction. Psychological process happen directly or
indirectly, absentia or in presence which will gives you
something whether you except or not. The inbuilt skills
are developed through process by which your mental
ability will sustain to prove yourselves. This is the real
need of all performing Arts.
Performance psychology is a branch of
psychology that focuses upon the factors that allow
individuals, teams, and groups to flourish and to
achieve their aim of being the best. It engages the
performer on how to be successful by developing the
power of the mind and to practice mental skills
training in their daily lives. This encourages peak
performance in sports, business, entertainment and
professional lives of all performs, whether elite,
professional or of amateur status. (From Wikipedia.)
Being an age of professionalism it is the need of
the hour to become smart in your routine life. It means be
specific, Meaningful, Attainable, Relevant and Time
Bound, Today time needs perfection, and everyone thinks
of professionalism, competition which results the positive
and negative mindset which disturbs the life.
Psychological treatment will give you positive
boost up to face any situation. Performance psychology
believes that motivation must be integrated at all the
levels. In dance performance, the basic need is you
should become strong with full confidence for best
performance. Dance is an art in which Body & mind works
together with Tal and laya. After getting training dance
requires space for performance.
In dance, performance is, mental as well as
physical too. Here there are two separate elements,
mental category includes concentration, motivation,
imagination, observation, confidence and in physical
category ability, willingness, capacity, strength matters.
My experience says that you should have control
on your emotion so that emotion can be a one element of
powerful presentation. Your motivation makes your will
strong to attain the goal. Psychological process makes
your work easy. To achieve goal is easy when you have
clarity in your thought. Your determination will helps you
Dr. Jayant Dr. Jayant Dr. Jayant Dr. Jayant S SS Shevtekar hevtekar hevtekar hevtekar Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Marathwada University Aurangabad,
Maharashtra
Dance Psychology
to fulfill your commitment. This happens when you accept
the challenges. In applying psychological steps in dance
art, the target is to enhance the individuals capacities of
performance and personal growth.
In the Book psychology of Dance By Jim Taylor puts his
views
Dance has historically relied on tradition
bound methods of preparing dancers. Many dance
teachers; however realize that traditional methods of
dance education do not fully prepare students for the
demands of career in dance. Traditional training also
does not always results in dancers reaching their full
artistic potential
Personal experience
One parent along with their kid came to my class
to take admission for Bharatnatyam. After a discussion I
said ok, I will give the admission than they told me the girl
is deaf & dumb. I accept the challenge and after 12 years
training she performed live programmed of
ARANGETARAM. And then many live programmes. Its a
miracle but made possible with joint effort of Guru &
shishya.
Here the psychology of the parent is in question,
whether her daughter will do Bharatnatyam or not.
Negative mentality always goes with negative thought, but
the efforts taken for positivity will change the situation.
In dance training Guru, gives lesions to students
which make their mind to be a part of dance. The related
training & thought gives new vision which will change
mind set up. The result of all these process is one part of
psychological treatment. I think the teaching of dance is
nothing but an inseparable part of psychological training.
The American psychological Associations (APA) Division
47: defines performance psychology
Performance psychology is the study and
application of psychological principles of human
performance to help people consistently performs in
the upper range of their capabilities and more
thoroughly enjoy the performance process.
Performance psychologist are uniquely trained &
specialized to engage in a broad range of activities,
including the identification, development, and
execution of the mental and emotional knowledge,
skills, and abilities required of excellence in
performance domains; the understanding,
diagnosing, and preventing of the psychological,
cognitive, emotional, behavioral and psycho
psychological environments to facilitate more
efficient development, consistent execution, and
positive experiences in performers.
Taking into consideration above thought Dance
Art requires psychological treatment because of the
performer always has the problem of
1) Body problems 2) Self identity
3) Low self esteem 4) Mental & health challenges
5) Stress. 6) His career in dance
7) Longevity of professional life
8) Financial earning potentials
9) Inability of their bodies to meet psychological demands.
10) Loss of motivation 11) Lock of Direction
12) Confidence
How to progress and achieve the goal should be
the thinking process of every performer.
There should be no stress at the time
performance. Any type of mental & physical tensions
makes your performance unnatural, in such type of
situation aesthetics of the performance goes on back foot.
Naturalness in performance will give joy to both performer
and audience. We can observe that performing artist
takes training to reach highest skill leaves within their art
form; in this process psychology contributes to make
performance perfect with natural aesthetics.
Complexity arises when some imbalance, illegal,
irrational, unprofessional thing happens. But performance
should overcome keeping all these hurdles asides.
It also happens that personal life and artistic life
mingles with each other, results into chaotic situation and
disturbs for decision making. Psychology is not the
answer for all but it is the continuous process which will
make your path clean & clear.
Psychology in dance is a simple way to reduce
performance stress. Psychology teaches you to become
perfect for presentation with natural pleasure. Artist
should be clearly identify the personal issues and
professional issues. No doubt creativity is new challenge
to any artist. Strong & positive qualities will defiantly boost
your new creation. How to go with easy way is the
process of dance psychology.
In this respect the pioneering American
psychologist William James commented that,
Psychology is a science, and teaching is an
art: and science never generates arts directly out of
themselves. An intermediate inventive mind must
make that application by using its originality.
To learn dance is also science and an art. The
understanding process differs with respect to theory and
practicals. Even psychology enhances cognitive
processing abilities and performance.
The energy of the dancer should be utilized
properly so that it will lead to increase effort in a right way.
Body, mind and spirit are three important elements in
dance. To relate all in one creates new system. The
strategy of the performance psychology is to develop an
individuals performance with personal growth. The
development of knowledge, power and brain will make
dance performance beyond your expectation.
In dance, psychology is worked as therapy.
Therapy is a treatment by which how the concept and
basic elements of that art is accepted and conceives in a
right manner. In dance we know that Body and mind are
inseparable. We also realize that the best performance is
the unity of body, mind and spirit. The treatment of
psychological process goes slowly so that confusion
should not be in understanding. When the concept and
basic principles are clearly understood then the
performance is powerful.
Performer has to think about self awareness,
self renewal so that self management is possible. When
you learn any art you should have clarity, for what you are
doing so. You should also know the challenges to
overcome; even your commitment towards art should be
sincere and true. Performer needs psychological
treatment for Relaxation, visualization, focusing for
positive Affirmation. It has been observed that
psychological process or treatment enhances your
performance.
Research Paper Performing Arts : Drama

Theatre is a group experience almost for
everyone under vering social situation with different
purposes and objectives. This group experience transmits
communication both ways while considering audience
involvement and the people working from the front stage
to backdrop. Theatre is not life, but it reflects life in
numerous artistic forms. Theatre is also not an object, but
it is subject. It is not static, it always moves to provide
aesthetic pleasure and handsome sublimity among the
audience on the contrary, and The Theatre today does
not require a decorator in creating a total theatre. Art
seems to be inherent and natural to man. Over two
thousand years ago Aristotle said that man had an
instinct for imitation. While modern psychologists might
quarrel with his use of the term 'instinct' the fact remains
the man , uniquely among the fellow animals , feels that
he must represent his life and experience , that he must
give them visual and aural form as painting , sculpture ,
architecture , music , dance , theatre , literature . Though
forms and styles may differ widely there seems to be no
society beyond the most primitive that does not have
some form of art. Further-more, in the history of both
oriental and western civilizations, art of some sort goes
back to the very beginnings and is often linked with the
mythical origins of the race. Theatre-in-
education (TIE) is professional theatre work with specific
educational aims, offering a unique educational resource
to schools and colleges. Although it has roots in the work
of such pioneers as Joan Little wood, it began with a pilot
educational project at the Belgrade Theatre, Coventry, in
1965. The aim was to target new links between the
theatre and local schools, and to this end a small unit of
'actor-teachers' was formed to take programmes of work
into classrooms and school halls. The objectives were
educational and the means theatrical.
Kinds of Theatre in education work range from
straight performance of a play devised specially for
children particle age followed by workshop on its theme
or follow-up programme of work organized by the teacher
in consultation with the company to full participation
programmers. It is the latter for which theatre in education
won its reputation as a pioneering force in education.
Such programmers may last anything from one hour to a
full day or even to a series of although it is important to
note that the evidence to support therapeutic efficacy of
drama therapy is anecdotal rather than scientific.
There are many forms of educational drama
these all share one common goal, to create awareness or
an understanding of an idea or issue. The following is a
few examples of the main forms in which drama is used
as a tool for education. Theatre in education (TIE) is the
typical image of drama, seen since the 1960s. Usually
performed for youth groups, or schools by a drama group
this form of theatre was usually a devised piece which
used abstract ideas to communicate a message, it follows
in the tradition of plays seen throughout history such as
morality plays like everyman. This form of theatre could
also be compared to commedia del arte, and other such
travelling forms of theatre. Unlike theatre in education,
drama in education (DIE) is workshop-based, with groups
creating their own scenarios, ideas and even subject
matter through the use of drama and drama workshops.
Sometimes this kind of work may lead to the creation of a
play, or a piece of TIE or some other kind of means to
show a result from the work. Drama in Education utilizes
skills used across the spectrum of dramatic activity,
everything from teacher in role to normal theatrical
conventions of audience and spectator. Drama in
Education is usually run in youth clubs, schools,
community centers etc. A theatre workshop is a situation
where a group is allowed to explore and think about an
issue, book, a thought, a play, anything. Within drama
terms it is an active situation with a lot of learning and
experiencing.
For entering into the theatre world I think the first
step is to acquire 'knowledge', second is 'analysis'. The
third is 'projection'. And this 'projection' is fully practical
which is profoundly related with mechanical and electro-
human circuit. Moreover, we love theatre because art is
as old as mankind itself. Through evolution of the Theatre
we get to know a nation, its people, its Art and culture.
Theatre art is not like a physical popular science; on the
contrary it is a cultural science. It demands
multidisciplinary and interdisciplinary approach.
At last I think Theatre is very important to
understand the psychological objectives in education.

REFERENCES

1. Environmental Theatre - Richard Schechter.
2. On the Art of the Theatre - Edward Gordon Craig.
3. The Empty Space -Peter Brook

4. The Theatre Experience - Edwin Wilson.
5. The theory of Drama - Nicolle Allardyace.
6. A. G. Khan - Speech on Theatre and education..

Dr. Chandrashekhar B. Kanse Dr. Chandrashekhar B. Kanse Dr. Chandrashekhar B. Kanse Dr. Chandrashekhar B. Kanse
Shri Panditguru Pardikar Mahavidyalaya Sirsala,
Tq. Parli(v) Dist. Beed, Maharashtra

The Psychological and Physiological Effects of Human-
Plant Interaction on Human Well Being
Research Paper Law

ABSTRACT Purpose: To study the position of Lawyer as a psychologist, understanding and dealing the issues relating
to relationship of advocacy with psychology, by making a repo between law and psychology. Methodology: The research
methodology used for the present research article is traditional Doctrinal research method. As most of the information can be
sought form the available literature by referring books, articles, journals, websites etc. Findings: Lawyers interest in
Psychology and psychologists interests in law can be traced back a long way, when lawyer deals with a case he will enquire
not only physical problem of the client but also consider psychological factor, study of psyche or mental condition of a
person is qualitative treatment wherein physical condition is quantitative treatment. Research Limitations:Though psychology
and law is playing remarkable role in understanding substantial and practical problems of person individually and in general
but researcher has concentrated only on the area of lawyer as a psychologist. Practical Implications: The results of this study
would check the role of Lawyer and his role as social psychologist in maintaining the relation between, Clients, Bar,& Bench.
Value: The study is conducted in systematic manner to check the nature of Legal Psychology, importance of it and how it can
be used to maintain Human behavior

KEY WORDS-: Advocacy, Psychology, Legal Psychology ,Values, Ethics.

My consciousness is the consciousness of the world and the
consciousness of the World is mine, So when there is order
within the human being, then there is order in the world.
-J. Krishnamurthy
1

INTRODUCTION:
There is deep inter connection between
and Law and psychology even though both are two
separate disciplines, but have much in common.
Psychology deals with or study of mind while law deals
with study of human behavior psychologys goal is to
understand mind and human behavior and laws goal
to regulate it, both fields make assumptions about
what causes people to act the way they do. Many
psychologists research how to improve the legal
system. And many Jurists try to interpret the human
behavior their effect in framing or changing laws.
Advocacy and the Legal Psychology:
Generally speaking, any research that
combines psychological principles with legal
applications or contexts could be considered legal
psychology. It involves empirical, psychological
research of the law, legal institutions, and people who
come into contact with the law. Legal psychologists
typically take basic social and cognitive principles and
apply them to issues in the legal system such as jury
decision-making, investigations, and interviewing. The
term "legal psychology" has only recently come into
usage, primarily as a way to differentiate
the experimental focus of legal psychology from
the clinical Psychology
2
For some time now there have
been those who have asserted that there are no
values necessarily in law. The values which are in law,
according to this theory, are in law simply because
lawmakers choose to recognize and serve these
values. The dearest aim of this group is to keep
necessary values out of law so that law can be said to
be scientific in its concern for facts and not for values.
In this view, there are no value judgments which men
make of necessity and there are no values which law
necessarily and predictably protect and furthers.
This picture of men and their law, however, is
grossly distorted. The findings of psychology show that
there -are certain value judgments which are
necessarily present in the thinking of all men and
consequently in the laws of all men. These findings
receive support from the data of anthropology. These
data indicate that there are certain value judgments
which are universally present in the laws of all known
societies of men. Not that this universality is evidence
of the necessity of these value judgments. Such
evidence comes from psychology. But this universality
is solid corroboration of the findings of psychology that
men form these value judgments necessarily. There
are also value judgments which, although all individual
men cannot be said to make them universally, are
found in the laws of all known societies of men. There
are further value judgments which are not found
universally in the laws of all societies but are present in
varying degrees of prevalence. That there are such
findings of psychology and such data of anthropology
is not a new thought, but it is an ignored one. Sufficient
account of this evidence has not been taken. Instead it
has been disregarded, passed over, left unexamined
and unrelated to the functioning of values in law.
3

Advocate as a social psychologist:
Lawyers interest in Psychology and
psychologists interests in law can be traced back a
M. Madhuri Irene M. Madhuri Irene M. Madhuri Irene M. Madhuri Irene School of Law, Christ University, Bangalore, West Bengal
Advocacy- An Agile Psychology
long way ,indeed Psychiatry is internal part of
medicine they will enquire not only physical factor of
the patient but also consider psychological factor,
study of psyche or mental condition of a person is
qualitative treatment wherein physical condition is
quantitative treatment.
Advocate is a doctor for social remedies
treating the corpus or body of the society hence he is
treated as social psychiatrist who will be ascertaining
the nature of disease in the society and he duty bound
to the society as social psychologist. For some
psychologists, practice, research and education are
important means of minimizing the challenges of the
society. But it has been their roles as policy advocates
and program developers, affecting the large systems
that impact family caregivers lives, that has been their
most gratifying work.
Advocate as a social Psychologists can draw
on their knowledge of policy, legislative strategies,
leadership, and organizational dynamics to become
active change agents. They serve family caregivers in
this regard in these ways:
Legal Psychologists inform and advise
policymakers and government agencies, as well as
health-specific and caregiver organizations, on
legislation and policies that can assist family
caregivers including community-based supports,
respite care and faith-based initiatives.
Legal Psychologists design and implement
assessment tools to measure the impact of these
policies and initiatives.
Legal Psychologists develop and oversee inter
professional prevention and intervention programs that
aid family caregivers, as well as their loved ones with
health problems or disability. They conduct empirical
studies of these programs to demonstrate their
efficacy.
4

Advocate is a physician for the cause of the client:
Just like a physician is a consultant for the
body Advocate is a consultant for two parties firstly
with Client, Bench and the Bar. When speaking for the
cause of the client or group of cliental verify the
available remedies to the client, convenience the
opposite advocate and the judge for the cause of his
party hence
Nothing pays in the profession more than
unremitting industry. As the saying goes;
Perseverance is the right hand of success, and the
patience her left- hand. In the words of Daniel
Webster; Accuracy and diligence are much more
necessary to a lawyer than great comprehension of
mind, or brilliancy of tenant. His business is to refine,
define, split hairs, look into authorities, and compare
cases If he would be a great Lawyer he must first
consent to become a great drudge.
5
While looking into
advocate has to ascertain the mental condition,
behavior and social status of the parties also ascertain
other side case and mind set of the fellow advocates
before putting forward his case before the bench, In
this case he should really work as a physician.
Interlinking Law and Psychology:
The law and psychology movement has had a
long and chequered history. When Hugo Munsterburg
published On the Witness Stand in 1908, the mocking
reception it received from legal scholars (and many
psychologists) did not augur well for future partnership.
Indeed, this initial foray into law and psychology was
not sustained: there was little work in the field until the
latter part of the century. The last thirty years have,
however, witnessed a veritable explosion of research
by psychologists in areas relevant to the law. Lawyers,
it is fair to say, have generally remained somewhat
skeptical of the potential contribution of psychology to
their discipline. This ambivalence is commonly
ascribed to major differences in approach, methods
and basic premises. At the same time, psychology and
law are often competing for the same common ground.
In spite of these tensions, there is a current surge of
interest in psycho-legal enquiry
6

The question of lawfulness usually arises
when we commence philosophical reflection on these
undeniable facts, or when we begin to consider what
might be required as part of a scientific account of
them. On the face of it, our propensity to psychologists
suggests that we are robustly realistic about the
mental; it suggests that we not only believe in mental
things, but that we think of these mental things as
active elements in the causal order.
The fact that our psychologzing works as well
as it does suggests that this naive metaphysics is
roughly true. That means that there are mental events,
and that these mental events cause, and are caused
by, other events. But causation involves laws; hence,
commitment to the reality of mental causation appears
to entail commitment to the existence of mental laws.
Donald Davidson, of course, has argued that this
particular reasoning is fallacious:
7
causation does
involve laws, he says, but the laws that are entailed by
the occurrence of individual causal transactions
needn't utilize the same vocabulary (or needn't advert
to the same properties) that we happen to use in
picking out the causally related events. The
requirement that there be a law backing each true
claim of the form 'c caused e' is satisfied as long as
there is some description of c and e that supports
generalization
8
. How we choose to identify events
depends on pragmatic factors: what we know, what
our audience knows, and what we all find interesting,
and these are things that have nothing to do,
necessarily, with nomic structure. Object of law is not
only curative but also preventive study of Law shall
necessarily be paired with psychology, it is hearting
note that even Bar Council of India introduced
Psychology as a subject in 5yrs law course.

Conclusion:
It has been said that neither law nor human
nature is an exact science,
9
and surely many lawyers
would agree. Nonetheless, the science of psychology
has much to contribute to the art of legal practice and
to the craft of working with clients, opposing counsel,
staff, witnesses, mediators, judges, and others. While
we cannot provide an exact recipe for success, we
hope that by highlighting the importance of
psychological science and some of the critical insights
offered by that field, we provide some useful tools for
improving the ways in which lawyers are able to
successfully represent their clients. Most lawyers
would benefit greatly from knowing more about
psychology, that is, the science of how people think,
feel, and behave. After all, the typical lawyer spends
much of his time interacting with people: clients, other
lawyers, staff, witnesses, mediators, arbitrators,
insurers, experts, judges, and jurors.
Lawyers who can harness the insights of
psychology will be more effective inter-viewers and
counselors, engage in more successful negotiations,
conduct more efficient and useful discovery, more
effectively persuade judges and others through their
written words, better identify and avoid ethical
problems, and even be more productive and happier.
10

Same time Lawmen who are still under the impression
that there are no such value judgments would do well
to examine the data of psychology. For too long have
jurisprudents spurned the findings of other fields of
endeavor. From what they take to be high ground, they
look down on the work of other disciplines. Efforts to
bring data from these know ledges into law have been
patronizingly labeled as attempts to "psychologize law.
Hence, when statements are made to the effect that it
has never been shown that there are universal value
judgments in law, the only conclusion which can be
accurately drawn is that there is in such remarks much
less than meets the eye.
11
If men in law are to
understand law, and off course the study of law with
psychology is a spirited life with dynamism and
development, where as a pure study of law without
psychology is an exercise without a purpose.
Always think thoughts that are productive and positive. For
the law of Attraction possesses your key to either endless
misery and woe or to an abundance you never knew could
be achievable.
- Xavier Streete
FN/Endnotes
1. The Awakening of Intelligence (Harper &Row,1773)127
2. Michael J. Saks (1986). The Law Does Not Live on
Eyewitness Testimony Alone. Law and Human
Behavior, 10, 279-280.
3. THE BASIC VALUES IN LAW A Study of the Ethico-
legal Implications of Psychology and Anthropology
THOMAS E. DAVITT Professor of Jurisprudence,
School of Law, Marquette University American
Philosophical Society .http://www.jstor.org
4. Coon, D.W. & Burleson, M.H. (2006). Working with Gay,
Lesbian, Bisexual, and Transgender Families. In. G. Yeo
& D. Gallagher-Thompson (Eds.), Ethnicity and the
Dementias (2nd ed., pp. 343-358). New York, NY:
Routledge.
5. Bhallas Advocates Act and Professional Ethics ,Nasik
Law House Aurangabad,India ,2
nd
edition 2004pg 319
6. Wiley and Modern Law Review are collaborating with
JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to The
Modern Law Review The Modem Law Review Limited
2005,
7. See Davidson (ARC) and (ME) in Davidson (1980). 3.
8. Ridgeview Publishing Company is collaborating with
JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access
toPhilosophical Perspectives. http://www.jstor.org
9. Daniel M. Hausman Essays on Philosophy and
Economic Methodology Cambridge University
Press,1992
10. http://apps.americanbar.org/abastore/index.cfm?pid=51
00021&section=main&fm=Product.
11. The New Analytical Jurists," New York Univ. Law Rev.
41 (1966): p. 884. www.jstor.org

REFERENCES

1. The New Analytical Jurists," New York Univ. Law Rev. 41 (1966): p. 884
2. Daniel M. Hausman Essays on Philosophy and Economic Methodology Cambridge University Press,1992.
3. Wiley and Modern Law Review are collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to The Modern Law
Review The Modem Law Review Limited 2005,
4. Michael J. Saks (1986). The Law Does Not Live on Eyewitness Testimony Alone. Law and Human Behavior, 10,.
5. Coon, D.W. & Burleson, M.H. (2006). Working with Gay, Lesbian, Bisexual, and Transgender Families. In. G. Yeo & D.
Gallagher-Thompson (Eds.), Ethnicity and the Dementias (2nd edn.). New York, NY: Routledge
6. Bhallas Advocates Act and Professional Ethics ,Nasik Law House Aurangabad,India ,2
nd
edition 2004
7. David Ross Q C Advocacy Cambridge university press, second edition2007.
8. Brooks-Gordon and Freeman Law and Psychology current legal issues vol.9 Oxford university press 2006
Research Paper Law

ABSTRACT Purpose: To study the psychology of the legislature at the time of enacting the laws I favour of women and
children. Methodology: The research methodology used for the present research article is traditional Doctrinal research
method. As most of the information can be sought form the available literature by referring books, articles, journals, websites
etc. Findings: The legislature at the time of enacting the laws for woman and children are adopting the same psychology
which was used before 100 years. The legislatures are rigid in that attitude and their policies are governed by the old
principles. Research Limitations: The topic is vast topic for the sake of proper study I have kept the research work up to 2 to 3
acts enacted by the legislature for the women and children. Practical Implications: The results of this study would check the
psychology of the legislature for the enacting of the laws for women and children and in future may we check this issue from
practical point of view than theoretical aspect. In the era of globalization we need to test every possible aspect before
enacting the law for welfare of any class of the society. Value: The study is probably first time conducted in different manner
to check the laws available for the women and children in critical manner.

KEY WORDS: Psychology, Law, Woman, Children, Change.

INTRODUCTION:-
Over the last few decades many aspects of
law enforcement and related legal and judicial
processes have been influenced by psychological
theories and research. Psychology is spreading
through many aspects of the legal process across the
world. But till last century, we find hardly any reference
where psychology and law are studied interlinked. In
1889, psychology students were beginning to take
courses related to law such as Crime and Modern
Theories of the Criminal, but for the most part,
American psychologists did not immediately embrace
the study of legal issues. (Bersoff, Ogloff, & Tomkins,
1996) For reasons unstated, the study of psychology
and law began to wane after World War II. In the
1960s, psychologists were beginning to be called on
to make predictions of dangerousness, make clinical
assessments relevant to insanity defense pleas, and
make assessments and/or offer testimony about other
mental health issues in the courts. In the early 1980s
law, criminal justice, and social science would become
embraced in legal education. Interdisciplinary and
specialized training was introduced at the doctoral,
internship, post-doctoral, and continuing educational
levels.
Aims and objectives of the research:-
The study is carried out with the following aims
and objectives.
1. To study the link between Law and psychology.
2. To study the role and policies played by the
legislature while making the laws.
3. To point out the impact of psychology while
making the laws.
4. To critically analysis the role of the legislature.
Methodology:-
The research methodology used for the
present research article is traditional Doctrinal
research method. As most of the information has been
sought form the available literature. So the author has
chosen doctrinal method as method for article and has
used books, journals, research articles for preparation
of the same.
The status of woman and children in the society:-
The exalted status of Indian women in
ancient days suffered a setback in the medieval
period. Social economic and political factors played a
major role in their suppression. Social inhibitions and
discriminatory practices against them continued to
exist during the enlightened' and 'civilized' imperial
rule. The leadership of independent movement was,
however, committed to accord an equal status to
women and give them a place of honour, and dignity in
the society. Accordingly the constitution - the
fundamental law- as emerged out of the constituent
assembly, treated both men and women equally and
also provided for protective discrimination for women
in view of their peculiar position in the human society.
Sanjay S. Bang Sanjay S. Bang Sanjay S. Bang Sanjay S. Bang Lal Bhadur Shastri National academy of Administration,
Mussoorie, Uttarakhand
A Critical Study of the Psychology of the Legislature for
Enacting the Laws Related to Woman and Children
Children are the future of a country. They
bring the development & prosperity to the country. But
as we all know that the children are the most
vulnerable part of the society & can be easily targeted.
In India we have enacted many laws & Acts related to
Children in order to protect them & to give them a
better & sound development. With more than a third of
its population below the age of 18, India has the
largest child population in the world. This
backgrounder explores the levels of health, nutrition,
education and social security of children, and
government policy and action on child rights India has
made some significant commitments towards ensuring
the basic rights of children.
Law in India related to woman and children:-
The principal of gender equality is enshrined in
the Indian constitution. The Constitution of India, the
supreme law of the land has certain special provisions
relating to women. The constitution makers were
aware that in this country the suppression of women
and her rights was a common phenomenon. To
overcome this they inserted certain provisions for
upliftment and development of the status of women.
The legislatures are also playing their role by enacting
laws to protect woman from the age old atrocities she
has been facing in the society.
Though the concept of the rights of the child
was not very lucid at the time of making of the
Constitution, it was envisioned that children are the
assets of the country. They need protection and
provisions to develop in complete beings capable to
steer the nation. The Indian Constitution contains
certain provisions specifically aimed for protection,
development and welfare of children. Art.24 prohibits
the employment of children in any factory or mine or in
any other hazardous occupation. Art. 39 (e) & (f) in
DPSP lay down that the state shall direct its policy in
such a manner that the tender age of the children. The
legislature have enacted different laws for the
protection and for the welfare of the children as they
are the future of the country and if proper care is not
taken today, tomorrow the future of the country will
become dark.
Evaluation of psychology of the legislature for the
laws of woman:-
In the Constitution, a direction has been given
under Art 15 to enact the laws in favour of woman
even by going in discriminatory manner but must be
positive and in the limits of the constitution. Few of the
provisions of the Indian Penal Code, are in favour of
the woman. The critics even have gone up to the
extent to call this Act as gender biased. For instance
under Sec 497, the concept and punishment for the
offence of adultery has been given. It means a man is
keeping illegal relationship with a married woman with
her consent. In this case the victim is husband of that
married woman. Here the punishment is given only to
the man and not to the woman though both are equally
involved in the offence. The section has been enacted
long back in 1960 and the status of woman in financial
and education was completely different from today.
This section has been challenged for number of times
as unconstitutional and in violation of Article 14 of the
Indian Constitution. But every time the Court has held
it as constitutional. The matter of social circumstances
has always been quoted. But it is not a matter of social
condition of woman, it is much better in comparison
than earlier. But it reflects the psychology of the
legislatures for woman as; they are finding it difficult to
differentiate between the position of woman in 1860
and 2013. Even the legislature are not yet ready to
treat the woman as abettor in the offence and entitled
for lesser punishment than the man, which is provision
in few of the countries. The amendments made to the
Criminal Law in 1983 are again the best example of
the psychology of the legislature for the woman.
Especially sec 498(A) which states cruelty by
husband and his relatives to the wife. No doubt,
because of insertion of this section the torture of the
woman is reduced up to the extent. But now the
position is changed and some of the husbands are
also facing cruelty by wife and her relatives. But
husbands are not having any legal remedy for their
protection. In reaction a group is claiming to insert
some provision in the Code which will equally protect
the husband as well. But till this date, the legislature
are not ready to admit the fact that it can happen in
India, when wife can commits cruelty against husband.
In reaction to this a group has been set up in Nagpur,
Maharashtra named Patni pidit purush sangathana.
The psychology of the legislature related to
woman is same as it was long back in 1860 at the time
of formation of the Indian penal code. The Protection
of woman from Domestic violence Act-2005 has also
been challenged in 6 different High Courts on the
ground of unconstitutionality which is still pending
there. In this Act, case can be initiated against man
and not against woman, even if she is involved in
domestic violence against woman. In fact the statics
are showing that in most of the cases in crime against
woman, other woman is involved. It means the
psychology of the legislature is not yet ready to accept
the change.

Evaluation of psychology of the legislature for the
laws of children:-
The psychology of the legislature is not
different in framing the laws for children than woman.
In Indian Contract Act-1872, the contract entered by
minor is void contract. Initially it was not clear, but in
Mohri bibi v/s Dharmodas Ghosh, the Privy Council
declared that a contract entered by minor is not only
void, but it is void ab initio, means void since
beginning. The decision was given by the Council in
1904, but still we are going with the same provision. In
England, the contract entered by minor is voidable,
depends upon the capacity of the minor to judge it.
The position is same in the USA as well. But in India,
the minors are enjoying the privilege in comparison to
his counterpart in England and the USA. The position
of minor is no doubt, changed today that the position in
1904, but we are still under estimating the capacity of
the minor. It is perhaps because in India, we find that
children are not encouraged to take independent
decisions like what he should eat, dress and which
course he should adopt in his studies. Parents are
over protective in their approach for the children.
Perhaps it is reflected in the psychology of the
legislature as well and we have framed protective laws
only in favour of minor. Even the studies have shown
that minors have misutilised this concept for their
personal gains.
Even in the Criminal law, if a person below the
age of 18 if commits any crime, he will get the
protection because of his age and will be send to
Protection Home and not in jail. In Delhi gang rape
case, out of five, one accused was minor, and it has
been reported that he was most aggressive among the
five. But because of his age only just after 3 years he
will come out, is this really tribute and justice to that
victim girl? Even a demand rose to reduce the age to
16 but not implemented by the legislature. It shows the
psychology of the legislature related to the children.
Because of the advancement and development in the
information and technology, the child now able to learn
new things more quickly than earlier. But the
psychology of the society is not accepting this fact and
the will of the society is reflecting in the views of the
legislatures as well.
Concluding remarks and suggestions:-
The legislatures have played a positive role by
enacting the laws in welfare of the women and
children. In this era when even we have noticed few of
the cases where mother has killed her own son or
daughter and even the father has raped on his own
daughter, we can not deny any possibility of crime
which may take place. It is also correct that very few
incidences are there, but has started to take place and
it is better to have legislative provisions before this evil
will grow.Hence, it is the time when we need to change
the psychology. Because of development in other
resources and laws to protect one may take
disadvantage of his position and may exploit the other
who was exploiting him till that time. Law must be a
tool to bring the social change. But because of rigid
psychology, now the people have started to use law as
a weapon. It is again the time of globalization. We
continuously need to study the global aspect and bring
the change in our local level according to our
suitability. But if we adopt rigid attitude in psychology
of our society and if the same would be reflected in the
attitude of the legislature it would be very difficult to
bring such change and make a society free from
exploitation.

REFERENCES

1. Canter David (Editor), Psychology and Law bridging the gap (2008), Ashgate Publishing Limited, Hampshire, England.
2. Kapardis Andreas, Psychology and Law a critical introduction (2003), Cambridge University Press, England.
3. Bajpai Asha, Child Rights in India Law policy and practice (II Edition) (2006), Oxford university Press, New Delhi, India.
4. Srivastava T. N., Woman and the Law (I Edition) (1985), Intellectual Publishing House, New Delhi.
5. Dr. Myneni S.R, Contract I, (I edition) (2011), Asia Law House Hyderabad.
6. Sarkar S.C, Indian Penal Code-1860 (III Edition) (2011) 4
th
volume, Dwivedi Law Agency, Allahabad.
Research Paper Law

ABSTRACT Legal systems are necessary in any functioning society. Centuries ago, people realized that the only way to
maintain a peaceful community was to develop a firm set of ruleslawsto punish transgressors. As laws have continued to
evolve in societies around the world, psychological scientists have begun to investigate the psychological basis of many
aspects of legal systems
There are nearly as many intersections between law and psychology as there are areas of policy regulation. Conflict
resolution and negotiation; judgment and decision-making capacity; prejudice and stereotyping; criminal responsibility;
competency; assessment of evidence, including the reliability of eyewitnesses, and lie detection; hedonics; developmental
psychology and educational policy; addiction and drug policythese are just a few of the frontiers open to scholars and
practitioners educated in both law and psychology. In criminal trials, an expert witness may be called to testify about
eyewitness memory, mistaken identity, competence to stand trial, the propensity of a death-qualified jury to also be "pro-
guilt", etc. Psychologists who focus on clinical issues often testify specifically about a defendant's competence, intelligence,
etc. More general testimony about perceptual issues (e.g., adequacy of police sirens) may also come up in trial.

INTRODUCTION:-
Legal psychology is the term used to describe
incidents where legal matters must be considered in
tandem with psychological matters. This specific field of
psychology is often referred to as forensic psychology
and is commonly used in criminal investigations,
particularly where the sanity of a defendant is in question
or when it is believed that an eyewitness to a crime may
not accurately convey information to a court.
Professionals trained in legal psychology are often called
upon to participate in criminal investigations before a
court trial begins and to eventually testify in court
regarding their findings.
A number of professionals trained in legal
psychology find work in prisons and mental health
institutions. Some may even work in private practices
while specializing in certain aspects of the field that may
be helpful to police investigators and judges. Individuals
trained in legal psychology are also frequently relied upon
to counsel witnesses and victims of violent crimes during
an ongoing investigation. The duties required of a person
trained in legal psychology vary quite a bit. Judges
presiding over child custody hearings will often require a
professional trained in legal psychology and who has
experience counseling young people to evaluate children
in an effort to determine custody and visitation orders.
Others working in this field may be relied upon to provide
psychological research to attorneys relating to how jurors
are likely to view defendants and arrive at verdicts.
Psychology plays a role i n criminal j ustice
Forensic psychology: - Forensic psychologists apply
the study of the mind to legal matters. Forensic
psychology professionals work with offenders, victims and
authorities to provide insight into criminal behaviors and
actions. Becoming a forensic psychologist requires a
tremendous amount of study as it combines work in
multiple fields. Forensic psychologists are responsible for
maintaining a high level of professionalism regardless of
the conditions. Working in correctional facilities may
present challenges, but forensic psychologists must
assist incarcerated individuals to ensure their health and
safety.
Clinical psychology: - Clinical psychologists conduct
research and evaluation to promote good psychological
health. Adjusting to prison is a problem for many first-time
offenders, but clinical psychologists offer assistance to
help them adjust to their confinement. Clinical
psychologists assess the nature, causes and effects of
dysfunctional environments, examining behavior,
emotional and mental disorders. They may examine
prisoners by conducting interviews, aptitude tests and
other assessments to learn more about their actions and
behaviors. Clinical psychologists assess, diagnose and
help treat a wide variety of mental disorders. These
professionals may work in drug rehabilitation centers,
prisoners or other settings, which means that individuals
who work in the criminal justice system may find
themselves interacting with clinical psychologists.
Criminal psychology: - We can get inside a criminals
mind by examining their mentality and social behavior.
Investigative psychology--Criminal psychologists can
study a criminals influences. Police collect information
from a crime scene that can affect the public and the
criminal justice system. Psychosocial approach a
persons interpretation of a situation may lead him or
hereto criminal behavior. Criminal psychologists must
consider situational variables that may lead a person to
commit a crime.
Developmental psychology: - Developmental
psychologists can examine an individuals emotional and
mental development over an extended period of time,
allowing them to see behavioral changes that may occur
as he or she gets older.
Adolescent crime Exposure to violent situations may
lead children to commit crimes. Several factors may
impact juvenile delinquency, including economic and
Shaikh Tarnnum Yusuf Shaikh Tarnnum Yusuf Shaikh Tarnnum Yusuf Shaikh Tarnnum Yusuf

M.S.S. Law College, Jalna, Maharashtra
The Functions of Psychology and Law in Modern
Society
social conditions. Developmental psychologists can
examine influences that may lead a child to a life of crime.
Egocentrism People may begin committing crimes due
to egocentrism, the belief that they are more important
than others. Developmental psychologists can study the
roots of self-centered behavior.
Antisocial behavior Children develop behavior
patterns at a young age, but environmental and social
factors may lead them to become antisocial. Their early
development could impact them as adults, leading to
criminal behaviors. Developmental psychologists
emphasize childhood as they review possible influences
that could lead people to commit crimes.
Psychological impact of prisons Prisons can
become dysfunctional environments that impact the
mental state of inmates during their incarceration. Harsh
conditions can drive people to act and think differently
than they would outside prison, and an incarceration can
impact a person in the short-term and long-term. Forensic
psychologists face the challenge of diagnosing and
monitoring prisoners psychological problems, helping
them deal with adjusting to their lack of freedom.
1) Forensic psychology framing our legal system:-
The field of forensics is often associated with objective
truths: fingerprints left on a murder weapon, DNA
evidence taken from a toothbrush, crime scene
investigators in lab coats collecting hairs and clothing
fibers for further investigation. Another equally important
component of forensics, however, lies in deciphering the
motives of the accused. After all, the legal systemthe
police, lawyers, and judges that prosecute and defend
people charged with crimesknow that DNA and
fingerprints are not the only things that define us as
unique individuals. Increasingly, forensic psychologists
have been called upon to bridge the gap between
psychology, defined as the study of human behavior and
the law.
There are many points at which the field of
psychology and the legal system intersect. A person
convicted of a crime and found to be mentally ill, for
example, will inevitably cross paths with several members
of the psychological profession during the legislative
process. The generally accepted definition of, forensic
psychology though, limits the definition exclusively branch
of psychology directly associated with legal decisions.
Today, forensic psychology plays a critical role in our
judicial system, from the initial apprehension of criminals
to the appeals process that might eventually set them
free.
Forensic psychology aims to help law
professionals remove human error when handling trials.
Lawyers, judges, jurors, and witnesses that populate the
judicial system are often subject to personal biases. The
dangers behind such biases stem from the fact that they
are often subconscious manifestations of historical
experiences. The role of forensic psychology, of course,
is to gain insight into the human mind and utilize the
insight to shape legal proceedings in an objective
manner. An increasingly important role in forensic
psychology in the courts is to question the veracity of
traditional testimony, from confessions to eyewitness
accounts to suspect identification. It has been known for
decades that eyewitness testimony, despite the important
role it plays in convincing members of the jury of a
suspects guilt or innocence, is highly unreliable. Some of
these findings have helped prompt reforms in evidence-
gathering procedures such as police lineups,
where reliability can be greatly improved with a few
changes. Backed with mounds of evidence,
the Psychological Association has encouraged the courts
to allow defendants to more easily challenge the reliability
of witnesses. However, psychologists arent typically
allowed to testify on the reliability of witnesses during
trials, leaving such a judgment up to jury, and a
recent Supreme Court decision upheld the fairness of this
practice.
2) Euthanasia:- The ethical, psychological, medical and
legal issues involved in euthanasia and terminal care are
both complex and challenging. There exists an inherent
tension between respecting individual autonomy and
relieving people from unbearable suffering while still
protecting the principle of valuing human life. Any
liberalizing of laws in relation to euthanasia needs to
achieve a satisfactory mechanism which balances this
tension, achieves respect for individual rights (of patients,
careers and professional health workers), and prevents
abuse, without becoming too unwieldy, bureaucratic and
time consuming to be practical.
The complexity of the psychological issues which
need consideration becomes clear from the preceding
analysis. Whether or not voluntary active euthanasia is
legalized, it is clear that the need for high quality care
remains. In fact, perhaps one beneficial consequence of
the current debate is the increased recognition of the
rights of the terminally ill to the highest quality of care,
including palliative care, and including also concern for
their psychological as well as physical welfare. Adequate
psychological services need to be available to those
terminally ill patients who are depressed or suffering other
psychological disorders concomitant with, or as a
consequence of, their terminal illness. Services also need
to be available to respond to careers psychological
needs.
The decision-making process raises many difficult
psychological issues. It is clearly apparent that every
case where a patient requests assistance to die should
be assessed individually. Many elements of what might
be required for an acceptable process have been
identified here.
Finally, it is clear that there are several places
where psychologists can and should enter in the debate
on euthanasia, in policy development and in practice for
the care of the terminally ill, and in the process of support
and decision-making should requests for assistance to
die be made
We urge policy makers to consider these issues
seriously, and to bring them to the attention of other
professionals and policy makers. Psychologists should
strive to establish and keep up to date their knowledge in
this area, e.g. through continuing professional education,
so as to be prepared to enter into social action and
professional service in this field if called upon.
A) To reduce the legal jeopardy of those who
implement euthanasia - Euthanasia occurs
now. Legally, a person who kills another or connives at
the death of another, breaks the law and may be charged
with a serious criminal offence (murder or manslaughter),
and may be convicted and punished. That the killing
resulted from requests from the sufferer, and that it was
done from motives of empathy and compassion, will not
necessarily alter the legal situation. If euthanasia were
recognized as an option, and provided that accompanying
regulations were observed, then a person who assists a
person to die would be protected from prosecution, or at
least have a defense.
B) To allow regulation of procedures regarding
euthanasia - It is widely recognized that euthanasia
does occur covertly. Overt recognition would allow
regulations to be developed governing modes of request
and consent, counseling for sufferers and families,
decisions about modes of death, and so on.
3) PSYCHOLOGICAL INFLUENCES ON THE LEGAL
DIVORCE PROCESS - Most of the interface between
the divorcing couples and the helping professionals takes
place during the legal divorce or litigation stage. It is
during this period that the spouses contact attorneys and
proceed, together, through the legal process. A number of
psychological factors have major impact on the nature
and quality of this process. Although divorce is an
experience of growth, change, and positive individual
development for some, it is a psychological and emotional
death for others. For most, it certainly is a time of
tremendous stress, disruption, chaos, uncertainty, and
craziness. With appropriate help from understanding and
knowledgeable professionals, the process of divorce can
be navigated successfully. However, without an
understanding of the powerful dynamics of divorce, the
helping professional can become a misnomer,
contributing unnecessarily to the escalation of negative
emotions and negative interactions.
In choosing to respond to the client's stated
needs, and neglecting the larger responsibility of
protecting the client's long-range best interests, the
practitioner renders service that is of questionable value.
To allow for the ever-changing emotional and
psychological state of the client (ranging from runaway
guilt to abject despair), the professional must be more
than just an advocate for the client. He must play also the
role of devil's advocate, counselor, financial adviser,
protector, motivator, and hand holder. The generic
requirements that define the role of a lawyer must give
way to the unique demands of the lawyer' s role in this
very specific and special area of human relationships. In
light of the critical significance of the many psychological
factors involved in divorce settlements, it is of real
concern that, along with their considerable training in
substantive law and litigation, attorneys have so little
preparation or training in psychology. Perhaps it is time to
institute more rigorous psychological training for legal
professionals involved in the very difficult area of divorce.
On the more optimistic side, the exposure that
therapists and attorneys have had to each other, as a
result of the merging of the disciplines in cases of court-
ordered custody mediation, has created an
interdisciplinary dialogue that has enhanced the
knowledge and understanding of practitioners of both
disciplines. The mental health professionals have brought
a new understanding of the psychology of divorce to the
legal professionals who practice in this area. At the same
time, therapists have gained greater knowledge of the
complex legal and practical problems which compound
divorcing clients' psychological and emotional needs. This
represents a most positive development in the evolution
of these professional disciplines. The ripple effect that will
inevitably result will reach other professional practitioners
whose clients are in the process of separation and
divorce, hopefully sensitizing them to the very influential
and unavoidable psychological aspects of divorce.
Conclusion:-
Psychologists are very important elements of the
legal system because of the many roles they play.
Psychologists most commonly perform roles such as
advising attorneys on cases, providing research,
consulting on trials and jury selection, testifying as expert
witnesses, and evaluating trials. However psychologists
do not just play an important role in the courtroom setting.
Psychologists are also often used by law enforcement,
corrections, and even in university settings. Most
commonly, in criminal cases these psychologists play big
roles in course a trial takes and its outcome.
Law enforcement uses psychologists for many
things. Sometimes they are used to evaluate officers who
have been through a traumatic experience on the job
such as killing someone or being shot/ injured on the job.
They are also called in on occasion to watch integrations
and give deceives insight on the suspects mannerisms
and mental status. When law enforcement is dealing with
issues regarding children, child psychologists are often
called in to observe the child and speak with them
regarding the situation. Some issues that come with using
psychologist in law enforcement are when a psychologist
is asked to speak with a suspect. If the psychologist does
not carefully explain the rules the suspect could think they
are speaking with a doctor and then all statements
made would be patient doctor confidentiality. Another
area of the legal system that uses psychologists is the
corrections department. Psychologists perform any
number of tasks related to corrections for analyzing,
evaluating and treating inmates to helping resolve any
issues that might arise between inmates. In the
corrections department psychologists are often used in
the rehabilitation of offenders. These psychologists allow
inmates to talk about their feelings and concerns and
work on areas of...

REFERENCES

1. Divya Menon, Psychology and the Law: A Special Issue of Current Directions in Psychological Science
2. Bombay High Court Declaration (1989) Clinical Psychologist as a Mental Specialist.
3. Dutt, K (1993) Clinical Psychologist in India, I.J.C.P., 20 (1-4)
Research Paper Law

ABSTRACT Younger Generation has always been considered as a pillar of our nation, but somehow the proper care
which require to be taken it results in many changes in behavioral pattern of young boys and girls. This behavioral changes
many occasions cross the natural behavioral pattern laid down by the society.
No doubt Law always taken into consideration element of mensra and act which constitutes the crime. A criminal
justice administration system has to take into consideration this factor while determining the adolescence behavior. It has
been rightly stated by many experts that human being not criminal by birth but society makes him criminal. It means that may
social, psychological and economical and other factors influences the behavior of human mature including behavior of
adolescence. Now, psychology of adolescence behavior is being considered with utmost importance because of new scientific
advancement in criminal science. These elements are being evaluated which much more care and caution while convicting
acquitting these adolescence. This paper deals with how psychology is esteemed factor while evaluating these adolescences
behavior..

INTRODUCTION :
Adolescence is usually defined as the period
that begin with the onset of puberty and ends
somewhere around age eighteen or nineteen.
Adolescence is the period of rapid growth between
childhood and adulthood including psychological and
social development.
Adolescence (from Latin Adolescence
meaning to grow up)
1
is a transitional stage of
physical and psychological human development that
generally occurs during the period from puberty to
legal adulthood (age of majority)
(1) (2) (3)
. The period of
adolescence is most closely associated with the
teenage years,
(3)
though its physical, psychological
and cultural expressions may begin earlier and end
later.
Crime in Youth : Is participation is illegal behavior by
minors (juveniles (individuals, younger than the
statutory age of majority).
Crime in youth is an universal problem. In
recent years in the U.S. the average age for first arrest
has dropped significantly and younger boys and girls
are committing crimes between 60 80% of
adolescents and pre adolescents engage in some of
juvenile (adolescence) offence. These are range from
status offence ( such as underage smoking), to
property crime and violent crime. The parent of teen
who offend is so high that it could seen to be a cause
of worry. However, youth (juvenile) offending can be
considered normative adolescent behavior. This is
because most teens lead to offend by committing
non-violent crimes, only once or a few times and only
during adolescence . It is when adolescents offend
repeatedly or violently that their offending is likely to
continue beyond adolescence and become
increasingly violent. It is also likely that if this is the
case, they began offending and displaying antisocial
behavior even before reaching adolescence
Causes and Crime in Youth :
Influence of Psychological & Social Factors
Parenting styles with 2 styles most likely to predict
delinquency. Being permissible parenting,
characterized by a lack of consequence based
discipline and encompassing two subtype known as
neglectful parenting, characterized by a lack
of monitoring and such of knowledge of childhood
activities and indulged parenting, characterized by
affirmative enablement of misbehavior.
Authorization parenting, characterized by
harsh discipline and refusal to justify discipline on any
basis on other than because I said so. Peer group
association, particularly with antisocial pear groups, as
is more likely when adolescence are left unsupervised
Poor or low socioeconomic status.
Poor schools readiness/performance and / or
feller, peer rejection, or attention deficit hyper activity
disorder (ADHD).
Individual psychological or behavioral risk
factors that may make offending more likely include
low intelligence, impulsive or the inability to delay
gratification, aggression lack of empathy and
restlessness.
Aggressive or troublesome behavior,
psychology, language delays or impartments, lack of
emotional control (learning to control once angle) and
cruelty to animals.
Children brought by lone parents are more
likely to start committing crimes then those who live
with to natural parents, as it is more likely that children
of single parents may live in poverty.

Joshi P.M. Joshi P.M. Joshi P.M. Joshi P.M. Regional Officer, Maharashtra Pollution Control Board,
Aurangabad, Maharashtra
Influence of Psychological & Social Factors on
Adolescence Resulting in Crime

Difference between adolescence criminals and
other criminals :
a) Bail :- When adult is arrested and scheduled
for argument, he or she can be (1) remanded to jail; (2)
release with a set bail amount; or (3) released on his
or her own recognizance. Adolescence
criminals/juveniles, however are not illegible for bail, so
the Judge must decide either to release the minor to
the custody of his or her parents to remand the
juvenile or adolescent criminal to a detection facility for
minors.
b) Detainment :- when adult is arrested, he or
she is usually put into a jail cell until bail can be set or
he can be released on O.R. A adolescent
criminal/juvenile is almost never locked up with adults,
and is sent to a juvenile detention facility.
c) Burden of Proof :- In an adult criminals trial,
the prosecutor must prove beyond a reasonable doubt
that the defendant did, in fact commit the crime, in
adolescent criminal cases/ juvenile cases, however,
the prosecutor usually has to prove with a pre-
pondevance of evidence (50%) that the dependent is
guilty as long as the conviction will not result in a jail
sentence.
d) Juvenile/Adolescent Criminal Law Terms
Compared with Other Law Term :
Juveline/Adolescent Criminal
law term
Corresponding
Adult/other criminal Law
Terms
Offense Crime
Take into custody Arrest
Petition File charged
Denial Not guilty plea
Admission Guilty plea
Adjudicatory Hearing Trial
Found Delinquent Found guilty
Disposition Sentencing
Detention Jail
After care Parole
Reforming Theories and Modern Clinical Methods
to deal Adolescent Criminal: An adolescent
criminal are not like hard core or other criminals they
must be not arrested, charges must not be filed
against them and if not found guilty sentenced to jail,
instead they must be taken into custody, reformative
theory may be applied on them so as to rehabilitated
them to re-enter society else law abiding citizens.
They must be given separate space, separate
treatment, there should be a separate strategy to deal
them considering psychological another factor as this
factors primarily lead adolescence into crime.
The above mentioned clinical methods and
reformative theory will certainly will play vital role in
rehabilitating adolescent criminals to re-enter into
society as law abiding citizens.
Because the development of delinquency in
youth/ adolescent criminal/youth criminal is influenced
by numerous factors such as psychological, social,
and other numerous factors, prevention efforts need to
be comprehensive in scope. Prevention services may
include activities such as substance abuse, education
and treatment, family counseling, youth monitoring,
parenting education, educational support, and youth
sheltering Increasing availability and use of family
planning services, indulging education and
contraceptive helps to reduce unwanted pregnancy
and unwanted birth, these causes risk factors for
adolescence criminal should be catered to deal
adolescent criminal.
Judicial Efforts to deal with Adolescence Criminals
in Reformations Strategy:
In fact, it has been well accepted that it is
circumstances and atmosphere and influence of
psychological and social factors which compel children
to become adolescence criminal/delinquent and not
their own will itself, thus, this is not impossible to
reform the antisocial attitude in them by reforming
unhealthy and unfavorable surroundings and by
providing sufficient suitable means. Further, fulfillment
of this purpose the juvenile justice (care and protection
of children) Act, 2000 has been enacted w.e.f.
30/12/2000. It aims to consolidate and amend the law
relating to juveniles in conflict with law and children in
need of care and protection, by providing for proper
care, protection and treatment by carrying to their
developmental need, by adopting a child friendly
approach in the adjudication and disposition of
matters in the bar interest of children, and for their
cultivate rehabilitation through various juvenile
institutions like children home, observation home,
special home, shelter home along with a juvenile
justice board, child welfare committee, etc.,
established under the Act.
Conclusion: After a long study and research the
criminologists have come to conclusion that it is a
clinical survey including and considering psychological
and social factors, etc. the adolescence/youngsters
can be prevented from in criminal activities. The All
India Crime Prevention Society in this regard
(established in 1950) has been showing its
commendable service to suppress adolescence
criminals/juvenile delinquency in the whole national
front. The said recognition also received from the
United Nations.

REFERENCES

1. Adolescence from Wikipedia.
2. Article posted by Hemangane Kalita on Juvenile Delinquency in India.
3. Criminal Law and Juvenile Justice, Article by Kate Vaughen & Jeaba Kim
4. Why Juveniles commit crimes by Joseph A.Wickliffe
Research Paper Law

ABSTRACT Law refers to the body of rules adopted in order to regulate the behavior of individuals.
Morals are the ethical principles which regulate the behavior of individual as a part of family, society and community at
large. Morals help in shaping the character of an individual. They are prompted by motives as to right or wrong just or unjust,
fair and reasonable.
Morals and laws both are there to shape the rightful character of an individual but apart from this there is one more
important characteristic which influence individuals behavior that is the psychological element. An individuals character
may be of very high virtues due to the inherent moral principles and he/she may be a law abiding citizen or individual, but
many a times due to stress or some other reason which affects the mental state of individual may force him to act against the
established rule of law or against their moral principles. At this juncture of time the psychological element is very crucial in
deciding the conduct of a human being. Laws and morals both have certain similarities and distinction to a certain extent it is
accepted that laws are based on morals, at the same time it cannot be ignored that morals are not universal in nature but they
differ from society to society and place to place depending upon their customs, usages and mental attitude.
The three concepts of law, morality, and psychology are interrelated to each other and influence each other in
circumstances at a given point of time.

KEY WORDS-: Law, Morality, Psychology, Influence, Inter-Relationship.

INTRODUCTION -:
According to encyclopedia Britannica law
means, specialized form of social control familiar in
modern, secular, politically organized societies. Law is
an enactment or body of rules prescribed by the state.
According to Austin law is the command of the
sovereign.
Morals give the insight to individual to
distinguish between right and wrong. Morality cannot
be enforced by external authority; it is something which
is indivisible with inner conscience of individuals.
Obedience to law depends upon the active support of
the moral sentiments of the people. Laws which are
not supported by the moral conscience of the people
are liable to become meaningless and vague.
Law and morals both regulate the behavior of
individuals which shape their character and mental
attitude is placed above law and morals by an
individual because it is the psychological element
which is stronger when there is dilemma between
pleasures or happiness and pains of an individual. As
Bentham in his an introduction to the principles of
morals and legislation (1789), presented an ethical
theory that the actions are right as far as they produce
pleasure or prevent pain. According to him the purpose
of civil and criminal law is to maximize the amount of
pleasure and happiness which may be enjoyed by the
society
1

The core of natural theory is the proposition
that law and morals intersect. Prof. Oppenheim has
rightly remarked that a rule is a rule of morality if by
common consent of the community it applies to
conscience and to conscience only: whereas on the
other hand, a rule of law is a rule of law, if by common
consent of the community it will eventually be enforced
by external power. There is distinction between moral
and legal principles. Morals apply only to conscience
and rules create obligations
2
.However positivist school
would maintain absolute separation holding that there
is no relation between law &morality.
Law and morality does not coincide in
meaning, though there is and there should be a
necessary interdependence between them. Morals law
distinguishes from right and wrong human actions. It
aims at personal development. Human civilization is
not possible without law and morality standing in right
relationship.
In actual practice morals are not above law but
many a times owing to different circumstances
individual places morals above the law as in the noted
case of Aarushi-Hemraj murder
3
.in this case the
parents of the only daughter killed their daughter and
their servant for the objectionable behavior of both.
Ansari Zartab Jabeen Ansari Zartab Jabeen Ansari Zartab Jabeen Ansari Zartab Jabeen M.P.Law College, Aurangabad, Maharashtra

Law, Morality and Psychology
This case depicts as to how much morals are
important for individual in a particular society, that they
can take the extreme step of honor killing of their only
daughter. Here the morals have been placed above
law, but at the same time we cannot neglect that the
psychological element overpowered the Talwar couple
(Rajesh Talwar -Nupur Talwar) who flew in their
emotions and even forgot that they are morally also
not correct in punishing their daughter and servant for
the wrongful act by killing them. As it is neither lawfully
nor morally correct to punish the offenders/wrongdoers
by taking law in own hands.
A dominant principle underlying much of
modern popular psychology is that man identifies
himself in complete freedom; he is a subject of self
identification or self definition
4
.The purpose of morality
is to force the upright conscience of individual.
The laws to considerable extent are having its
source in morals. Though morals are not universal in
nature but they differ from society to society and
circumstances, but still they influence law and law
making process. Morals and religion are inextricably
joined, personal laws of various religions have
adherence to moral principles. The relationship
between religion and law is too intensive. Each religion
has a moral code according to which its followers
should act. Religion makes rule for human morals.
Relationship between religion and law is complex and
intensive. The values of religion are central elements
of values of society and principles that govern law.
Personal laws are having their source in their own
religions hence laws and morality are interrelated
when we speak of personal laws, at the same time
psychological element is having its own relevance.
People follow their personal laws not only because it is
morally correct or because it is lawful but because
psychologically they are attached to those principles.
Each personal law has provided certain guidelines for
the purpose of validity of marriage which is based on
the morals of a particular community. It may or may
not be right for the state to adopt one of the religions
as the truth, to found itself upon its doctrines, and to
deny to any of its citizens the liberty to practice any
other. If it does, it is logical that it should use the
secular laws wherever necessary to enforce. If it does
not, it is illogical that it should concern itself with
morals as such. If the State leave the matters of
religion to private judgment (personal laws), it should
logically leave matters of morals also
5
Hence in the
wake of secularism as practiced in India
implementation of uniform civil code under art-44 of
the Indian constitution is not possible because we
respect personal laws of different religions and decide
accordingly. Even if forced implementation is done it
will arouse the sentiments of people belonging to
different communities as in the case of Shah Bano
7
.
The moral law of a society is made up from the
ideas which members of that society have in common
about the right way to live. The regulation of marriage
laws has always been the matter of morals. As the
institution of marriage is closely related to society it
has deep relevance for moral concepts. As in India
bigamy is a crime under Hindu law
6
whereas it is not
so under Mohammedan law there even polygamy is
permitted under special circumstances and even
morally not wrong
7

Some people believe that morals should
be something private to the individual that he
determines for himself, and the civil law should consist
of regulations made for the good order and discipline
of society. Some branches of law have larger content
of morals like-: law of tort, law of contract, criminal
laws, civil laws etc.
Relationship between law of tort, morality and
psychological influence -:
Tort is a civil wrong which is not covered under
any other law in force. Negligence, defamation,
nuisance are some of the types of tort. In order to
constitute tort guilty intention or malice is very
important to be proved this itself suggest that law of
tort is having relevance to morals as well as
psychological element. All the principles of law of tort
are not having relevance to the concept of morality,
like the principle of vicarious liability.
The utmost that can be expected from the law
of tort is that no part of it ought to be positively
repugnant to the ordinary mans sense of moral justice,
because it is from that all laws draws its strength
8
.
Morality and law of contract-:
Literal meaning of the term of contract is the
agreement that is enforceable by law. Breach of
agreement leads towards penalties and liabilities this
suggest that it is having influence of moral value as not
to act against the principle of good faith. If the contract
is induced by misrepresentation, fraud then the
common law of contract will grant relief to the other
party as it mounts to lie and telling lie is also ethically
wrong. Thus it suggests that law of contract is having
adherence to morals. Apart from that wagering
agreements are not treated as valid contract at the
same time they are morally not correct
9
.Agreements in
restraint of trade, marriage are void agreements under
Indian contract act 1972
10
.

Jurisprudence and morality -:
Jurisprudence is the science of law. Natural
law theorist believes that jurisprudence is a science of
law that is based on moral principles. Whenever
judges decide the case they look into the existing rule
of law, if law is silent they look into customs if even the
custom fails they apply logic. These logical
conclusions are to be based on morals which include
justification, fairness and reasonableness. Apart from
this while delivering judgments the judges have to
follow the principle of natural justice i.e. audi altem
partem rule,-which refer to the rule that no party
should be left unheard and the second principle is that
no man should be the judge in his own case in order to
prevent bias. Thus from above we can conclude that
even jurisprudence is having relevance to moral
concept.

Morals and criminal law-:
Criminal laws are there to decide whether a
particular act amounts to crime or not and if it is a
penal offence punishments are prescribed according to
the intensity of the crime committed. This is done in
order to regulate the behavior of individuals. This is
also the purpose of morality; it regulates and shapes
the inherent behavior of individuals. Murder is an
offence under sec 302 of IPC 1980 and hence it is
punishable in form of death penalty or life
imprisonment. Under sec 376 rape is a crime against
humanity and the culprit is punished according to the
severity of the crime. Likewise there are number of
offence which are regarded as punishable and
punished accordingly. These all suggest that criminal
law is having its base in moral principles of the society.
Conclusion -:
There are various branches of law that are
having relevance with moral code of conduct. From
this we can conclude that morality and psychological
element play a significant role in the development of
law. According to natural law theorist also the
development of law came from the concept of natural
rights and duties but it is not accepted by positivist as
according to them law is having four elements such as
(i) general element (ii)element of command
(iii)absolute obligation (iv) legal sanction. For them law
is different from morality, by external marks that it is
expressed and enforced by power of state. It is not
found on morality.
11

Thus we can say that morals do play a
significant role in shaping the law of the society,
because laws mainly depend upon customs and
whatever customs are followed they are based on the
principles of morality so to a considerable extent the
view point of naturalist thinker is correct that laws are
having its source in morals, but it will be wrong to
mention that all laws are totally based on morals. If we
refer to international law it is universal in nature
whereas morals differ from society to society they are
not universal in character. Like Euthanasia i.e. mercy
killing is legalized in some countries whereas it is not
so in some countries like India. Similarly
homosexuality is recognized in some places whereas
not in other.
Laws which we have today are the outcome of
historical development and not solely the moral
principles. Still we can find that in India morals play
significant roles in shaping the laws of the country in
consonance with the psychological element which is
equally relevant in shaping the law. Thus we can say
that the concept of law, morality and psychology are
inter-related with each other and lays a considerable
impact on one another.

REFERENCES

1. Prof. (Dr) Ranbir Singh-V.C.NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY DELHI-Bentham Introduction to the principles of moral and legislation-
universal law publishing co. New Delhi India Pg.no-XX
2. Dr. S.K.Kapoor 16th edition INTERNATIONAL LAW AND HUMAN RIGHTS-Central law agency Pg.no 43
3. 15th may 2008 popularly known as Aarushi case
4. Article entitled law & morality-21-9-2011-14:28 webmaster -www.cormarburke.or.ke.
5. Patrick Devlin-the enforcement of morals- Oxford university press London oxford new York 1965-Pg.no.5
6. Ahmed khan vs Shah Bano 1985scr(3)844
7. Hindu marriage act 1955 sec 5&sec11
8. Verse 3 of Surah Nisa HOLY QURAN
9. Supra note 5 Pg.no.41
10. Sec 30 Indian contract act 1972
11. Ibid sec 27 and sec 26
Research Paper Law

INTRODUCTION:
Admittedly, lawyer has to play a multifaceted
role in trial of a case before the court of law. Every trail
begins with filing of case, as far as role of lawyer is
concerned, he/she has to give maximum satisfaction to
the client at different stages of case. One of the roles
of lawyer is to act as psychologist as he ought to give
utmost satisfaction to the client, for doing so, he acts
as psychologist. Therefore, he/she has to act upon in
tune with client, so that; lawyers response may give
satisfaction to the client. Hence, lawyer must study
expectations of client, for which psychological
assessment is essential. Upon meticulous observation
is has observed that, client does believe in such
lawyers, who respond confidently, and able enough to
make them positive about their case.
Role of lawyer in chamber to give
advice/consultation
Before filing case in court of law, interested
litigant has to approach to the lawyer. In pre-filing
meeting client has to share certain facts and available
evidences with the lawyer. In the course of discussion
lawyer has to assess set of mind of client and give
advice by referring to the relevant statutory provisions
of law befitting with the facts. In matrimonial cases, a
very sensitive situation is occurred because there is
question of life two individual and some times of their
issues. Hence role of lawyer is extremely crucial, he
has to tackle client by keeping balance with
psychological aspects.
A lawyer who is socially aware and spirited
can think in a way to have social harmony in the
society, may advice to the client to have a cordial
cohabitation instead of keeping fighting with each other
on very trifle issues. In such a cases, lawyer as
psychologist can help to settle the disputes between
the parties and assist to have cordial cohabitation
between the spouses. By having acted as psychologist
such results are possible.
A treatment based on psychological
assessment is varied from client to client namely male-
female, literate and illiterate, rich and poor, rural and
urban. A lawyer who believes that, mere dictum of
statute is not going to serve all purposes of society.
Neither law is solution per se of all crises of the
society, nor sole tool to provide harmony in society as
well as human life. Lawyer is a social engineer, not a
tradesman, in legal profession prime importance is
given to social harmony rather than individual gain.
Legal profession is a profession not trade or business.
Therefore, lawyer must first of all pay due attention
towards social interest and keeping in view this object
should advice to the client instead of running after
money.
As compare to the male clients, female clients are
required to be tackled psychologically, because female
are of flexible nature. On the basis of positive and
confident suggestions female client can be convinced
and instead of filing matter and contesting case
against husband they can be turned to be a very good
life partner of husband. They need a parental
treatment from the lawyer. In certain cases with the
help of lawyer, if he is enough good in assessing
psychology of client, disputes are resolved before filing
of cases, far early in the chamber in the course of
advice or consultation.
A special care is required to taken in case of
illiterate clients, as they have inferior complex of their
background. Therefore a lawyer who is able to
understand set of mind of such clients, and give them
realization by giving them a treatment of brotherhood
which they rarely get from white collar class, thereby
helps to assure them that he is going to save them
from all problems. Therefore a treatment of
brotherhood is required to be given by the lawyer to
the illiterate client in the course of advice. One
advocate who was so close to Pardhi Tribe that he
started to speak in their dialect, in result he used to be
the only advocate who used to appear on their behalf
in all the cases at different places.
As far as, literate and urban clients are concerned they
are comparatively forward than rural or illiterate clients.
Hence, such clients are to be satisfied with the help of
knowledge than other means.
Role of lawyer while filing of case
In case of dispute regarding protection legal
rights, case of civil nature is filed. In such cases lawyer
has to prepare draft on the basis of facts and
information given by the clients. In this process lawyer
has to give such confidence to the client that, he is one
among the persons from close circle, with whom any
information can be disclosed.
While drafting of case, information is to be
extracted from the clients, at this stage lawyer has to
act as psychologist. When he deals with female client,
she must be given confidence that, the information
disclosed would not be shared with anybody, nor her
identity would be disclosed. This precaution is taken
Pramod J. Herode Pramod J. Herode Pramod J. Herode Pramod J. Herode
Dr. Ambedkar College of Law, Aurangabad, Maharashtra
A Role of Lawyer in Trial: A Psychologist
because as compare to male, female are shy and
under courageous, therefore they avoid sharing
information or disclosing their identity.
As far as, illiterate or poor client are
concerned, a rapport of brotherhood is required to
established by the lawyer with such category of clients,
so that, they may feel free and share information and
facts. Such psychological understanding must be had
to the lawyer for becoming a successful lawyer.
Literate and rich clients are comparatively
confident than other category of clients, for tackling
them, lawyer ought to have satisfied by them in such a
way to assure that, he is man acquainted with law and
procedure. However, the success of case is fully
depending upon the disclosure of facts and information
and adducing cogent and corroborative evidence by
them.
Such psychological understanding ought to
have to the lawyer while dealing with clients from
different background, so as to become successful in
profession. Lawyer must not deal to all types of clients
in stereotype way of tackling.
Role of lawyer after filing of case
After filing of case till its final disposal of, it
requires to journey through different stages, at every
stage lawyer ought to play a pivotal role. One amongst
the other, recording of evidence is required to use of
skill of lawyer. At this stage necessity of utilization of
psychological skill is occurred.
Of course, when matter is hotly contesting,
role of lawyer as psychologist comes into picture. It is
pertinent to note that, in the course of cross
examination, cross questions are asked to the witness
standing in the witness box. While asking cross
questions, lawyer aims at to extract favorable answers.
In order to get expectations fulfilled, empathy for time
being is to establish that would sufficiently give
assurance that, this lawyer is not his opponent nor
reply would cause any harm. Indeed, such tactics are
varied from client to client, and situation to situation.
For instance, in trial of rape, a prosecutrix (victim of
offence) need special sort of moral support, because,
she has to disclose information which she usually
cannot share with stranger.
In case of disputes regarding matrimonial
disputes, amicable settlement of matters is preferred.
Therefore, by keeping in view the possible settlement
of disputes, in family courts, concept of marriage
councilor is adopted. After filing of matter pertaining to
matrimonial relationship, it is referred to the marriage
councilor for amicable settlement. The marriage
councilor arranges independent seating with either of
the spouse individually or in common. The marriage
councilor also has a dialogue with the advocates of
respective parties, thereby seeks helps of the lawyers
to tackle the issue and bring both the parties on
amicable settlement of the disputes.
At the time of recording evidence namely chief
examination, cross examination a pivotal role as
psychologist is being played by the lawyer. At this
particular stage of case irrespective of the nature of
the case, whether civil or criminal. Unless empathy is
not established no expected favorable reply is gained
by the advocate. On the basis of my own experience
as a lawyer I say that, in the course of putting forth
cross questions, I preferred to ask series of questions
based upon the facts happened so that witness in the
witness box should get in tune with series of facts
occurred, and must think adverse. In result I could get
all admissions which were favorable to me and
adverse to the witness. The reason behind was
psychological understanding of witness.
Narratives of experience in matrimonial matter
A case was pertaining to matrimonial relations
between the spouses. There was no cohabitation
between them on the count of having differences of
nature. The wife was staying away from the husband,
as she got a job, but husband has an objection to such
attitude saying that she did get a job without his
consent. This has resulted into filing of multiple cases
against each other. Husband initially preferred to file
case for restitution of conjugal rights, which was
decreed by the court by placing reliance on the
evidence and directed to the wife cohabit with
husband. But on one or the other reason she failed to
comply with the directions of the court.
Due failure to adhere to the directions of the
court, the husband preferred to file case for divorce, as
provided in law. But at the stage of evidence, wife
came with a plea to have prepared to cohabit with
husband, to which husband was reluctant, saying that,
her statement or attitude is not believable, and for this
she has lost opportunity. The lawyer of husband also
tried to convince him to be ready to cohabit with wife,
but husband was reluctant by showing her own
previous deeds. Court and lawyer were kin in
convincing to husband to have cohabitation, but he
was not ready. Consequently he changed the lawyer,
and engaged such lawyer who advised him to get the
matter emphasized and pray for decree only.
Conclusion
In the course of conducting cases of all kinds,
lawyer ought to act as a psychologist. He has to adopt
different modalities, with changed type of clients. He
has to keep strict adherence to the set of mind and
understanding of the client, while tackling with them.
The background of clients from which he/she come
must have to be paid due consideration, so that, way
of dealing with client can be changed which would be
befitting to achieve the ultimate goal in filing of cases
and becoming successful lawyer, a social engineer
rather than trader or businessman.

Research Paper Law

In the words of Justice P.N. Bhagwati if, the
law fails to respond to the needs of changing society,
then either it will stifle the growth of the society and
choke its progress or if the society is vigorous enough,
it will cast away the law which stands in the way of its
growth. Law must therefore constantly be on the move
adapting itself to the fast changing society and not lag
behind
1

Introduction:
There are two sides of each coin; similarly,
each act of any person is also, either good or bad. And
it is the rule, since existence of the society was
customarily based on the morals. But, as soon as
society is replaced by the State, morality too gets
replaced by the law. If, we want to change any existing
custom or behavior in society, it should be changed by
the instrument of law only, otherwise not.
The prime function of legislators is to enact the
laws, according to the desire of the society. Whenever
any question arises in court of law, regarding the
validity of that law if court finds that constitutional,
moral, and just, then it holds it valid, but if not so, then
declares it invalid and unconstitutional.
Where any law is set by the society in the form
of enactment or custom, then, it is said that society has
changed the law. On the other hand, if such law is
immoral, unjust and unconstitutional then society has
to be changed according to the valid law.
2

The importance of Morals in Law making:
What law is to the State, similarly morals are
to the society. But, it cannot be denied that morals
have lost and been transformed by law. In practical
life, especially in villages which were the bundle of
morals, even after the independence, new generations
were following the instructions of their parents and
elder persons of the village. Due to this crimes were
nominal in the villages. During that period the person
who stayed in the urban were categorized has less
moral and it was said that in cities, the persons did not
know their neighbours and never asked their welfares
but limited themselves to earning the monies. Now, the
morality is transferred from village to cities. Presently,
there is no meaning of the moral, everyone is bothered
about their legal rights, few think about their moral
duties.
Blackstone, he defines, it as
Law is a rule of conduct, prescribed by the
supreme power in the State, commanding which is
right and prohibiting what is wrong. Jurisprudentially,
law consists of rules prescribed by society for the
governance of human conduct.
General Welfare and the Law:
Law not only lays down the norms, which are
acceptable to a given society; it also lays down the
norms, which the society should adopt in the interests
of its own welfare. The rules or code of conduct, which
a society develops by experience, shapes into law for
the sake of uniformity, consistency, permanence and
sanction. An acceptable norm thus becomes law.
The law exists to serve the needs of the
society, which is governed by it. If the law is to play its
allotted role of serving the needs of the society, it must
reflect the ideas and ideologies of the society. It must
keep time with the heartbeats of the society and with
the needs and aspirations of the people.
The Constitution precedents cannot be
permitted to be transformed into weapons for defeating
the hopes and aspirations of our teeming millions, half-
clad, half-starved, half-educated. These hopes and
aspirations representing the will of the people can only
become articulate through the voice of the elected
representatives. If they fail the people, the nation must
face the death and destruction.
3
It clearly indicates the
morals of the elected representative should be very
high to strive for the general well being and welfare as
they are answerable to the masses who has given
them the mandate.
The Constitution, unlike other Acts, is intended
to provide an enduring paramount law and a basic
design of the structure and power of the State and
rights and duties of the citizens to serve the society
through a long lapse of ages.
Thus, law should sub serve social purpose. A
judge must be a jurist endowed with the legislators
Patil Kailash Laxman Patil Kailash Laxman Patil Kailash Laxman Patil Kailash Laxman
Research Scholar, North Maharashtra University, Jalgaon,
Maharashtra
Morality and Human Psychology with reference to the
Law of the Land
wisdom, historians search for truth, prophets vision,
and capacity to respond to the needs of the present,
resilience to cope with the demands of the future and
to decide objectively disengaging himself/herself from
every personal influence or predilections. Therefore,
the judge should adopt purposive interpretation of the
dynamic concepts of the Constitution and the Act with
its interpretative armory to articulate the felt
necessities of the time. The judge must also bear in
mind that social legislation is not a document for
fastidious dialects, but a means of ordering the life of
the people. To construe law, one must enter into its
spirit, its setting and history. Law should be capable of
expanding freedoms of the people and the legal order
can, weighed with utmost equal care, be made to
provide the underpinning of the highly inequitable
social order.
4

Conclusion:
We learn Morals right from the day when we
started to talk. In school there is one subject on moral
science which teaches the students to distinguish what
is right and what is wrong. It teaches how to lead a
chaste and good life and above all to love and respect
our Nation and abide by its Laws and regulations.
Therefore in my opinion law and morality along with
the psychology of human nature are related to each
other and together they create a better society.
We are always thought to obey the laws and
respect the morals, if laws are not obeyed then the
State punishes by way of fine or imprisonment
whereas if morals are broken then the society ought to
punish the wrongdoer by banishing him and breaking
all sorts of social relations with him. One cannot afford
to live without the society as man is a social being and
all his needs are satisfied in the society only and
without it one cannot imagine life.
It is always said that Morals play an important role in
creating discipline and order in the society. They are
just like the spinal cord on which the society stands
firmly and is able to fight the bad spirit which tries to
demoralize the society.

REFERENCES

1. Law and Social Transformation, Malik & Raval, Pg. 1, Allahabad Law Agency, First Edn. 2007.
2. Law and Social Transformation, Malik & Raval, Allahabad Law Agency, First Edn 2007.
3. Justice Chandrachud, in Kesavananda Bharati V. State of Kerala, AIR 1973 SC 1461.
4. State of Karnataka v. Appa Balu, (1995) Supp. 4 SCC 469.

Research Paper Law

INTRODUCTION:
One organ of the State is not expected to interfere
into other organ of the State. Each organ should perform its
function within its own parameter. It is found that when
legislators fails to discharge its function effectively in that
circumstances in many occasion the judiciary has tried to put
its leg into shoes of legislator. It means the role of judiciary in
last two three decade has widened from its conventional role
to just interpret the laws. This judicial activism played very
important role for many poor and needy people. In fact the
court makes an attempt to cross the border line laid down by
the constitution to mitigate the ends of justice. This has all
happened because of activist psychology of courts. Even
where the court is concern with legislation, the legislator
merely gives the dry Skelton of the law, but to fill-up its gaps
with flesh and blood is the function of judge and it is there
that he takes part in the process of creation. The judge
moulds and develops the law and makes it accordance with
justice.
1

DEFINITION:
According to Collins English Dictionary activism is
a policy of taking direct and often militant action to achieve
an end especially a political or social one. Websters new
twentieth century dictionary defines activism as the doctrine
or policy of or doing things with decision. another dictionary
meaning is policy of vigorous action.
In the light of these meaning judicial activism would
denote a judiciary in which judges discharge their function in
a vigorous and decisive manner to achieve an end. The end
is dispensing justice with a view to righting wrings or
fashioning remedies where none exist.
2

POSITIVE ATTITUDE AND PSYCHOLOGY OF JUDICIARY
IN POST EMERGENCY PERIOD:
Most important power is vested with the judiciary
because besides interpreting the law they maintain
constitutional supremacy in the country, as these three
organs derives its power through constitution and conflicts of
transgression of power by either of the organ of government
or interference is bound to be there. In these circumstances
the role of court is to act as an impartial umpire and to
maintain constitutionalism in the country which itself makes
the judicature most authority vested center in the democracy.
Legal scholars are of the opinion that in India
activism against judicial passivism emerged during post
emergency period. The role of higher judiciary particularly
after this period has reflected a pragmatic and practical
approach instead of traditional and technical one. The
technicality has been bypassed for attending ends of
constitutional objectives. The post emergency period inspired
judiciary to look constitution beyond catalogue of rules. The
court in India tried to find out new ways and means for
access to justice for disabled, economical poor and socially
deprived sections of society. It is this dynamic mode which
accepted by judiciary become a reason to have greater faith
in this organ of governments and to enhance its credibility in
all masses. This has of course happened because of positive
attitude and psychology of judiciary. The transformation had
to be reflected in the justice process avoiding the established
procedural formalities. This is very necessary to reach the
justice to the door of unapproachable people of our society.
This role has been properly discharged by the court resulting
dreams in to reality and not with intent or psychology to
establish judicial governance in the country.
USE OF PUBLIC INTEREST LITIGATION TO MITIGATE
ENDS OF JUSTICE:
The supreme court of India through activist
approach evolved the concept of public interest litigation
diluting the concept of Locus Standi So that anyone could
able to approach the court. The public interest litigation could
evolve because of activist approach of the court which
abstained from easier technical and rigid format of court
room. According to justice Bhagawati Supreme Court has
developed strategy of public interest litigation and made it
possible for the disadvantaged to be brought before the
courts. The supreme court in last few years through intense
judicial activism, become a symbol of hope for the people in
India. It has augmented its moral authority and acquired a
new credibility with the people through judicial activism and
judicial creativity. PIL has been answering many of the
problems thrown up by formal legal system in providing
access to justice. Any letter even a telegram addressed to
the court serves the purpose.
3

The supreme court of India has developed an
innovative jurisprudence through Art 21 of the constitution.
Art.21 of our constitution furnished a platform for innovation
ideas to be suited within constitutional parameter for active
judiciary in India. In Maneka Gandhi v. Union of india
4
the
supreme court has not only overruled Gopalans case but
has widened the scope of personal liberty considerably the
observation of Justice Bhagwati that the expression
personal liberty in Art.21 is of widest amplitude and it cover
a verity of rights which go to constitute the personal liberty of
man and some of them have raised to the status of distinct
fundamental rights and gives additional protection under art.
19.in Maneka Gandhis case court gives new dimension to
Art.21. It held that right to live is not merely confined to
physical existence but it include within its ambit right to life of
human dignity.
The five judges bench of the Supreme Court in
Olegs Telis v.Bombay Municipal Corporation
5
held that right
to life guaranteed under Art. 21 includes right to means of
livelihood. Similarly in Asiad case
6
the Supreme Court held
that non enforcement of provision of labour laws e.g.
minimum wages Act by the state authority is violation of
workers right to live with human dignity enriched in article 21
of the constitution. The real constitutional objectives has
been tried to achieve In Bandua Mukti Morcha v. Union of
Dr. D. M. Jadhav Dr. D. M. Jadhav Dr. D. M. Jadhav Dr. D. M. Jadhav
V.N. patil law college, N-3, CIDCO, Aurangabad, Maharashtra
Judicial Activism Social and Psychological
Dimensions of Justice
India
7
Wherein the supreme court has considered right to life
means right to live with human dignity free from exploitation.
OPTIMISTIC PSYCHOLOGY IN COMPENSATORY
JURISPRUDENCE:
While evolving a jurisprudence of various rights the
Supreme Court has also tried to merge various human rights
in Art. 21 of the constitution and proved that the courts are
really custodian of rights of the citizen of this country which
reflects in their compensatory jurisprudence evolved through
positive psychology. In Nilambati Behara v. State of Orissa
8

the court has focused on very crucial issue of custodial
torture and held it as worst kind of crime in civilized society.
The court awarded Rs.1,50,000/- compensation to the
petitioner in the present case.
The court has dealt with once again issue of
custodial death in a deep detail in D.S. Basu v. State of West
Bengal.
9
The court observed that rights inherent under Art 21
and 22 (1) of the constitution of India required to be jealously
and scrupulously protected. The court laid down
requirements to be followed in cases of arrest and detention.
The court held that any form of torture or cruel, inhuman or
degrading treatment, would fall within the inhibition of Art.21
of constitution whether it occurred during investigation
interrogation or otherwise the court held that precious right
guaranteed under Art. 21 of the constitution could not be
denied to convicts, under trail, determines and other
prisoners in custody. Except according to procedure
established by law. In Rudal Shah v State of Bihar
10
the
court directed government of Bihar to pay compensation of
Rs 30,000 to Rudal shah who had to retain in jail for 14
years because of the irresponsible behavior of state
government officers even after his acquittal.
Thus the Supreme Court while exercising its writ
jurisdiction has not exercised the same only for enforcement
of fundamental rights but on many occasions the court has
given the relief in appropriate and fit circumstances. This has
increased a creditability of this powerful institution in the
mind of commoners, illiterates and poor people in all sector
of our society. The Supreme Court while dealing with the
cases of custodial torture evolved compensatory
jurisprudence and granted compensation to the victims of
state violence. In People Union for Democratic Rights v.
Police Commission Delhi Head Quarter
11
a labour was taken
to the police station for doing some work. He was severely
beaten when he demanded wages and ultimately
succumbed to injuries. It was held that the state was liable to
pay compensation and accordingly directed the government
to pay Rs. 75000/- as compensation to the family of
deceased. In Hussainara khatun v. Home Secretary State of
Bihar
12
the Supreme Court held that free legal aid is
fundamental right within Art 21 of the constitution.
In Vishakha v. State of Rajasthan
13
in the absence
of enacted law to provide for effective enforcement of basic
human right of gender equality and guarantee against sexual
harassment and abuse more particularly against sexual
harassment at work places, the supreme court laid down
certain guidelines to be observed at all work places or other
institutions until legislation is enacted for this purpose.
There are many social issues or area which remained
untouched by our legislatures where judiciary through its
activist approach travels in such areas like education shelter,
pollution free environment and many other areas. The
Supreme Court has made it clear that right to life under Art.
21 includes right to pollution free air and water.
14

In Gurav Jain v. Union of India
15
Supreme court has issued
several direction for rescue and rehabilitation of child
prostitutes and children of fallen women. The court has
observed that it is duty of state and all voluntary non-
governmental organizations and public spirited person to
come in to their aid to retrieve such women from prostitution
and rehabilitate them with helping hand to lead a life of
dignity of person, self-employment through provisions of
education, financial support so as to give them real status in
the society.
CONCLUSION:
The activist approach of judiciary has helped to
solve many social issues which are blocked because of
nonexistence of statutory provision. The supreme court of
India has utilized many potent provisions of our constitution
to mitigate the ends of justice. It is due to activist approach
and pragmatic psychology of court only the Art 21 of the
constitution of India got many dimensions.
Not only social issues but also issues of daily
difficulties of commoners have been considered in public
interest litigation. The constitutional provisions have been
utilized at fullest extent by interpreting these provisions for
social good.
The judicial activism reflected from the post
emergency era is the result of pragmatic psychology and
practical approach of judiciary in India. Without their liberal
and positive interpretation access to justice would not be a
reality for millions of people

REFERENCES

1. M.P.Tondon,Jurisprudence Allhabad law agency, 1994, p. 433.
2. Soli J. Sorabjee, Judicial Activism, Boon or Bane, in Nanai Palkhivala memorial Law Lecture , Bombay 11.1.2008. Also see (2008) 3 SCCP. 25.
3. Justice S.B.sinha, Judicial Independence Fiscal Autonomy and accountability Nyaya Deep, Vol.VII, Issue-I.2006, p. 37, 38.
4. AIR 1978 SC 597.
5. AIR 1986 SC 180
6. People Union of democratic right v. union of India AIR 1982 SC 1473.
7. AIR 1984 SC 802.
8. 1993 CrL.J. 2899, 1993 (2) SCC 746.
9. AIR 1997 SC 610.
10. (1983) 4 SCC
11. (1989) 4 SCC 730
12. AIR1979 SC 1377
13. AIR 1997 SC 3011
14. Subhash kumar v.state of BiharAIR 1997 SC 420
15. AIR 1997 SC 3021.
Research Paper Law

I ntroducti on:
Policy makers, not only in India, but more or less
everywhere in the world have focused on psychological
perspective. This perspective can be instrumental in
formulating social policy which will eventually lead to national
development.
Policy making involves many spectrums related to
health and well-being, education, social justice, social
integration, environment and work organizations, besides
focusing on some general issues relating to the logic of
framing legislations.
In democratic form of government, the role of government,
the role of legislature as the prime policy making body is
significant.
The Judiciary is also regarded as an important
agency in the policy making process. In United States of
America and India, constitutions entitle the Supreme Court to
exercise the judicial review. Policies in many areas have
been influenced by judicial decisions.
Hi stori cal Overvi ew: Countries like India, which
attained independence during or after the II world war,
realized the concern of institutionalization of human rights in
ensuring humane life to every inhabitant. The oppressive
regime during colonial period played an instrumental role in
expressing the value of conferring inviolable stature to
interest, indispensable for avoiding indignation, deprivation
and denial from the hand of ruler.
India was amongst the countries valued the
importance of human rights and psychology in the
governance of the country. The belief of ensuring a means of
dignified life left the imprint on the mind of the freedom
fighters.
Demand for life with humane existence played
significant role in leading the movement.
1
Therefore, it
guaranteed in making India a free country not only in terms
of institutions but also of dignified life and existence of its
people. The constitution had resolved to make India into a
sovereign, secular and democratic republic, ensuring its all
citizens the social, economic and political justice; liberty of
thought, expression, faith and worship; equality of status and
opportunity; and fraternity assuring dignity of the individual.
2

It was a momentous political decision for constitutionalism
and human rights in history.
Psychol ogi cal outl ook behi nd exi sti ng l aws i n
I ndi a:
Constitution of India: - The psychological standpoint
in the Indian Constitution can be best explained in the words
of Dr. Ambedkar :
3

Political democracy cannot last unless there lies at the
base of its social democracy. What does social democracy
means? It means a way of life which recognizes liberty,
equality and fraternity which are not to be treated as
separate items in a trinity. They form a union trinity in the
sense that to divorce one from the other is to defeat the very
purpose of democracy. Liberty cannot be divorced from
equality, equality cannot be divorced from liberty. Nor can
liberty and equality be divorced from fraternity.
The above view lays emphasis on the liberty of an
individual and equality of his social status in the society
forms the bedrock of a healthy nation. Liberty, as explained
from the utilitarian aspect, should be coupled with social
restraint and subordinated to the liberty of the greatest
number for common happiness.
4

Landmark judgments, like in the case of Maneka Gandhi
5

redefined the meaning of liberty to its broadest possible limit,
giving a new dimension to the psychological definition to the
dignity of an individual. In the case of Nergesh Mirza,
equality was given new edge barring the vile of
discrimination on the grounds of gender. Again in the case of
Vishakha
6
, the Supreme Court has laid down exhaustive
guidelines to prevent sexual harassment of working women
in places of their work.
In Kharak Singh v. State of U.P.,
7
it was held that the
expression life was not limited to bodily restraint or
confinement to prison only but something more than mere
animal existence. Similarly, in Surjit Singh Thind v. Kanwaljit
Kaur
8
the court held that allowing medical examination of a
woman for her virginity amounts to violation of her right to
privacy and personal liberty enshrined under Article 21 of the
Constitution.
Keeping in view of all the above said cases we are
able to fathom the depth of human psychology applied in
giving these judgments.
Indian Contract Act, 1872:
It lays down certain conditions to enter into a
contract for persons like-
i) a minor i.e. below the age of 18yrs
9
cannot be held
competent to be a party to a contract.
ii) An agreement by minor is void in the eyes of law and
the Court will never direct any action towards him to
make him liable for the damages,
iii) The agreement of a person of unsound mind is
absolutely void.
10

iv) According to section 14 of Indian Contract Act, 1872,
free consent is an essential requirement of a contract.
Consent is an English concept which states when two
or more person agrees upon same thing in the same
sense, they are said to consent, Consensus ad
idem means the meeting of mind.
v) Section 14 defines free consent in a negative form.
Consent is said to be free when it is not caused by-
i) Coercion, sec.15.,
ii) Undue influence, sec. 16.
iii) Misrepresentation, sec. 18.
iv) Mistake e i.e. consent caused by mistake makes the
agreement void,

Shirin Syed Ahmed Hussain Shirin Syed Ahmed Hussain Shirin Syed Ahmed Hussain Shirin Syed Ahmed Hussain V.N. Patil Law College, Aurangabad, Maharashtra.
The Importance of Psychology in Framing of Law
Family Laws: There are numerous instances in various
provisions of Hindu Marriage Act, Mohammedan Laws,
Special Marriages Act, Guardian ship Act, etc., where the
psychological state of mind is of significant consideration
such as;
i) The marriageable age of both boy and girl plays an
important role while entering into marriage, considering
the physical as well as psychological development of the
human mind, that can evolve only with age.
Many provisions of family laws are closely related to the
age factor.
ii) In the case of divorce also, the state of mind of the
husband and wife, is of prime consideration.
iii) For the guardianship of a child the mental and
psychological state of the guardian is considered, which
is necessary for an efficient upbringing of the child.
Jurisprudence:
Various theories of punishment such as :
i) Deterrent theory-it is based on the theory ,it believes that
the object of punishment is not only to prevent the
wrongdoer from doing a wrong second time but also to make
him an example to others having criminal tendencies.eg.
Rigorous imprisonment, penalty, capital punishment, etc.
ii) Reformative theory: according to this theory; the crime
should be put to an end and not the criminal , therefore it
advocates the idea of reforming the wrongdoer. Eg. Remand
homes, various activities carried out in prisons like
encouragement for education, learning different handicrafts,
yoga, meditation,etc.
iii) Preventive theory: its main objective is preventive or
disabling. Such as cancellation of the driving license of a
person. as he has no license, he is prevented from driving.
iv) Retributive theory: the victim or the wronged to whom
the wrong was committed is allowed to have his revenge
against the wrongdoer. The principle of an eye for an eye,
a tooth for a tooth was recognized and followed.
v) Compensation theory: in this theory the contention is
that the mainspring of crime is greed and if the offender is
made to return the ill-gotten benefits of the crime, the spring
of criminality would eventually dry up.eg. Penalty, fine,etc.,
Considering at the above theories of punishment,
one can easily conceive the underlying psychological
treatment involved while punishing the wrongdoer.
Law of Crimes: Indian Penal Code, 1860, explains the
psychological aspect related in committing crime by a Latin
maxim:`` Actus Non Facit Reum, Nisi Men Sit Rea, which
means there can be no crime without guilty mind. To make a
person criminally liable, it must be proved that the conduct
was accompanied by a legally blameworthy attitude of mind.
Means Rea explains the mental element as a main
component of crime. It is a wider concept including intention,
motive, knowledge, recklessness and negligence ,etc., which
are often used to indicate the different possible mental
attitudes constituting actus reus i.e. the physical element of
a particular crime.
Suggesti ons:
As we have seen and discussed various provisions
relating to the psychological characteristics playing a vital
role in law making. No doubt, the laws framed are very
extensive and elaborative in its approach keeping in mind the
psychology and well-being of an individual, but there is a
need to analyze the other side of the coin, i.e., the possibility
of misuse of the law.
This misuse which ultimately results in miscarriage of
justice is very much in debate because of some anti-social
elements manipulating laws in order to take revenge or settle
personal scores. Women settling personal enmity with her in-
laws by filing a complaint under sec.498-A of IPC, which is a
stringent provision dealing with the crimes of dowry deaths,
but many instances of its misuse have come up in recent
times. Another example , giving more edge to the powers of
police officers in dealing with terrorism has resulted in large
number of fake encounters of innocent persons has put the
police in the place of a terrorist and is attracting international
attention.
More recent example is the formulating of new strict
anti-rape laws enacted in the wake of the recent Delhi gang
rape, has given rise to false complaints of sexual assaults
under these provisions in order to settle other disputes. In
fact, this misuse of anti-rape law has put a question mark
over employing women by the employers as there are
chances of the women filing a sexual assault case against
any male colleague or her boss at the drop of the hat.
Further, it can be said that it is worrying many social thinkers
that the very foundation of womens involvement in the socio-
economic level will be endangered by this negative view that
is being gradually taking shape among the society. The laws
which were framed for the security and protection of women
will prove fatal for them with its rampant misuse. This abuse
of laws in the present scenario defeats the very purpose of
its enactment.
Concl usi on: There is a need for proper application
psychology, not only in framing of law but due care should be
taken with the help of experts in the field of psychology while
enacting and executing it in order to prevent miscarriage of
justice. Finally, I will conclude with a thought , very relevant
in this context a hundred guilty can escape, but not a
single innocent should be punished.

REFERENCES

1. (The Indian National Congress adopted a resolution under the title of Fundamental Rights and Duties and Economic Programme in its sessi on
held at Calcutta on April 1, 1933. There were all 17 articles in this resolution divided into four heads namely Fundamental Rights and Duties,
Labour, Taxation and Expenditure and Economic and Social Programme.) Makardan, K.C., Directive Principles of State Policy in the Indian
Constitution, ABS Publications, Jalandhar, 1987.
2. The Preambl e of the Indian Constitution,1950
3. Dr.Ambedkar in his concluding speech i n the Constituent Assembly:
4. S.S. Bola v. B.D. Sardana, (1997)8 SCC 522
5. AIR 1978 SC 597 at p. 619.
6. AIR 1997 SC 3014
7. AIR 1963 SC 1295
8. AIR 2003 P&H 353 See Also Sharda v. Dharmpal, 2003 AIR SCW 1950.
9. Section 3, Indian Majority Act.
10. Section 12 gives the test of competency, which defines the person of sound mind.
Research Paper Law

Introduction:
Advocates are social engineers, they mould
and design the society. It is said that the Doctors give
life but an Advocate strives for the right to life of many.
As psychologists try to understand the mental and
emotional condition of the patients by giving them such
treatment, which they happily take and dont even
come to know, that they are being treated, similarly,
there are some advocates who also believe in giving
such advice and consultation to the client, which will
not only solve the grievances but also save them from
the harassment of taking the matter to the Court of
Law and waiting for justice for years to come. In
todays, existing circumstances Advocates roles have
changed and instead of arguing the matter before the
court of law they try to go for a compromise, which
proves more fruitful for the parties. In doing this, they
are acting as Psychologists and curing their patients
called clients by solving their grievances amicably.
On the other hand our courts are so much
overburdened with litigations that many times it is
reported that Courts should function in shifts to bring
down the pendency of litigations and every day
thousands of new cases are filed which is adding to
the mountain of pending litigation.
Alternate Dispute Resolution System serve as
an alternative to settling disputes through the
alternative judicial system, other than the regular
system of court. Typically, in ADR, disputes are settled
in a quick and cost-effective manner as the procedure
followed is non-formal without strict adherence to
procedural aspects.
Mahatma Gandhi has said that I had learnt
the true practice of law. I had learnt to find out the
better side of human nature, and to enter mens
hearts. I realized that the true function of a lawyer was
to unite parties driven as under. The lesson was so
indelibly burnt unto me that the large part of my time,
during the 20 years of my practice as a lawyer, was
occupied in bringing about private compromises of
hundreds of cases. I lost noting, thereby not even
money, certainly not my soul.
1

There are several hurdles and barriers in the
way of getting justice by common man in the courts
due to cost factor. The time consumed in litigation is
yet another factor since there is no speedy
amelioration of grievances. Coupled with delay in
disposal of cases, mounting arrears at all levels in
judicial courts has virtually reached a point that the
ordinary citizen starts feeling that justice is a myth or
a fiction.
2

Justice Krishna Iyer has observed that our
judicial system is terribly cumbersome expensively
dilatory and cumulatively disastrous. The poor cannot
reach the court because of heavy court fee and other
expenditure, the mystique of legal procedure. The
hierarchy of courts, with appeals. Puts legal justice
beyond the reach of the poor.
3

Needs for alternatives to the formal legal system:
The need for alternatives to the formal legal
system has engaged the attention of the legal
fraternity, comprising judges, lawyers and law
researchers for several decades now. This has for long
been seen as integral to the process of judicial reform
and as signifying the access-to-justice. Settlement of
disputes through arbitration, conciliation, mediation or
by an impartial third party is also a component of ADR.
Today the business community prefers ADR because
the time and cost implications of ADR far outweigh that
of settling disputes through the traditional court based
system.
4

What is Conciliation:
According to the dictionary meaning,
conciliator is one who brings opponents into harmony,
or one who conciliates the parties (act of reconciling).
In other words, conciliation means bringing of
opposing parties or individuals into harmony.
Appointment of Conciliators:
Generally, there shall be one conciliator to
conciliate the matter but, if there is an agreement
between the parties, there may be two or three
conciliators. Where there is more than one conciliator,
they ought, as a general rule, to act jointly. (Section
63)
5

Submission of statement to conciliator:
After appointment as conciliator, he may
request each party to submit him a brief written
statement describing the general nature of the dispute
and the points at issue. Copy of the statement shall be
sent to other party. The conciliator is not bound by the
Civil Procedure Code. 1908 or the Indian Evidence
Act. 1972.
Role of Conciliator in the Conciliation proceeding:
Duties and functions of Conciliation Officer are
mainly described by Section 67 of the Act. There is no
bar on the power and duties of the Conciliation Officer.
According to this section the role of Conciliator is as
follows;
Sabhia Kulsum Y. Shaikh Sabhia Kulsum Y. Shaikh Sabhia Kulsum Y. Shaikh Sabhia Kulsum Y. Shaikh
V.N. Patil Law College, Aurangabad, Maharashtra.
Role of Advocates as Psychologists in
Conciliation Proceedings
(a) The conciliator shall assist the parties in an
independent and impartial manner in their
attempt to reach an amicable settlement of
their dispute.
(b) The conciliator shall be guided by the
principles of objectivity, fairness and justice,
giving conciliation to, among other things, the
right and the obligation of the parties, the
usages of the trade concerned and the
circumstances surrounding the dispute
including any previous business practices
between the parties.
(c) The conciliator may conduct the conciliation
proceedings in such a manner as he considers
appropriate, taking into account, the
circumstance of the case, the wishes the
parties may express, including any request by
a party that the conciliator hear oral
statements and the need for a speedy
statement of the dispute.
(d) The conciliator may at any stage of the
conciliation proceedings, make proposals for a
statement of the dispute, such proposal need
not be in writing and need not be accompanied
by a statement of the reasons therefore.
Communication between conciliator and parties:
It provides that the conciliator may invite the
parties to meet him or may communicate with them
orally or in writing. He may meet or communicate with
the parties together or with each of them separately.
Discloser of information:
When the conciliator receives factual
information concerning the dispute from the party, he
shall disclose the substance of that information to
other party in order that, the other party may have
opportunity to present any explanation that he
considers appropriate. But, when a party gives any
information to the conciliator subject to a specific
condition that it be kept confidential, the conciliator
shall not disclose that information to the other party.
There should be co-operation of the parties with
conciliator.
Advantages:
The advice of Abraham Lincon bears repetition. He
said;
Discourage litigation: persuade your
neighbours to compromise whenever you can, point
out to them how the nominal winner is often the loser
in fees, expense and waste of time.
1) Reduces the litigations in the court: No
doubt conciliation reduces the number of case
in the regular courts. In those case where the
decision of the conciliator is agreed to by both
the parties, then there is no chance to go in
the routine courts, but seems to be finally
disposed.
2) No chance to fabricate the evidence: The
parties themselves bring their grievances to
the conciliator and so there is no chance to
fabricate the evidence.
3) Parties are happy with the decision: When
parties arrive at a compromise there is very
little bitterness left in their minds and this is the
most significant achievement of the
conciliation. Whereas in the court decision,
instead of friends they become hard enemies.
Conclusion:
As a psychologist can read the minds of
Patients similarly Advocates can understand the minds
of their clients while discussing their case with them. If
the Advocate tries in a positive manner many cases
can be solved without the matter being actually take to
the court of Law.
In Family Courts such conciliation by the
Advocate is very much required in todays
circumstances wherein cases of matrimonial disputes
have increased at large and the parties make the
things more worst by taking it to the court of law.
Especially in Family disputes where the issues are
very delicate and slightest of wrong interpretation of
the facts leads divorce or judicial separation. But if the
Advocates understand the psychology of their
problems and make them understand the aftermaths of
divorce, definitely they will think once more to keep up
their marital tie.
Few days before the Family Court at Aurangabad
felicitated twenty couples who were living happily after
their disputes were amicably settled by the
Conciliators. Our society aims at preserving the marital
ties rather than ending it up in a court case and this
aim is fulfilled by the councilors

REFERENCES

1. Mahatma Gandhi Law and Lawyer.
2. V.S. Dave, An Alternative Judicial System. 1993.
3. V.R. Krishna Iyer, Indian Social Justice, 1980.
4. Law and Social Transformation, Malik & Raval, Pg. 386, Allahabad Law Agency, First Edn. 2007.
5. Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996.
Research Paper Law

1. Introduction:
Rule of Law is the heart and Justice is
the soul of Indian Constitution, which is a living social
document. It aims at achieving ideals of Welfare State.
It expects from the Judiciary to play dynamic and
positive role. Therefore, it guarantees independence to
judiciary. This is one of the basic features of the
Constitution. Indeed, our Judiciary has been playing
pivotal role in upholding Rule of Law and ensuring
Justice to every member of society.
1.1 Concept of Justice: Justice means fair and
equitable treatment to every individual with proper and
impartial application of Law.
Prof. Sidgwick opines while explaining
importance of Justice, In determining a nations rank
in political civilization, no test is more decisive than the
degree in which justice as defined by the law is
actually realized in its judicial administration.
Preamble of our Constitution ensures three kinds of
Justice Social, Political and Economic. Secondly,
Principle of Natural Justice is the golden thread
running throughout the Constitution.
Judiciary has been shouldering the responsibility of
protecting this constitutional mandate with two
weapons Judicial Review and Judicial Activism.
1.2 Concept of Judicial Activism:
Parliament is under constitutional obligation to
draft laws which will ensure welfare of the society.
Unfortunately, this organ of the State has failed in its
duty. This leads to Judicial Activism. The Supreme
Court while interpreting provisions of the Constitution
adopts Rule of Beneficial Construction and goes
beyond technical letters of law. This is a bold, active
and positive step to protect fundamental rights with
liberties of the individual. This process is known as
Judicial Activism.
The Supreme Court has been exercising its
power, guaranteed under Art.32 of the Constitution,
with courage, practical wisdom, creativity and vision to
protect and enhance fundamental psychological
values, such as, dignity of the individual, equality,
privacy, psychological sense of community and justice.
1.3 Concept of Psychology:
Psychology can be defined as the
science of mind and behavior. Goal of Psychology is to
develop theories that describe, explain and predict
human behavior by reference to law which ultimately
aims at welfare of society. Psychologists try to study
role of mind in individual and social behavior. They
deal with concepts like brain functioning, emotion,
motivation, personality, attention, behavior and
interpersonal relationships.
2. Importance of Psychological Jurisprudence:
Study of human psychology is important for
Judges while delivering justice. Criminal justice system
considers psychological aspects like motive, intention,
negligence, recklessness, unsoundness of mind, etc. A
Psychologist can definitely help a Judge to understand
and analyze behavior of a criminal.
Gary Melton, past American Psychological
Law Societys President, says, Psychologists should
urge legal decision makers to choose actions likely to
enhance psychologically desirable values related to
human dignity.
Other side of the coin is that the decision
making process of any Judge has connection with his
psychology. According to Justice Balakrishna, The
division between judicial activist and protagonist of self
restraint or between Liberals and Conservatives on the
court has historically been shaped by the individual
Justices level of circumspection, perception of societal
consensus and personal, political, social and moral
values.
Justice P.N.Bhagawati and Justice
V.R.Krishna Iyer are known as founding fathers of
concept of Judicial Activism. Their attitude has given
new dimensions to process of judicial interpretation
and set new trend in judiciary.
In the process of Judicial Activism, opinions
and reasoning expressed by the Judges clearly reflect
their psychology. Inner forces within conscious and
subconscious mind of a Judge like, inherent instincts,
customary and religious beliefs, personal likes and
dislikes, moral values, etc. definitely influence his
attitude towards a case. Therefore, Justice Kuldip
Singh is known as Green Judge, for his judgments on
Environmental issues.
India has been witnessing Judicial Activism
since 1978, the year in which Supreme Court started
giving widest, liberal and beneficial interpretation to
expand scope of fundamental rights, to read directive
principles in fundamental rights and to protect
cherished goals of the Constitution.
3. Instances of Judicial Activism:
Here, it will be important to take birds view of
cases of Judicial Activism.
3.1 Maneka Gandhi V. Union of India, A.I.R.1978
S.C.597
In this case Justice Bhagawati held, Attempt
of the Court should be to expand the reach and ambit
P.S.JOSHI P.S.JOSHI P.S.JOSHI P.S.JOSHI
N.S.Soti Law College, Sangli, Maharashtra
Justice, Judicial Activism and Psychology
of fundamental rights. To be a fundamental right it is
not necessary that a right must be specifically
mentioned in a particular Article. The Court further
held that the procedure depriving a person of his life or
personal liberty must be fair, just and reasonable and
it must satisfy the requirement of Natural Justice. The
Court held that Right to live means Right to live with
human dignity.
3.2 Hussainara Khatoon V. State of Bihar,
A.I.R.1979 S.C. 1369 (Speedy trial case)
In this case the Supreme Court held that
speedy trial is an integral and essential part of the
fundamental right to life and liberty enshrined in Art.21.
3.3 A.B.S.K. Sangh (Rly) V. U.O.I., A.I.R.1981
S.C.298 (P.I.L. case)
Justice Krishna Iyer declared, Access to
justice through class actions, public interest litigation
and representative proceedings is the present
Constitutional Jurisprudence.
3.4 Bandhu Mukti Morcha V. U.O.I., A.I.R. 1984 S.C.
803 (Bonded Labour case)
Justice Bhagawati held, Under Art. 32, this
Court has all incidental and ancillary powers including
to forge new remedies and fashion new strategies
designed to enforce fundamental rights. Purpose of
P.I.L. is to make basic Human Rights meaningful to the
deprived and vulnerable sections of the community
and to assure them social and economic justice which
is the significant tune of our Constitution.
3.5 M.C.Mehta V. U.O.I., (1987) 4 S.C.C. 463
(Ganga pollution case)
Expanding the scope of Art. 21, the Court held
that right to pure water and pollution free environment
is part of right to life. The Court further directed
Mahapalika to lay sewerage line, to construct public
latrines and urinals, for the use of poor people free of
charge, to ensure that dead bodies or half burnt bodies
are not thrown into Ganga. The Court blamed
Government for not taking effective action.
3.6 Parmanand Katara .V. U.O.I., A.I.R. 1989 S.C.
2039 (Accident case)
This was a significant and landmark judgment.
The Court held that it is a paramount obligation of
every member of medical profession to give medical
aid to every injured person brought for treatment
immediately without waiting for procedural formalities
to be completed in order to avoid negligent death.
3.7 Gain Kaur V. State of Punjab, (1996) 2 S.C.C.
648 (Euthanasia case)
The Supreme Court overruled its earlier
decision in P. Rathinams case and held that Right to
Life doesnt include Right to Die. Justice Varma
observed, Right to life is a natural right embodied in
Art. 21, but suicide is an unnatural termination or
extinction of life and incompatible and inconsistent with
the concept of Right to life.
3.8 Vishaka V. State of Rajasthan, A.I.R.1997
S.C.3011 (Sexual harassment case)
In this landmark judgment, the Supreme Court
interpreted principle of Gender Equality in Art.14, 19
and21 of the Constitution. It relied upon International
Convention (CEDAW) to define Sexual Harassment
as the domestic law was silent on this point. The Court
has laid down exhaustive guidelines to prevent sexual
harassment of working women at working places until
legislation is enacted for this purpose.
3.9 Common Cause, a Registered Society V. U.O.I.,
A.I.R. 1997 S.C.1886 (Corruption case)
The Supreme Court directed three Ministers
Smt. Sheela Kaul, Mr. Sukhram and Capt. Satish
Sharma to pay RS.50 Lacs compensation to
Government of India as punishment for misusing their
discretionary power as Minister.
3.10 D.K.Basu V. State of W.B. A.I.R. 1997 S.C. 610
(Custodial death case)
In this landmark judgment, the Court held,
Custodial death is perhaps one of the worst crimes in
a civilized society governed by the Rule of Law. Many
guidelines were issued to States to be followed in the
matters of arrest or detention.
4. Conclusion:
Law and Psychology, though are two
distinct disciplines, have one common area of interest
i.e. Human Behavior. Both these disciplines can serve
to establish Welfare State if they can coordinate in
positive manner. In U.S.A., American Psychology
Law Society has been playing significant role in co-
study of Law and Psychology. Fox Dennis opined,
Emerging psychological jurisprudence directs legal
attention to fundamental psychological values such as
dignity, privacy, justice, equality and autonomy.
Supreme Court has delivered major judgments in the
area like divorce, maintenance, offences of sexual
assault, juvenile delinquency and domestic violence by
taking into consideration psychology of the accused as
well as the litigant.
Recently, by giving status of wife to a woman living in
relationship with a man, cautioned us to adhere to
ethical and moral values involved in the institution of
marriage.
So, one can safely conclude that, the Supreme Court
is implementing Psychological Jurisprudence with the
help of Judicial Activism

REFERENCES

1. Fox Dennis, Psychology and Law: Justice Diverted,(1997);
2. Justice Balakrishna, New Dimensions of Law and Justice,(1992) Snow white;
3. Mahjan V.D., Jurisprudence and Legal Theory (2010);
4. Pandey J.N., Constitutional Law of India,( 2001).
Research Paper Commerce

ABSTRACT Stress is a very common feature among college students. Stress among students mainly comes from
academic tests, interpersonal relations, life changes, social and environment factors, family background and career
exploration. Such stress may usually cause psychological, physical, and behavioral problems. The purpose of this study
involves assessing the perceived levels of stress and detecting sources of stress among college students. The analysis also
involves the identification of the reaction of the students to the various stressors and also the ways the college students
commonly adapt themselves to the stressors. The coping up strategy adopted for the management and moderation of stress is
also analyzed. The primary data is collected by administering a structured questionnaire to 100 Govt. college students in
Hospet Bellary Dt. In addition interaction with students is also undertaken to get some qualitative information. The secondary
data is collected from websites, books and journals. Simple percentage analysis is used. The analysis revealed that the Govt.
college students are aware of the stressors and do adopt some techniques to cope up and manage stress. However, the
techniques involves the dependence of the respondents on themselves and are not keen on seeking others help.

Introduction:
College students in general and Government
College students in particular, stress are very
commonly come across. Psychological, physical, and
behavioral problems may usually be caused by such
stress. Academic tests, family background, social,
interpersonal relations, life changes, and environment
factors, and career exploration are the sources of the
stress among students. Assessing the perceived levels
of stress and detecting sources of stress are the main
purpose of this study among college students. The
identification of the reaction of the students to the
various stressors and also the ways the college
students commonly adapt themselves to the stressors
are analyzed. The coping up strategy adopted for the
management and moderation of stress is also
analyzed. A structured questionnaire is administered
for collecting primary data from one hundred
Government college students at Hospet from Bellary
district, Karnataka. Further, qualitative information is
also collected with interaction from students. Journals
magazines, books and websites are referred for
collecting secondary data. Statistical tool like simple
percentage analysis is used. Awareness of the
stressors and adoption of some techniques to cope up
with and manage stress of Government College
students are revealed through analysis. However, the
techniques involves the dependence of the
respondents on themselves and are not keen on
seeking others help.
According to Chang's Dictionary of Psychology
Terms, stress is a state of physical or mental tension
that causes emotional distress or even feeling of pains
to an individual
Feng (1992) and Volpe (2000) defined
stressor as anything that challenges an individual's
adaptability or stimulates an individual's body or
mentality.
Positive Stress Positive influence and it can
result in an exciting new perspective and compel into
action.
Negative Stress Negative feelings and
results in distrust, anger and depression
Models for Stress
Transaction Model Lazarus and Folk man's
interpretation of stress focuses on the transaction
between the people and their external environment.
Health Realization Model -The Health Realization
Model is found on the idea that the Stress does not
follow the presence of a STRESSOR. The focus
should be on the nature of thought of the individual.
STRESS results from appraising oneself and one's
circumstances through a mental filter of insecurity and
negativity, whereas the feeling of well being results
from approaching the world with a "quite mind", "inner
wisdom" and "common sense".
Sources of Stress/ Stressors
Family factor
Social factor
Physical/mental factor
The main stressors are the experience of
these students academic life. Struggling to meet
academic standards, concerns over grades, time and
money management worries, and many
responsibilities are components of this stress. As the
number and intensity of these hassles go up, levels of
stress on individual mounts up.

Somappa Badiger Somappa Badiger Somappa Badiger Somappa Badiger
Dr. Jeelanbasha V. Dr. Jeelanbasha V. Dr. Jeelanbasha V. Dr. Jeelanbasha V.
Govt. First Grade College, Mariyammanahalli Hospet (Tq), Bellary (Dt)
Karnataka
Empirical Study on management of Stress among Government
College Students (With Special Reference to Hospet City)
Management of Stress:
Management of stress of students are
specifically designed to reduce stress, such as
relaxation techniques, counseling, supportive
friendship and other related techniques for
management of stress .Students of this survey usually
follow social activities, watching television, leisure
activities and exercise more than other methods for
managing stress. Thus, they should adopt stress
management abilities in day today life so as to lead
sound health in the society.
Research Methodology:
A structured questionnaire was used for
collecting primary data. The sample size is one
hundred Government College students of Hospet city
in Bellary district, Karnataka. Convenience sampling is
used. Moreover, interaction from students was also
undertaken to get some qualitative information.
Journals magazines, books and websites are referred
for collecting secondary data. Statistical tool like
simple percentage analysis is used. Five point rating
scale is used for analysis of variables except variable
of reaction to stressors and management of stressors,
where three point rating scale is used.
Objectives:
1. To find out the sources of stress among
Government College students in Hospet city;
2. To analyze the opinion of the students on
stress;
3. To determine the identification and reasons for
the various stressors; and
4. To analyze the moderation and management
of stress by the Govt. college students in the
city.
Table-1:
Classification of respondents based on
demographic factors
S.No. Demographic Factors No. of
Students

17-20 60 1 Age
20-23 40
Low income 50
Middle Income 35
2 Family Status
High Income 15
Under
Graduate
50 3 Course Studying
Post Graduate 50
Residential 60 4 Accommodation
Hostel 40
Total 100
Out of the total number of Government college
students, 60 are in the age group of 17-20 and the rest
from the age group of 20-24. Half of the students are
under graduate and post graduate course. The family
status of the students shows that among the
respondents 50 are from low income, 35 from middle
income and 15 from high income. More than 50% of
the respondents are staying with family. Not more than
50% of the respondents are staying in the hostel.

Table-2: Opinion of respondents on Stress
Opinion On Stress YES NO
1. Is your lif e stress free 24 76
2. Have you experienced stress 85 15
3. Do you agree that there is
a. Positive Stress
b. Negative Stress

17
93

83
7
4.Is stress necessary in life 05 95
5. Do you agree that Insufficient
Stress - Depressant
07 93
Excessive Stress Complication- Optimum
Stress - Motivation
80 20
Table 2 speaks that more than 2/3 of the
respondents are not free from stress and 80% have
experienced stress. A lions share of respondents
accepts that there is negative stress but only 17%
have knowledge that there exists positive stress.
Moreover, negligible percentages of the respondents
feel that there is need of stress in life. Al most all
respondents agree that excessive stress leads to
various types of complications and a majority of 93%
feel that insufficient feel that there should be some
amount of stress.
Table-3:
REASONS FOR STRESS AND THE LEVEL OF
STRESS
S.No
.
Reasons 1
( No
Stress
)
2 (Low
Level
of
Stress
)
3
(Neutral
)
4
(High
Level
Stress
)
5
(Extremel
y High
Level of
Stress)
1 Lessons
load
52 20 26 1 1
2 Teachin
g quality
30 8 47 10 5
1- No Stress. 2- Low Level of Stress. 3- Neutral. 4-
High Level Stress.5- Extremely High Level of Stress.
The above table clearly reveals that half of
Govt. college students experience stress-free as far as
lesson load is concerned. Not more than 15% of
respondents undergo high level as well as extremely
high level of stress as far as academics and teaching
quality is concerned.
Table-4:
Time Management

S.N
o.
Reasons 1
( No
Stres
s)
2
(Low
Level
of
Stres
s)
3
(Neutr
al)
4
(High
Level
Stres
s)
5
(Extrem
ely High
Level of
Stress)
1 College
timing
25 3 70 1 1
2 Submissi
on of
assignme
nts
30 8 46 10 6
3 Time
managem
ent in
exams
1 - 25 69 5
Table -4 discloses that almost all respondents are
neutral to college timing. 16% of respondents are more
stressed about submission of assignment on time.
More than 2/3 encounters high level and 5%
experience extremely high level of stress as far as
Time management in examinations is concerned.
Table 5:
PART TIME WORK
S.No. Reasons 1
( No
Stress)
2 (Low
Level
of
Stress)
3
(Neutral)
4 (High
Level
Stress)
5
(Extremely
High Level
of Stress)
1 Difficulty
in
handling
work and
studies
- - 38 3 5
2 Working
too many
hours
- - 25 5 8
3 Lack of
time to
study
- - 20 2 3
Table 5 depicts that Out of 100 respondents,
only 46 students are doing part time work and 8
students experience beyond average level of stress
and 8% and 5% experience extremely high level and
high level of stress in working too many hours
respectively. Hardly 5 % of students find high level of
stress due to lack of time to study.
Table 6:
EMOTIONAL/MENTAL

S.No
.
Reasons 1
( No
Stress
)
2 (Low
Level
of
Stress
)
3
(Neutral
)
4
(High
Level
Stress
)
5
(Extremel
y High
Level of
Stress)
1 Lonelines
s
90 5 1 4 -
2 Study
skills
72 20 - 8 -
3 Lack of
motivation
6 15 45 16 18

The above table points out that lions share of
students do not experience any stress due to
loneliness. When it comes to study skills, 72% are
stress free and only 8% experience high stress level.
Nearly 1/3 of students experience high level of stress
due to lack of motivation. In other words, they are
dependent on others to motivate them.
Table 7: PHYSICAL
S.No. Reasons 1
(No
stress)
2
(Lo
w
Lev
el of
Stre
ss)
3
(Neu
tral)
4
(Hig
h
Leve
l
Stres
s)
5 (Extremely
High Level of
Stress)
1 Health
problem
s
50 20 22 - 8
2 Low
energy
levels
16 - 59 25 -
3

A meager 8% of the students experience
extremely high level of stress from health Problems.
Low energy levels cause high level of stress to 25% of
the respondents. The reason for this mainly relates to
untimely eating and eating of junk food.

Table 8: ENVIRONMENT
S.N
o.
Reasons 1
(No
stres
s)
2
(Low
Level
of
Stres
s)
3
(Neutra
l)
4
(High
Level
Stres
s)
5
(Extreme
ly High
Level of
Stress)
1 Transition
from
school to
college
30 10 35 10 15
2 Campus
environme
nt
40 10 30 10 -
3 Uncertain
future
1 8 21 - 70

Table 8 exhibits that the transition from school to
college has created high as well as extreme high level
of stress to 25% of Government College students.
Only 10% of respondents feel uncomfortable with
campus environment. The stress from uncertain future
has brought in extremely high level of stress among
majority of the respondents. Only 1% and 8% of the
respondents do not experience stress and low level of
stress respectively.
Table 9: SOCIAL
S.N
o.
Reason
s
1
(No
stres
s)
2
(Low
Level
of
Stres
s)
3
(Neutr
al)
4
(High
Level
Stres
s)
5
(Extrem
ely High
Level of
Stress)
1 Treatme
nt by
fellow
students
46 4 50 - -
2 Competi
ng with
other
students
67 2 18 8 5
No college students experience high level of stress as
far as their social activity is concerned. More than 2/3
of students experience free from stress in competing
with other students. Only 8% and 5 % undergo high
level and extremely high level of stress due to
competition with other students respectively.
Table 10: FAMILY
S.No
.
Reasons 1
(No
stres
s)
2
(Low
Level
of
Stres
s)
3
(Neutra
l)
4
(High
Level
Stres
s)
5
(Extremel
y High
Level of
Stress)
1 Loss of
someone
important
60 2 11 15 12
2 Lack of
support
from family
60 20 7 8 5
3 Fear of
disappointi
ng the
family
20 - 60 2 18
4 Financial
problems
20 6 9 45 20
Extremely high and high level of stress is
experienced by 12% and 15% of the respondents due
to loss of someone important. 20% of the respondents
experience beyond average level of stress due to lack
of support from the family. Not less than 1/5 of the
respondents are stressful as far as fear of
disappointing is concerned. Majority of the students
have high level stress following financial problems.
Table 11: Reaction to Stressors
S.No. Stressors 1(Agree) 2(Neutral) 3(Disagree)
1 Viewing
stressors in An
exaggerated
angle
15 60 25
2 Trying to please
everyone
80 10 10
3 Over reaction to
stressor
50 28 22
4 Confidence to
cope up with a
stressor
25 61 14
5 Ponder on
negative aspects
70 18 12
6 Excess emotions
and temper
21 70 19
1- Agree, 2- Neutral, 3- Disagree
The above table manifests that nearly of total
respondents do not view the stressors in an
exaggerated fashion, 60% are neutral and only 8%
have accepted that they view stressors in an
exaggerated angle. Majority of them agree that they try
to please everyone when they experience stress. Half
of the respondents over react to the stressors. of the
respondents are confident of coping up with the stress.
Not less than 2/3 of the respondents give importance
to negative aspects. About 1/5 of respondents feel
excess emotions and temper.
Table 12: MANAGEMENT / COPING UP WITH STRESSORS
S.No. Management
Strategy
1(Agree) 2(Neutral) 3(Disagree)
1 Relaxation
techniques
80 10 10
2 Counseling 74 - 26
3 Exercise to
build up
physical
resources
80 20 -
4 Supportive
friendship
45 50 5
5 Fix realistic
goals
73 11 16
6 Expect some
failures &
frustration
24 10 68
7 Stress
management is
learnable skill
73 24 3
1. AGREE. 2- NEUTRAL. 3- DISAGREE.
It is revealed from the above table that about of the
respondents agree that stressors are coped up with
the relaxation techniques, counseling, exercise,
fixation of realistic goals and stress management is a
learnable skill. Nearly half of the respondents agree
that stressors are managed by supportive friendship.
Not less than 2/3 of them deny that expectation of
some failures & frustration cope up with the stressors.
Suggestions:
2. Counseling cell should be opened and functioned
actively in Government colleges to take care of
students free from stress.
3. Students should be motivated towards the growth
and expansion of interested skills.
4. Students should be taught about hygienic and
unhygienic things and food to maintain sound
health with sound mind.
5. Students should be taught about their goals and
objectives so that they should be free from
uncertain future.
6. Teachers should help in getting available
scholarships from various government and other
agencies to financially weak students and provide
to get hostel facilities and part-time job to be free
from financial problems.
7. Design general curriculum on stress and stress
management strategies. Colleges should design
and offer stress-related courses to help the
students.
8. Career development topics should be
incorporated into formal curricula.
9. Students' stress in the academics should be
given more focused. Teachers should also assist
students with poor academic achievements and
minimize their difficulties in the academics. This
will boost up their self confidence and act as a
stress reliever.
Conclusion
A majority of the students experience high
level of stress due to financial problems, low energy
levels uncertain future and their career opportunities.
A majority of the respondents agree that they
react to various stressors due to reasons like over
reaction, viewing stressor in an exaggerated fashion,
trying to please everyone, excess temper and
emotions. The confidence to cope up with a stressor
has to be developed. The students agree that stress
management is a learnable skill and this shows that
they are in a position to evaluate a stress and are
willing to cope up with it through various learnable
channels

REFERENCES

1. Feng,G.F.(1992), Management of Stress and Loss, Tajpei; Psychological Publishing Co. Ltd.
2. Volpe, J.F., (2000), A Guide to Effective Stress Management, Career and Technical Education, 48(10), pp-183-188
3. Lazarus,R.S., and Folkman,S. (1984), Stress, Appraisal and Coping, Newyork: Springer
4. ElizabethA. Larson, University of Wisconsin-Madison, Stress in the lives of College Women: Lots to do and Not much Time
5. Dr. Lavanya Vedagiri Rao (2013), Management of Stress among College Students, Research Journal SANSMARAN,Vol.3 No.1,
pp20-28

ABSTRACT E Commerce, commonly known as e-commerce refers to a wide collection of online business activities for
products and services. It also pertains to any form of business transaction in which the parties interact electronically rather
than by physical exchange or direct physical contact The business phenomenon that we call e-commerce has an interesting
history it started in the mid 1990s.and grew rapidly until 2000.which was called as dot com boom but In the period of 2003
economy saw a slowdown. The companies that survived were in depression E-commerce gave a new wave to the industry.
Originally, electronic commerce was identified as the facilitation of commercial transactions electronically, using technology
such as Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) and Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT). These were both introduced in the late 1970s,
allowing businesses to send commercial documents like purchase orders or invoices electronically. 1) E-tailing or virtual
storefronts on web sites with online catalogs, sometimes gathered into a virtual Mall. 2) The gathering and use of
demographic data through web contacts. 3) Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) , the business to business exchange of data. 4)
Business to business buying and selling. Business transaction security
Business models across the world also continue to change drastically with the advent of e-Commerce and this change
is not just restricted to India/ USA. Other countries are also contributing to the growth of e-Commerce. For example, United
Kingdom has the biggest e-commerce market in the world when measured by the amount spent per capital, even higher than
USA. The internet economy in UK is likely to grow by 10% between 2010 to 2015. This has led to changing dynamics for the
advertising industry Amongst emerging economies,

KEYWORDS: Global Trends in E-Retailing and Shopping, E Commerce payment system, Procedure of
fund transfer

INTRODUCTION:-
E Commerce, commonly known as e-commerce
refers to a wide collection of online business activities
for products and services. It also pertains to any form
of business transaction in which the parties interact
electronically rather than by physical exchange or
direct physical contact.
Definition:-According to IBM the transformation of key
business processes through the use of internet
technologies .
E Commerce is related with buying and selling
over the internet, or conducting any transaction
involving the transfer of ownership or rights to
Use goods or services through a media of computer
network.
Brief history:-The business phenomenon that we call
e-commerce has an interesting history it started in the
mid 1990s.and grew rapidly until 2000.which was
called as dot com boom but In the period of 2003
economy saw a slowdown. The companies that
survived were in depression E-commerce gave a new
wave to the industry. Originally, electronic commerce
was identified as the facilitation of commercial
transactions electronically, using technology such as
Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) and Electronic
Funds Transfer (EFT). These were both introduced in
the late 1970s, allowing businesses to send
commercial documents like purchase orders or
invoices electronically. The growth and acceptance of
credit cards, automated teller machines (ATM) and
telephone banking in the 1980s were also forms of
electronic commerce. Another form of e-commerce
was the airline reservation system typified by Sabre in
the USA and Travicom in the UK.
OBJECTIVE OF STUDY:-
1) E-tailing or virtual storefronts on web sites
with online catalogs, sometimes gathered into
a virtual Mall.
2) The gathering and use of demographic data
through web contacts.
3) Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) , the
business to business exchange of data.
4) Business to business buying and selling.
5) Business transaction security
SCOPE OF STUDY:-
Global Trends in E-Retailing and Shopping:
Business models across the world also continue to
change drastically with the advent of e-Commerce and
this change is not just restricted to India/ USA. Other
countries are also contributing to the growth of e-
Commerce. For example, United Kingdom has the
biggest e-commerce market in the world when
measured by the amount spent per capital, even
higher than USA. The internet economy in UK is likely
to grow by 10% between 2010 to 2015. This has led to
changing dynamics for the advertising industry
Asha Shinde Asha Shinde Asha Shinde Asha Shinde C.S.I.T.College, Chinchwad,Pune-19, Maharashtra.
Present Status of E-Commerce in Global Market
(With special reference to the e-payment system)
Amongst emerging economies, China's e-Commerce
presence continues to expand. With 384 million
internet users, China's online shopping sales rose to
$36.6 billion in 2009 and one of the reasons behind the
huge growth has been the improved trust level for
shoppers. The Chinese retailers have been able to
help consumers feel more comfortable shopping
online.
E Commerce payment system:
E-commerce payment system facilitates the
acceptance of electronic payment for online
transactions. Also known as a sample of Electronic
Data Interchange (EDI), e-commerce payment
systems have become increasingly popular due to the
widespread use of the internet-based shopping and
banking. In the early years of B2C transactions, many
consumers were apprehensive of using their credit and
debit cards over the internet because of the perceived
increased risk of fraud. Recent research shows that
90% of people in the United Kingdom still do not shop
online because they do not trust online payment
systems. However, 54% do believe that it is safe to
shop online which is an increase from 26% in 2006.
There are numerous different payments systems
available for online merchants. These include the
traditional credit, debit and charge card but also new
technologies such as digital wallets, e-cash, mobile
payment and e-checks. Another form of payment
system is allowing a 3rd party to complete the online
transaction for you. These companies are called
Payment Service Providers (PSP).
Categories of Electronic Commerce:
Business to Consumer (B2C)
Business to Business (B2B)
Consumer to Consumer (C2C)
Consumer to Business (C2B)
Business to Government (B2G)
Government to Government (G2G)
Procedure of fund transfer:
EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer) is the new facility
provided to the Exporters for submitting the license
fee through the Internet without visiting the Bank for
the payment. This procedure is being proposed to
facilitate payments through electronic means. The
facility shall be available only for electronically filed
applications. Currently Electronic payment can be
made through following banks:-ICICI , IDBI , HDFC,
UTI , State Bank of India, Bank of India, Punjab
National Bank, etc This Electronic payment facility is
applicable for deposit of application fees in case of all
licensing schemes (For which Electronic Filing of
application facility is available).However Electronic
Payment facility is mandatory for DEPB, DES, EPCG
and DFIA Licensing Schemes An exporter having valid
Importer Exporter Code (IEC) need to have an Internet
Banking account , his ID and password from any of
the Banks given above. License Fee can be submitted
simultaneously while filing the E-Com application
without visiting the Bank. It will also reduce the time
required to make the payment as compared to manual
mode like DD etc. Payment can be made only by
logging on valid unique ID and password provided to
the exporter by the Bank. The transaction is carried out
in secured environment through Banks gateway
specially created for the purpose.
Processing of refund of fee submitted through
net banking shall be through an application in hard
copy as perform given in appendix 6-B. This may be
submitted to the licensing authority against whom the
e-com number has been generated. On receipt of
application the licensing authority shall pass refund
after they have verified from the Pay and Accounts
Office, Ministry of Commerce & Industry, New Delhi
that the amount was credited to the Government of
India. No claim for refund of application fee shall be
entertained by the licensing authority after expiry of
one year from the date of payment to the concerned
bank. However, on merits, for reasons to be recorded
in writing, the licensing authority may condone the
delay but in no case shall an application for refund of
fees be entertained after the expiry of three years with
regard to the date as mentioned above. Refund Order
of fees will be valid for three months from the date of
issue. Request for revalidating the same may be
considered on merits by the authority which issued the
Refund Order.
STEPS FOR MAKING PAYMENT:-
Following are the steps for making payment through
EFT option:
(Example given below for IDBI bank)
1) Click on Online License application form, EFT
button is displayed on the main form of the
application for making payment through Internet
banking option. For e.g. in the main Form of DEPB
option with EFT button will look like the figure
below:

2 A dialog is displayed to select the Bank (e.g.
ICICI Bank, HDFC Bank, SBI Bank, IDBI
Bank, UTI Bank etc.) From the list. Select the Bank
through which Payment is to be made from the
drop down list. & fill the License Fee amount in
Indian Rupees. Select bank and filling the amount,
click on OK button. The screen appears like this:

3. A table appears displaying the details
DGFT reference number, E-com-reference
number, selected bank, Amount and Name of
the Firm. The window appears like

4. Click on Pay Now button. Corporate Internet
Banking website of the Selected Bank is opened.
Login screen of the selected bank appears. Enter the
login ID and password provided by the selected bank
for making online transactions. Click on OK/Go button.
(For e.g. the CIB login screen of IDBI bank will look
like this)

5. If the details entered by the exporter are valid, the
Payment screen appears. This screen displays the
details of the request made.

6. Click on OK button to proceed
.
7. Enter the transaction ID and password (This may
be same as Login ID/password or may be different as
provided by the bank). Click on OK button. The
payment request is submitted to the server of the bank
and account is debited. Bank will generate BID
number. This BID number can be used for future
reference to the bank.

8. Click on Close button. The status message from
DGFT end is displayed on the screen whether the
transaction was successful or not.

9. Click on Close Window button the Payment
details window is closed. If the above screen doesnt
appear after the payment is successfully made at the
bank and any of the given below conditions arise then
click on Verify EFT button on the screen of the main
application form. When the above shown HTML page
is displayed then Click on Close Window button the
Payment details window is closed.
10. If the Payment was successful then open the
Fee Details form by clicking on the Fee Details button
on the main screen. Fee details of the EFT payment
made should be added in the list box of payments
made. This EFT payment can be just viewed from this
screen. The details cannot be updated or edited.
11. If the Payment was successful at Bank and
above shown HTML page is displayed with Successful
status, continue with the filling of other information of
the application
12. If the payment was successful at Bank but
above shown HTML page is not displayed then, Verify
the transaction by clicking on Verify EFT on the main
Licence application form.
STEPS FOR VERIFYI NG THE
PAYMENT(Fol lowing are the Steps to Veri fy
the Payment: 1. On the main form of
appl ication of E-Commerce fil ing, Verify
EFT button is displ ayed on the mai n form
of the appl ication. The button on the form
appears l ike the figure bel ow:

2. Click Verify EFT button. A dialog box
appears. In the list box the list of unsuccessful
payments against the selected E-Com reference
number is displayed. The list box will display the list of
only unsuccessful payments.

3. Select the request from the list for which
verification is to be done, by double clicking on the
request from the list. Enter the BID number (BID No.
can be taken from the Banks Corporate Internet
website or request the Bank to get BID No.) BID
Number is mandatory for doing verification. After
entering valid BID No. click on OK button. The
generated request goes to the designated Banks
website and payment is verified from the database of
the Banks server. If the payment was successful then
a message of Successful payment will pop up and
status returns to DGFT web page. Successful
message will be displayed against the Transaction
Status in the Table. (Example given below shows the
Status message of IDBI Bank)

4. If the payment was un-successful then a
message of Unsuccessful payment will pop up and
status returns to DGFT web page .Un-Successful
message will be displayed against the Transaction
Status in the Table.

5. For further verification, return to Online License
application form, click on BR/DD details button. A
dialog box appears. Please check if the request for
which verification was done is added to the list. If the
transaction was successful the payment made will be
added to the list. If the payment made is not added to
the list then the transaction was un-successful.
Contents
Credit Cards and Smart Cards:
over the years, credit cards have become one of the
most common forms of payment for e-commerce
transactions. In North America almost 90% of online
B2C transactions were made with this payment type.
Increased security measures such as the use of the
card verification number (CVN) which detects fraud by
comparing the verification number on the printed on
the signature strip on the back of the card with the
information on file with the cardholder's issuing bank.
Also online merchants have to comply with stringent
rules stipulated by the credit and debit card issuers
(Visa and MasterCard)
[4]
this means that merchants
must have security protocol and procedures in place to
ensure transactions are more secure. This can also
include having a certificate from an authorized
certification authority (CA) who provides PKI
infrastructure for securing credit and debit card
transactions.
Electronic Bill Presentment and Payment:
(EBPP) is a fairly new technique that allows
consumers to view and pay bills electronically. There
are a significant number of bills that consumers pay on
a regular basis, which include: power bills, water, oil,
internet, phone service, mortgages, car payments etc.
EBPP systems send bills from service providers to
individual consumers via the internet. The systems
also enable payments to be made by consumers,
given that the amount appearing on the e-bill is
correct. The original EBPP method is a direct
withdrawal from a bank account through a bank such
as Scotia bank. Other service providers such as
Rogers Communications and Aliant additionally,
accept major credit cards within the bill payment
sections of their websites.
Electronic data interchange (EDI) is the structured
transmission of data between organizations by
electronic means. It is used to transfer electronic
documents or business data from one computer
system to another computer system, i.e. from one
trading partner to another trading partner without
human intervention. It is more than mere e-mail; for
instance, organizations might replace bills of lading
and even cheques with appropriate EDI messages. It
also refers specifically to a family of standards.
Electronic data interchange is "the computer-to-
computer interchange of strictly formatted messages
that represent documents other than monetary
instruments. EDI implies a sequence of messages
between two parties, either of whom may serve as
originator or recipient. The formatted data representing
the documents may be transmitted from originator to
recipient via telecommunications or physically
transported on electronic storage media
A clearing house:
Clearing house is a financial institution that
provides clearing and settlement services for
financial and commodities derivatives and
securities transactions. These transactions may be
executed on a futures exchange or securities
exchange, as well as off-exchange in the over-the-
counter (OTC) market. A clearing house stands
between two clearing firms (also known as
member firms or clearing participants) and its
purpose is to reduce the risk of one (or more)
clearing firm.
A comparative study of E-Commerce in India and
Abroad
E-Commerce Payments in India

E-Commerce Payment
Systems

Percentage Rank
Credit Card 35 1
Debit Card (Smart Card) 26.5 2
Cash on Delivery 23.5 3
Bank Transfer 9 4
Money Transfer 5 5
Postal Transf er 1 6
Prepaid card 0 0
Payment Through
Convenience Store
0 0
Total 100 0
E-Banking Statistics in Kenya

Type 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
ATM 239000 262100 248247 266811 332015 426110 829962
Credit 16531 18522 18215 57146 59164 69478 750085
Debit 62256 159498 202018 330007 356989 496647 73238
Smart 2784 3068 3301 3693 3371 3142 3769
Total 320571

443188

471781

657657

751539

995377

1657054

Factors Discouraging Consumer for Online
Payments

Factors Percentage
Concern about security 70
Difficulties to enter
inf ormation
9
Do not have credit
cards/smart cards etc.
7
Do not like interest charge 6
Purchase value too small 4
Exceeded personal limit 4
The factors which are critical for the success
of e-commerce payment systems are multifaceted.
These include integrity, non-repudiation,
authentication, authorization, confidentiality and
reliability, which are discussed below:
Integrity: transaction data are transmitted and
received unchanged and as intended.
Non-repudiation: transactions have the quality
of non deniable proof or receipts.
Authentication: identities and attributes of
parties engaged in commerce are established
at some tolerable level of risk.
Authorization: individuals are established and
recognized as entitled to receive, send or view
transactions.
Confidentiality: transactions can be protected
from view except by those who are authorized.
Reliability: probability of failure in the
transaction-send, receive, acknowledge-is low.
COMPARISON OF ELECTRONIC PAYMENT
SYSTEMS:-
The present part of the study revealed many electronic
payment systems and broadly these electronic
payment system can be grouped or classified into four
categories: (1) Online Credit Card Payment System (2)
Online Electronic Cash System (3) Electronic Cheque
System and (4) Smart Cards based Electronic
Payment System. These payment systems have
numbers of requirements: e.g. security, acceptability,
convenience, cost, anonymity, control, and traceability.
Features Online
Credit
Card
Payment
Electronic
Cash
Electronic
Cheque
Smart
Cards
Actual
Payment
Time
Paid later Prepaid Paid later Paid later
Transaction
information
transfer
The store
and bank
checks the
status of
the credit
card
Free transfer.
No need to
leave the
name of
parties
involved
Electronic
checks or
payment
indication
must be
endorsed
The smart
card of
both
parties
make the
transfer
Online and
offline
transactions
Online
transactions
Online
transactions
Offline
transfers
are
allowed
Offline
transfers
are allowed
Bank account
involvement
Credit card
account
makes the
payment
No
involvement
The bank
account
makes the
payment
The smart
card
account
makes the
payment
Users Any
legitimate
credit card
users
Anyone Anyone
with a
bank
account
Anyone
with a bank
or credit
Party to
which
payment is
made out
Distributing
Bank
Store Store Store

Finding and suggestion:-
Companies are being asked to focus on cost,
evaluation and performance Firms can significantly
improve their performance and evaluation. Using new
concepts of e commerce. With e- commerce
investment, corporation can improve both individual
and corporate performance. Virtual communities erode
the marketing and sales advantages of large
companies. Small companies with better product and
customer service can challenge larger competitor
which they cant do in the real world .
Conclusion:-
Technology has inarguably made our lives
easier. It has cut across distance, space and even
time. One of the technological innovations in banking,
finance and commerce is the Electronic Payments.
Electronic Payments (e-payments) refers to the
technological breakthrough that enables us to perform
financial transactions electronically, thus avoiding long
lines and other hassles. They provides greater
freedom to individuals in paying their taxes, licenses,
fees, fines and purchases at unconventional locations
and provides 24*7 support system.

REFERENCES

1) E-Commerce strategies by Charles Trepper,200 Microsoft Corporation
2) Web commerce technology hand book Daniel Minoli
3) E-Commerce C.S.V Murthy
Web sites:-
4) www.google.com
5) www.wikipedia.com

ABSTRACT Entrepreneurship education should include all factors ranging from skills development to technological
innovations. It is high time now that steps be taken to identify and initiate youth into entrepreneurship. Entrepreneurship
education should be made a part of the higher education in the country, thinkers have stressed for the development of India.
Many thinkers, professionals, bankers, deans, and teaching fraternity are suggesting that the institutes of higher education
should formulate a course on entrepreneurship development.
The Human Resource and the UGC held a number of meetings to explore how they could achieve a shared vision the
widespread availability of entrepreneurship education across all levels of the Indian education system. There is a need to
produce quality graduates who should be employable and should be entrepreneurs. There is a need for better coordination
between industry and academia to achieve this objective. India does not have an entrepreneurship education policy despite the
many calls and evidence based reports by the Indian education Commission highlighting the substantial benefits to a nations
economy and to its young people.
This paper draws together the seminal international reports on this topic and draws from them the main lessons for
India. The paper analysis and examines what is being done in other countries of similar size and to identify a series of actions
that could be taken by Government within the budgetary constraints that currently exist after the global recession.

INTRODUCTION:
For much of the past decade the university
grants Commission has held the view that
entrepreneurship must be embedded into the education
system and that it should be available to all primary,
secondary and third-level students. Furthermore, the
Commission has advocated that two sets of
complementary actions should be incorporated into
entrepreneurship education. The first should aim at
developing attitudes and behaviours, particularly traits
such as personal responsibility, creativity, leadership,
problem solving, and being proactive. The second set of
actions should focus on the technical and managerial
competences required to start and run an organisation.
The publication of the university grants commission in
2000 advocated economic growth and employment as the
priorities. The university Grants Commission recognised
that to truly embed entrepreneurial behaviour across its
Member and it needed to ensure that entrepreneurship
education was made available to all students at all levels
across all country. Towards this ambition it has published
a series of thoughtful reports and recommendations for
colleges and the HR Ministry to act upon. Indeed the
2006 UGC Education Conference on Entrepreneurship
Education in India: Fostering Entrepreneurial Mind-sets
through Education and Learning detailed a wide range of
possible actions that could be taken by different
stakeholders, with the development of entrepreneurship
education strategy being at the heart of any set of
initiatives. Unfortunately the Indian response thus far to
this call to action has not been proactive.
A number of countries similar in size and
peripheral geographic location have already recognised
the benefits of an entrepreneurship education strategy
and have implemented policies to ensure that all students
receive some form of entrepreneurship education during
their formal schooling years. In china entrepreneurship
education is a thematic entity, not a subject. In 2004 the
Chinese Ministry of Education produced an Action Plan
for Entrepreneurship Education that covered all levels of
the education system, and working together with the
Ministry of Trade and Industry appointed a working group
entitled From Higher Education Institutes to
Entrepreneur. The Ministry of Education also appointed
an Entrepreneurship steering group to ensure that the
agreed programme of action was properly implemented.
In Brazil entrepreneurship is included in the
curricula at all levels, and three government departments
are involved in its delivery (Ministry of Education and
Research, Ministry of Trade and Industry and Ministry of
Local Government and Regional Development). In
addition to co-operation between ministries and
directorates, there are also partnership agreements with
businesses as part of the action plan. The primary goals
of the Brazilian strategy are to develop knowledge and
competences in students related to entrepreneurial
activities, strengthen young peoples belief in and
capabilities of their own creative forces, and foster a
culture for entrepreneurship.
Closer to home, our cousins in srilanka launched
a policy last year called Investing in srilankas Future:
Creating a Culture of Enterprise in Our Schools which
details the actions that will be taken by the srilankan
government to embed entrepreneurship into the national
schooling system. As part of its action plan, it contains a
section entitled What success will look like which
highlights how the programme will be measured.
Obviously, the more important indicators cannot occur in
the early years of the programme but it demonstrates a
Dr Memon Ubed Yusuf Dr Memon Ubed Yusuf Dr Memon Ubed Yusuf Dr Memon Ubed Yusuf Sir Sayyed College, Aurangabad, Maharashtra.
Psychological Approach towards Entrepreneurial Education & Learning.
political commitment to long-term planning and the future
development of the country.
While these countries have clear strategies in
terms of entrepreneurship education, India possesses a
wide variety of separate initiatives taking place across
secondary and third levels of Indian education. The
initiatives are highly fragmented, are lacking a clear
sense of overall purpose and direction, and are not
meeting the needs of the country. There is therefore an
urgent need for a coherent entrepreneurship education
strategy that is integrated across all three levels and
across government departments, a strategy that will
provide entrepreneurship education to a wider number of
students throughout the education system, particularly to
non-business students.
The need to develop a coherent
entrepreneurship education strategy is not new to India.
The top educational ministry report in 2002 stated that the
school system does not support the idea of working for
oneself and that the Indian education system was seen
by entrepreneurs to have played a very limited role in
supporting entrepreneurship to date. Since then there
have been a succession of Indian publications such as
the Enterprise Strategy Group report, the Small Business
Forum report, various GEM reports and the 2007
Towards Developing an Entrepreneurship Policy for
India report that have successively argued for the
development of entrepreneurship education across all
levels of the Indian education system as a sustainable
source of locally grown entrepreneurs. To date there has
been no entrepreneurship education strategy developed,
nor indeed has there been any entrepreneurship policy
published!
One of the most common misconceptions about
entrepreneurship is that it deals only with starting a
business and that it promotes capitalistic greed. But
entrepreneurship is not just about starting your own
business, it is also about a way of thinking and behaving
that can be applied in many different contexts. People
starting up charities or organising charity events are
behaving entrepreneurially, while people in sports and
social clubs across the country behave entrepreneurially
on a weekly basis as they struggle to get the resources
together through church gate collections and other
fundraising events to keep their club afloat or to build new
facilities that the members can use. Entrepreneurship is
not just about the creation of capital wealth, it also
encourages the generation of other forms of wealth such
as social, sporting and artistic wealth. Furthermore, we
live in a time when we urgently need our public sector
employees to behave entrepreneurially as government
funding is being pruned across government departments
to take account of the economic challenges that the
country faces.
There is a growing body of international evidence
which demonstrates that students who receive
entrepreneurship education as part of their schooling
show improved academic performance, school
attendance, and educational attainment, have increased
problem-solving and decision-making abilities, have
improved interpersonal relationships, teamwork, money
management, and public speaking skills, are more likely
to find employment, and have enhanced social
psychological development (self-esteem, ego
development, self-efficacy)
1
The reason that students
achieve these benefits is because the primary goal of
entrepreneurship education is not to get everyone to start
their own business but to give our young people the
ability to think positively, to look for opportunities to make
things happen, to have the self-confidence to achieve
their goals, and to use their talents to build a better
society (economically and socially). It also recognises that
students of all academic abilities can be part of this
process and that success is not dependent upon the
number of points that one gets in the Leaving Cert but on
how one lives their life.
Unfortunately the Indian education system is
primarily left brain orientated (particularly for business
students) and arguably there is a general need to re-
imagine the whole education curricula. This proposal is
not arguing for that to happen but we do urgently need to
develop young people who are entrepreneurial in their
way of thinking and behaving. The proposal recognises
that the Department of Education faces further budget
cutbacks which will place serious financial constraints on
any new initiatives being proposed to them. However, by
giving the education system a clear vision and strategy
for entrepreneurship education, much can still be
achieved without the need for substantial funding. It
should be noted that any entrepreneurship education
strategy would require teachers to understand business
and be trained in its different approaches, a proposition
that may not find favour with everyone concerned.
Undoubtedly there will be resistance from many quarters
to such an initiative as introducing any new syllabi or
culture can be a difficult and lengthy process. However,
because it is challenging does not mean it cannot be
achieved!
Implementation Strategy for Entrepreneurial
Education system:-
The following is the main strategy that can be
implemented towards embedding entrepreneurship
education more broadly across all levels of education in
India. The overarching principle behind this research
paper is that entrepreneurship education activities are
operated in a fashion that replicates the business
environment. This means that clear plans would be
developed, roles and responsibilities would be assigned,
metrics would be agreed to measure the effectiveness of
the various initiatives and the efficiencies achieved, and a
spirit of entrepreneurial action is engendered amongst all
stakeholders. It should be an exemplar of practising what
one preaches.
1. Appoint a Champion and a Driver
Lead Responsibility Department of Education in every
state of the country.
one member of Department staff to act as the
Driver (preferably someone on from a school) who would
work with the Champion (volunteer entrepreneur).
Nothing will truly change unless there is some dedicated
person to Champion the overall strategy, an entrepreneur
with an appropriate profile and that this would be
complemented by a Driver within the Department. The
Champion will provide their time and expertise off course
with some charge. The Driver will work with the Champion
to promote the benefits of entrepreneurship education by
contacting school personnel on a regular basis and
offering support to any initiatives. The Driver is the biggest
expense involved towards ensuring the design and
implementation of an entrepreneurship education strategy.
2. Write an Entrepreneurship Education
Strategy
Lead Responsibility Department of Education
The purpose of having an Entrepreneurship Education
Strategy is to give focus and direction to entrepreneurship
education in India (as can be found in Scotland, Norway
and Finland). It should clearly set out the aims of the
Department of what it seeks to achieve in terms of
entrepreneurship education and by what dates. It should
bring together the many different initiatives currently taking
place and incorporate the recommendations of the
European Commission. It should be drafted in the first
instance by the Driver in conjunction with Champion and
the Advisory Panel.
3. Include Field Research as a Portion of
Business / Business Studies Subjects
Lead Responsibility HR Ministry
Time required by member of HR Ministry staff to adjust
subject curricula and implement the changes
One very simple but effective idea is to introduce a field
research element to Business / Business Studies courses.
This form of learning already exists in subjects such as
Geography and History where 20% of the assessment
marks are assigned to a project related activity. A similar
learning approach could be adopted by all Business /
Business Studies subjects with minimal disruption to the
current course provision.
4. Introduce Multiple Intelligence and Emotional
Intelligence Theory into SPHE
Lead Responsibility HR Ministry
Time required by member of HR Ministry staff to adjust
subject curricula and implement
The changes this is the key to developing
entrepreneurship in young people as successful leaders of
industry, business, and education have high levels of
Emotional Intelligence. It has been argued in academic
literature that within an entrepreneurial context, good
people skills, effective communication, and disciplined
self-management are frequently considered essential to
achieving desired outcomes. Overall, one of the critical
elements of entrepreneurship education is to make
students aware that academic intelligence and
entrepreneurial activity/success are NOT necessarily
related. Entrepreneurship is available to people of all
academic abilities and reinforcing that possibility as a
career option could be one element of teaching in the
SPHE (Social, Personal and Health Education) modules at
Primary and Secondary levels. By introducing Multiple
Intelligence and Emotional Intelligence Theory into the
school curricula, it would enable teachers to work more
deeply with students on fostering their self-worth and self-
confidence. For teachers in Primary Schools, they could
also relate the material on entrepreneurship with subjects
such as Maths and SESE (Social Environmental and
Scientific Education). Teacher training to implement these
modules can be incorporated into the on-going in-service
training for SPHE.
5. Utilise Discretionary Time in Primary Schools
for Entrepreneurial Activities
Lead Responsibility Teachers
There is a period of discretionary time available to a
primary teacher that offers them the opportunity to work
with students on a wide variety of activities. This timeslot
could be used to develop a business idea (e.g. school
bakery, book fair, charity event). It would highlight the
importance of teamwork, build the notion of taking
responsibility, get them to utilise what they learn in class
and apply it to a real situation, and ensure that students of
all academic abilities understand that they possess
different strengths.
6. Launch a Young Entrepreneur of the Year
Competition
Lead Responsibility Department of Enterprise
Utilise existing funds currently allocated to a variety of
similar schemes
The City / County Enterprise Boards currently organise a
Student Enterprise Competition which initially is judged at
county level and then at national level. While it is a good
competition, it currently receives little national media
attention and it is focused on Transition Year students.
There are also other student enterprise competitions
targeted at second-level students but none with a high
profile. What is required is one national competition that is
similar in size and stature to the Young Scientist of the
Year competition.
7. Establish School Awards
Local sponsors would pay for Awards and
Champion/Driver would select Schools and Teachers for
Award Certification.
There are 3 ideas wrapped under one heading here. The
first is the Entrepreneurial School Flag which would
recognise schools that have adopted a proactive approach
to entrepreneurship education. The second is the
Pioneering Teacher Award which would recognise
individual teachers who promote entrepreneurship
education. International metrics are available for these
awards and they could be evaluated by the Champion or
Driver. The final award would be the Entrepreneurial
Student Award within schools themselves which would be
awarded to students who demonstrated entrepreneurial
flair. This flair may manifest itself in many different ways,
such as organising a charity event or some other such
endeavour. The award would be presented by the school
and would be sponsored by a local company.
8. Develop an Entrepreneurship Education
Online Resource
There are many excellent initiatives already taking place
around the country (e.g. Young Entrepreneur programme
in Kerry) but these are not captured in any central location.
A hub that gathers and disseminates these ideas would be
an excellent resource for teachers. Additionally, the
website should collect useful teaching resources (e.g.
case studies, video clips) that are available for free and
build a warehouse of information from which a teacher can
develop a tailored course for their students. Google net
already exists for such purposes for each subject but very
little information is available related to Business. Rather
than developing a new website, it would be more cost
effective to simply ensure that someone within the
Department is charged with developing the Business area
of this website.
9. Introduce Entrepreneurship into Teacher
Training and In-Service Training
By introducing entrepreneurship training into teacher
training programmes, it would enable the teachers to
understand what is meant by entrepreneurship education
(as there are many myths and misunderstandings of what
it actually means) and how it can be incorporated into
existing school activities. Ultimately, all participants
studying to become a teacher should receive some form of
education with regard to entrepreneurship while current
teachers can receive entrepreneurship education training
through the existing in-service provisions.
10. Implement the Recommendations of the EC
for 3
rd
Level Students
Many of the previous proposals have focused on primary
and secondary school programmes but third level schools
also need to be addressed. An EC report published in
December 2008 entitled Survey of Entrepreneurship in
Higher Education in Europe made a number of
recommendations that should be adopted by Government.
Firstly, develop a policy programme on how to mainstream
entrepreneurship into higher education. Secondly, ensure
that HEIs are not restricted in their pursuit of the
entrepreneurial agenda. Thirdly, track and evaluate the
effects of entrepreneurship. Also, all HEI subjects should
have at least one entrepreneurship module. Finally, the
focus must be on the entire educational system, as one
study level feeds into the other. The formation of an
entrepreneurial mindset is a joint effort from primary
education to tertiary education.
11. Build a Foundation for Entrepreneurship
Education
Lead Responsibility Department of Enterprise
This idea would require approximately Rs.50 crores for the
Foundation to be properly established. The CEO could be
the Champion mentioned earlier who would drive the
agenda of entrepreneurship education in India but that
person would need to be supported by the following
personnel: Primary Schools (two people), Secondary
Schools (two people), Third Level (one person),
Disadvantaged Youth (one person), Research Activities
(one person) and an Administrator (one person). Once
established the funding models could either be through
business donations, through government support (e.g.
National Council for Graduate Entrepreneurship, UK), or
through some amalgamate model. The Foundation would
effectively ensure that all of the proposals above would be
sustained and that the notion of entrepreneurship
education is constantly in the forefront of national
consciousness. A detailed Business Plan would be
required to gain the confidence of the high-worth
individuals (e.g. 10 entrepreneurs offering Rs. 0.5crore
each) and to assure them that the idea would have
significant benefits for the countrys students and for the
economy of the country.

12. Appoint an Advisory Panel to Oversee the
Implementation of this Proposal
The Minister for Education should appoint an Advisory
Panel who would be willing to contribute their time on a
voluntary basis. The Advisory Panel would be chaired by
the Champion and the panel would monitor the planning
and implementation of the proposed actions in this report.
Conclusion
These are challenging times economically but it does not
mean that opportunities no longer exist for potential
entrepreneurs, nor does it mean that we should stop
seeking to enhance the education that our young people
receive. Cooney (2008) wrote that the Tatas & Birlas
were born in the education jungle and highlighted the
vision of Maulana Abul Kalam Azad in making available
free secondary education to every child in the country,
and how it eventually will led to a well-educated nation
that will be strongly positioned to take full advantage of
the global market opportunity that will be presented itself
to India in the 2020s. What is now needed is someone
with similar vision, someone who can see beyond the
next election and instead introduce a strategy that will
serve as the basis for a successful independent economy
in future years. A smart economy requires young people
who truly know what it means to be entrepreneurial.

REFERENCES

1. Central Board of Secondary Education, 2002. Entrepreneurship. Secretary, CBSE, Preet Vihar, Delhi.
2. Charantimath Poornima, 2008. Entrepreneur Development Small Business Enterprise. Darling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi.
3. Dollinger, 2006. Entrepreneurship, Strategies and Resources. Pearson, Low priced edition, New Delhi, Third Edition.
4. Gupta C.B., Khanka S.S., 2003. Entrepreneurship & Small Business Management. Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi,
Fourth Edition.
5. Hatten S Timothy, 1997. Small Business Entrepreneurship and Beyond. Prentice Hall, New Jersey
6. Hisrich-Peters, 1995. Entrepreneurship, Starting, Developing & Managing a new Enterprise. Irwin, Chicago, Third Edition.
7. Kilby Peter, 1971, Hunting The Heffalump, in Kilby Peter [ed.] Entrepreneurship and Economic Development. The Free
Press, New York
Website :- www.mced.org.in, www.educare.org.in, www.smallindustryindia.com

ABSTRACT Training & Development is performance oriented. The main purpose of this article is find out the
effectiveness of training and understand the ability of the individual and to satisfy the current and future manpower needs of
the organization.

KEYWORDS: Human resource, Training, Development

STUDY OBJECTIVE AND METHODOLOGY
A. Objective -
1. Understand the meaning of training.
2. Understand the needs of training
3. Know the types of training .
4. Evaluation of training
B. Methodology -
1. Interview
2. Observation
C. Area of study-
Industrial area in and around Aurangabad ,
Maharashtra ,India
Introduction:-
Training today has become an integral
part of any organization's functions and it is believed
that the effective performance of the functionaries in
the organization depends on the trained personal
managing them. Training may be construed as the art
& science of helping the functionaries in acquiring
knowledge and skills of those who practice in an
organization to make them more effective in achieving
the objective of the organization.
Definition of Training :-
Training is a short term, organized and
systematic process using which employees are
enabled to achieve technical knowhow and skills for
particular objectives Dale Yoder.
Training : It's need
Training is an essential input in providing
learning opportunities to employees of an organization
to enable them to optionally contribute towards
meeting the short-and long term objectives of the
organization. Thus, all the activities pertaining to
training must be related to the specific needs of both
the organization and the individual employees. The
specificity with which training needs are stated will be
for effectiveness of the training efforts as it will assist in
evaluating firstly; the extent to which the skill required
for a particular task or role have been acquired and
utilized in improving one's performance and extent to
which the individual interests, aspirations and
potentials have been met and realized for ensuring job
satisfaction and employee growth.
Types of Training:-
When we are planning a training programme,
we have to consider the objective of the training, when
it is to be given the period of training, the trainee's
background etc.
There are different type of training
1) Induction Training: -
The training given to a new recruit before he
begins his work so that he may be familiarized with the
organization is called Induction Training. The
employee is given information regarding the objectives
of the organizations, policies, working conditions,
hours of work, various departments which the
organization and their superior officers, the nature of
the job he has to undertake etc.
2. Job Training: -
This is training given regarding the actual job.
This training is given to both new and existing
employees of the organization. This training includes
the nature of the job entrusted to him, the finer points
regarding the job, the machinery and equipment he
has to handle, the best method to do the work etc.
Such training is generally on hands training or
Practical training.
3. Refresher Training :-
Refresher Training aims at revising the training
earlier imparted to the employees. Training is a
continual process. The main aim of this training is to
revise the training given earlier and to modernize it.
Recurring training after a specified period helps the
employee to keep his knowledge up to date and his
skills at the highest level.
4. Training for Promotion: -
Vacancies occur due to promotion, demotion,
resignation or death of employees. New job
requirements create vacancies. Those employees
within the organization are found eligible for the job are
granted promotions and appointed to the new job. It is
essential to impart training to such employees to
provide them with the necessary knowledge and skills
Dr. Kotgire Manisha Dr. Kotgire Manisha Dr. Kotgire Manisha Dr. Kotgire Manisha Kohinoor Art's, Commerce and Science College, Khultabad,
Maharashtra
Organizational Performance -Effectiveness of
Training
to take up the new job. The training given to an
employee to cover his needs on promotion is called
Training for Promotion.
5. Training regarding Safety: -
It is essential for every employee to do his job
correctly. At the same time, he is required to take
certain precautions. Imparting training as to what
precautions are necessary while handling a particular
job is called safety related training. This training aims
at reducing risks and dangerous situations arising due
to various reasons.
Evaluation of training:-
In order to assess the extent to which training
programmes have achieved the purposes for which
they are designed, it is necessary to evaluate various
activities that have culminated in the implementation of
the training package such an evaluation exercise
would provide relevant information not only about the
effectiveness of training but also about the future
design of other training programmes. It is through the
process of evaluation that training specialists can
monitor the training programmes and update, modify
and innovate in future training programme. The
evaluation of the outcome and consequence of training
also provides useful data on the basis of which
relevance of training and its integration with other
functions of management can be established.
Table 1.1 Training and Development Programmes for
Employees.
Response Frequency Percent Cumulative
Percent
Excellent 7 2.3 2:3
Good 20 6.6 8:9
Average 68 22.3 31:1
Poor 210 68.9 100:0
Total 305 100.0
As shown in table 1.1, a majority
(68.91 %) of the respondents opined that opportunities
for employee training and development are poor.
More than twenty two percent respondents opinion is
"average" nearly seven percent of the respondents
opinion is good and the rest of them stated that the
training and programmes for employees are
"excellent".
Table 1.2 Opportunities to make use of the skills
learned
Response Frequency Percent Cumulative
Percent
Excellent 8 26 2.6
Good 46 15.1 17.7
Average 132 43.3 61.0
Poor 119 39.0 100:0
Total 305 100:0
Table 1.2 presents the opinion of the respondents on
the opportunities to make use of the skill learned in the
training, more than two-fifth of the respondents felt
average while nearly forty percent as poor. A little
more than fifteen and nearly three percent of the
respondents opined as good and excellent respectively
43.3 percent of the respondents stated that the
opportunities they have is average.
Conclusion :-
Organization is made up of people and
through their endeavors the organization achieves its
objectives and success. Therefore, training can
contribute to the success of the organization and
enable to employees to
1) Improve their job performance which in turn
enhances the performance of the organization.
2) Achieve Promotion and follow a chosen career
path.
3) Achieve Job satisfaction.

REFERENCES

1) Arun Monappa and Mirza Saiyadain Personnel Management. New Delhi. Tata MCGrow Hill Publishing Company.
2) Sarma A.M. Personal and Human Resource Management, Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House- 146.
3) Ravishankar Sand, R.K. Mishra, Management of Human Resource in Publication Enterprises, New Delhi : Vision
Books Pvt. Ltd - 22
4) Subbo Rao - Essential of Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations, Mumbai : Himalaya Publishing
House.
5) Sashi Bala (1984) Management of small scale Industries, new Delhi Deepa and Deepa.
6) Heneman, Herbort, G III etal, Personal Human Resource Management, Irwin : Third Edition 224.
7) Patro, G.C. Human Resource Management New Delhi : Discovery Publishing House.
8) Stephen P. Robbins (2012), Organizational Behavior person Education., INC Publishing as prentice Hall.


ABSTRACT The major theories that have shaped developmental psychology are psychoanalysis (fraud) behaviorism
(system), genetic epistemology (piaset), and the theory of the historical cultural development process of the mind. The current
areas of research in developmental psychology are 1. Lifespan development 2. Developmental system theory of developmental
biology 3. Development behavioral statics and research into cognitive neuroscience and 4. Applied development at psychology
in the future, along with more corporation with relevant disciplines, especially developmental biology, the how pertinent to
applied developmental psychology will emerge and certainly stimulate thinking about human development. Development
psychology is a branch of modern psychology that studies the onto genetic development of individual human beings, which
includes all stages of development form the parental until old age and death. There have two major discussions in the
theoretical issues of human development 1. The interplay between biological inheritance development is continues
(quantitative) or discontinuous( qualitative).

INTRODUCTION :
Population ageing is a common issue in the
developed countries and concerns are growing for
the affect again has on people among those nations
Japan displays on exceptionally high rate of gains at
25% and requires and adjustment of not only medical
care and welfare but also important issues for the
elderly including technology living environment and
erratic and also important psychological aspect. I am
conducting multicoated study within the faculty of
human development through collaboration with groups
working on sociology and physiology.
Developmental psychology is the field of
psychology which involves the examination of both
constancy and change in human behavior A cross the
entire life span, that is from conception to death
developmental psychologists are concerned with
diverse issue ranging from the growth of motor skills in
the infant, to the sains and losses observed in the
intellectual functioning of the elderly. The goal of the
study in development psychology is to future our
knowledge about how development evolves over the
entire life span, developing a knowledge of the general
principles of development and the difference and
similarities in development across individuals. The
range of topics comprising the study of modern
psychology is vast, and encompasses sub areas as
diverse as social psychology, comparative psychology
the study of learning, neuropsychology, abnormal
psychology and cognitive psychology.
WHAT IS DEVELOPMENT:
Development as patterns of change over time
which basing at conception and continue through the
life span. Development occurs in different domains
such as the biological (change in our physical being)
social (changes in our social relationship) emotional
(changes in our emotional understanding and
experiences) and cognitive (changes in our thought
process). Some development psychologists prefer to
restrict the nation of development only to changes
which lead to qualitative reorganizations in the
structure of a behavior, skill or ability where believed
that development consisted of two processes
interaction and differentiation.
Development consists of the integration of
more basic, previously acquired behavior in to new,
higher level structures, for the example, according to
Piaget. The baby who learns to successfully reach for
objects has learned to coordinate a variety of skills
such as main tainting an upright posture, moving the
on visually coordinating the position often hand and
the object, and grasping the object under our
integrated structure called a scheme.
Development as a combination of these two
process of integration and differentiation he saw
development as a process of increasing hierarchical
integrating and increasing differentiation course,
wheres view of development is by no means
universally accepted within developmental psychology
mainly developmental list argue that anything which
evidences change our time is relevant to the study of
development lists argue that anything which evidence
change over time is relevant to the study of
development. Thus this debate remains a tension
within the study of human development.
Gaikwad Chakradhar P. Gaikwad Chakradhar P. Gaikwad Chakradhar P. Gaikwad Chakradhar P.
Rashtriya Arts, Commerce and Science College,
Aurangabad, Maharashtra.
Human Development Psychology
Development psychology is interested in the
scientific study of sensory and motor development as
well as in cognitive, linguistic, emotional and social
development cognitive development and social
development and social development have been as
the forefront of theory and research Jear Piasets
genetic epistemology and information processing
theories have inspired many studies on children
perception of the outside world as well as childrens
cognitive and socialization processes. Socialization
involves individuals learning of socially acceptable
behaviors and moral standards, acquisition of social
experience, the formation of values and belief, as well
as the development of personality and identity of
individuals as independent and members of society.
Frequently studies topics in social development and
socialization include pro-social behaviors, anti-social
behaviors, sexual roles, self-consciousness, identity,
moral development, influences, peer pressures, and
the effects of mass media on child and adolescent
psychological development is typically divided into
stages adolescence, adulthood and late adulthood.
Research infantant infancy, childhood, psychological
development has always received much attention only
in the last quarter of the twentieth century has the
process of assign started to receive much attention
only in the last quarter of the twentieth century has the
process of assign started to receive special attention
sharking much research on the psychological
development inherent to late adulthood. In
comparison, late young adulthood has received little
attention. Only in the last quarter of the twentieth
century has the process of aging started to receive
special attention sparking much research on the
psychological development inherent to late adulthood.
In comparison, late young adulthood have received
little attention.
There are two preferred controlled
observations design used in developmental
psychology. Longitudinal and cross-sectional studies.
In longitudinal studies, the same individuals are
observed on several occasions over time. The major
advantage of this approach is that it observed how
specific individuals are developing over time. Course
sectional studies observe individuals of different age
groups simultaneously at a particular time-This method
can thus gather developmental data from different age
groups in a relatively short period time. Developmental
changes that are attributable to differences caused by
the simple effect of time. Developmental changes that
are attributable different historical background are
confounded with those attributable to normal aging
thus rendering generational differences vulnerable to
being mistatgenly interpreted as individual
developmental change.
Human development and environment and the
faculty of Human Development will pursue the creation
of an innovative academic field of human and
community development. Some of these theories are
more important from historical perspective, whereas
others one theories that are relatively recent
stalemates which are gaining increasing attention from
developmental psychologists as important. Ways
conceptualizes developmental issues.
Introduces you to diverse article such as the
growth of social relations, the nature and inactions of
play, how conceptions of friendship change with age,
the importance of being accepted by ones peere and
the development of an understanding role of minds in
social behavior finally issues surrounds the prevention
and treatment of psychology in childhood.

REFERENCES

1. Arlin P.K. (1975) 3 connective development in adulthood : A fifth stage developmental psychology 211: 602-606.
2. Becker G.S. (1971) The Economic approach to Human Behaviour chiaso university press.
3. Dixon R.A. and lerher R.M. (1999) History and systems developmental psychology developmental psychology Mahwah
N.J. Lawrence Erlbum.
4. Hawkins Scott and Hastie Reid Hind signt Biased Judgments of Past Event after the outcomes are Known psychology
Bulletin May 1990.
5. Reese H.W. (1993) Developments in child psychology from the 1960s to the Development 0113. 503-504.
6. Tappan M. 1996 the narrative approach to moral development from the epistemic subject to dialogical salves Human
Development.
7. www.humandevelopmentpsychology.com

ABSTRACT This response has proven favorable over the course of their lives (and even over human history). Put
differently, much of our unconscious consumer processing is likely to be quite adaptive and functional. In such situations, the
consumer need not be concerned. These processes save precious conscious cognitive resources in a world of increasingly
taxed individuals. But when the non-conscious system leads to an undesirable outcome, a consumer can only avoid this
outcome if he or she is aware that the process is occurring in the first place. By more broadly studying such processes and
perhaps developing response or control strategies, consumer welfare can be substantially enhanced.

INTRODUCTION:
What exactly is non-conscious consumer
psychology? We use the term to describe a category
of consumption behavior that is driven by processes
that occur outside a consumer's conscious awareness.
In other words, individuals engage in consumption
related cognition, motivation, decision making,
emotion, and behavior without recognizing the role that
non-conscious processes played in shaping them.
Objective of study:
The study reveals the following objectives
1) It gives the main objective to understand the
consumer psychology in terms of its rules and
regulations.
2) Consumer psychology may vary as per the
requirements of the products.
Research Methodology:
The research investigates the value of
consumer Psychology analysis in a commercial
context. This study is based on secondary data
collected through books, journals and websites. The
researcher relied on the secondary data and
Information source for analysis of study.
History:
A brief history of the non-conscious in
consumer psychology It was not that long ago that the
use of the term no conscious (or unconscious) to
describe consumer psychology was essentially
verboten. Perhaps researchers were (too) comfortable
with the traditional information processing models
implying that consumer behavior is driven by
conscious, deliberative thought and choice. Perhaps
some were unaware of the virtual revolution of
automaticity in social psychology over the last several
decades. Perhaps consumer psychologists, along with
many consumers, did not want to acknowledge that
many of the processes that occur in a consumption
domain occur largely outside the awareness of the
consumer. In 2001 a group of 12 researchers gathered
in a research track at the Choice Symposium to talk
about their belief that the unconscious played an
important, or some might say critical, role in forwarding
our revolution of automaticity in social psychology over
the last several decades. Perhaps consumer
psychologists, along with many consumers, did not
want to acknowledge that many of the processes that
occur in a consumption domain occur largely outside
the awareness of the consumer. In 2001 a group of 12
researchers gathered in a research track at the Choice
Symposium to talk about their belief that the
unconscious played an important, or some might say
critical, role in forwarding our understanding of
consumer psychology. It was emboldening to
(i) hear that other researchers were working on
related research ideas centered around non-
conscious processes and
(ii) Learn that none of us were alone in experiencing
strong resistance from consumer research
gatekeepers (e.g., editors and editorial boards) to
the notion that key processes in consumption
were often largely no conscious.
(iii) or another examine no conscious consumer In
the 10 years since that conference there has
been an explosion of research on consumption
being driven by processes occurring outside
conscious awareness. It is rare to see an issue of
the Journal of Consumer Psychology (or any
other top tier consumer behavior.

Dr. Vasundhara Maturkar Dr. Vasundhara Maturkar Dr. Vasundhara Maturkar Dr. Vasundhara Maturkar
(Channe) (Channe) (Channe) (Channe)
Kuldip Patil Kuldip Patil Kuldip Patil Kuldip Patil
Shri Muktanand College ,Gangapur. Dist. Aurangabad,
Maharashtra
An Innovative Study of Consumer Psychology
Factors of Consumer Psychology:
1) A growing literature has documented that a wide
range of consumption behaviors are strongly
influenced by factors outside of people's conscious
awareness.
2) For instance, consumers are often unaware they
have been exposed to an environmental cue that
triggers a given consumption behavior, or are
unaware of a mental process that is occurring
outside conscious awareness, or are even
unaware of the consumption-related outcome of
such a non conscious process. Such processes
are often adaptive and highly functional, but at
times can lead to undesirable outcomes for
consumers. By shining a light on a wide range of
no conscious consumer psychology we hope to
facilitate increased reliance on our unconscious
systems in certain situations and equip consumers
to defend themselves when unconscious
processes can lead to negative outcomes.
3) What exactly then is a non-conscious
psychological process for a consumer? We define
it as a subset of automatic processing An
automatic process is one that, once set into
motion, has no need of conscious intervention.
4) The labeling of automatic processes in social and
cognitive psychology, including those set forth in
dual process models, implies that processes are
either automatic or they are not. Labels such as
automatic/controlled,
5) This continuum view of the conscious nature of
decision making is important as it suggests that
the study of non-conscious processes in consumer
choice is important not just for a small category of
research topics that focus on subliminal
persuasion and other relatively rare and/ or
extreme situations. Rather, virtually all consumer
psychology has both a conscious and non-
conscious elements that are important to
understand.
Conclusion:
As a result, we believe that consumer
psychologists studying motivation, emotion,
attitude formation, and decision making should all
consider the role of the unconscious in the specific
processes they are examining. The conclusion
shows that the demonstrated with the consumer
applications and their benefits towards the
commercial environment.

REFERENCES

Bargh, J. A. (1989). Conditional automaticity: varieties of automatic influence on social perception and cognition. In J.
Uleman, & J. Bargh (Eds.),
Unintended thought. New York: Guilford.
Bargh, J. A. (1994). The four horsemen of automaticity: awareness, intention,
efficiency, and control in social cognition. In R. S. WyerJr., & T. K. Srull
(Eds.), Handbook of social cognition (pp. 140). (2nd ed.). Hillsdale, NJ:
Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc.
Bargh, J. A. (1999). The cognitive monster: the case against the controllability
of automatic sterotype effects. In Chaiken, & Trope (Eds.), Dual-process theories in social psychology. New York:
Guilford.

ABSTRACT Behavioral Finance is an upcoming field of finance which seeks to combine the behavioral and cognitive
psychological theory with the classical finance theories. The individual investors in the real world are subject to various
judgmental biases and emotions. These emotions play a vital role in the decision making process while investing. The most
important investors traits as discussed below are anchoring, mental accounting and herd behavior. These traits of investors
behavior can be overcome by certain simple ways. These ways are also discussed in brief in the present paper.

KEYWORDS: Behavioral Finance, Investors Traits, Anchoring, Mental Accounting, Herd
Behavior

What is Behavior Finance?
Behavior Finance is the upcoming financial
decision making aspect which tries to study the
reasons behind the behavior of the investors in the
markets. This behavior of investors causes market
fluctuations also. It attempts to explain the reasoning
pattern of investors which includes the emotional
processes and the degree to which it influences the
decision making process. It focuses on the application
of psychological and economic principles for the
improvement of financial decision making.
While the classical finance theories assume
the man thinks and acts rationally and the markets
also behave rationally and efficiently, but in the real
world this is not the case. The individual investors in
real world are subject to judgmental biases and
emotions. These emotions play a role in decision
making which causes the markets to deviate from fair
values and thus market cycles result.
Traits of Investors Behavior
The key traits are the concepts which are
identified by various behavioral economists. These
traits are the factors contributing to irrational and
detrimental financial decision making. If one goes
through it may be observed that at one or the other
point of time all of us have fallen prey to some of these
biases.
1. Anchoring: Anchoring can be explained as
the reference point around which the investors
decisions are based. This reference point does not
necessarily have any logical sense. Here the decisions
of investors are based on irrelevant facts, figures and
statistics.
People usually tend to be very optimistic about the
knowledge they possess. They also tend to be more
confident about their knowledge or abilities. They also
act the same way. They attribute their profits or
positive performances to their skills and abilities
whereas loses are attributed to bad luck. This is due to
overconfidence about their skills, abilities and
knowledge, which may be illogical or irrelevant at
times.
It is also observed in many cases, that the
investors favor only those alternatives where the
unknown factors are few. It means they fear the
unknown and therefore their decisions are based only
on the known factors.
There also exists a fear anchor in the minds of
investors. The decisions of investors also revolve
around the information available about the alternative
investment avenues. If the fear for loss comes true in
the short time they certainly regret their decision for
not choosing the other alternative. This may lead to
investors not taking any decisions in future or staying
away from such investments.
2. Mental Accounting: Mental accounting is the
tendency of the people to separate their money into
separate accounts based on variety of subjective
criteria. There are different ways of mental accounting
followed by different people. Some people make a
variety of investments to justify a diversified portfolio
but what they mentally account for is a separate
investment for separate purpose. Here they do not
treat their entire portfolio as one but separate it into
small parts. For e.g. a separate investment is
maintained for vacation, higher education, home etc.
It is also an observed tendency among people to treat
the different sources of income differently instead of
treating it as mere income and investing it accordingly.
Income from tax returns or dividends received is
treated as easy money and spent on luxuries or
comforts whereas only the income earned from
salaries are invested. This tendency of investors is
nothing but a case of mental accounting.
The incomes earned from are first used to
invest in special investments whereas the debt
payment is not done. Investors usually tend to treat
money differently. They invest or park their money in
jars which earns them little or no interest whereas the
same money is not used to make the repayment of
Manisha S. Vaidya Manisha S. Vaidya Manisha S. Vaidya Manisha S. Vaidya Sir Dr M.S.Gosavi College of Commerce, Nasik, Maharashtra
Behavioral Finance: Traits of Investors Behavior
credit card interest which multiplies at around 20%
annually.
There is a tendency among investors to believe the
simple rule of thumb. It means they fear to enter into
complex calculations. They make their decisions
based on the information which is frequently
bombarded on to their ears which makes them believe
it.
3. Herd Behavior: Herd behavior is the tendency
of the people to mimic the actions of the large group of
people. This can be attributed to the human
psychology of living in groups. Here also while
investing people do not like to be left alone and so they
follow a large group of people.
The main reason behind the herd behavior
may be the peer or social pressure. It is the human
psychology to be accepted by all people and therefore,
even if one does not understand the calculations
investments are made on the basis of simple
fundamental principle that if I dont understand means
I am dumb; the whole group cannot be dumb. They are
smarter than me and so I should follow them.
It is observed that frequent buying and selling
in pursuit of newest trends is also a herd behavior.
History has many evidences of this tendency. The
latest among it was the Dotcom bubble of 2000
where the whole market crashed due to the herd
mentality of the people who blindly went on putting
more and more into the internet business without any
scrutiny of the earnings of these companies.
Investors are usually very loss sensitive. The
impact of the short term loss is more painful than the
joy of short term gains. Also, people tend to follow the
herd in expectation of gains only. This is nothing but
gambling to win only. The real problem here is the
judgment of the right time of entry in the markets. By
the time investors start following the herd, many of the
earlier investors have already made money and are
ready to quit. This leaves the later entrants with very
less profits or even losses at times.
Steps to reduce the impact of biases:
1. Investors should broaden their concept of
wealth to include not only stocks but also other
investment avenues which would add to their income
as well as create assets in the future. It means
investors must diversify their portfolio to include other
assets.
2. Investors should review their portfolios at
regular intervals and evaluate them periodically
instead of continuously. This is because the volatile
markets smoothen out and give better returns in the
long term only.
3. Investors are advice to have a long term
baseline and diversify accordingly. The portfolio must
also include non-traditional as well as traditional fixed
income bearing assets.
4. Portfolios need to be rebalanced regularly in
fixed periods like quarterly, half-yearly or annually.
This helps the investors to focus on the future earnings
rather than past performances.
5. Investors must ask as many questions as
possible to get all the information before making any
decision. If one does not understand the working of the
business, it is better to stay away from it than to follow
the group.
6. All the investments carry certain risks. These
risks must be understood clearly before making any
decisions. The risks undertaken must be
commensurate with the returns it earns. At the same
time, it should be in accordance with the risk appetite.
7. It must be remembered that there is no right
time for the market, but a right time for you. It is very
difficult to time the market as it is very volatile. But it
should be kept in mind that every volatility evens in the
long run. Therefore it is advisable not to follow the herd
blindly without any calculations.
Conclusion
From the above discussion it can be
concluded that people are social animals and they
therefore want to be in the company of people. They
always follow their peers and group mates. The
decisions made always have an impact of the peer
pressure. Any decisions made regarding investments
many times are not rationally made, there is always
some or the other emotion involved in it. These
emotions sometimes attach thoughts to certain
perceptions or reference points while taking any
investment decisions. The emotions also let investors
to divide and invest. They separate their money into
separate jars having separate purposes. All these
emotion should be kept at bay while taking any
investment decisions. The investments must be made
rationally in order to acquire wealth.

REFERENCES

1. Ricciardi, V. (n.d) What is Behavioral Finance? Business, Education & Technology Journal, Vol 2, No2.pp1-9 fall2000
2. Phung, A. (n.d) Behavioral Finance: Introduction http://www.investopedia.com
3. Breaking Bad Behaviors: understanding Investing Biases and How to Overcome Them (Feb 2003)
http://www.ishares.com
4. 6 Things You Need To Know To Ride Out A Volatile Stock Market http://www.franklintempletonindia.com
5. Simple Strategies For Investing Success http://www.franklintempletonindia.com
6. Andrikopoulas, P (n.d) Modern Finance Vs. Behavioral Finance: An Overview Of Key Concepts And Major Arguments
Dept. of accounting and Finance, Leicester Business School, De Montfort University
7. Ricciardi, V (2003) A Research Starting Point For The New Scholar: A Unique Perspective Of Behavioral Finance The
ICFAI Journal of Behavioural Finance Vol III No 3, 2006


INTRODUCTION
Behavioral finance, unlike classic economic
models, allows the thought that human behavior in
financial markets is not entirely rational, and that
markets need not be effective. Pioneer publications
on behavioral finance appeared as early as 1979, yet
we are still far from a complete psychological model
of market behavior, incorporation of psychology into
behavioral finance is still weak, serving just as an
explanation for anomalies not fit- ting into
conventional economic models. Therefore
psychological theories of market behavior need to be
more than just arguments against the effective market
hypothesis. The study on the impact of psychology on
financial markets has yielded several important
phenomena, heuristics and cognitive errors related to
investment decisions, recently broadening its area of
interest to social psychology and herding behavior.
The area of memory-related phenomena has not yet
been widely analyzed by researchers of behavioral
finance. The aim of this paper is to introduce yet
another psychological phenomenon capable of
severely affecting investors behavior on financial
markets the misinformation effect.
The misinformation effect in behavioral finance
Relevance of the misinformation effect to
financial markets becomes understandable when we
take into account the amount of data delivered every
day from economies around the world. Receiving
more and more information is of little to no gain for
investors, as they dont properly weight information,
rely on unsound samples, and fail to recognize what
the market already knows. One could even expect the
abundance of information to have an adverse effect on
the investors decisions. As access to stock market
information becomes increasingly easier, thanks to
the abundance of news programs and finance-related
websites, so does access to incorrect information.
This is especially true of various interpretations and
analyses although raw financial values are usually
the same regardless of source, the perceived
consequences of those values differ between analysts
and commentators. In short, the misinformation effect
can occur wherever there are several sources
regarding the same situation, and at least one of
those sources is possibly inconsistent with the other
ones. Thus, apart from commentaries and opinions,
the misinformation effect may appear in technical or
fundamental analysis, recommendations,
transactional systems and market-related literature.
One could even find an instance of the
misinformation effect in financial data themselves:
every month, the ADP report.
Factors modulating the misinformation effect
Having shown the possible relation between
the misinformation effect and behavioral finance, it is
important to describe several factors, which cause the
effect to become stronger ones that possibly appear
in situations related to financial markets, increasing
the relevance of the missing- formation effect to
financial markets. Stock market data is an area
particularly prone to all forms of misinformation, due
to the fact that predictions made from current events
always leave a degree of uncertainty, making it harder
to distinguish between valid and incorrect
information. Moreover, the similarity between the
original and misleading source plays a major role in
the magnitude of the effect the more similar the two
sources are, the bigger the chance of confusing
them. This is explained by one of the more
interesting theories of misinformation effect: source
monitoring errors. According to this concept, subjects
exposed to two different sources may remember the
data from both those sources, but are unable to recall
which data comes from a particular source. For
example, an investor planning to buy stocks of
company X for a short period of time may be interested
in short-term analyses only. The subject is exposed to
a negative short-term analysis for the next month.
Afterwards, the investor reads a long-term analysis,
which takes the current negative situation as mere
information noise, insignificant in the long run. The
misinformation effect will cause some of the subjects
to recall details from the long-term analysis as parts
of the short-term one, resulting in a less accurate
decision (assuming the analyses are correct). In
Zaragoza and Lanes studies, 31% of misled
participants claimed to have seen the incorrect detail
Dr.Bhagwan D.Sangle Dr.Bhagwan D.Sangle Dr.Bhagwan D.Sangle Dr.Bhagwan D.Sangle
Babuji Avhad Mahavidyalay, Pathardi Dist.Ahemadnagar,
Maharashtra
The Misinformation Effect in Financial Markets-
An Emerging Issue in Behavioral Finance
in the original. If we use suggestive questions instead
of a misleading text, the proportion of source
monitoring errors grows to 42%. The words we use to
describe events can also significantly influence the
subjects memory. Loftus and Palmer (1974)
conducted a study, in which they showed the
participants a video recording of a car crash.
Afterwards they asked the subjects to assess the
speed, at which the cars were going when they
smashed. Other participants were asked the same
question, only with the word smashed substituted by
bumped, collided, hit or contacted. The results
showed that if the word suggested the crash to have
been serious (e.g. smashed), the subjects reported the
speed to have been higher, than if the word was
delicate. Some of the participants even reported to
have seen broken glass on the road. Since a single
word is able to change the perception of a car crash in
such a serious manner, using extreme words in relation
to stock market data is to have the same effect. For
example, should an analysis state that annual GDP
change shows that emerging markets are having a
tough time is going to have a smaller effect on
investors reactions than annual GDP change shows
that emerging markets are in a crisis even though
both conclusions stem from the same data, and differ
only by a single word. Should the results of the
experiment by Loftus and Palmer (1974) be reproduced
in such a situation, using a more severe word in the
aforementioned description might even cause the
subjects to recall the raw GDP figures as lower than in
the other group.
One of the most important facilitating factors
of the misinformation effect is the time interval
between exposure to the original source, the
misleading source, and the subjects answer. Ac-
cording to extensive research (Loftus et al., 1978;
Hertel, Cosden and Johnson, 1980; Peterson,
Parsons and Dean, 2004), the misinformation effect is
the strongest when there is a long time interval
between the original and misleading sources, almost
immediately followed by the test. This way, subjects
are most likely to forget the original and rely solely
on misinformation. In a financial market situation, this
design especially favours misleading data containing
extreme content (i.e. such that the investor is forced
to act instantly, in fear of immediate losses). If the
extreme content refers to some older data (i.e. a
reinterpretation) and makes the investor make
immediate choices, the misinformation effect is most
likely to occur. If we combine that with the
aforementioned results by Loftus and Palmer (1974),
the probability of this particular kind of misinformation
having negative impact is not to be ignored.
Another important factor is the probability of
the event described in the misleading source.
According to Loftus (1979) and Pezdek, Finger and
Hodge (1997), it is easiest to create misinformation
about events which are most probable to happen.
Moreover, according to Dodd and Bradshaw (1980),
the believability of the source of information itself (i.e.
whether the source is blatantly biased or not) has
very little to no impact on the magnitude of the
misinformation effect. In theory, a statement by the
most acclaimed analyst is as effective a
misinformation as an anonymous post on a webpage.
Conclusions
As shown above, the misinformation effect is
likely to occur in financial markets, and its potential
consequences for behavioral finance are not to be
ignored. While research gives us proof that the
misinformation effect is capable of altering the
investors memory traces, the link between those
traces and investment choices needs to be
investigated empirically. Moreover, experimental
research is required due to the specific type of
reasoning behind investment-related decisions, and
the difference between the methodology used in
behavioral finance studies and the standard memory
tests applied in forensic\cognitive psychology research.
There is also very little knowledge on the
misinformation effect which can be directly applied to
financial markets, and research in that matter seems
both important and promising.

REFERENCES

1. A Model of Investor Sentiment. Journal of Financial Economics.
2. DeBondt, W., Thaler, R. (1985). Does the Stock Market Overreact.
3. Dodd, D. H., Bradshaw, J. M. (1980). Leading Questions and Memory: Pragmatic Constraints.Journal of Verbal
Learning and Verbal Behavior,
4. Dow, S. C. (2011). Cognition, Market Sentiment and Financial Instability. Cambridge Journal of Economics.
5. Eisen, M. L., Carlson, E. B. (1998). Individual Differences in Suggestibility: Applied Cognitive Psychology.
6. Fama, E. (1970). Efficient Capital Markets: A Review of Theory and Empirical Work. Journal of Finance.

INTRODUCTION :
Indian become independent on 15
th
Aug. 1947
the congress working committee recommend to from
planning commission ensuring planed economic
development. Subsequently Nehru formed planning
commission in 1950 and the 1
st
5 year plan was
declared for the period of 1951-56 with the prime
objectives of formation of socialistic pattern of society
and elimination of poverty and unemployment. The
parliament passed a special resolution to this effect in
1954.
India took revolutionary step introducing New
Industrial Policy in July 1991 and New Trade policy in
March 1992 not only marching toward 21
st
Century but
also to open the economy. The revolutionary decision
taken by the country was appreciated by developed
countries in their own interest and created atmosphere
that India will be financially super power all over the
world by 2000. Now we have crossed year 2000. Now
many problems are there, that we cant answer
positive. Hence, it is the proper time to see that what
exactly happened in the country particularly after 1991.
India has the decision to globalize its economy
in 1991 and started to advocate the decision giving
several arguments in favor of integration of Indian
economy with global economy. Since then Govt. have
taken many steps to liberalize, privatize and globalize
the economy. World Trade Organization (WTO)
established in 1995. As a signatory to the General
Agreement on Tariff and (GATT) and as a founder
member of WTO. India is required to dismantle the
quotas and restrictions on import and bring down the
tariff barriers.
Object of Indian Economy :-
I. Investment of Economy : FII and FDI :-
Since 1991 Foreign Institutions Investment
and Foreign Direct Investment in several sectors is
remarkable. Capital and Consumer product industries,
service sector industries received this FII and FDI
because of our open door policy. India is not capable
to invest in industries, services, agriculture and
infrastructure at his own so we encouraged foreign
institutions and foreigners for investment. Every Indian
state is aware that without the help of FII and FDI we
are not going to reach our targets, so everybody is in
the race. As a part of globalization FII is increasing day
to day.
II. Industrialization : of Economy :-
India adopted privatization as a part of new
economy policy. India's new industrial policy ended the
License Raj system. Now India adopted disinvestment
policy for Public Sector companies, MNC's to lead the
industrial sector. In India MNC's have captured the
Indian market and they are the leading players in
various industries. Because of their money, manpower
and machinery investment, the process of
industrialization is going rapidly. Through this
industrialization skillful jobs are created. Today MNC's
made their reputed place in industrial sector.
III. Modernization of Economy :-
Indian agriculture and industries require
innovative changes for the higher productivity.
Modernization is the base of developmental change.
Globalization fulfilled this need of Indian economy.
Today because of modern mechanism and technology
Indian industries and other sectors going hand to hand
with MNC's. MNC's not only came with money but also
with their modern technology and skillful manpower
which is helpful and guide to our economy.
IV. Increase in Foreign Trade of Economy :-
India adopted globalization because of
economic crisis which is the result of Bop problem.
Today as the effect of globalization India registered
good track record on trade front. India's Bop position is
becoming stronger and stronger now a days. We got
$48 billion reserve because of successive international
trading. Through FII and FDI capital account amounts
are in surplus. India has implemented Import
Substitution and Export Promotion policy very
successfully. India succeeded in bringing variation in
its export. Export of services is the backbone of our
total export in these days. Today India is the largest
and main software exporter in world economy.

S.P. Budhawant S.P. Budhawant S.P. Budhawant S.P. Budhawant
Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Art's & Commerce College,
Psychology effects on Indian Economy
V. Key to strong developed country :
India adopted planning as medium of
development since 1951 and yet we are waiting in the
Que. of LDC's. We experienced so many obstacles in
the development process. Today we changed our
development strategy through globalization.
Globalization is a big challenge but we are trying to
convert it into choicable chances. There is no reverse
gear in this global vehicle. We must go with the globe.
Now globalization is the only rope through which we
can achieve our goal. China proved that if you want to
become economically strong, try your best through
liberalization and globalization. India also adopted LPG
policy which solved India's investment problem.
Globalization created job opportunities. It has helped
India to increase sectoral production. It has opened the
doors of world economy for Indian goods and services.
It is useful and played guides role for Industry and
other sectors. Globalization provided suitable climate
for development. Now MNC's are eager to invest in
Indian industries. Through collaboration with Indian
companies MNC's are playing opener's inning
according to development. Public sectors white
elephant is the main obstacle in our development
process, we must destroy it through proper
privatization. Our bureaucracy is not functioning with
the directives. We must try to find solution through
market economy. If we compare planning ear from
1951 to 1991 and thereafter there are so many hopes
which we got after adopting new economic policy.
Conclusion :-
In the light of the above observations, we
reached to the conclusion that crisis facing the
economy have been skillfully managed and that phase
is over. The economy has been stabilized and a
conducive environment has been created in the
second phase for India to grow and compete. The
follow up actions must be steady to bring Prosperity to
our Nation.

REFERENCES

1. "Globalization of Indian Economy : A Challenge", Prof. Sondge M. N.
2. "Impact of Globalization on Indian Economy", Prof. G.D. Kharat.
3. "Indian Economy", Dutt and Sundharam
4. "Indian Economy", Misra and Puri
5. "Articles from Times of India"

INTRODUCTION:-
Abraham Harold Maslow (April 1, 1908 June 8, 1970)
was an American psychologist who was best known for
creating Maslow's hierarchy of needs, a theory of
psychological health predicated on fulfilling innate human
needs in priority, culminating in self-actualization. Maslow
was a psychology professor at Brandeis University,
Brooklyn College, New School for Social Research and
Columbia University. He stressed the importance of
focusing on the positive qualities in people, as opposed to
treating them as a "bag of symptoms." Born and raised in
Brooklyn, New York, Maslow was the oldest of seven
children and was classed as "mentally unstable" by a
psychologist. His parents were first generation Jewish
immigrants from Russia who fled from Czarist persecution
in the early 20th century.
Maslows parents had decided to live in New York
City and in a multiethnic, working-class neighbourhood.
His parents were poor and not intellectually oriented, but
they valued education. It was a tough time for Maslow, as
he experienced anti-Semitism from his teachers and from
other children around the neighborhood. He had various
encounters with anti-Semitic gangs who would chase and
throw rocks at him. Maslow and other youngsters at the
time with his background were struggling to overcome
such acts of racism and ethnic prejudice in the attempt to
establish an idealistic world based on widespread
education and monetary justice. The tension outside of
his home was also felt within it, he rarely got along with
his mother, and eventually developed a strong revulsion
to her. He is quoted as saying, "What I had reacted to
was not only her physical appearance, but also her
values and world view, her stinginess, her total
selfishness, her lack of love for anyone else in the world
even her own husband and children her narcissism, her
Negro prejudice, her exploitation of everyone, her
assumption that anyone was wrong who disagreed with
her, her lack of friends, her sloppiness and dirtiness..." He
also grew up with few friends other than his cousin Will,
and as a result "...[He] grew up in libraries and among
books." It was here that he developed his love for reading
and learning. He went to Boys High School, one of the
top high schools in Brooklyn. Here, he served as the
officer to many academic clubs, and became editor of the
Latin Magazine. He also edited Principia, the school's
Physics paper, for a year. He developed other strengths
as well:
As a young boy, Maslow believed physical
strength to be the single most defining characteristic of a
true male; hence, he exercised often and took up weight
lifting in hopes of being transformed into a more
muscular, tough-looking guy, however, he was unable to
achieve this due to his humble-looking and chaste figure
as well as his studiousness.
Academic career of Abraham Harold Maslow
He continued his research at Columbia University,
on similar themes. There he found another mentor in
Alfred Adler, one of Sigmund Freud's early colleagues.
From 1937 to 1951, Maslow was on the faculty of
Brooklyn College. His family life and his experiences
influenced his psychological ideas. After World War II,
Maslow began to question the way psychologists had
come to their conclusions, and though he did not
completely disagree, he had his own ideas on how to
understand the human mind. He called his new discipline
humanistic psychology. Maslow was already a 33-year
old father and had two children when the United States
entered World War II in 1941. He was thus ineligible for
the military. However, the horrors of war instead inspired
a vision of peace in him and this led to his
groundbreaking psychological studies of self-actualizing
people. These studies began with his two mentors,
anthropologist Ruth Benedict and Gestalt psychologist
Max Wertheimer, whom he admired both professionally
and personally. These two were so accomplished in both
realms, and such "wonderful human beings" as well, that
Maslow began taking notes about them and their
behavior. This would be the basis of his lifelong research
and thinking about mental health and human potential. He
wrote extensively on the subject, borrowing ideas from
other psychologists but adding significantly to them,
especially the concepts of a hierarchy of needs, meta
needs, meta motivation, self-actualizing persons, and
peak experiences. Maslow was a professor at Brandeis
University from 1951 to 1969, and then became a
resident fellow of the Laughlin Institute in California. In
1967, Maslow had an almost fatal heart attack, and knew
his time was limited. Maslow considered himself to be a
psychological pioneer. He gave future psychologists a
push by bringing to light different paths to ponder. He built
the framework that later allowed other psychologists to
add in more information. Maslow long believed that
leadership should be non-intervening. Consistent with this
approach, he rejected a nomination in 1963 to be
president of the Association for Humanistic Psychology
Prof. Sanjay B.Shinde
Dr.Chopade B.B
Prof.Thube B.G
Arts, Commerce & Science College, Sonai, Tal- Newasa,Dist:
Ahmednagar, (MS)
B.J Arts, Commerce & Science College,Ale Dist: Pune(MS) )
Abraham Harold Maslow and His Hierarchy of Needs
Theory
because he felt that the organization should develop an
intellectual movement without a leader.
Maslow based his study on the writings of other
psychologists, Albert Einstein and people he knew who
clearly met the standard of self-actualization.
Key worlds:-
Humanistic Psychology, Maslow's hierarchy of
needs, psychology
Definition;
Human needs as ordered in a prepotent hierarchya
pressing need would need to be mostly satisfied before
someone would give their attention to the next highest
need
Objective of the study:-
The present paper has been prepared keeping in mind
the following objectives.
1) To understand the Abraham Harold Maslows
Introduction.
2) To understand hierarchy of needs represented
as a pyramid with the more basic needs at the
bottom.
Research methodology:-
All are a the data present study should have collected
from s secondary source of data collection, related
books, webs ,journals, and other published or
unpublished data.
Maslow's hierarchy of needs;-

An interpretation of Maslow's hierarchy of needs,
represented as a pyramid with the more basic needs at
the bottom

Maslow's hierarchy of needs is a theory in
psychology proposed by Abraham Maslow in his 1943
paper "A Theory of Human Motivation" in Psychological
Review. Maslow subsequently extended the idea to
include his observations of humans' innate curiosity. His
theories parallel many other theories of human
developmental psychology, some of which focus on
describing the stages of growth in humans. Maslow used
the terms Physiological, Safety, Belongingness and Love,
Esteem, Self-Actualization and Self-Transcendence
needs to describe the pattern that human motivations
generally move through.
Maslow studied what he called exemplary people such as
Albert Einstein, Jane Addams, Eleanor Roosevelt, and
Frederick Douglass rather than mentally ill or neurotic
people, writing that "the study of crippled, stunted,
immature, and unhealthy specimens can yield only a
cripple psychology and a cripple philosophy." Maslow
studied the healthiest 1% of the college student
population.
Hierarchy
Maslow's hierarchy of needs is often portrayed in the
shape of a pyramid with the largest, most fundamental
levels of needs at the bottom and the need for self-
actualization at the top. While the pyramid has become
the de facto way to represent the hierarchy, Maslow
himself never used a pyramid to describe these levels in
any of his writings on the subject.
The most fundamental and basic four layers of the
pyramid contain what Maslow called "deficiency needs" or
"d-needs": esteem, friendship and love, security, and
physical needs. If these "deficiency needs" are not met
with the exception of the most fundamental
(physiological) need there may not be a physical
indication, but the individual will feel anxious and tense.
Maslow's theory suggests that the most basic level of
needs must be met before the individual will strongly
desire (or focus motivation upon) the secondary or higher
level needs. Maslow also coined the term Metamotivation
to describe the motivation of people who go beyond the
scope of the basic needs and strive for constant
betterment.
The human mind and brain are complex and have parallel
processes running at the same time, thus many different
motivations from various levels of Maslow's hierarchy can
occur at the same time. Maslow spoke clearly about
these levels and their satisfaction in terms such as
"relative," "general," and "primarily." Instead of stating that
the individual focuses on a certain need at any given
time, Maslow stated that a certain need "dominates" the
human organism. Thus Maslow acknowledged the
likelihood that the different levels of motivation could
occur at any time in the human mind, but he focused on
identifying the basic types of motivation and the order in
which they should be met.
1. Physiological needs;
Physiological needs are the physical requirements for
human survival. If these requirements are not met, the
human body cannot function properly and will ultimately
fail. Physiological needs are thought to be the most
important; they should be met first.
Air, water, and food are metabolic requirements for
survival in all animals, including humans. Clothing and
shelter provide necessary protection from the elements.
While maintaining an adequate birth rate shapes the
intensity of the human sexual instinct, sexual competition
may also shape said instinct.
2. Safety needs;
With their physical needs relatively satisfied, the
individual's safety needs take precedence and dominate
behavior. In the absence of physical safety due to war,
natural disaster, family violence, childhood abuse, etc.
people may (re-)experience post-traumatic stress
disorder or transgenerational trauma. In the absence of
economic safety due to economic crisis and lack of
work opportunities these safety needs manifest
themselves in ways such as a preference for job security,
grievance procedures for protecting the individual from
unilateral authority, savings accounts, insurance policies,
reasonable disability accommodations, etc. This level is
more likely to be found in children because they generally
have a greater need to feel safe.
Safety and Security needs include:
a) Personal security
b) Financial security
c) Health and well-being
d) Safety net against accidents/illness and their
adverse impacts
3. Love and belonging;
After physiological and safety needs are fulfilled, the third
level of human needs is interpersonal and involves
feelings of belongingness. This need is especially strong
in childhood and can override the need for safety as
witnessed in children who cling to abusive parents.
Deficiencies within this level of Maslow's hierarchy due
to hospitalism, neglect, shunning, ostracism, etc. can
impact the individual's ability to form and maintain
emotionally significant relationships in general, such as:
a) Friendship b) Intimacy c) Family
According to Maslow, humans need to feel a sense of
belonging and acceptance among their social groups,
regardless if these groups are large or small. For
example, some large social groups may include clubs, co-
workers, religious groups, professional organizations,
sports teams, and gangs. Some examples of small social
connections include family members, intimate partners,
mentors, colleagues, and confidants. Humans need to
love and be loved both sexually and non-sexually by
others. Many people become susceptible to loneliness,
social anxiety, and clinical depression in the absence of
this love or belonging element. This need for belonging
may overcome the physiological and security needs,
depending on the strength of the peer pressure.
4. Esteem;
All humans have a need to feel respected; this includes
the need to have self-esteem and self-respect. Esteem
presents the typical human desire to be accepted and
valued by others. People often engage in a profession or
hobby to gain recognition. These activities give the
person a sense of contribution or value. Low self-esteem
or an inferiority complex may result from imbalances
during this level in the hierarchy. People with low self-
esteem often need respect from others; they may feel the
need to seek fame or glory. However, fame or glory will
not help the person to build their self-esteem until they
accept who they are internally. Psychological imbalances
such as depression can hinder the person from obtaining
a higher level of self-esteem or self-respect.
Most people have a need for stable self-respect and self-
esteem. Maslow noted two versions of esteem needs: a
"lower" version and a "higher" version. The "lower"
version of esteem is the need for respect from others.
This may include a need for status, recognition, fame,
prestige, and attention. The "higher" version manifests
itself as the need for self-respect. For example, the
person may have a need for strength, competence,
mastery, self-confidence, independence, and freedom.
This "higher" version takes precedence over the "lower"
version because it relies on an inner competence
established through experience. Deprivation of these
needs may lead to an inferiority complex, weakness, and
helplessness.
Maslow states that while he originally thought the
needs of humans had strict guidelines, the "hierarchies
are interrelated rather than sharply separated". This
means that esteem and the subsequent levels are not
strictly separated; instead, the levels are closely related.
5. Self-actualization;
"What a man can be, he must be." This quotation forms
the basis of the perceived need for self-actualization. This
level of need refers to what a person's full potential is and
the realization of that potential. Maslow describes this
level as the desire to accomplish everything that one can,
to become the most that one can be. Individuals may
perceive or focus on this need very specifically. For
example, one individual may have the strong desire to
become an ideal parent. In another, the desire may be
expressed athletically. For others, it may be expressed in
paintings, pictures, or inventions. As previously
mentioned, Maslow believed that to understand this level
of need, the person must not only achieve the previous
needs, but master them.

REFERENCES

1. "Dr. Abraham Maslow, Founder Of Humanistic Psychology, Dies". New York Times. June 10, 1970. Retrieved 2010-09-26. "Dr.
Abraham Maslow, professor of psychology at Brandeis University in Waltham, Mass., and founder of what has come to be known as
humanistic psychology, died of a heart attack. He was 62 years old..
2. Carlson, N. R. (19992000). Memory. Psychology: the science of behavior (Canadian ed., p. 461). Scarborough, Ont.: Allyn and Bacon
Canada .
3. Motivation and Personality (1st edition: 1954, 2nd edition: 1970, 3rd edition 1987)
4. Motivation and Personality (1st edition: 1954, 2nd edition: 1970, 3rd edition 1987)
5. Buniess Management, Nirali Prakashan, Pune.

INTRODUCTION:
Marketing is the process of communicating the
value of a product or service to customers, for the
purpose of selling the product or service. It is a critical
business function for attracting customers.
From a societal point of view, marketing is the link
between a societys material requirements and
its economic patterns of response. Marketing satisfies
these needs and wants through exchange processes and
building long term relationships. It is the process of
communicating the value of a product or service through
positioning to customers. Marketing can be looked at as
an organizational function and a set of processes for
creating, delivering and communicating value to
customers, and managing customer relationships in ways
that also benefit the organization and its shareholders.
Marketing is the science of choosing target
markets through market analysis and market
segmentation, as well as understanding consumer buying
behavior and providing superior customer value.
There are five competing concepts under which
organizations can choose to operate their business; the
production concept, the product concept, the selling
concept, the marketing concept, and the holistic
marketing concept.
[1]
The four components of holistic
marketing are relationship marketing, internal marketing,
integrated marketing, and socially responsive marketing.
The set of engagements necessary for successful
marketing management includes, capturing marketing
insights, connecting with customers, building strong
brands, shaping the market offerings, delivering and
communicating value, creating long-term growth, and
developing marketing strategies and plans
Marketing management is a business discipline
which is focused on the practical application
of marketing techniques and the management of a firm's
marketing resources and activities. Globalization has led
firms to market beyond the borders of their home
countries, making international marketinghighly significant
and an integral part of a firm's marketing
strategy.
[1]
Marketing managers are often responsible for
influencing the level, timing, and composition of customer
demand accepted definition of the term. In part, this is
because the role of a marketing manager can vary
significantly based on a business's size, corporate
culture, and industry context. For example, in a large
consumer products company, the marketing manager
may act as the overall general manager of his or her
assigned product.
[2]
To create an effective, cost-efficient
marketing management strategy, firms must possess a
detailed, objective understanding of their own business
and the market in which they operate.
[3]
In analyzing
these issues, the discipline of marketing management
often overlaps with the related discipline of strategic
planning.
Marketing strategy: To achieve the desired objectives,
marketers typically identify one or more target customer
segments which they intend to pursue. Customer
segments are often selected as targets because they
score highly on two dimensions:
1) The segment is attractive to serve because it is large,
growing, makes frequent purchases, is not price sensitive
(i.e. is willing to pay high prices), or other factors.
2) The company has the resources and capabilities to
compete for the segment's business, can meet their
needs better than the competition, and can do so
profitably.
[]
In fact, a commonly cited definition of
marketing is simply "meeting needs profitably."
The implication of selecting target segments is that the
business will subsequently allocate more resources to
acquire and retain customers in the target segment(s)
than it will for other, non-targeted customers. In some
cases, the firm may go so far as to turn away customers
who are not in its target segment. The doorman at a
swanky nightclub, for example, may deny entry to
unfashionably dressed individuals because the business
has made a strategic decision to target the "high fashion"
segment of nightclub patrons.
In conjunction with targeting decisions, marketing
managers will identify the desired positioning they want
the company, product, or brand to occupy in the target
customer's mind. This positioning is often an
encapsulation of a key benefit the company's product or
service offers that is differentiated and superior to the
benefits offered by competitive products.
[6]
For
example, Volvo has traditionally positioned its products in
the automobile market in North America in order to be
perceived as the leader in "safety", whereas BMW has
traditionally positioned its brand to be perceived as the
leader in "performance".
Ideally, a firm's positioning can be maintained over a long
period of time because the company possesses, or can
develop, some form of sustainable competitive
advantage.
[7]
The positioning should also be sufficiently
relevant to the target segment such that it will drive the
purchasing behavior of target customers.
[6]
To sum up,the
marketing branch of a company is to deal with the selling
and popularity of its products among people and its
customers, as the central and eventual goal of a company
is customer satisfaction and the return of revenue.
Implementation planning: The Marketing Metrics
Continuum provides a framework for how to categorize
metrics from the tactical to strategic.
Suresh G. Sonawane
Dr. Ganesh N. kathar
Kohinoor Arts,commerce &science college Khultabad,
Dist. Aurangabad, Maharashtra.
Asaramji Arts, comm.& science college Deogaon, Tq.kannad
Marketing Strategies in Business

If the company has obtained an adequate
understanding of the customer base and its own competitive
position in the industry, marketing managers are able to
make their own key strategic decisions and develop
a marketing strategy designed to maximize the revenues and
profits of the firm. The selected strategy may aim for any of a
variety of specific objectives, including optimizing short-term
unit margins, revenue growth, market share, long-term
profitability, or other goals.
After the firm's strategic objectives have been
identified, the target market selected, and the desired
positioning for the company, product or brand has been
determined, marketing managers focus on how to best
implement the chosen strategy. Traditionally, this has
involved implementation planning across the "4 Ps" of
marketing: product management, pricing (at what price slot
does a producer position a product, e.g. low, medium or high
price), place (the place or area where the products are going
to be sold, which could be local, regional, countrywide or
international) (i.e. sales and distribution channels), and
Promotion. Now a new P has been added making it a total of
five P's. The fifth P is politics, which affects marketing in a
significant way.
Taken together, the company's implementation
choices across the 4(5) Ps are often described as
the marketing mix, meaning the mix of elements the
business will employ to "go to market" and execute the
marketing strategy. The overall goal for the marketing mix is
to consistently deliver a compelling value proposition that
reinforces the firm's chosen positioning, builds customer
loyalty and brand equity among target customers, and
achieves the firm's marketing and financial objectives.
In many cases, marketing management will develop
a marketing plan to specify how the company will execute
the chosen strategy and achieve the business' objectives.
The content of marketing plans varies from firm to firm, but
commonly includes:
An executive summary
Situation analysis to summarize facts and insights
gained from market research and marketing analysis
The company's mission statement or long-term strategic
vision
A statement of the company's key objectives, often
subdivided into marketing objectives and financial
objectives
The marketing strategy the business has chosen,
specifying the target segments to be pursued and the
competitive positioning to be achieved
Implementation choices for each element of the
marketing mix (the 4(5)Ps)
Project, process, and vendor management:
More broadly, marketing managers work to design
and improve the effectiveness of core marketing processes,
such as new product development, brand
management, marketing communications, and pricing.
Marketers may employ the tools of business process
reengineering to ensure these processes are properly
designed, and use a variety of process
management techniques to keep them operating smoothly.
Effective execution may require management of
both internal resources and a variety of external vendors and
service providers, such as the firm's advertising agency.
Marketers may therefore coordinate with the company's
Purchasing department on the procurement of these
services. Under the area of marketing agency management
(i.e. working with external marketing agencies and suppliers)
are techniques such as agency performance evaluation,
scope of work, incentive compensation, RFx's and storage of
agency information in a supplier database.
Reporting, measurement, feedback and control systems:
Marketing management employs a variety of
metrics to measure progress against objectives. It is the
responsibility of marketing managers in the marketing
department or elsewhere to ensure that the execution of
marketing programs achieves the desired objectives and
does so in a cost-efficient manner.
Marketing management therefore often makes use
of various organizational control systems, such as sales
forecasts, sales force and reseller incentive programs, sales
force management systems, and customer relationship
management tools (CRM). Recently, some software vendors
have begun using the term "marketing operations
management" or "marketing resource management" to
describe systems that facilitate an integrated approach for
controlling marketing resources. In some cases, these efforts
may be linked to various supply chain managementsystems,
such as enterprise resource planning (ERP), material
requirements planning (MRP), efficient consumer
response (ECR), and inventory management systems.
Conclusion:
Is a written analysis of the Strengths, Weaknesses,
Opportunities and Threats to a business entity. Not only
should a SWOT be used in the creation stage of the
company but could also be used throughout the life of the
company. A SWOT may also written up for the competition to
understand how to develop the marketing and product mixes.
Besides information about the target market, one
also needs information about one's competitors, customers,
products, etc. Lastly, you need to measure marketing
effectiveness. A few techniques are.

REFERENCES

1. Joshi, Rakesh Mohan, (2005) International Marketing, Oxford University Press, New Delhi and New .
2. Philip Kotler, Philip.; Kevin Lane Keller (2006). Marketing Management.
3. Ramaswamy,Namakumari,(2013),Marketing Management.

Organizations in the information technology enabled
services sector have been very successful in using
exclusivist and inclusivist strategies to keep unions at
bay. These strategies have reinforced the notion of
culturalism that aims at winning the hearts and minds of
employees,
By managing what they think and feel, and not just how
they behave. The objective is to illustrate how these
management strategies play out in call centers in India.
The article is based on interviews carried out with call
centre employees in Thane.
Call centers have emerged out of the major
changes that have taken place in the sphere of work and
employment in last two decades or so. A fundamental
feature of this change has been the economic
restructuring bolstered by the phenomenon of outsourcing
resulting in the increase in the number of jobs in the
service sector. One such sector that has grown rapidly
due to these changes is the information technology
enabled services-business process outsourcing (ITES-
BPO) sector. The services offered include customer
interaction, back office operations, transcription, content
development and education/ training/research. It has
emerged as one of the key industries for investment in
the country. Exports are estimated to have doubled from
$ 3.1 billion in the year 2003-04 to $ 6.3 billion by the end
of the year 2005-06. In terms of total employment, the
projected figure was supposed to have reached 4,09,000
for the financial year 2005-06. This growth in the Indian
ITES-BPO segment is driven by a steady increase in
scale and depth of existing service lines and the addition
of newer vertical specific and niche business services.
[National Association of Software and Services
Companies or NASSCOM 2006]. At the organizational
level, this process of economic restructuring buttressed
by outsourcing has been accompanied with a more
customer focused strategies increasingly used by
employers to achieve competitive advantage in global
and national markets. The introduction of new
employment practices, organizational structures,
information and communications technologies,
Production systems and management techniques have
enabled organizations to focus their strategies on
customer satisfaction [Belt 2002]. For instance, in the call
centre space, software developments have allowed for
extremely complex routing of calls, as well as the
integration of customer data, products and process
information across the entire range of organizational
activities and services. The development of management
information systems generates real-time statistics on a
range of activities, such as the number of calls,
transactions and sales, as well as work process related
measures, such as average length of calls. On the
employee relations front, the expansion of call centers
made employment more flexible.
It will also shape employees expectations, so
that demands for wages will not be based on movements
in community standards but on improvements in personal
productivity.
In the context of call centers, researchers in the
west provide evidence of the use of both inclusivist and
exclusivist strategies. Commitment to organisational
values was seen by management as antithetical to trade
union membership. Management has endeavored to
increase commitment via employee involvement schemes
that focus on improving management-employee relations
and thereby deflecting the perceived need of call centre
agents to involve unions in representing their interests
[van Den Broek 2003]. The latter also provides evidence
of exclusivist strategies used in Australian call centers.
Customer service representatives who had unitarist
tendencies and were antithetic to workplace trade
unionism were recruited while those with union
backgrounds or those who previously worked in highly
unionized firms were blacklisted. Moreover, recruits were
pressurized to sign individual non-union contracts at the
appointment or promotion stage. Nonetheless, the impact
of these policies on unionization has not received the
attention that it deserves. A few studies have addressed
the issue, though parsimoniously. Rose (2002) states
substitution policies may have little effect on the level of
commitment shown by an employee to his/her
organization. For example, a relatively opulent working
environment in a non-unionized setting together with the
provision of certain benefits such as free private medical
and dental care do not detract from the sweatshop
conditions which prevail. Management control is not
uncontested and that the nature of the work can provide
opportunities for unions to organize. Much of what
management wants to achieve conflicts with the
employees interests. Performance targets, minimizing
the agents time away from the telephones and
minimizing staffing levels result in work intensification,
besides, lack of career and promotion prospects and
monotony giving rise to resistance, including union
representation. The new issues of service quality,
discretion to deviate from standards and recognition of
social skills are added to the more traditional bargaining
issues of pay, working hours, holidays, etc, [Taylor and
Bain 1999]. However, Todd et al (2003) state that
Arvind W Ubale Arvind W Ubale Arvind W Ubale Arvind W Ubale
Dr. P.Y. Harkal. Dr. P.Y. Harkal. Dr. P.Y. Harkal. Dr. P.Y. Harkal.

A.Vartak College, Vasai Road, Dist- Thane, Maharashtra
DSM College, Parbhani, Maharashtra
Organizing Call Centre Agents: Emerging Issues
management control strategies such as close monitoring
and nature of the work can make it difficult for unions to
gain recognition within the call centers. Management
would not want outsiders intruding in such a culture of
control and surveillance, unless they believed that this
would assist with the achievement of those goals. Our
objective in this article is to illustrate how these
management policies play out in the context of call
centers in India. The article is based on the interviews
carried on with employees working in the contact centers
in Thane.
Research Methodology
The present paper draws from a larger qualitative
study whose focus was to understand subjective
meanings and interpretations of work experiences of
employees in the ITES-BPO sector in Mumbai and
Thane. The conversational interview was used to explore
and gather experiential narrative material that would
serve as a resource for developing a richer and deeper
understanding of the experience being studied. Though
unstructured, the process was disciplined by focusing on
the fundamental question that prompted the research. Yet
the clarity of the research question did not preclude
exploring issues that emerged during the interview, since
the researcher was aware that they could generate
important insights into the phenomenon under study.
Participants in the study were people who had
experienced the phenomenon. Potential participants were
identified through snowball sampling and contacted via
the telephone. Once the researchers introduced
themselves and explained to the participants how they
had come to know of them and their contact details, the
purpose of the phone call and the study were explained.
Potential participant questions were answered these
questions essentially related to the purpose of the study
and the length of time for the interview. If they agreed to
participate, a convenient time and place were set up.
Permission to record the interviews was sought, and
since participants were explained that recording the
interview helped to maintain the accuracy of their
accounts as compared to compiling field notes where
accuracy could be compromised due to faulty recall later,
they agreed. All interviews were conducted in English and
were later transcribed by a research assistant. Forty call
centre employees were included in the study. During the
period of data collection, interviews were translated and
transcribed. The researchers then read these transcripts
carefully and repeatedly, immersing themselves in the
data [Crabtree and Miller 1992]. This approach did not
involve prefigured categories but allowed the researchers
intuitive and interpretive capacities to prevail. Immersion
allowed the researchers to identify themes, categories
and patterns emerging from the data [Marshall and
Rossman 1996]. Proceeding in this manner, the
researchers developed various understandings (such as
concepts, causal linkages, processes, and so on) of the
phenomena under study. These understandings were
used to inform further data collection, through which they
were tested and challenged. Based on newer data, they
were further developed, thereby feeding back into the
analysis [Marshall and Rossman 1996]. Iteration thus
formed an integral part of the research process. When all
the data were collected, the researchers immersed
themselves further in the transcripts and the preliminary
findings. They not only identified more patterns, themes
and categories in the data and looked for interpretations
at this level, but also subsumed under major themes,
those themes, patterns and categories and their linkages
within and across respondents that held together in a
meaningful yet distinct way. Interpretations based on this
level of analysis were made.
Work Context
Recent research has described call centers as
electronic sweatshops [Fernie and Metcalfe 1998] and
assembly lines in the head Taylor and Bain that
emphasize factory-like division of labour [Taylor and Bain
1999; van den Broek 2003], with jobs being characterized
as dead-end, with low complexity, low control, repetition
and routineness [Knights and McCabe 1998; Taylor and
Bain 1999]. Call centre agents are mouthpieces who
follow scripted dialogues and detailed instructions and
their work is closely monitored, tightly controlled and
highly routinised, thanks to extensive reliance on highly
sophisticated computer technology [Deery and Kinnie
2004]. The pressure for quantity versus the aspiration for
quality imposes conflicting role requirements on
employees. The challenge is of trying to get closer to the
customer while reducing costs, prescribing standards and
meeting targets [Houlihan 2000; Korczynski 2002]. Data
from the present study highlighted that in the Indian
context, agents working in call centers were trained to
believe that the customer could hear their smiles and
sense their moods, and therefore it was mandatory to
enthusiastically communicate with the customer no matter
how irate he/she was. Interacting with an abusive or irate
customer was seen as being an integral part of the
agents job at a call centre. The evaluation parameters in
call centers included the number of calls taken per shift,
the average handling time per call and the maintenance
of prescribed procedures while in an outbound call centre
they were evaluated on their ability to convert calls into
sales. Call barging allowed supervisors at various levels
such as team leaders, project managers, operations
managers as well as quality analysts to listen to
employees taking a call. Further, call recording meant
that all calls were recorded and any call could be pulled
out of the archives at random to be evaluated. Through
both these processes, employees were given feedback
about their technical and social performance. Though
monitoring for quality was not objected to, the constant
pinpointing out of deficiencies at times irritated agents
and affected their productivity.
Those in outbound sales were constantly
haunted and abused by their supervisors. They were
constantly reminded that their worth lay in making money
for the company. Employees were expected to be able to
adjust to sudden change in shifts and were at times
abruptly summoned to office. Change in shifts affected
their biological rhythms more so when there was not
enough rest provided for between shift changes to make
these adjustments.
Agents were denied leave even in case of
serious ailments or problems. When the call volume was
high people were expected to report to duty no matter
how ill the person was. Instances were
Cited of those who were denied leave by the
management and were threatened with termination
letters. They were not always paid overtime for the extra
work they put in. In fact extra work
was required to be done to impress ones superiors who
would ensure further growth in the organization. A
confirmation letter did not mean anything, employees
could be terminated at any
time without proper notice. For managers, employees
required to have a foremost responsibility
to their job rather than to the family. Skipping company
outings in some cases was equated to lack of
commitment to the team and team bonding. Agents pleas
of their inability to spend quality time with members of
their family were ignored by managers. As a result, in an
effort to juggle between family and work resulted in
agents depriving themselves of sleep. Their weekly
breaks were spent entirely with the family or to handle
households chores like washing soiled clothes that had
accumulated during the week.
Trade Union Formation: A Challenge
Unions as alien and unnecessary entities: At the very
outset most of the agents ruled out the possibility of
forming a union. Many did not know what the term union
meant and how unions functioned. When explained to
them they found the idea strange and alien. They nodded
with disbelief at suggestions of unions being formed in
call centers. Call centre employees believed that union
formation would never take place in the sector for several
decades to come. For those who had some
understanding of the word, union, the formation of a
collective would be unfair, since the organization had
been upfront about the working conditions at the time of
recruitment, it was not right for employees to later form a
union, because they could not cope.
Footloose capital: This attitude towards union formation
was all pervasive even though job security was a major
concern. In their opinion, it was beyond the unions ability
to assuage this constant tension of keeping ones job
since the threat of job security was greater from the ban
on outsourcing than from being fired. A union would only
exacerbate the situation of job insecurity as it would lead
to work stoppages affecting the clients, the company and
the agents themselves. This was something that none of
the stakeholders could afford, more so the agents, as it
would render them unemployed. The footloose nature of
capital today made agents wary of any action that would
result in job loss. Having been abused by agents in the
west they knew that their jobs were also at risk.
Technology today enabled transfer of a process from one
city to another or even from one country to another.
Formation of a union in Bangalore would result in a shift
to newer locations like Chennai and result in a job loss.
Agents were also aware of competition from countries like
the Philippines and China. Thane had to be a preferred
choice for investors and union formation would only shun
away investment and leave the youth stranded. Agents
therefore preferred to bear with the strains and pressures
rather than form unions. The formation of unions would
destabilize the industry and disturb the present status quo
which in their opinion was not unfavorable to them.
However, this was rarely required to be done as their
problems were immediately resolved. A simple complaint
to the team leader or operations manager would set
things right. Individual dialogue with ones superiors was
encouraged to address grievances. Even personal
problems were discussed. People were encouraged to
express their frustrations and feelings so that
performance did not suffer. They could also raise issues
in the surveys that regularly happened. For some agents,
the HR department was like a union taking up issues on
the behalf of the employees. Problems with the operation
managers could be reported to the HR which would then
take up the issue with the concerned authorities. This was
reinforced by the belief that there was almost no or only a
minimal hierarchy between the agents and the
management. The informal atmosphere of using first
names and provisions for games and sports was proof of
this. Therefore a union which could take up the issues on
behalf of employees was not required. They often
believed that the numbers reflected their performance.
Performance mattered and it was natural that those who
did not meet the standards should be told to quit. I have
never seen unions in call centers. Probably because in a
good company, if you complain it will be solved. So they
dont need to make a union and fight together, because
the company is affected. Unions are never seen because
they give you whatever you want. You have some
problem with the cab, you can go and tell the team leader
(TL) and TL will take the issue to higher authority. If the
cab driver is drunk, they will take him off. Thats the way it
works.
Maintaining Larger Interests
The unitarist tendencies on the part of
employees surfaced when they pleaded against the
criticism of the call centers. The call centre management
was always right and they favored efforts that improved
the functioning of the organization. Agents argued for an
alternate organization that would enhance the call centre
industrys intellectual and financial capabilities rather than
be a debilitating influence. The mandate of such an
organization should be to maintain the agents
employability. Its objectives need to coincide with the
interest of the corporate organizations goals. Any
research that raised questions about call centre
management was to be set aside. Research results that
were not in line with the corporate organizations
perspective were required to be circumvented. Only
research that improved the functioning of the corporate
organization was to be encouraged. Organizations should
carefully scrutinize the agenda of the researcher.
Role of Professionalism
The industry also provided them with a life style
that they could not otherwise dream of. Compared to
employees in other industries they were well paid,
dressed well, acquired credit cards, and enjoyed their
weekends and visited discos and pubs. Though it was
true that the companies outsourcing work enhanced their
profits it was also true that their salaries were higher than
those they could have earned in any other industry. The
difference in the salaries that they earned with those of
their counterparts in the west, were explained away as
differences due to the standard of living. The call centre
agents tried to differentiate themselves from their
government counterparts who they derided as having no
work and were good for nothing. Unions were meant for
those who avoid work and to shield poor performers,
which in their view was being unprofessional.
Government employees formed unions because their
management did not take care of them. Nomenclatures
such as cyber coolies or slaves on Roman ships used
to describe their working conditions were abhorred. Call
centre agents preferred to be slotted along with the
software professionals, rather than with slaves or factory
workers. Unions were only for the working class while
they were professionals. Their education required them to
behave in a way that was not unbecoming of a
professional. They could not be seen slogan shouting and
picketing on the streets. Joining hands with corrupt union
leaders was a complete no. They considered themselves
to be intellectuals those who derived their power in
exchanging knowledge. The agents considered they
educated and professional and unlike their government
counterparts able to handle stress and pressure. Artifacts
of the organization, typically associated with high status,
supported the notion of professionalism, strengthening
agents identification with the organizations goals and
compliance. The atmosphere in the call centre was
informal but professional. The agents were open and
frank with each other. Taking on anglicized names also
made them feel that they were like the Americans, British
or Australians who were highly professionalized as
compared to Indians. I know its not a factory that we can
get together and ask for something. We are
professionals. We are there to serve the client, how can
you form a union?
Moving On: Quitting and Attrition as Solutions
In the agents opinion the unions could not
resolve their issues or handle their grievances. This
notion stemmed from the view that their frustration like
disagreements with ones boss could be dealt with
effectively by simply quitting. Call centers had
mushroomed around every nook and corner and better
jobs or higher salaries were easy to come by. They
therefore preferred to smoke and relax to overcome their
immediate frustration, stress and pressures, and when an
opportunity came by, quit. Some agents suggested that it
was management that needed to organize against such
behavior of employees rather than the employees against
the management. It was management that was being
exploited and not the employees. This method of
resolving their
Frustration was not only a problem for management but
also put brakes on union formation. The realization of the
power of a collective to resolve these issues had not
emerged. The fear of being fired also deterred them,
especially those who in some way were dependent on
call centers for their earnings
Conclusion
The exclusivist and inclusivist human resources
taxonomy provided by Peetz (2002) does allow for some
understanding of the situation, but it does not capture the
context and the complexity in its entirety. Union formation
was also inhibited by the prevailing labour market
conditions, poor awareness about unions, a vicious public
opinion against any form of employee collective, an
extremely young work force that would be influenced by
the unitarist perspective and the construction of the
employees identity. Changes in these factors over a
period of time could see the emergence of unions.
However for now, organizations in the ITES sector have
been extremely successful in using both the exclusivist
and inclusivist strategies to keep unions at bay. These
strategies have reinforced the notion of corporate
culturalism that aims at winning the hearts and minds of
employees by managing what they think and feel, and not
just how they behave.

REFERENCES

1. 1.Alvesson, M and H Willmott (2002): Identity Regulation as Organisational Control: Producing the Appropriate Individual,
Journal of Management Studies, 39(5), 619-644.
2. 2.Arzbacher, S et al (2002): Management Responses to Unions in Australian Call Centres: Exclude, Tolerate or Embrace?
in U Holtgrewe, K Christian and K A Shire (eds), Re-organising Service Work: Call Centres in Germany and Britain,
Aldershot (Ashgate).
3. 3.Belt, V (2002): Capitalising on Femininity: Gender and the Utilisation of Social Skills in Telephone Call Centres in U
Holtgrewe, K Christian and K A Shire (eds), Re-organising Service Work: Call Centres in
4. 4.Germany and Britain, Aldershot (Ashgate), 123-45. Crabtree, B F and W L Miller (1992): Doing Qualitative Research:
Multiple Strategies, Sage, California.
5. 5.D Cruz, P and E Noronha (forthcoming): Being Professional: Organisational
6. Control in Indian Call Centres, Social Science and Computer Review.

INTRODUCTION :
India is agriculture based rural economy and
about 60% of total populations still reside in villages.
Villages are heart of India. Indias rapid development
depends on the development of rural sector. Most of rural
people are disguisedly employed on agriculture land and
most of the time they are reluctant to shift over to the
activities other than farm activities. Among these poor
rural people, women are great suffers because of being
doubly oppressed. When we talk about rapid economic
development, it will be incomplete without developing
women, who constitute 50 % of total population.
Entrepreneurship and economic development
are found to go hand in hand. The sportive growth in the
economy of the developed countries reflect the significant
role played in nations economy. Mans poverty and wide
spread unemployment are the two most pervasive
phenomena common in third world countries. The
mounting problems of unemployment has brought into
focus the importance of small scale, agro & rural
industries as well as development of entrepreneurship in
the related fields.
OBJECTIVE OF THE STUDY :
The present study is an attempt to
1. To explain the present status of rural women
entrepreneurs.
2. To study the various development schemes for rural
women entrepreneurs.
3. To identify the problems faced by rural women
entrepreneurs.
4. To make suitable suggestions for promoting rural
women entrepreneurs.
METHODOLOGY
The methodology is designed with an intention to
make a critical appraisal of the present day women
entrepreneurs & identify the opportunities & challenges.
The study is based on Secondary Sources of India.
PRESENT STATUS OF RURAL WOMEN
ENTREPRENEURS:
The 2001 National Census Survey Figures
shows that women constitute 50 % of the total population
out of which 38 % live in rural areas and 12 % in urban
areas, 11.55 % of these are employed in primary sector,
out of which 10.02 % are entrepreneurs. ( women& men
in India 2008, published by Central Govt. of India )
I would like to quote Pandit Nehrus word here, When a
women moves forward the family moves and the villages
moves and the nation moves. Upliftment of women is an
essential ingredient of human development.
Entrepreneurship development among the rural women
force would strengthen the village economy & promote
regional development.
Earlier, involvement of rural women in
entrepreneurship was limited. In most cases especially in
developing nations like India women are victions of social
prejudice and discrimination. Past two decades, rural
women have made their mark in different walks of life
thanks to growing level of education, social reforms,
political awaking, legal framework and safeguards so on.
The rural women are the one of the most
marginalized groups in our society. Though, they
comprise 50 % of total population of India, but they are
deprived since ancient periods. In most cases, they are
not a part of the decision making process of the family, as
well as of the society. By depriving this section of the
society, India cannot get the status of developed nation,
so, to bring this large mass to the mainstream of the
society from the vicions chain of male dominance, the
role of women lead SHGs is praise worthy. The women
lead Self Help Groups (SHGs ) in the villages have to be
successfully demonstrated how to mobilize and manage
thrift, appraise credit needs, maintain linkages with the
banks and enforce financial discipline ( Sarangi 2008 ).
It is interesting to more that, the performance of
banks in linking SHGs to the banking system scaled
further heights during the year. The bank financed to
SHGs aggregated Rs. 44900.86 millions to 6,20,109
SHGs. The 11
th
plan given priority to agriculture and rural
development with a view to generate adequate protective
employment.
The above mentioned measures are bringing
about commendable change in the role played by rural
women entrepreneurs in economic development.
OPPORTUNITIES FOR RURAL WOMEN
ENTREPRENEURES
1) Integrated Rural Development Progress (IRDP) :
The main objective of Integrated Rural Development
Programme is to increase the income generating
power of the families, who are below the poverty line.
30 % women should be the beneficiaries in Rural
Development Programme run by Government.

Changing Psychology of Women towards Entrepreneurship
Leading to Economic Development
Rumana S.Khan Rumana S.Khan Rumana S.Khan Rumana S.Khan
Iqra Junior College, Aurangabad, Maharashtra
2) Training of Rural Youth For Self Employment
( TRYSEM ) :
TRYSEM is a sub plan of Integrated Rural Development
Programme. It gives training to the youth / young
unemployed men & women for Self employment.
The trainees get a stipend of Rs. 150 per month during
training period. In this programme 40 % of total seats are
reserved for women. About 20 lakh women have been
trained form its inception till now.
3) Development of Women & Children In Rural
Areas ( DWCRA ) :
DWCRA is the Rural Development Departments scheme
to support womens income generation activities through
a group of 15 to 20 women each. The Govt. of India
has launched this women & children development
programme in 1982. The main objective of this
programme is to strengthen the economy of rural women
by giving them loan and economic assistance to develop
their skills, efficiency and abilities to meet their liabilities
effectively.
4) NORAD Programme :
NORAD ( Norwegian Agency for International
Development ) was established in 1982 83 to help the
educated & uneducated women financially in non
traditional areas of business like electronics,
computer programming, manufacturing of watches,
printing, readymade garments, etc. Near about one
lakh women were benefited by NORAD
Programme. In 2008 09( up to 31
st
Dec. 2008 ), it has an
expenditure of Rs. 672.80 lakhs and the beneficiary
women are 14615.
5) STEP Support to Training And Employment
Programme :
STEP was started in 1987 with the objective to provide
training to rural women for increasing their production
capacity and income generation. In this programme,
they give training in the areas of traditional business like
agriculture, milk, fisheries, handlooms, khadi
development, etc.
6) Assistance to Rural Women In Non Farm
Development ( ARVIND ) :
The National Bank of Agriculture & Rural Development (
NABARD ) has started a rural women development
programme called ARVIND. It provides loan up to Rs.
10 lakhs to the women who work collectively in agriculture
for their economic development.
7) Rashtriya MahilaKosh( RMK ) :
RMK was established in 1992 with a fund of Rs. 31 Crore
to meet the needs of poor women by giving them
loans. RMK is also organizing training, apprenticeship
and orientation programmes for trainers under the Indian
Mahila Block Societies ( IMPS ). The objectives
of RMK is that credit becomes a widely known and used
facility for enhancement of the daily income of poor
women. The experience of RMK is that the
women would have been able to double or triple their
daily income with the credit support of Rs. 2500 to Rs.
5000. The activities followed may be dairying,
petty shop keeping and investment on the agricultural
operations.
8) Indira MahilaYojna( IMY ) :
IMY was launched in August, 1995. Its main objective is
to give a forward thrust to education, awareness,
income generation capacity and empowerment to
women. The platform for the forward thrust is to be done
through self help groups at the grassroots level.
9)SEWA Self Employed Womens Association :
SEWA based in Ahmedabad is a brain child of Ela Bhatt.
SEWA guides women in rural areas in the use of their
own resources to the maximum both physical and
financial. SEWA has helped many women from the rural
areas of Gujarat and Rajasthan in marketing their land
embroidered Tie & Dye materials both in India and
abroad. A commendable job of SEWA is where the rural
women entrepreneurs are sent to countries like Australia,
Europe and United States for promoting their products.
10) Self Help Groups ( SHG ) :
SHGs plays a vital role in rural development in general
and for rural women in particular. The women lead Self
Help Groups comprise 15 20 members & each has a
group leader. Each member of the group contributes
money & kept in bank in the name of the Group. Group
can obtain loan from the bank. The rules &
regulation are developed by the group of members. The
SHGs are linked with the banks for the external credit
inflow. Self Help Group associate with micro credit is the
element for the development of any country.
CHALLENGES FACED BY RURAL WOMEN
ENTREPRENEURS
1) Illiteracy:
Gandhiji has stated back that Educating a man is
educating an individual while educating a women is
educating a family. But it is find that womens
education proper in rural area has been sadly
neglected. Families generally prefer educating boys
than girls as parents feel that education after all does not
help the girls once they are married. Girls have to
shoulder greater responsibility at home but have no say in
decision taken.
2) Conservative Attitude of Society:
The Manu laws stress the need to control women
because of the so called evils of female character.
Women therefore dependant all their life as a child she
is dependent on her father as a wife on her husband & in
old age on her son.
Today, only a small percentage have been able to break
the bonds to achieve those goals which have been
considered to be in the male domination, but this
benefit has accrued only to the urban areas and
is yet to trickle down to rural areas.

3) Health Problems :
Health is a positive state of wellbeing of the individual
having harmonious development of physical & mental
capacities. Therefore, health involves not only medical
factors but social economic and educational factors as
well. Women in rural areas have health due to
Lack of hygiene environment.
Lack of adequate diet & poor nutrition.
Lack of proper housing.
4) Religious & Social Taboos :
Strong Religious benefits & Cartelism prones to be
hindrance, as rural women are not allowed to go
outside the home and the so called high cast do not
mingle with the other castes. This has led bleak
chances of proper development in rural areas.
5) Male Dominance :
The Superiority complex of men keeps them from doing
something which she desires to do, even if she
manages to do so, husbands demand every paise
earned by their wives. Therefore, women are
totally deprived a any sort of financial independence
and are always in a state of insecurity.
6) Lack of Infrastructural facilities :
Out of 5.5 villages in India there are many unfortunate
villages mainly those in the interiors of UP, MP, Bihar
where there is lack of basic facilities required for the
economic growth and progress ( viz roads, water, power
etc ).
7) Procurement of Loan :
The application forms for the procurement of loans are
very complex for the rural lot. The time gap between
applying for loan and loan sanctioning is too wide.
Another major difficulty is that rural women entrepreneurs
are not able to find guarantors for the loan.
8) Marketing Problems:
Rural women entrepreneurs face the biggest problems in
marketing their products. Some of them are forced to
sell these products at cheaper rates to brokers and
middleman due to lack of proper knowledge of marketing.
9) Lack of Confidence:
Since ages rural women have been confined to the four
walls of their house and have been bereft of all the
opportunities which could inculcate confidence in them.

10) Lack of Mobility:
Rural women by their nature are less mobile and they are
deprived of the benefits of low cost and high efficiency.
The socio cultural backgrounds binds them to remain
in their native places. Their physical condition is also
responsible for their immobility.
11) Other Problems :
Few exceptionally innovative rural women who tread the
beaten track to break free from the bonds have had
bad experiences like.
1) Harassment by officials.
2) Pursuant resistance from family.
3) Non serious attitudes of the society which
makes them feel time and again that they are the
weaker sex and cannot do anything
independently.
4) Suggestions for promoting rural women
Entrepreneurship
1. Rural women entrepreneurship should be given
liberty to choose their business activity. This creates
interest in the entrepreneurship and attracts her
commitment and an all out effort for the success of
business undertaken by her.
2. Entrepreneur awareness camps in rural areas to
make them aware of their hidden entrepreneurial
capabilities and motivate them to do justice to these
capabilities.
3. Case studies and audio visuals of successful
women entrepreneurs should be prepared to bring
awareness among women and motivate new women
entrepreneurs.
4. Rural women entrepreneurs should be made aware
of avenues of opportunities, procedures and
techniques to exploit such opportunities to their
benefit.
5. Urban rural women understanding. This
memorandum of understanding is possible if
voluntary womens organizations are formed to take
care of rural women.

REFERENCES

1. Amatucci F M &Sohi J E 2004, Women entrepreneurs securing business angle financing : tales from the field. Venture
Capital Vol. 6, No.13,
2. Anand Neeta 2003, Working women: issues and problems, Yojana March.
3. Arvinda C. and Renuka S. 2001, Women entrepreneurs and exploratory studies, SEDME Journal Spet. Vol. 28.
4. George P.A 1998. women entrepreneurship in India, Pranjan Vol.2.
5. Ragani S. 2003, Women entrepreneurs : the changing face of business, effective executive, March.
6. Manimekalai N. and Rajeshwari G. 2000. Empowerment of women through SHGs, MARGIN Vol.32, No.4.
7. Hanuman Prasad and Verma B.L. 2006, Women entrepreneurship in India, The Indian Journal of Commerce, Vol. 59,
No.2.
Research Paper Management

ABSTRACT Human capital is getting more and more attention with a new technology and a new modern how we can
behave with a human capital in the era of globalization , lack of education and getting job due to the recent downturn in the
various economies of the world. Developed and developing countries put emphases on the importance of human capital
development in the direction of accelerating the economic growth by devoting necessary time and efforts. The impact of
human capital on organizational performance is one of the solutions to develop the economy of the organization. The
organizations have to invest necessary resources in developing human capital which tend to have a great impact on
performance. The current study examines the impact of human capital on organizational performance from various points.
Organizational performance is viewed in the terms of outcomes.

KEY WORDS-: Human Capital, Organizational Performance

Introduction
The corporate and professional communities
interest and recognition of the significance of Human
Capital practices gained momentum after realization of
the fact that it is the people who make organizations
successful not the buildings. It would not be justified to
assume that the concept of human capital is a newly
emerged phenomenon. It is an advanced form of people
management. At present the need for HC is felt
enormously, in order to ensure that the business units are
able to accomplish organizational objectives through
people. Organizations have always aimed for a sound HC
system for success. However, very few organizations
could care about HC due to lack of understanding of the
worth and contribution of HC activities.
This paper looks at the impact of human capital
on organizational performance as a common issue in any
organizations in Yemen especially in the new era of
globalization, where competitiveness and innovativeness
are norms that go with performance.
The term Human Capital has now become common in
human resource language to describe people and their
collective skills, abilities, experience and potential.
Human Capital is one of three elements to make up
intellectual capital.
Intellectual capital describes the knowledge
assets available to the organizations and is a large part of
intangible value. It can be described as:
Human capital the knowledge, skills, abilities and
capacity to develop and innovate possessed by people in
an organization.
Social capital the structures, networks and procedures
that enable those people to acquire and develop
intellectual capital represented by the stocks and flows of
knowledge derived from relationships within and outside
the organization.
Organizational capital the institutionalized
knowledge possessed by an organization which is stored
in databases, manuals etc. This would also include HR
policies and processes used to manage people, 15Annual
Meeting (2007)
Human capital is knowledge, skills, attitudes,
aptitudes, and other acquired traits that contribute to
production (Goode, 1959).
Litschka, Markom and Schunder (2006) saw
human capital from individual perspective saying that it is
the combined knowledge, skill and abilities of a person,
including aspects of somatic and psychological health
and from organizational perspective as Human capital of
individual offered for potential used by an organization. It
can, however, not be owned by organization.
Human capital
In response to the changes, most of the
organizations have accepted the ideas of human capital
as a good competitive advantage that will enhance higher
performance. Human capital becomes a part of an overall
effort to achieve the goals of the organization. Hence,
organizations need to understand human capital that
would enhance employee satisfaction and improve
performance. Although there is a broad assumption that
human capital has positive effects on organizational
performance, the notion of performance for human capital
remains largely untested.
This paper attempts to look into the connection
between human capital and organizational performance
in the Yemen.
According Schultz (1993), the term human
capital has been defined as "a key element in improving
a firm assets and employees in order to increase
productive as well as sustain competitive advantage". To
sustain competitiveness in the organization human capital
becomes an instrument used to increase productivity.
Human capitals refer to processes that relate to training,
education and other professional initiatives in order to
increase the levels of knowledge, skills, abilities, values,
and social assets of an employee which will lead to the
employees satisfaction and performance, and eventually
on a firm performance.
Hameed M.S. Ahmed Hameed M.S. Ahmed Hameed M.S. Ahmed Hameed M.S. Ahmed Research Student, Dr. B.A.M. University, Aurangabad,
Maharashtra

Impact of Human Capital on Organizational
Performance in Republic of Yemen
Rastogi (2002) stated that "human capital is an
important input for organizations especially for
employees continuous improvement mainly on
knowledge, skills, and abilities". So that from the definition
above human capital is referred to the knowledge, skills,
competencies, and attributes embodied in individuals that
contribute to achieve the individual goals as well as
organizational goals. The term human capital formation
means, "The process of acquiring and increasing the
number of persons who have the skills, education and
experience which are critical for the economic and the
political development of the country. Thus it is associated
with investment in man and his development as creative
productive resources.
(Schultz) observed that there are five ways of
developing human resources:
(a) Health facilities and services which include all the
expenditures that affect the life expectancy, strength and
stamina and the vigor and utility of people.
(b) On-the job training, including old type apprenticeships
organized by firms,
(c) Formally organized education at the elementary,
secondary and higher "levels.
(d) Study programmes for adults that are not organized
by firms, including extension programmes notably in
agriculture.
Importance of Human Capital
Human capital on organizational performance in
different developing economies is a critical and important
area of research. In the past, researchers focused on the
effect of Human Resource Management practices on
organizational productivity, turnover and financial
performance, but in this era they started focusing on
human capital on human capital on organizational
performance.
Nobel Prize-winning economist Gary S. Becker,
who coined the term human capital, says that the basic
resource in any company is the people. The most
successful companies and the most successful countries
will be those that manage human capital in the most
effective and efficient manner. Organizations are
recognizing the importance of investing in their
employees now more than ever before. Companies are
beginning to understand that to stay on top in the global
economy; they need to place more and more emphasis
on developing and retaining their people.
Lee, Liu and Wang (1994) found that "human
capital evolution played a significant role in expanding
output growth and contracting income inequality in
Taiwan". In their research work they explained the
importance of human capital continuous learning process
has made an effective on industrial outcomes. The
investment in human capital, especially through improved
education, continuous training and increased social
mobility, would raise labor productivity as well as
organizational performance.
The importance of human capital is being
recognized in both developed and developing countries
considering that we live in the era of globalization, fierce
competition, continuous technology development and
innovation. Human capital in every organization is a
valuable concept because it recognizes that people
should be treated as assets, rather than as an expense.
Human Capital in Yemen
Yemen as a developing country has a lots of
challenges and obstacles that face human capital.
Success in today's competitive market depends on
advantages associated with economies of scale, proper
use of technology, access to capital, creativity and
innovation. This is possible when competent human
resource with proper attitude, skills and knowledge has
been selected on merit, so that HC can work with
motivation towards organizational growth. Although in
most of the developing countries, the main hindrance of
organizational growth and profitability is either no or
negligible use of professional HC, but, the struggle is
continuing to find the best way to use these practices
optimally. Human capital is the economic value that an
employee provides to an employer. The assessment of
this value is related to the body of skill, knowledge, and
experience that the employee possesses. Factors such
as formal education and participation in ongoing training
related to the workplace also help to enhance the value
that the employee has. Yemen has been focusing on
human capital to increase the growth of the economy. As
a result, the organizations from different industries are
performing a momentous role in the economic
development of the country. Despite their economic
importance, different organizations suffer from a variety of
structural and institutional weaknesses, which have
constrained their ability to take full advantage of rapidly
advancing process of globalization and HC.
Index of Human Capital per Person for Yemen
(HCIYISYEA066NRUG)

Objective of the Study
The study aims at investigating relationship of
Human Capital and Organizational Performance,
specifically as to which of the drivers of human capital
play significant role in influencing organizational
performance. The objective is to fill the knowledge gap
that exists in Yemen regarding the above subject.
Methodology
This study depends on the secondary data which
collected from books, journals, web site, periodical
reports etc.

Organizational performance
In the era of globalization and a new technology
that rapidly changing workplace and globalised economy,
development of organizational performance is associated
with the development personal performance, behavior,
skills, knowledge and experience. Management in every
organization need to give higher attention towards
understanding individual differences, needs and
behaviors, as well as their criticality to enable them to
understand and manage organizational complexity. Such
understanding is considered important in helping
individuals develop effective learning styles that is aligned
with organizational objectives and needs. This article
explores some thoughtful considerations for management
related to understanding and improving the overall
performance of individuals and teams in organizations. It
reflects thoughts and learning from several
implementations of small and large projects in public
sector. It also sheds light on various theories, tools and
frameworks and how they can be used to improve overall
organizational performance.
Organizational Performance Model
The Organizational Performance Model Mercer
HR Consulting developed a model that links HCM to
organizational performance and, ultimately, shareholder
value

Source: 15Annual Meeting of the Arab Network for
HRM/D Sana'a- Yemen, December 2007.
Significance of the Study
The study is expected to help demystify the
classical thinking on the significance of land, labor, and
capital generally excluding reference to human capital
and investment in human capital. It is expected to provide
more understanding that human capital is the key for
economic and organizational growth as claimed by so
many theorists. The conclusion at the end of the study
may accelerate efforts to invest in human capital at
organizational as well as at country level.
Conclusion and Recommendation
Human capital has significant effect on
organizational performance. It means it increases the
overall organizational performance. Organizations having
transparent selection systems, adequately scheduled
training programs and employee participation in decision-
making are high performers. These organizations become
attractive for local and foreign investors for further
investment that contributes considerable growth in the
economic activities in Yemen, Since the human capital
performance is contributing in organizational
performance. In knowledge era human capital plays
central role in value of business. The best way to create
workplace and work force capable of addressing the
challenges of global economy were revaluing of human
capital and emphasizing team collaboration. Yemeni
organizations realized the significance of investment in
human to increase the outcomes of their organizations.
The study was limited to industry in which human capital
is the source of competitiveness of developing the
economy of the country. Discussion on Important
conclusions that can be drawn out of the study supports
the view that human capital has significant positive with
organizational performance. The study also concluded
that organizational performance can be predicted on the
basis of his/her score on human capital. A wider and clear
understanding of the importance of human capital may
help us to develop our human resources into a more
positive, committed and innovative work force.
Understanding of the exact role of human capital may
guide policy maker and organizations in terms of better
decisions regarding organization tangible and intangible
assets, strategic role of HR, policies for the attracting,
enhancing, retaining of human capital, reporting the value
of intangible asset. All the literature review I came to the
decision that every organization must give the priorities to
the human capital. If the performance of human capital is
not good it will affect the whole organization.

REFERENCES

1. 15Annual Meeting of the Arab Network for HRM/D Sana'a- Yemen, 1-3 December 2007.
2. Goode, B. R. (1959) Adding to the stock of human capital, The American economic review, 49(2), pp. 147-155.
3. Lee, M., Liu, B. and Wang, P. (1994) Growth and Equity with Endogenous Human Capital: Taiwan's Economic Miracle
Revisited, Southern Economic Journal, 61(2), pp. 435-444.
4. Litschka,M. Markon,A. and Schunder,S. (2006) Measuring and analyzing intellectual assets: an integrative approach.
Journal of Intellectual Capital, 7 (2), 160-173.
5. Rastogi, P.N. (2002). Sustaining enterprise competitiveness is human capital the answer. Human System
Management.19 (3), 193-203.
6. Schultz, T.W. (1993). The economic importance of human capital in modernization Education Economics, 1(1), 13-19.
Research Paper Management

Introduction
Stress is the way we interact with the outside
world and the form in which we communicate this
experience to ourselves. The world in which we lived for
most of our lives has unexpectedly changed and since
most of humanity lives for the future, the expectation of
controlling our lives has dramatically shifted. Hesitation is
present in the collective consciousness of this world, and
our sense of power to control any situation has been
bruised.
Definition
Stress is a condition or feeling experienced when
a person perceives that demands exceed the personal
and social resources the individual is able to mobilize.
From the definition, you can see that there are three
major approaches that we can use to manage stress:
1) Action-oriented: ;
In which we seek to confront the problem causing the
stress, changing the environment or the situation;
2) Emotionally-oriented:
In which we do not have the power to change the
situation, but we can manage stress by changing our
interpretation of the situation and the way we feel about it;
and
3) Acceptance-oriented:
Where something has happened over which we have no
power and no emotional control, and where our focus is
on surviving the stress.
Action-oriented approaches - best where you have
some control
To be able to take an action-oriented approach, we must
have some power in the situation. If we do, then action-
oriented approaches are some of the most satisfying and
rewarding ways of managing stress. There are techniques
that we can use to manage and overcome stressful
situations, changing them to our advantage.
Emotionally-oriented approaches - subtle but
effective
If you do not have the power to change a situation, then
you may be able to reduce stress by changing the way
you look at it, using an emotionally-oriented approach.
Emotionally-oriented approaches are often less attractive
than action-oriented approaches. In that, the stresses can
recur time and again; however, they are useful and
effective in their place.

Acceptance-oriented approaches - when there's no
valid alternative...
Sometimes, we have so little power in a situation that all
we can do to survive it. This is the case, for example,
when loved-ones die. In these situations, often the first
stage of coping with the stress is to accept ones lack of
power.
These different approaches to stress management
address our definition of stress in different ways: the
action-oriented techniques help us to manage the
demands upon us and increase the resources we can
mobilize; the emotionally oriented techniques help us to
adjust our perceptions of the situation; and the
acceptance-oriented techniques help us survive the
situations that we genuinely cannot change.
Causes of stress
Results from large scale research projects on the causes
of stress in humans done by the Center for Disease
Control, the American Institute of Stress, Canadian
physician Hans Selye, and many others, confirm that
there are certain life events that the majority of humans
find very stressful. Here are the top ten causes of extreme
human stress:
1. Childhood Trauma-
People who are sexually, psychologically, and/or
physically abused, or who have been abandoned while
young, may carry these stresses into adulthood.
2. Divorce-
All the aspects of a divorce, from personal to financial to
loss of family and friends, contribute to these forms of
stress.
3. Finances-
Although this is easily understood as a stress factor,
bankruptcy and mortgage foreclosures seem to increase
the human stress levels even more.
4. Employment-
Those who are employed may find their work, hours or
co-workers cause stress, while those who are not
employed find their circumstances without income and the
job searching process also cause stress.
5. Poor Health-
The medical crisis or being ill, escalating medical costs,
terminal illness, becoming incapacitated, not having
medical insurance, and not having access to medical
Inamdar Aqeela Muzaffar Inamdar Aqeela Muzaffar Inamdar Aqeela Muzaffar Inamdar Aqeela Muzaffar
IIBM College of B.B.A, B.C.A, Chinchwad, Pune (MS)

Modern Approaches to Stress Management
services all contribute to causing stress.
6. Personal Relationships-
If there are troubling issues with family, extended family,
partnerships, friends, children, or lovers, these are all
large contributors to stress levels.
7. Pregnancy-
Infertility, lack of a relationship when wanting children,
adoption, premature births, unplanned and/or unwanted
pregnancies, complications during pregnancy, and
pregnancies caused from sexual abuse and rape are high
human stressors.
8. Danger and Fear-
People who live in war zones, crime infested areas, and in
isolated communities can experience daily stressors that
accumulate over time, while others who are victims of
personally invasive crimes, such as cyber bullying and
identity theft, are also at risk for high stress levels.
Effects of stress
Common symptoms of stress include a fast heartbeat,
headache, stiff neck and/or tight shoulders, back pain,
fast breathing, sweating and sweaty palms, an upset
stomach, nausea, or diarrhea.
You might notice signs of stress in the way you think, act,
and feel. You may feel cranky and unable to deal with
even small problems, feel frustrated, lose your temper
more often and yell at others for no reason, feel jumpy or
tired all the time, find it hard to focus on tasks, worry too
much about small things, feel that you are missing out on
things because you can't act quickly, imagine that bad
things are happening or about to happen.
How stress affects you depends on many things, such as:
1) Your personality.
2) What you have learned from your family about
responding to stress.
3) How you think about and handle stress
4) Your coping strategies.
5) Your social support
Stress management and relief
In the days of the caveman, stress often came in
the form of physical threats that required individuals to
react quickly and decisively. The body helped out by
automatically clicking into high gear at the first sign of
trouble, releasing a surge of hormones (notably
adrenaline and cortisol) to accelerate the heart rate, raise
blood pressure, increase blood sugar, and enhance the
brains use of glucose. This stress response meant the
caveman was instantly ready to fight or flee.
Modern day stresses are more likely to be
psychological in origin and prolonged in nature (work-
related stress, financial worries, inter-personal
relationships, chronic illnesses). But they can still set off
the bodys alarm mechanism and the associated hormone
surge. Over-exposure to those stress hormones can, in
turn, have a range of impacts on the bodys systems -
brain, cardiovascular, immune, and digestive and so on.
Modern Approach To Stress Management
Developing strategies to deal with stress can
prevent or reduce its effects. There are many approaches
to managing, relieving or coping with stress. These
include exercise, dietary changes, relaxation, stress
management courses, counseling and medications.
Exercise and Diet
Diet and exercise can play an important role in
the relief of stress. Eat a balanced diet and avoid foods
that may increase tension e.g.: coffee, tea, and foods high
in sugar. Exercise helps to release built up tension and
increases fitness .This, in turn, increases the bodys ability
to deal with stress and helps to avoid the damage to our
health that prolonged stress can cause. It is
recommended that exercise be undertaken at least three
times per week to be of most benefit. If you are not used
to exercise, discuss this with a doctor prior to
commencing an exercise programme.
Relaxation
Relaxation is an effective way to help reduce
muscle tension associated with stress. There are many
different relaxation techniques e.g.: yoga, meditation,
massage. Some people find that simply taking time out
during the day or after a stressful situation is sufficient to
reduce stress levels. There are more formalized
relaxation techniques available e.g.: Jacobsons
Progressive Relaxation Technique, The Mitchell Method.
Consult a doctor or community resource group (e.g.:
Citizens Advice Bureau) to find out what services are
available. A local library may also be able to recommend
suitable books on this topic.
Stress management courses
Stress management courses enable individuals
to develop strategies to cope with life and stress more
effectively. Most courses teach skills that enable the
individual to recognize current stressors and techniques
to effectively deal with these. Skills such as time
management, goal setting, assertive communication,
problem solving, managing change and relaxation
techniques may be taught.
Counseling
Discussing concerns with an impartial person
may assist with recognizing stressors and deciding upon
strategies to deal with them. This does not necessarily
need to be a professional therapist but may be a trusted
family member, friend or colleague. Often the process of
discussing a concern is enough to alleviate the stress it is
causing. Asking for help should not be seen as a sign of
weakness.

Research Paper Economics
Poverty in Maharashtra

Jadhav Jyoti Sahebrao Jadhav Jyoti Sahebrao Jadhav Jyoti Sahebrao Jadhav Jyoti Sahebrao Rayat Shikshan Sansthas, Mahatma Phule Mahavidyalaya,
Pimpri. Pune-17 Maharashtra

ABSTRACT - Maharashtra is among the richest states in India in terms of per capita income, yet incidence of poverty in
the state remains close to the national average. All India Urban Rs 859.6/- (Lakh) and Rural Rs 672.8/-(Lakh) Monthly per
capita expenditure in 2009-10. Maharashtra state Urban Rs 961.1/- (Lakh) and Rural Rs 743.7/- (Lakh) Monthly per capita
expenditure. The Head Count Ratio (HCR) is obtained using urban and rural poverty lines, which are applied on the Monthly
Per Capita Expenditure (MPCE) distribution of the states. All India Headcount ratio and number of persons is 37.2(2004-05)
and 29.8 (2009-10). Persons below poverty line of 4,072.2(Lakhs) and 3,546.8 (2009-10). Maharashtra state Headcount ratio
is 38.2 (2004-05), 24.5 (2009-10) and 392.4(Lakhs) 2004-05, 270.8(Lakhs) 2009-10 for number of persons below poverty line.
Maharashtra state stands at 3rd position after Bihar and Madhya Pradesh in rural poverty ratio, which has been 47.9 per
cent.

INTRODUCTION :
Maharashtra is the second largest state in India
both in terms of population and geographical area
(3.08 lakh sq. km.). The State has a population of
11.24 crore (Census 2011) which is 9.3 per cent of the
total population of India. The State is highly urbanized
with 45.2 percent people residing in urban areas.
Maharashtra is the second largest state in terms of size
of population after Uttar Pradesh. The population of the
State was 11.24 crore, which was 9.3 per cent of the
total population of India (121.02 crore) in 2011. Poverty
in India is widespread, with the nation estimated to
have a third of the world's poor. In 2010, the World
Bank reported that 32.7% of the totals Indian people
fall below the international poverty line of US$ 1.25 per
day (PPP) while 68.7% lives on less than US$ 2 per
day.
World Bank:
Poverty is pronounced deprivation in well-
being, and comprises many dimensions. It includes low
incomes and the inability to acquire the basic goods
and services necessary for survival with dignity.
Poverty also encompasses low levels of health and
education, poor access to clean water and sanitation,
inadequate physical security, lack of voice, and
insufficient capacity and opportunity to better ones life.
Economic aspects of poverty focus on material needs,
typically including the necessities of daily living, such
as food, clothing, shelter, or safe drinking water.
Poverty in this sense may be understood as a condition
in which a person or community is lacking in the basic
needs for a minimum standard of well-being and life,
particularly as a result of a persistent lack of income.
Definition of Population below poverty line:
National estimates of the percentage of the population
falling below the poverty line are based on surveys of
sub-groups, with the results weighted by the number of
people in each group. Definitions of poverty vary
considerably among nations. For example, rich nations
generally employ more generous standards of poverty
than poor nations.
OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY
Following are the main objectives of the present
research paper
1. To study the State wise poverty lines for some
major states
2. To study the Headcount ratio and number of
persons below poverty line of some major
states
HYPOTHESIS
HY1. There is significant difference in poverty lines
for some major states.
HY2. There is significant difference in Headcount
ratio and number of persons below poverty
line of some major states.
RESEARCH DESIGN
The present research paper is based on secondary
data which is collected from Planning Commission, GoI
As per Tendulkar Committee report, Economic Survey
of Maharashtra reports. The collected data is
KEYWORDS : Poverty, Maharashtra
processed with the help of computer by using
appropriate statistical techniques.
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS
Table No 01: State wise poverty lines for 2009-10 of
some major states in India
Monthly per capita
expenditure ( Rs )

Sr.No.

State
Urban Rural
01 Andhra Pradesh 926.4 693.8
02 Bihar 775.3 655.6
03 Gujarat 951.4 725.9
04 Karnataka 908.0 629.4
05 Kerala 830.7 775.3
06 Madhya Pradesh 771.7 631.9
07 Maharashtra 961.1 743.7
08 Punjab 960.8 830.0
09 Rajasthan 846.0 755.0
10 Tamil Nadu 800.8 639.0
11 Uttar Pradesh 799.9 663.7
12 West Bengal 830.6 643.2
13 All India 859.6 672.8

Source: Planning Commission, GoI # As per
Tendulkar Committee report (Press release Dt.19th
March, 2012)
Tendulkar Committee developed a methodology
using implicit prices for estimating state wise poverty
lines for the year 2004-05. As per the Committee
recommendations, the state wise urban and rural
poverty lines of 2004-05 are updated for 2009-10. The
Head Count Ratio (HCR) is obtained using urban and
rural poverty lines, which are applied on the Monthly
Per Capita Expenditure (MPCE) distribution of the
states. State wise Poverty Lines for 2009-10 of some
major states are shown in Table no.01.

Graph No 01: State wise poverty lines for 2009-10 of some
major states in India
Table No.02: Headcount ratio and number of
persons below poverty line of some major states in
India.

Sr.
No
.
State Headcount
Ratio
Number of
Persons (Lakh)
200
4-05
200
9-10
2004-
05
2009-
10
01 Andhra
Pradesh
29.6 21.1 235.1 176.6
02 Bihar 54.4 53.5 493.8 543.5
03 Gujarat 31.6 23.0 171.4 136.2
04 Karnataka 33.3 23.6 186.5 142.3
05 Kerala 19.6 12.0 62.0 39.6
06 Madhya
Pradesh
48.6 36.7 315.7 261.8
07 Maharashtra 38.2 24.5 392.4 270.8
08 Punjab 20.9 15.9 53.6 43.5
09 Rajasthan 34.4 24.8 209.8 167.0
10 Tamil Nadu 29.4 17.1 194.1 121.8
11 Uttar Pradesh 40.9 37.7 730.7 737.9
12 West Bengal 34.2 26.7 288.3 240.3
13 All India 37.2 29.8 4,072.2 3,546.8

Source: Planning Commission, GoI # As per
Tendulkar Committee report (Press release Dt.19th
March, 2012)
Above table shows the headcount ratio and population
below Poverty Line of some major states.
CONCLUSION
All India Urban Rs 859.6/- (Lakh) and Rural Rs
672.8/-(Lakh) Monthly per capita expenditure in 2009-
10. Maharashtra state Urban Rs 961.1/- (Lakh) and
Rural Rs 743.7/- (Lakh) Monthly per capita
expenditure. The Head Count Ratio (HCR) is obtained
using urban and rural poverty lines, which are applied
on the Monthly Per Capita Expenditure (MPCE)
distribution of the states. All India Headcount ratio and
number of persons is 37.2(2004-05) and 29.8 (2009-
10). Persons below poverty line of 4,072.2(Lakhs) and
3,546.8 (2009-10). Maharashtra state Headcount ratio
is 38.2 (2004-05), 24.5 (2009-10) and 392.4(Lakhs)
2004-05, 270.8(Lakhs) 200
9-10 for number of persons below poverty line

REFERENCES

1. Directorate of Economics & Statistics. (2005), State Income of Maharashtra 1993-94 to 2003-4: Disaggregated and Derived Tables,
Directorate of Economics & Statistics, Mumbai
2. Economic Survey of Maharashtra 2012-13 Director of Economics and Statistics, Government of Maharashtra.
3. Maharashtra State Rural Livelihoods Mission Annual Action Plan 2012-13
4. Planning Commission, GOI As per Tendulkar Committee report (Press release Dt.19th March, 2012)

ABSTRACT The word empowerment means the creation of an environment where women can make independent
decisions on their personal development as well as shine as equals in society. In India Women are still facing different
obstacles in male dominated culture. An upsetting place still remains for Indian woman is the negative sexual attention that
woman often receive. Indian societies have received notoriety for begin unsafe for women. Add to this heinous practice of
female feticide and infanticide wherein nearly 10 million baby girls have been killed in the last 20 years alone. It is duty of law
enforcement agencies to prevent crimes against women but they fail to solve this scourge alone. Teamwork by people is the key
to eradicating this menace. People must come forward to help in rooting out such social evils .Law enforcing agencies cannot
work alone. When the people are dynamic in their drive against crime, the police cannot remain mute spectator though they
are supposed to be the protectors of citizens. Youth should be motivated to be socially responsible and protect women. This is
the need of hour education must essential to women to know their real place in the world. I think there is need to be a sea-
change in the mindset of the people in the country. Not just women themselves but the men have to wake up to a world this is
moving towards equality and equity. It is better that this is embraced earlier rather than latter, for our own good.

We might be listening to news, reading
newspaper or magazine, we should have gone through
incidents and accidents with women in India. While
any other article on womens empowerment in India
will take a look at our rich heritage and enlightened
societies of the past where women were treated as
equals, the concept of India itself evolved quite
recently, relative to the sum of its parts histories. But
the TRUTH is that in the modern India, the woman has
always been a second grade citizen, no matter what its
esteemed leaders have said or done.
It is hard to fathom how slow moving the
cultural exchange of the world is when you find out that
there are several places across the country where
harmful customs of the ancient world coexist with
modern appliances and thought. However that may
come as hardly any surprise to anyone who has lived
in India the dichotomy of society is something that
can only be explained by a refrain from an old
Bollywood song: It happens only in India!
Yes, it is only in India that glaring and brutal
gang rapes occur frequently in a state that is headed
by a woman Chief Minister. Gender discrimination is
the least of worries for women in India, known
otherwise as the fourth most dangerous country in the
world for women. Other instances of violence against
women has an astonishing and grim variety to it with
acid throwing, domestic violence stemming out of
dowry, rape, harassment and an assortment of others.
WOMEN EMPOWERMENT In the simplest of words it
is basically the creation of an environment where
women can make independent decisions on their
personal development as well as shine as equals in
society.
Women want to be treated as equals so much so that
if a woman rises to the top of her field it should be a
commonplace occurrence that draws nothing more
than a raised eyebrow at the gender. This can only
happen if there is a channelized route for the
empowerment of women.
Thus it is no real surprise that women empowerment in
India is a hotly discussed topic with no real solution
looming in the horizon except to doubly redouble our
efforts and continue to target the sources of all the
violence and ill-will towards women.
CRIMES AGAINST WOMEN
The crimes against women fly directly against
orchestrating women empowerment in India. A report
on the crimes against women by the National Crime
Records Bureau comes up with some alarming
statistics:-
Sl
N
o.
Crime
Head
Year
2006
Year
2007
Year
2008
Year
2009
Year
2010
Year
2011
Year
2012
Percent
age
Variatio
n
in
2012
over
2011
1
Rape
(Sec. 376
IPC)
19,34
8
20,73
7
21,46
7
21,39
7
22,17
2
24,20
6
24,92
3
3.0
2
Kidnappin
g &
Abduction
(Sec. 363
17,41
4
20,41
6
22,93
9
25,74
1
29,79
5
35,56
5
38,26
2
7.6
Dr.Beelkis Hasanali Patel Dr.Beelkis Hasanali Patel Dr.Beelkis Hasanali Patel Dr.Beelkis Hasanali Patel
Chishtiya College of Arts, Khuldabad. Dist: Aurangabad,
Maharashtra
Women Empowerment in India
Sl
N
o.
Crime
Head
Year
2006
Year
2007
Year
2008
Year
2009
Year
2010
Year
2011
Year
2012
Percent
age
Variatio
n
in
2012
over
2011
to 373
IPC)
3
Dowry
Death
(Sec
302/304
IPC)
7,618 8,093 8,172 8,383 8,391 8,618 8,233 -4.5
4
Torture
(Sec. 498-
A IPC)
63,12
8
75,93
0
81,34
4
89,54
6
94,04
1
99,13
5
1,06,
527
7.5
5
Molestatio
n
(Sec. 354
IPC)
36,61
7
38,73
4
40,41
3
38,71
1
40,61
3
42,96
8
45,35
1
5.5
6
Sexual
Harassme
nt
(Sec. 509
IPC)
9,966
10,95
0
12,21
4
11,00
9
9,961 8,570 9,173 7.0
7
Importatio
n of Girls
(Sec. 366-
B IPC)
67 61 67 48 36 80 59 -26.3
8
Sati
Preventio
n Act,
1987
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 -100.0
9
Immoral
Traffic
(Preventio
n) Act,
1956
4,541 3,568 2,659 2,474 2,499 2,435 2,563 5.3
10
Indecent
Represent
ation of
Women
(Prohibitio
n) Act,
1986
1,562 1,200 1,025 845 895 453 141 -68.9
11
Dowry
Prohibition
Act, 1961
4,504 5,623 5,555 5,650 5,182 6,619 9,038 36.5
Total
1,64,
765
1,85,
312
1,95,
856
2,03,
804
2,13,
585
2,28,
650
2,44,
270
6.8
A total of 2,44,270 incidents of crime against
women (both under IPC and SLL) were reported in the
country during the year 2012 as compared to 2,28,650
in the year 2011 recording an increase of 6.4% during
the year 2012. These crimes have continuously
increased during 2008 2012 with 1,95,856 cases in
the year 2008, 2,03,804 cases in 2009 and 2,13,585
cases in 2010 and 2,28,650 cases in 2011 and
2,44,270 cases in the year 2012. West Bengal with
7.5% share of countrys female population has
accounted for nearly 12.7% of total crime against
women by reporting 30,942 cases during the year
2012.
CHALLENGES
There are several challenges that are currently
plaguing the issues of womens rights in India. A few of
these challenges are presented below. While a lot of
these are redundant and quite basic issues faced
across the country, these are contributory causes to
the overarching status of women in India. Targeting
these issues will directly benefit the empowerment of
women in India.
EDUCATION
While the country has grown from leaps and
bounds since its independence where education is
concerned, the gap between women and men is
severe. While 82.14% of adult men are educated, only
65.46% of adult women are known to be literate in
India. Not only is an illiterate women at the mercy of
her husband or father, she also does not know that this
is not the way of life for women across the world.
Additionally, the norms of culture that state that the
man of the family is the be-all and end-all of family
decisions is slowly spoiling the society of the country.

Data Source: Census of India 2011
As said in a study conducted by the Centre for
the Study of Society and Secularism,
In spite of the UN Charter of Human Rights
and the provisions of the Indian Constitution, women
continue to be victims of exploitation. The view that the
future generation of a family is carried on and
preserved by boys-only has degraded the position of
women in society. Similarly, it is noticed that majority
of the women are lacking in the spirit of rebellion. If
careful attention is not paid and major steps are not
taken, the situation will become extremely critical.
Eradicating this gap and educating women
about their real place in the world is a step that will
largely set this entire movement rolling down the hill to
crash and break the wall of intolerance, negligence
and exploitation.
POVERTY IN THE COUNTRY

Data Source: Wikipedia
About a third of the countrys population lives
on less than 1.25USD per day. The GINI index keeps
rising slowly over the years, indicating that the
inequality in the distribution of wealth in the country is
increasing, currently hovering a little close to 33.9.
Poverty is considered the greatest threat to
peace in the world, and eradication of poverty should
be a national goal as important as the eradication of
illiteracy. Due to abject poverty, women are exploited
as domestic helps and wives whose incomes are
usurped by the man of the house. Additionally, sex
slaves are a direct outcome of poverty, as unearthed
by Davinder Kumar:-
Andhra Pradesh accounts for nearly half of all
sex trafficking cases in India, the majority involving
adolescent girls. According to police estimates, a
shocking 300,000 women and girls have been
trafficked for exploitative sex work from Andhra
Pradesh; of these just 3,000 have been rescued so far.
The state is relatively prosperous, ranking fourth in
terms of per capita GDP in India, but it is also home to
some of the poorest people in the country.
If poverty were not a concern, then the girl
child will be able to follow her dreams without concerns
of sexual exploitation, domestic abuse and no
education or work.
HEALTH & SAFETY
The health and safety concerns of women are
paramount for the wellbeing of a country, and is an
important factor in gauging the empowerment of
women in a country. However there are alarming
concerns where maternal healthcare is concerned.
In its 2009 report, UNICEF came up with shocking
figures on the status of new mothers in India. The
maternal mortality report of India stands at 301 per
1000, with as many as 78,000 women in India dying of
childbirth complications in that year. Today, due to the
burgeoning population of the country, that number is
sure to have multiplied considerably. The main causes
of maternal mortality are:-
Haemorrhage: 30%
Anaemia: 19%
Sepsis: 16%
Obstructed Labour: 10%
Abortion: 8%
Toxaemia: 8%
While there are several programmes that have
been set into motion by the Government and several
NGOs in the country, there is still a wide gap that
exists between those under protection and those not.
Poverty and illiteracy add to these complications with
local quacks giving ineffective and downright harmful
remedies to problems that women have. The
empowerment of women begins with a guarantee of
their health and safety.
ACTIONS TAKEN TO EMPOWER WOMEN
MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOAL
The United Nations Development Programme
constituted eight Millennium Development Goals
(MDG) for ensuring equity and peace across the world.
The third MDG is directly related to the empowerment
of women in India. The MDGs are agreed-upon goals
to reduce certain indicators of disparity across the
world by the year 2015.
The third MDG is centered towards promoting
gender equality and empowering women: Eliminate
gender disparity in primary and secondary education,
preferably by 2005, and in all levels of education by no
later than 2015
While Indias progress in this front has been
brave, there are quite a few corners that it needs to cut
before it can be called as being truly revolutionary in its
quest for understanding what is women empowerment.
As UNDP says:-
India missed the 2005 deadline of eliminating
gender disparity in primary and secondary education.
However, the country has hastened progress and the
Gender Parity Index (GPI) for Gross Enrolment Ratios
(GER) in primary and secondary education has risen.
Given current trends, India is moderately or almost
nearly on track. However, as the Government of India
MDG Report 2009 notes, participation of women in
employment and decision-making remains far less
than that of men, and the disparity is not likely to be
eliminated by 2015. Achieving GPI in tertiary
education also remains a challenge. In addition, the
labour market openness to women in industry and
services has only marginally increased from 13-18
percent between 1990-91 and 2004-05.
MINISTRY FOR WOMEN & CHILD DEVELOPMENT
The Ministry for Women & Child Development
was established as a department of the Ministry of
Human Resource Development in the year 1985 to
drive the holistic development of women and children
in the country. In 2006 this department was given the
status of a Ministry, with the powers to:-
Formulate plans, policies and programmes; enacts/
amends legislation, guiding and coordinating the
efforts of both governmental and non-governmental
organizations working in the field of Women and Child
Development.
It delivers such initiatives such as the Integrated Child
Development Services (ICDS) which is a package of
services such as supplementary nutrition, health
check-ups and immunization. As mentioned earlier, the
empowerment of women begins with their safety and
health and this Ministry is committed to providing them.
Swayamsidha Programme
Additionally, the Ministry is also implementing
the Swayamsidha programmed an integrated
scheme for the empowerment of women at a total cost
of Rs. 116.30 Crores. Core to this programme will be
the establishment of womens self-help groups which
will empower women to have increased access to all
kinds of resources that they are denied, in addition to
increasing their awareness and skills. This programme
will benefit about 9,30,000 women with the setting up
of 53,000 self-help groups, 26,500 village societies
and 650 block societies.
National Commission for Women
The National Commission for Women is a
Department within the Ministry of Women and Child
Development. It was set up exclusively to help women
via the Constitution by reviewing Legal and
Constitutional safeguards for women, recommending
remedial legislative measures, by facilitating quick
redressal of grievances and by advising the
Government of India on all policy matters affecting
women.
The website allows for online submission of
complaints and fast redressal exclusively for women.
Additionally it is also a good resource of information for
women and the Commission is committed to helping
out women in need.
THE ROAD AHEAD
India as a country is still recovering from years
of abuse in the time of the Raj and more years of
economic suffering at the hands of the License Raj. It
is only now that globalization, liberalization and other
socio-economic forces have given some respite to a
large proportion of the population. However, there are
still quite a few areas where women empowerment in
India is largely lacking.
To truly understand what is women
empowerment, there needs to be a sea-change in the
mind-set of the people in the country. Not just the
women themselves, but the men have to wake up to a
world that is moving towards equality and equity. It is
better that this is embraced earlier rather than later, for
our own good.
Swami Vivekananda once said arise away
and stop not until the goal is reached. Thus our
country should thus be catapulted into the horizon of
empowerment of women and revel in its glory.
We have a long way to go, but we will get there
someday. We shall overcome.

REFERENCES

1. Women Empowerment india-Jaipurrugs. org www.jaipurrugs.org
2. Support Women Empowerment-icharity.in www.icharity. In/ women-Empowerment
3. Women in India Wikipedia the free encyclopedia En. Wikipedia.org/ wiki/ women in India
4. National Policy for the Empowerment of Women www . wcdnicin/empwomen.htm.

Economics and Psychology

ABSTRACT - The biological and evolutionary origins of personality traits are explored Personality measurement
systems and relationships among the measures used by psychologists are examined The predictive power of personality
measures is compared with the predictive power of measures of cognition captured by IQ and achievement tests For many
outcomes personality measures are just as predictive as cognitive measures even after controlling for family background and
cognition Moreover standard measures of cognition are heavily influenced by personality traits and incentives measured
personality traits are positively correlated over the life cycle However they are not fixed and can be altered by experience and
investment Intervention studies along with studies in Biology and neuroscience establish a causal basis for the observed effect
of personality traits on economic and social outcomes Personality traits are more malleable over the life cycle compared with
cognition which becomes highly rank stable around age 10 Interventions that change personality are promising avenues for
addressing poverty and disadvantage.

INTRODUCTION
In this article I review empirical findings on
anomalous impacts of incentives and argue that rather
than being a disconnected string of idiosyncratic
exceptions to the standard model these findings
constitute convergent evidence about a coherent set of
principles that can help improve the design of incentive
structures in a variety of settings. To organize the
literature I carve the set of observed anomalies in two
different ways,. 1st I divide the empirical findings into
those that suggest that there is no free disposal (of
options or of money) and those that demonstrate that
framing problem. This categorization however does not
coincide with the categorization based on the
mechanisms behind the impact. Some of the observed
effects are driven by contextual inference some are a
consequence of loss aversion and dynamic inconsistency
and some reflect psychological factors such as choking.
Contrary to what you would expect based on a standard
introductory text in microeconomics if you pay a person
more for doing a task she might be less willing to work on
it she might be less productive given her efforts and she
may enjoy the without task. If you start charging a fee for
something more people might first doing it. If you want
your employees to save more for retirement you may
want to give them fewer investment alternatives. If you
want them to engage more in a task you might want to
offer them an additional alternative to that task Moreover
to induce particular actions you might have to think not
only about the underlying incentives but also about the
defaults the presentation the labels and the frame
about the choice architecture. I should also mention an
important topic that this review does not shroud. There
are anomalies in incentives that are primarily driven by
social preferences with fairness trust and reciprocity
playing particularly important roles (Fehr&Falk 2002
Fehr&List 2004). Although those factors are certainly as
important as the ones I consider here I do not discuss
them since Fehr et al review the relevant literature in the
first volume of this journal.
Intrinsic and Extrinsic Incentives The possibility that
monetary incentives can crowd out intrinsic motivation
was first demonstrated by Deci (1971). Subjects in both
the control and the treatment group came to the lab for
three hour long sessions During each session subjects
had an opportunity to solve puzzles In the first and the
third session subjects were not paid for their
performance on this task During the second session
however the subjects in the treatment group were paid $1
for each puzzle solved within the allotted time; the
subjects in the control group were not During each
session the experimenter left the room for eight minutes
and secretly measured how much of that time subjects
spent trying to solve a puzzle that unbeknownst to the
subjects was unsolvable On the table in front of each
subject along with the puzzle were the most recent issues
of The New Yorker Time and Playboy so not all the
subjects spent the entire eight minutes on the impossible
puzzle thus providing Deco with suitable variation in the
outcome measure. The effect that Deco found and
emphasized the effect that gave birth to an entire subfield
within social psychology is that during the third
incentivized session the subjects in the treatment group
spent less time working on the puzzle than the subjects in
the control class. The common interpretation of this
finding is that the exposure to extrinsic monetary
incentives crowds out intrinsic motivation and thus
reduces subsequent interest in the task This experiment
has been replicated many times: Deci (1999) review 128
experiments with the same design.3 almost all the
replications however follow
Pro-social Behavior and Extrinsic Incentives
Titmuss (1970) argues that offering payment for
blood donation might reduce the number of people willing
to take blood.5 Mellstrom & Johannesson (2008) provide
one experimental test of this conjecture They recruited
Khan Fauzia Bano Khan Fauzia Bano Khan Fauzia Bano Khan Fauzia Bano
Quasim Khan Quasim Khan Quasim Khan Quasim Khan
Research fellow, Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Marathwada
University, Aurangabad (Maharashtra)
undergraduate students for an experiment purportedly
about attitudes toward blood donation All subjects were
then given an opportunity to undertake a physical exam
that would be necessary for them to become blood
donors The outcome measure was the subjects
willingness to undergo this exam Subjects were
randomized into three conditions In the control condition
they were not offered any compensation In the first
treatment condition subjects were given $7 if they agreed
to the physical exam In the second treatment condition
subjects who agreed to the physical exam could choose
between a $7 payment and a $7 donation to a charity In
contrast to Titus conjecture the authors find no significant
difference in outcomes across the three conditions
although their standard errors are large enough to allow
for the possibility that the $7 payment substantially
reduces the willingness to agree to the exam Moreover
the authors separately analyze the data on male and
female. Among men payment does not substantially
affect behavior Among women however the fraction of
subjects who agree to the exam drops from 52% without
compensation to 30% when a $7 payment is introduced
(p 0.024) Under the second treatment where the $7
could be designated for charity the fraction of women who
agree to the exam is 53% quite similar to the control
class.6 Because from the ex ante perspective there was
little reason to expect the effect to hold only for women
however these results should be interpreted with
Providing Too Many Options Taking monetary incentives
as given if a principal wishes to induce an agent to
engage in a particular activity such as writing a paper or
saving for retirement one possibility would be to provide
the agent with more options For instance the principal
could be flexible on when the paper is due or could offer
more funds for the agent to invest in It turns out however
that such indirect incentives can backfire Wertenbroch
(2002) conduct an experiment where subjects are paid for
proofreading three texts and are given either a deadline
of turning one text in every week or a deadline of turning
in all three texts at the end of 3 weeks.22 In both
conditions subjects paid a penalty of $1 for each day of
delay past the assigned end line. Even though the
subjects in the latter condition had more options for when
to work on their task they reported spending less time on
the task and they detected fewer errors in the texts
Iyengar. (2004) examine the relationship between
participation in a 401(k) plan and the number of funds
available They analyze records of roughly 800000
employees in a cross section of companies whose 401(k)
plans are administered. They find that every 10 additional
funds in a 401(k) plan decrease participation by
approximately % points. Iyengar & Kamenica (2010)
examine the same data but focus on the employees
participation in the stock market They find that even
though the fraction of funds that are equity funds
increases in the overall number of funds for every 10
additional funds in a 401(k) plan an employee is roughly 3
percentage points less likely to invest any money at all in
equities
CONCLUSION
Monetary incentives are clearly powerful tools for
motivating people Prendergast (1999) reviews the
empirical evidence on the use of incentives in firms and
demonstrates that in a variety of settings incentives
improve performance For example Lazear (2000)
examines the impact of a change from fixed salaries to
piece-rate compensation for workers in an auto-glass
company He finds that this introduction of incentives
raised output per worker by 44% However Prendergast
(1999) also points out that poorly structured incentives
can have unintended consequences because of
multitasking concerns that arise due to the difficulty of
specifying all aspects of workers jobs (Holmstrom &
Milgrom 1991) In this review I focus on other reasons why
poorly structured incentives can backfire (while
nonstandard interventions can work): Agents might have
limited information about what they want to do they might
suffer from loss aversion and dynamic inconsistency and
their effort might become less productive when the
incentives are too steep It is helpful to distinguish those
tasks that people certainly do not want to do unless they
are paid for them from those that people may or may not
engage in depending on the details of their choice-making
environment Much of contract theory deals primarily with
the former47 For such tasks such as showing up to work
at an unpleasant unrewarding job incentives are clearly a
crucial tool although factors such as multitasking and
repeated interactions between the employer and the
employees still need to be taken into account The results
discussed in this review are most relevant for the latter
type of task Consider once again trying to induce people
to save more for retirement48 Savings rates are not
something that most people have clear preferences over
Most individuals are unsure how when and how much to
save Consequently it is not obvious what would be a
more effective way to raise 401(k) investments: lower the
fees charged by the funds by 20% or implement a Smart
plan Such an experiment has not yet been conducted but
for what it is worth my money is on Smart

REFERENCES

Bodie Zvi and Kane Alex (2006) Investment, , Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi.
Bhole, L.M.(2004), Financial Institution and Markets: Structure, Growth and Innovations, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, Delhi
Bahamani-Oskooee, M. and Soharabian, A. (1994), Stock Prices and the Effective Exchange Rate of the Dollar, Applied Economics, Vol. 24,
pp. 459-464.
Austin, E. J., Saklofske, D. H., & Egan, V. (2005): Personality, well - being and health correlates of trait emotional intelligen ce, Personality
and Individual Differences , 38 , 547 558. 4.
Brackett, M. A., Mayer, J. D., & Warner, R. M. (2004): Emotional intelligence and its relation to everyday behavior, Personality and Individual
Differences , 36 , 1387 1402


INTRODUCTION:-
Poverty in India is widespread , with the nation
estimated to have a third of the world's poor. In 2010,
the world bank reported that 32.7% of all people in
India fall below the international poverty line of US $
1.25 per day (PPP) while 68.7% live on less than US $
2 per day.
According to 2010 data from the united nations
development programme, an estimated 29.8% of
India's live below the country's national poverty line. A
2010 report by the oxford poverty and Human
Development Initiative (OPH) states that 8 Indian
states have 421 million poor people. A 2013 UN report
stated that a third of the worlds poorest people live in
India.
According to a 2011 poverty development
goals report, as many as 320 million people in India
and china are expected to come out of extreme
poverty in the next four years, with India's poverty rate
projected to drop from 51% in 1990 to about 22% in
2015. The report also indicates that in southern Asia,
only India is on track to cut poverty by half by the 2015
target date.
Poverty is burning issue because on one side there is
high profile class who are very rich and on other side
most of the people from India is poor. There is double
digit growth rate of India and we are calling shining
India but on the other side people from India faces
illiteracy, unemployment, corruption, poverty etc.
In this research paper poverty, poverty line,
causes, effects of poverty are studied and with this
psychological causes are also studied. This research
paper is depend on the secondary data.
Objectives:-
1] To study the Indian poverty ratio.
2] To analyses the state wise poverty lines in
India.
3] To study the causes of poverty in India.
4] To study the effects of poverty in India.
5] To give appropriate suggestions for poverty
reduction.
What is poverty?
According to Amartya sen poverty means to
fail to live according to his own set values.
Poverty can also be define as a social
phenomenon in which a section of the society is
unable to fulfill even its basic necessities.

India's poverty line
Table No.1
State specific poverty lines for 2011-12
Monthly per
capita (Rs)
Sr.
No.
States
Rural Urban
1 Andhra Pradesh 860 1,009
2 Arunachla Pradesh 930 1,060
3 Assam 828 1,008
4 Bihar 778 923
5 Chhattisgarh 738 849
6 Delhi 1145 1,134
7 Goa 1090 1,134
8 Gujarat 932 1,152
9 Haryana 1015 1,169
10 Himachal Pradesh 913 1,064
11 Jammu & Kashmir 891 988
12 Jharkhand 748 974
13 Karnataka 902 1,089
14 Kerala 1,018 987
15 Madhya Pradesh 771 897
16 Maharashtra 967 1,126
17 Manipur 1,118 1,170
18 Meghalaya 888 1,154
19 Mizoram 1,066 1,155
20 Nagaland 1,270 1,302
21 Odisha 695 861
22 Punjab 1,054 1,155
23 Rajasthan 905 1,002
24 Sikkim 930 1,226
25 Tamil Nadu 880 937
26 Tripura 798 920
27 Uttarakhand 880 1,082
28 Uttar Pradesh 768 941
29 West Bengal 783 981
30 Puducherry 1,301 1,309
All India 816 1,000

Note : Computed as per Tendulkar method on mixed
reference period (MRP)

For 2011-12, for rural areas the national
poverty line using the Tendulkar methodology is
estimated at Rs. 816/- per capita per month and
Rs.1,000/- per capita per month in urban areas. High
national poverty line is observed in Puducherry with
1,301 per capita per month in rural areas and 1,309
per capita per month in urban areas. It is observed that
odisha has low national poverty line with 695 per
capita per month in rural areas and Chhattisgarh with
849 per capita per month in urban areas. Maharashtra
Gaikwad Ramesh Jalba Gaikwad Ramesh Jalba Gaikwad Ramesh Jalba Gaikwad Ramesh Jalba
Dr. Ubale Sonal Ashok Dr. Ubale Sonal Ashok Dr. Ubale Sonal Ashok Dr. Ubale Sonal Ashok

E.S.P.M. College of Arts, Bidkin, Aurangabad, Maharashtra
Causes And Effects of Poverty : Indian Experience

has 967 per capita per month in rural areas and 1,126
per capita per month in urban areas.

Table No.2
Number and percentage of population below poverty
line by states 2011-12.
(Tendulkar Methodology)

Notes:
1. Population as on 1
st
March 2012 has been used
for estimating number of
1. persons below poverty line. (2011 Census
population extrapolated)
2. Poverty line of Tamil Nadu has been used for
Andaman and Nicobar Island.
3. Urban Poverty Line of Punjab has been used for
both rural and urban areas
4. of Chandigarh.
5. Poverty Line of Maharashtra has been used for
Dadra & Nagar Haveli.
6. Poverty line of Goa has been used for Daman &
Diu.
7. Poverty Line of Kerala has been used for
Lakshadweep.
For 2011-12, in India the number and percentage of
population below poverty line by states by Tendulkar
methodology for rural areas are 2166.58 lakhs and
25.7% respectively; for urban areas 531.25 lakhas and
13.7% respectively and as total 2697.83 lakhs and
21.92% respectively.
Poverty in Indian Context
Poverty Ratio In India:-
Percentage and number of poor estimate by
Tendulkar method, using mixed reference period
(MRP)
Table No.3
Poverty Ratio Number poor (Million) Year
Rural Urban Total Rural Urban Total
1993-
94
50.1 31.8 45.3 328.6 74.5 403.7
2004-
05
41.8 25.7 37.2 326.3 80.8 407.1
2011-
12
25.7 13.7 21.9 216.5 52.8 269.3
Source : - Planning commission report 22
nd
July 2013.

The percentage of persons below poverty line
in 2011-12 has been estimated as 25.7% in rural
areas, 13.7% in urban areas and 21.9% for the country
as a whole. The respective ratios for the rural and
urban areas were 41.8% and 25.7% and 37.2% per
the country as a whole in 2004-05.
Poverty by social groups
Table No.4
Social Groups Rural (%) (2007-
08)
Urban (%)
(2007-08)
Scheduled castes 20.6 22.8
Scheduled tribe 25.3 20.6
other backward
class
12.0 19.0
others 6.3 7.3
All social groups 14.9 14.5
Source : IHD Report 2011 Page No. 114.
The above table shows poverty by social groups in
rural and urban areas for the year 2007-08. The
percentage of poverty for scheduled castes has been
estimated as 20.6% in rural areas and 22.8% in urban
areas. Other backward class has 12% in rural areas
and 19% in urban areas, others has 6.3% in rural
areas and 7.3% in urban areas.
The percentage of poverty for all social groups has
been estimated as 14.9% in rural areas and 14.5% in
urban areas.
Poverty by major religious communities
Table No.5
Religious
community
Rural (%)
(2007-08)
Urban (%)
(2007-08)
Hindus 14.3 13
Muslims 13.3 23.7
Christian 8.5 6.6
Sikhs 2.1 3.6
Source : IHD report (2011) page No.114
The above table shows poverty by major religious
communities for the year 2007-08. The percentage of
poverty for Hindus has been estimated as 14.3% in
rural areas and 13% in urban areas; for Muslims,
13.3% in rural areas and 23.7% in urban areas; for
Christians, 8.5% in rural areas and 6.6% in urban
areas and for Sikhs, 2.1% in rural areas and 3.6%
urban areas.
Causes of poverty in India
1] There is no optimization of one's valuable and
hidden qualities.
2] There is lack of fare opportunities for
optimization of qualities.
3] There is rapidly rising population which causes
poverty in India.
4] There is unemployment which causes poverty
in India.
5] There is low productivity in agriculture which
shows increase in poverty.
6] Under utilized resources is one of the reason
to cause poverty in India.
7] Price rise shows poverty in India.
8] There are social factors and political factors to
cause poverty in India.
9] Due to low rate of economic development
India faces poverty.
10] According to Vasant Pethe, the last reason for
poverty is his own psychology.

Effects of poverty :
1] Education :
Poor people do not have money to
expend on education and that is why their next
generation also remains illiterate and they remain poor
only.
2] Health :
The cost of medical facilities are increasing rapidly in
day-to-day life and these costly medicals are not
affordable to poor people and they have to
compromise with their health.
3] Standard of living:
Everyone wants a good standard of living but
poor people cannot live better because their minimum
needs also does not fulfil.
India ranks 129 in multi dimensional poverty and if
these three factors are not fulfill then there will be
human and nation un-development.
RECOMMENDATIONS
1] There should be quantitative and qualitative
inclusive development which can help to r
educe poverty.
2] There should proper implementation of poverty
alleviation schemes by the government.
3] There should be reduction in socio-economic
disparities.
4] There should be implementation of schemes
to reduce poverty by the government.
5] Government should give free education at
grass-root level to reduce poverty.
6] There should be employment creation by the
government especially in rural areas.
7] Government should provide proper public
distribution system.
8] Government should provide free medical
facilities for poor.
9] Government should control price rise.
10] Government should take strict rules for
population control.
11] There should be rise in economic
development.
12] There should be labour distribution planning.
13] Government should take initiative to start small
scale industries.

REFERENCES

1. Datt Ruddra (2010, Indian Economy, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi)
2. Government of Indian (2013), Planning commission report, (www.poverty.org.in)
3. Government of India (2011), India Human Development report oxf ord university press, New Delhi.
4. Sen Amartya (1981) : Poverty and f amines an essay of entitlement and deprivation, oxf ord university press, New Delhi.
5. www.devinit.org
6. www.indianpoverty.com .
Research Paper History

INTRODUCTION :-
For over a century , universities & colleges
throughout the world at all levels have relied on
academic disciplines as platforms for importing
knowledge and generating new knowledge , Today
interdisciplinary learning at all levels is far more
common as there is growing recognition that it is
needed to answer complex questions , solve common
questions and gain coherent understanding of
common issues that are increasing beyond the ability
of any single discipline to address comprehensively or
resolve adequately As Carolel Palmer (2001) writes ,
The real world research problem that scientist
address rarely arise within orderly disciplinary
categories & neither do there solutions.
The meaning of interdisciplinary studies or
interdisciplinary continues to be contested by its
practioners & critics but emerging from this debate are
key concepts around which consensus is developing
and which inform the integrated definition of
interdisciplinary studies used in this book the following
discussion unpacks the meaning of these terms and in
doing so , introduces some of the theory undergirding
this diverse & growing academic field.
Interdisciplinary work often leads to the
information of new fields & new interdisciplines
examples of growing variety of such fields includes
ecology , environmental sciences , leadership studies ,
behavioural economics , resource management
industrial ecology , human ecology , future studies &
cybernetics etc.
Objectives of this research paper :-
i) Focus on foundation of Nazism in
psychological perspective.
ii) Develop skill of acquire new knowledge
through interdisciplinary approach.
Nazism - Definition
i) A form of socialism featuring racism &
expansionism and obedience to a strong
leader
ii) The body of political and doctrines held and
put into effect by the Nazism in Germany from
1933 to 1945 including the totalitarian principal of
government predominance of especially Germanic
group assumed to be racially superior and supremacy
of the fuhrer
Nazism or national socialism in full (German -
Nationalsozialismus) is the ideology and practice
associated with the 20
th
Century German party and
state as well as other related for fight groups usually
characterized as a form of facisim that incorporates
biological racism and antisemitism Nazism originally
developed from the influences of pan germanlism
(Germanist paramiltriculture) in the post world war I.
Germany which many German felt had been left
humiliated by the treaty of versailes prior to the
emergence of the Nazi party other rightwing figures
had argued for a nationalist recasting of socialism as a
reactionary alternative to both Marxist socialism and
free market capitalism.
German Nazism subscribed to theories of
racial hierarchy and social Darwinism asserted the
superiority of Aryan master race and criticized
capitalism and communist for being associated Jewish
materialism It rejected the Marxist concept of class
struggle & promoting idea of peoples communing It
aimed to overcome social division with all part of
racially homogenous society cooperating for national
unity and regeneration and to secure territorial
enlargement at the expense of supposedly inferior
neighboring nations undernazism the of the individual
were subordinate to the needs of the state , the
nations and the leaders .
Social psychology definition
i) Myers and spencer (2006) Define social
psychology as the scientific study of how
people think about influence , and relate to
one another .
ii) Barron and byrne (2007) Define social
psychology as the scientific fields that seek to
understand the nature and causes of individual
behavior and that in social situation .
iii) Garden allport (1954) Social psychology is
the best define the as the discipline that uses
Bhuktar A.B. Bhuktar A.B. Bhuktar A.B. Bhuktar A.B. J.E.SS College of Education, Nandurbar, Maharashtra.

Rise of Nazism and Social Psychology
scientific methods in an attempt to understand and
explain how the thoughts , feelings & behavior of
individual are influenced by the actual , imagined ,
implied presence of other human being .
Nature :-
i) Social psychology focus on individual behavior
ii) Understand causes of social behavior &
causes
iii) Actions & characteristics of others persons
In shortly the scientific study of the way in
which peoples thought , feeling and behavior are
influenced by real implied or imagined presence of
other people .
Sociopsychological foundation to Nazism :-
Adolf Hitler was very intellect he study what
was demand of our society ? what they want ? Nazi
manipulate & Convert its party into mass movement
Joy gonen author of the roots of Nazi psychology the
subject of gonen both is not hearts and mights of
perpetrators and victims but ideology abstract
constructect that has according to gonen its own soul
Gonen writes Nazi success in mobilizing the masses
was not due merely to the deliberate use of fear &
terror but primarily to the Nazi ideological massages
that fell right on the target .
Hitler use people / mass against Jews ,
Marxist , gays & weak peoples Nazi propaganda
strategy officially promulgated by the ministry of public
enlightment & propaganda there goals to agitate
external enemy like treaty of versai & internal enemies
like Jews , roman , homosexuals , bolshevicks for this
Hitler use pictures , posters , film like this mass media
Hitler create one nation & appeal people to support
him he also focus purity of race & claimed that Aryans
are pure & destroyed Jews Hitler take advantages of
social emotions & give assurance to people that
Germany became a strenthful nation
Conclusion :-
Nazism was ideology after world war I. In
Germany this times Germany lost there territories &
sign the treaty of versai in wimer republic period Nazi
understand the demand of society and take advantage
of the emotion of people Nazi nationalized some
important industries , create employment opportunities
& he became authoritarian leaders take some decision
about support capitalism & destroyed bolshevick
In short Hitler was Authoritarian leaders , Aggressive ,
develop self leadership by knowing peoples demand
and take advantage of environment

REFERENCES

1. Baron R.A. , Byrne D & Branscombe N.R.(2006), social psychology, New Delhi Prientic hall
2. Hitler A. (2010) , Mein camph , Bottom hill Publishing .
3. www.bbk.ac.uk/thepursuitofthenazimind
4. www.britanica.com/E.B.checkedtopic/714411/T4program
5. www.wikipedia.org
6. www.wilhelmreichtrust.org
Research Paper Political Science

Democracy has been hailed as the true and
the authentic voice of people, working for both their
tangible and intangible interests. In a meaningful
democracy, political stability and working within the
conventional frame work of law and ethics are the two
most desired virtues. People across the globe have
long cherished the dream of living under healthy
governance, which has led to their reaffirming the
mandate for the constitutionally approved governments
irrespective of their efficiency levels or experiences.
Sometimes, there is a limit to all that people can brook.
Their faith in legal system fails them, the popular
government becomes a toy in the hands of industrial
bourgeoisie and capitalist entrepreneurs, they lose the
power to govern even the aspects of their own lives
and there is a sense of simmering anarchy. This is not
a passing mood - it has been born out of a strong
sense of being wronged and alienated amidst their
land and property.
When the Naxal uprising began in 1967, the
union government looked at it as a law and order
problem. It did not analyze the causes of the
movement and the extent of the mobilization of the
people. Hence, it believed that it could and would put
an end to it in a short span of time using force. During
the outbreak of the armed clashes in Naxalbari, the
then Home Minister, Y.B. Chavan, addressing the Lok
Sabha on 13
th
June 1967, described them as mere
lawlessness and transgression to be repressed and
contained. So, while Charu Mazumdar named the
1970s the Decade of Liberation the Indian states
choose to make it the decade of repression. After
four decades of the rise of Naxal movement in this
Sub-Continent, during the year 2008, Indian Prime
Minister Manmohan Singh warned, Naxalism is the
greatest threat to our internal security. The credit the
survival of the movement for over 40 years must go
the government, which has failed abysmally in
addressing the cause and conditions that sustain the
movement. The problem has been in the Indian States
perception of the causes of the Naxal Movement.
The governments have enacted several laws
to empower themselves to combat Naxals. The West
Bengal Government enacted the Best Bengal
(Prevention of violation activities) Act 1970 to arm itself
to repress the uprising. No particular national act has
been enacted so far specifically to counter the Naxal
Movement, but various anti terror acts have been
used to curb Naxal Violence.
This trend was followed in several other state
also. For instance, in Andhra Pradesh in 1983, N.T.
Rama Rao government even liberalized arm licensing
to enable people to protect themselves from Naxals.
However, in spite of Governments strong action and
legal teeth, the Naxal movement has continued to
spread its base because the rural and tribal community
identify with its ideology. In other words, its inception,
ideology, spread and sustenance are deeply rooted in
the socio-economic factors. The naxlite movement
came into being as a result of prevailing socio-
economic issues with alarming levels of poverty. After
independence, the Indian Government pursued
agricultural policies focused on massively improving
output without doing enough to check economic and
social disparity. With the commercialization of
agriculture, economic disparities widen. The rich got
richer and the poor got poorer. The attempt of the
government to abolish zamadari created a class of rich
peasants from the backward classes. With the spread
of communist ideology, there was a greater
mobilization of the sharecroppers and landless
labourers, who mostly belonged to the so called lower
castes and tribes. This polarized the agrarian classes
and created an environment of confrontation. The local
administration and police nothing seemed to the more
natural than to see their role as defenders of the
vested interests irrespective of the changes in law.
More importantly, there was a conspicuous lack of
political will. Hence, socially biased bureaucracy also
impeded progress and made the legal system
ineffective as a tool for reform.
The constitution provides social, economic and
political guarantees to disadvantaged groups of
indigenous people, and the law provides special status
for indigenous people, but authorities often denied
them their rights. According to the ministry of tribal
affairs-2009-10annual report, there are more than 700
scheduled tribes in the country and the 2001 census
revealed the population of scheduled tribes as 84.3
million approximately 8 percent of the total population.
Activists claimed that approximately half of the
indigenous population lived in extreme poverty,
compared to 27 percent of total population.
Accordingly to the MHA 2009-10-annual report, there
were 5.582 Criminal cases reported against members
Prof. Kedar Nath Bishoyi Prof. Kedar Nath Bishoyi Prof. Kedar Nath Bishoyi Prof. Kedar Nath Bishoyi Balimela College Of Sc. & Tech., Balimela Dist-Malkangiri,
Odisha
Role of Good Governance: An Alternative Vision to Curb
Naxal Movement
of Scheduled Tribes in 2008. Tribal women employed
as domestic workers were often neither properly paid
nor protected from sexual exploitation. Land
encroachment on tribal lands continued in almost
every state, despite limited efforts by the state to
combat it. Many dalits were malnourished and bonded
laborers. Although the law protects dalits, in practice,
they faced violence and significant discrimination in
access to services such as health care and education.
The dispossessed forest-dwelling STS are
major source of support for the Naxal Movement.
Forest dwellers are disposed by the States,
declaration of reserve forests, without recognizing
rights of pre-existing communities. The main factor in
this regard was the forest Conservation Act 1080,
prior to 1980, the disposed were usually regularized,
but this process was stopped post 1980 and the
discontent set in as a result, the Naxal movement
stepped in. Since then forest conservation became a
strange companion to industrial forestry: Conservation
restricts Advasis rights, but industrial needs are
accommodated. There has been occupation by
advasis on extensive scale in Andhra Pradesh,
Chhattisgarh, Odisha and Jharkhand not fresh
occupation, just reassertion of traditional usufruct with
Naxlites support, but this has brought them in conflict
with forest department.
Naxal movement derives support from the rate
increases, it secured for picking of tendu (bidi) Kendu
leaves and other minor forest products in forest areas
of Andhra Pradesh, Chattishgarh, Odisha, Maharastra,
Jharakhand, which had been the major source of
exploitation of Adivasi labour. Government ignored it,
but the Naxlas put on end to it. The uncertain
existence of Advasis in the forests has resulted in
tremendous power of harassment in the hands of
forest department personnel. It was only after
Naxalities entered the picture, that the Advasis got
protection from harassment. The level of corruption in
the Naxal areas is noticeably less than elsewhere.
Tribal in India, have been historically self-
governing-which brings them in conflict with the formal
state system. Self governance meant management of
natural resources, general economic matters, - had
been appropriated by formal system over 1947-1995.
PESSA enacted in 1996 was meant to change this
erosion. Distinctive feature of governance at village
level in PESA is creation of space in legal frame for
functioning self-governance of tribal people. All laws
relating to Panchayats inconsistent with PESA are
deemed to have been lapsed on 13
th
December 1997,
but as ill luck would have it, PESA remains
unimplemented. There is hardly any realization in the
union government that implementation of PESA has to
be collaborative effort of almost all central ministries.
Only two ministries issued guideline to states in 1997,
Ministry of Rural Development on the role of Gram
Sabha in land acquisition and role of Gram Sabha
before granting of leases for minor minerals by Ministry
of Mines. There is total silence ever since about the
holistic frame of PESA in the entire Government
Establishment. In addition the National Mineral Policy
states that exploration should be carried out in a way
non-intrusive of rights of tribals under fifth schedule,
and causes least disturbance to ecology.
Since our country got her independence up to
2004, as many as 60 million people have been
displaced (Research based on state-by- state), an
unofficial estimate reveals. Out of this 25 million (28
percent) forest land, and 6 million hectare (24 percent)
is CPR. In these areas, Adivasis and landless are most
affected. Odisha, Jharakhand and Chhattisgarh are
rich in minerals mining projects have threatened
Advasi existence, and with further impetus to mining
due to growing demand from a fast growing economy,
there is a risk of further legal and illegal mining
occurring, without any concern for the displaced.
Governments both centre and states have no serious
rehabilitation and resettlement policy for last 60 years.
Since the administration provided little soccour,
Naxalite movement stepped into. One problem is that
displaced forest dwellers tend to settle down again in
some forest region, which is prohibited by law-the
Naxal movement assist, inviting the warth of state.
Another problem is that there is a presidential order
under Article (342) which declares the list of STS,
State wise. But the problem is that then these Tribal
People migrates involuntarily from one state to another
is not recognized as ST in new state-so there is no
protection of state, but receives Naxal protection.
When Odishas ST, shifted to forest near
Vishakhapatnam, the Andhra Government targeted it
for eviction. While Naxalites intervened, they were
harassed. Similarly, landless Gothi Koya tribes of
Chattisgarh crossed to Andhra Pradesh, (Khammam)
with Naxal support, so Andhra Pradesh forest and
police personals cracked down on them.
The constitution of India provides that 5
th
/ 6
th

scheduled Areas Gram Sabha should act as Nyaya
Panchayat in matters relating to customary law. There
is no judicial mechanism in rural / tribal areas to
resolve day to day conflicts. The Naxals filled a gap in
resolution of dispute their justice too rough and
ready. The current judicial system is too expensive,
dilatory, and complicated for tribal people barely 20
percent of population is able to access it. Scheduled
Caste and Scheduled Tribe population get involved in
the system as accused and defendants rather than as
seekers of their rights. Another area in governance is
that there are as many as 7 commissions functioning
in India for the upliftment for SC, STs, Minorities,
Women, Children, Safai Karmacharies, Tribals
Advisory council, Human Rights, Plus counterpart
commissions in the states- Unfortunately, they all are
toothless, with no enforcement mechanism, even
parliament ignores them.
Under the above discussion, we can now try to
analyze the role of good governance in any
circumstance or situation which can bring a radical
change and can bring the desired result. In a
dynamically and speedily changing social, economic
and technological setting, there is a growing need for
innovative practices in governance that respond to
complex challenges facing societies. We can address
these components for curbing the internal insecurity,
threat of our countrys integrity which is becoming a
major challenge for our policy makers, executives,
burecrates and threatened the very existence of the
welfare for the state Good governance is a dynamic
concept, which compasses fast changing political
social and economic milieu along with conditions of
operational governance. The search for good
governance has to be a continuing exercise as it is not
a finished product. Governance as a process denotes
a value free dispensation whereas good governance is
a value laden concept.
To ensure peoples welfare, which is the
objective of good governance, there must be properly
guided public servants or bureaucracy with missionary
zeal for execution of government policy with heart and
soul, for the welfare of the community as a whole.
Generally, bureaucracy, by its very nature cannot be
responsive and responsible, with a colonial heritage as
in India it is more true.
To create a good administrative environment,
peoples participation is highly essential and a corner
stone of good governance. Participation could be
either direct or through legitimate intermediate
institutions, participation needs to be informed and
organized.
Good governance requires fair legal frame
works that are enforced impartially which requires full
protections of human rights, particularly those of
minorities. Impartial enforcement of laws requires an
independent judiciary and impartial and incorruptible
police force.
Transparency means that decision taken and
their enforcement are done in a manner that follows
rules and regulations. It also emphasizes information is
truly available and directly accessible to those who will
be affected by such decisions and their enforcement.
Good governance requires that institutions and
processes try to serve all stake holders within a
reasonable time frame.
Good governance requires a broad and long
term perspective on what is needed for sustainable
human development and how to achieve the goals of
such development. This can only result from an
understanding of the historical, cultural and social
contexts of a given society or community.
A societys well being depends on ensuring
that all its members feel that they have a stake in it
and do not feel excluded from the mainstream of the
society. This requires all groups, but particularly the
most vulnerable, have opportunities to improve or
maintain their well being.
Accountability is a key requirement of good
governance. The role of bureaucracy has to set an
example by dint of their accountability for any omission
or commission. They have show their dedication, with
team spirit which will lead a systematic organization.
To sum up, last but not least, policy
formulation is necessary prior to every action in every
form of Organization. There are certain implications in
the concept of public policy.
Firstly, result oriented action rather than
random behavior is the hallmark of public policy.
Secondly, public policy refers to the action or
decisional pattern of public administrators on particular
issue over a period rather than their separate discrete
decisions on that matter in an adhoc fashion.
Thirdly, a particular policy is what
governments actually do and what subsequently
happens, rather than what they intend to do or say
they are going to do.
Fourthly, public policy may be either positive
or negative inform. Positively, in may involve some
form of government action, regarding any issue or
problem, negatively, it may involve a decision by
governmental officials not to take action on a matter.
Fifthly, Public policy at least, in its positive
form is based on law and authoritative. It has legal
sanctions behind it, which is potentially coercive in
nature and is binding on all citizens.
Sixthly, the policy making process has the
following important stages such as, indentifying the
underlying problem, determining alternatives for policy
choice, forecasting the consequences, Evaluating
..

Evaluating the outcomes and making a choice.


INTRODUCTION:
The Iraq attack on Kuwait resulted in
destruction of Iraq by Saddam Husain. There was no
need bring Kuwait under Iraq rule because Iraq was
having much more natured resoureses than any other
country. It was an opportunity given by Iraq to U.S.A. &
other Countries to invade Iraq. Before Iraq invasion to
Kuwait there was not much more interference in the
Gulf by other countries in general U.S.A.in Particular
U.S.A. accused Iraqi President Saddam
Husain of harboring & supporting Al-Qaida. During
2002, President Bush repeatedly warned of military
action against Iraq inspections were allowed to
process unfettered. In December 2009, former
Prime Minister Tony Blair stated that he "World still
have thought it right to remove Saddam Husain
regardless of whether Iraq possessed weapons of
mass destruction or not."
Background of Iraq :
The Iraq War was an armed conflict in Iraq
that consisted of two phases. The first was an invasion
of Iraq starting on 20 March 2003 by an invasion force
led by the United States. It was followed by a longer
phase of fighting, in which an insurgency emerged to
oppose the occupying forces and the newly formed
Iraqi government.
The U.S. completed its withdrawal of military
personnel in December 2011. However, the Iraqi
insurgency countries to cause thousands of fatalities.
Prior to the government of the United States and the
United Kingdom claimed that Iraq's alleged possession
of weapons of mass destruction (WWD) posed a threat
to their security and that of their coalition/regional
allies. In 2002, the United, nations Security Council
passed Resolution 1441 which called for Iraq to
completely cooperate with UN weapon inspectors to
verify that Iraq was not in possession Commission of
WMD and cruise missiles, Prior to the attack, the
United Nations Monitoring, Verification and Inspection
Commission (UNMOVIC) found no evidence of WMD,
but could not yet verify the accuracy of Iraq's
declarations regarding what weapons it possessed, as
their work was still unfinished.
After investigation following the invasion, the
U.S-led Iraq Survey Group concluded that had ended
its nuclear, chemical and biological programs in 1991
and had active programs at the time of the invasion,
but that they intended to resume production it the
Iraq sections were lifted. Although some degraded
remnants of misplaced or abandoned chemical
weapons from before1991 were found, they were not
they were not the weapons which had been one of the
main arguments for the invasion. Paul R. Pillar, the
CIA official who coordinated U.S. intelligence on the
middle East from 2000 to 2005, said "if prewar
intelligence assessments had said the same things as
the Duelfer report, the administration would have had
to change a few lines in its rhetoric and maybe would
have lost a few member's votes in Congress, but
otherwise the sales campaign-which was much more
about Saddam's intentions and what he "Could" do
than about extant weapons systems-would have been
unchanged. The administration still would have gotten
its war. Even Dick Cheney later cited the actual
Duelfer report as support for the administration's pro-
war case." George J. Tenet, the former director of
central intelligence, stated Vice President Dick Cheney
and other Bush administration officials pushed the
country to war in Iraq without ever conducting a
"serious debate" about whether Saddam Husain posed
an imminent threat to the United States.
Some U.S. officials also accused Iraqi
President Saddam Husain of harboring and supporting
al-Qaeda, but no evidence of a meaningful connection
was ever found. Other stated reasons for the invasion
included Iraq's financial support for the families of
Palestinian suicide bombers, CNN released an article
stating that the war was started to secure oil supplies.
On 16 March 2003, the U.S. government
advised the U.N inspectors to leave their unfinished
work and exit from Iraq. On 20 March the American-led
coalition conducted a surprise military invasion of Iraq
without declaring war. The invasion led to an
occupation and the eventual capture of President
Husain, who was later tried in an Iraqi court of law and
executed by the new Iraqi government. Violence
against coalition forces and among various sectarian
Dr. F.S. Pathan Dr. F.S. Pathan Dr. F.S. Pathan Dr. F.S. Pathan
Milind College of Arts, Aurangabad, Maharashtra
Iraq and Psychological Politics
groups soon led to the Iraqi insurgency, strife between
many Sunni and Shia Iraqi groups, and the emergence
of a new faction of Al-Qaeda.
In June 2008, the U.S. government of Defense
officials claimed security and economic indicators
begun to show signs of improvement in what they
hailed as significant and fragile gains Iraq was fifth on
the 2008 Failed States Index, and sixth on the 2009 list
As public opinion favoring troop withdrawals
increased and as Iraqi forces began to take
responsibility for security, member nations of the
Coalition withdrawals their forces. In late 2008, the
U.S. and Iraqi government approved a status of Forces
Agreement effective through 1 January 2012.
[50]
The
Iraqi parliament also ratified a Strategic Framework
Agreement with the U.S. aimed at ensuring
cooperation in constitutional rights, threat deterrence,
education, energy development, and s other areas.
In late February 2009, newly elected U.S.
President Barack Obama announced an 18 -month
withdrawal window for combat forces, with
approximately 50,000 troops remaining in the country
"to advise and train Iraqi security forces and to provide
intelligence and surveillance". UK forces ended
combat operations on 30 April 2009. Iraqi Prime
Minister Nouri al-Maliki said he supported the
accelerated pullout of U.S. forces. In a speech at the
Oval Office on 31 August 2010 Obama declared "The
American combat mission in Iraq ended. Operation
Iraqi Freedom is over, and the Iraqi people now lead
responsibility for the security of their country."
Beginning 1 September 2010, the American
operational name of its involvement In Iraq changed
from "Operation Iraqi Freedom" to "Operation New
Dawn". The remaining 50,000 U.S. troops were
designated as "advice and assist brigades" assigned
to non- combat operation while retaining the ability to
revert to combat operations as necessary. Two combat
aviation brigades also remain in Iraq. In September
2010, the associated press issued an internal memo
reminding its reports that "combat in Iraq is not over",
and U.S. troops remain involved in combat operation
alongside Iraqi forces, although U.S. officials say the
American Combat mission has formally ended".
On 21 October 2011, President Obama
announced that all U.S. troops and trainers would
leave Iraq by the end of the year, bringing the U.S.
mission in Iraq to an end. On 15 December 2011, U.S.
Defense Secretary Leon Panetta officially declared the
Iraq War Over, at a flag lowering ceremony in
Baghdad. The last U.S. troops left Iraqi territory on 18
December 2011 at 4:18 UTC.
Conclusion :
War of Gulf included many countries
destruction military forces. UN Security Council failed
to stopped the destruction in Gulf Countries. America
& other countries fought against the Saddam Hussein
rule in Iraq. Saddam Husain has to give up the
leadership of the country and was hanged till death,
because his behavior was decided by America & other
countries & not the Iraqi Cities.
There are many countries which are ruled by
the individual with cruelty to the human but in that
America & alliance countries doesn't come to the fight
with then. There was a resource in Iraq & which led the
America attraction to worlds Iraq. Still in country year
at least 25 year's Iraq will be govern by America
directly or indirectly. Main reasons to attack on Iraq
was dollar's were stock by Iraq President Saddam
Husain which led American Economy to destruction.
Footnotes
1) The Brookings Institution Iraq Index: Tracking Variables of
Reconstruction & Security in Post-Saddam Iraq (http:/www3.
brookings.edu/fp/saban/Iraq/index.pdf)1 October 2007.
2) Iraq war illegal, says Annan (http:/news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/middle -
east/366113.stm) BBC 16 September 2004.
3) Center f or American Progress (29 January 2004) In their Own
Words: Iraqs Imminent Threat (http://www.american
progress.org/ issues/kfiles/b24970.html) americanprogress.org.
4) President Discusses the Future of Iraq (http://geographybush-
whitehouse-archives.gov/news/releases/2003/02/20030226-
11.html) The White house, 26 February 2003.
5) A NATIONA AT WAR: Second Front ; Allied Troops Are Flown
In To Airfields In North, Byc.J.Chivers,24 March 2003.
6) Iraqi parliament wants say in extension of U.S. led forces
(http://fr.jpost.com/ servlet /Satellite?cid=1180960615762 &
pageame=Jpost JP Articles/Showfull) Associated Press, the
Jerusalem Post, 5 June2007.
7) BBCNEWS 21 February 2007, Blair announces Iraq troops cut
(http://news.bbc.co.uk/ 2/hi/uk_news /politics/ 6308933.stm).
8) Search goes on as Iraq death toll tops 250
(http://www.guardin.co.uk/Iraq/story/0,,2149392.html) Guardian
15 August

REFERENCES

Gordon, Michael R. (2006). Cobr II: The Inside Story of the Invasion and Occupation of Iraq (http://books.google.com/
books?id=CyuUZ1AFXHUC&dq=michael+gordon+cobra+II&source=gbs_navlinks_s).Pantheon.IBSN978-1557782328.
Larson, Luke S. (2008).Senators Son: An Iraq War novel (http://books.google.com/ books?id= bLJOdUsDjuoC &dq=Senator
s+Son:+Iraq+War+Novels&source=gbs_navlinks_s).Phoeniox, Arizona: key Edition Incorporated.ISBN978-1449969868.
Bruce R. Pirnie; Edward OConnell (2008). Counterinsurgent /cy in Iraq (2003-2006)(http://www.rand.org/pubs/monographs
/2008/RAND_MG595.3pdf).Santa monico, CA: Rand Corporation. ISBN 978-0-8330-4297-2.

INTRODUCTION:
The Quran repeated stresses the importance
of knowledge, Ilm . Though Prophet Mohammad
himself was illiterate, he preached to his followers to
seek knowledge ,even if one had to travel to distant
China. Muslims were urged to seek knowledge from
any source.
Two significant principles can be discovered
from these Islamic fields. One Islam not only gives
importance to religious theological knowledge but also
attaches importance secular branches of knowledge.
Another in comparison to Hinduism where traditionally
only Brahmins and upper castes were expected to
receive education, Islamic approach is egalitarian, as
learning and acquiring knowledge in Islamic tradition is
the duty of every Muslim male and female.
Religious Background:
The contrast between the Islamic precepts and
ideals of universalization of education and the
prevailing practices among Muslims all over the world
and specifically Indian Muslims. The intellectual
deprive of Muslims during the last 900 years is well
known and well documented. This is reflected among
the Indian Muslims too. In India Muslims are
educationally and socially backward. Even the
government of India in its 1986 New education policy
(NEP) declared the Indian Muslims backward. It must
be noted that very few studies of surveys on
educational backwardness of Muslims have been
carried out in India. Like other backward class Muslims
are also educationally backward and their children are
found engaging themselves in child labour rather than
receiving education in schools. Many Muslim boys and
girls can be seen working hazardous occupations such
as bangle factories, diamond cutting and brassware
industries, production of bidis, or matches and carpet
industries. Many Muslims children are also fond
helping their parents in family. Professions like
tailoring, zari making, chicken embroidery etc. Also
many children work at tea-plantation or estates and in
unorganized sectors like house hold in need of
domestic servants, tea stalls etc.
Causes for the Educational backwardness of
Indian Muslims :
1. There is definite preference amongst poorer
sections of Muslims to go in for mainly religious
education in Madarsas than formal schools. The
academic standards of Madarsas are low and no
efforts are made to include science, mathematics,
social sciences and English.
2. Qualified and trained teachers in science,
Mathematics and English are generally not available or
are not selected in Muslim-managed schools.
3. Dearth of trained Urdu teachers at the primary level
and shortage of facilities for such training are other
reasons contributing to the educational backwardness
of Muslim
4. General inhibition about sending girls to coeducation
institutions even at the primary stage, particularly when
there are no women teachers.
5. Muslims registration of educational societies formed
by them and securing recognition of educational
institutions as minority institutions. The new technical
institution is generally denied.
6. There is a greater tendency of artisans and
craftsmen to involve their children in traditional family
occupations rather than sending them to school.
7. The Muslims leaders have been laying more stress
on cultural and religious issues and have taken very
little concentrate social work to reduce the educational
backwardness of the community.
8. A large number of students whose mother tongue is
Urdu are being sent to Madarsas or Urdu Medium
school. In these schools there is Muslim dominated
environment.
9. Illiteracy of parents, poverty and lack of provisions
for religious institutions are other factors.
The main reasons for the educational backwardness is
that after the partition of India a large number of
educated Muslims migrated to Pakistan.
Prof. Imtiaz Ahmed argues that educational
backwardness of Indian Muslims should be attributed
not any religious fanaticism. or minority complex but
to the small size of the social strata whose members
can be expected to seek educational
opportunities.Educationally and economically
disadvantaged groups and minorities are demanding
governmental interaction on their behalf.
Dr. Manjiri Karekar Dr. Manjiri Karekar Dr. Manjiri Karekar Dr. Manjiri Karekar
S.P. College, Pune, Maharashtra
Educational Problems and Reservation for Muslim
Minority in India
Reservation for Muslims:
The Indian governments has done with
regards to the SCs, STs and OBCs. Muslims are
underrepresented. This may be due to the difference in
job preferences and educational backwardness.
After Indias Independence, social stagnation
and educational backwardness cumulatively resulted
in growing socio-economic deprivations and
marginalization of Muslims with low levels of education
and no affirmative action in the sphere of public in self
employment, Muslims are mostly in self employment.
The Sachar Committee reported severe
underrepresentation in governments jobs even in
states in which Muslims constitute large minorities. In
states like U.P., Bihar and West Bengal with large
Muslim populations their proportions in state
employments is less than a third of their population
share. The situation is conceivably worse in the private
sector.
It shows that Muslims have on the whole not
done well since independence in public institutions and
government jobs. The key question in this regard is
how much of Muslims underrepresentation is attributed
to educational backwardness and how much is due to
discrimination and bias in public employment on the
part of those who control the avenues of employment
in government and the public and private sector.
Historical factors have played major role. Partition was
accompanied by mass migration of the Muslim elite to
Pakistan which includes government servants,
businessmen and affluent sections, and educated
youth. This inhibited the growth of a Muslim middle
class is still weak and relatively small and hesitant to
out as an agent of change to provide leadership to the
community in its search for equity and justice.
A second set of factors has to with the nature
of Muslim communities. A large proportion of Muslims
are descendants of coverts from various low castes.
Whose social and economic conditions remained to
unchanged even after conversion. The third factor
relates to the influence of conservative sections of
ulema. Most organization associated with Muslims in
North India and influential sections of the Muslim elite
have focused on identity issues rather than education
and empowerment.
The educational backwardness of Muslims is
an important reason for their under-representation in
public employment and decision making structure. The
gap between Muslim and the advantaged sections has
widened more since 1980s. Even SCs/STs are
overtaking them in several areas. There is positive link
between education and employment.
The category of OBC provides a window of opportunity
through which disadvantaged groups among the
minorities can gain access to public jobs and other
social benefits.
Kaka Kalelkar commission declared certain
castes / communities among them within the purview
of the official framework of disadvantage. The Kalekar
report was rejected by the central government on the
ground that it used caste rather than economic criteria
for identifying backward classes. The Mandal
commission also noted the incidence of caste like
features among Muslims and hence the OBC category
included Muslims. The commission refrained from
using caste as a criterion to identify non Hindu OBCs.
The criterion involved for this purpose had two
conditions 1) all untouchables converted to any non
Hindu religion 2) such occupational communities which
are known by their traditional occupations and whose
Hindu counterpart have been included in the list of
Hindu OBCs. (Report of backward class commission
1955) Muslims constituted a little over 8% of the 27%
of the OBCs.
Most states have no separate quota for
Muslims except Karnataka and Kerala. In Karnataka in
the period of Veerappa Moily was chief minister the
entire community was declared backward and 4% was
given to Muslims in 1994 under II B category. This
measure has led to substantive rise in Muslims share
in the state govt. services. The inclusion of Muslims in
the OBCs list marks a significant shift in established
patterns of thinking on affirmative action and also
dents and undercuts the concept of a molilithic Muslim
identity.
A strong and influenced sections of Muslims
leaders favored reservations for Muslims on a
community basis because in their view the entire
Muslim community forms a backward class. This group
raised several objections against caste based
reservation for Muslim they felt that Muslims did not fit
into the OBC category because they are not a caste.
They do not accept that caste that caste is more
significant than the overall unity of the community,
They believe that the philosophy and structure of caste
as a superstructure of social discrimination is wholly
contradictory to the basic belief of Islam, which
implicitly emphasize equality and universal
brotherhood. (Laura D. Jenkins, 2003, 116) They want
entire community to be declared a backward class
and given reservation on that basis. There leaders
have repeatedly emphasized the necessity of cutting
the community not by class and caste but also
vertically the community not by class and caste but
also vertically by religion.
Basically, the inclusion of Muslims in the OBC
list would exclude them and they would stand the lose
unless the entire community was declared backward.
(Theodore Wright,1997, 853-4)
In opposing minority reservations the OBC
Muslim leaders point out that elite Muslims have
consciously played identity politics to restrict minority
politics to issue such as the Aligarh Muslim University,
Urdu and Muslim Personal Law while marginalizing the
backward classes among Muslims and sidelining the
more important issue of educational, social and
economic development of the Muslims masses.
(Anwar Alam 2003, Irfan Ahmad 2003)
The debate over stratification pattern among
Muslims The heterogeneity of Muslims in India and
existence of caste like features and status distinctions
based on it are well known. There are two aspects to
the social stratification pattern. The first relates the
larger society. The second relates to the
disadvantages position of sections within the Muslim
community, that underlines the relevance of internal
differentiation in the Muslim communities. Generally
Muslim elites have emphasized the first position. This
situation has changed somewhat the Muslim
community have questioned the representation of
Muslim as a monolithic community.
On the other hand, Muslim elites together
deny the existence of caste among Muslims, arguing
that Islam is an egalitarian religion and does not
recognize distinctness of caste and statues.
Imtiaz Ahmad notes that empirical studies which
initially took the form decennial census adduced
considerable evidence that caste existed among
Muslims and could be identified through a hierarchy of
status orders.
The broad categories identified constitute a
hierarchy in which the sub communities called castes
were ranked in an order to social procedure. Muslim
community is divided into numerous sects and into
various caste groups as well. Therefore to treat them
as a single entity and to deny internal differentiation
would only perpetuate inequalities and further reinforce
structure of marginalization. Most Muslims are from
lower caste background and the majority are
descendents of converts to Islam, known as ajlaf.
(Imtiaz Ahmad, 1978, 13) 75 percent of Muslim
population of India would fall into the ajlaf category.
This large group of ajlaf continuous to be discriminated
against by the so called ashraf groups and also by
their counterpart in the majority community.
Minority reservations have been opposed on
three grounds 1) they are in compatible with the
constitutional project of secularism 2) in the absence of
a caste system among Muslims there is no overt
discrimination suffered by them to justify special
measure and 3) it would underline national unity.
To find a resolution to these contending
claims, PM Manmohan Singh had appointed the
sachar commission to form an opinion on the question
of reservation and representation and recommended
remedial measures. The Sachar Commission Report
recommended the equitable distribution of available
jobs in the formal sector for Muslims and incentives to
the private sectors to encourage diversity in the work
force. But it did not recommend reservation for
Muslims not even for Muslims with tradition occupation
comparable to those of SCs and STs.
Conclusion:
it can be said that to roots of Muslim
backwardness lies in their educational backwardness.
We have seen a number of reasons for this. In
continuation with this educational backwardness goes
social backwardness. In addition to this lack of good
leadership created a psychological vacuum. It has
become essential to bring the Muslim community in the
mainstream. Therefore, reservation for Muslims are
essential. It is step towards bridging the gap between
advanced section and backward section in the Indian
society.

REFERENCES

Ahmad, Imtiaz (1978),Caste and Social Stratification among Muslims In India, Manohar Publishers, New Delhi.
Ahmad Irfan, (2003), A Diff erent Jehad: Dalit Muslims Challenge to Ashraf Hegemony, Economic and Political Weekly Vol XXXVIII no
46
Alam Anwar,(2003), Democratization of Indian Muslims: Some Reflections, Economic and Political Weekly Vol XXXVIII no 46
Hasan Zoya, (2009), Politics of Inclusion: Castes, Minorities and Affirmative Action, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
Jawaid M. A.,Jehangir K.N. & Bose Shanker(ed) (2007);Minorities of India Problems and prospects, ICSSR & Manak, New Delhi.
Jenkins Laura D,(2003), Identity and Identification in India: Defining the Disadvantaged, Routledge Curzon, London.
Jenkins Laura D., (2001), Becoming Backward: Preferential Policies and Religious Minorities in India, Commonwealth and
comparative Politics,Vol 39 No 1, July.
Radhakrishnan P,( 2006), Religion Caste And State , Rawat Publications, Jaipur.
Wright Theodore,(1997), A New Demand f or Muslim Reservations in India, Asian Survey, September.

Research Paper Geography

ABSTRACT This research highlights the profound effects that built environments have on public-health. Planning
decisions influence neighborhood configuration, housing design, parks, location of stores and schools, as well as factors such
as traffic density and air and water quality. These characteristics, in turn, affect physical and psychological health for people
of all ages..

KEY WORDS-: Built Environment, Children, Health

INTRODUCTION:
The built environment embraces a wide range
of concepts, from the design and integrity of housing,
to land-use and urban planning. A high quality
environment is essential for children to achieve optimal
health and development. Building and land-use
policies, including the quality and design of a childs
physical environment, can cause or prevent illness,
disability and injury, and degrade or preserve natural
resources. Though many common pediatric conditions
such as obesity, asthma, and lead poisoning as well as
injuries, are associated with risk factors within a childs
built environment this issue has received little attention
from researchers or policymakers. This new field is
ripe for etiologic and prevention research, and we
need pediatric advocates to speak out for childrens
needs within this arena. As children grow and mature,
the scope of their environment predictably expands
from the womb to the wider community to the broadest
reach of the planet. The childs built environment is a
central factor in this progression. Both known and
newly emerging diseases are linked to risk factors
within the built environment, including injuries, lead
poisoning, and the current epidemics of asthma and
obesity. Building and land-use policies can either
undermine or promote safety, health and optimal
development while simultaneously preserving future
resources. This newly evolving field is ripe for future
research. We urgently need pediatric advocates who
can effectively speak out for childrens needs within
this broad arena. This chapter will review and
summarize the negative and positive impact of the built
environment on childrens health.

Data collection and Methods
The present study examined the effects of built
environment on health of children Secondary data was
collected from various sources and analyzed.
Analysis & Discussion:
Wells along with two colleagues, Gary W.
Evans and Yizhao Yang, recently undertook a
comprehensive review of research on how planning
decisions impact public health (Wells, Evans and
Yang, 2010). They found that decisions about factors
such as density of communities, presence and size of
parks, land-use mix, height and size of residential
structures, food store location, and how roads are laid
out affect peoples physical health and psychological
well-being. Most of the major health problems plaguing
the U.S. population today from psychological
distress to heart disease to diabeteshave significant
environmental causes. Wells argues that, for those
reasons, health should be an important consideration
in planning decisions.
Land-use planning, such as zoning, often
influences community attributes such as soil
contamination, safety of drinking water, traffic density,
and water, air, noise, and light pollution. For example,
studies show that noise affects reading skills in
children, elevates blood pressure, and increases
stress hormones. Residents who live in neighborhoods
where they must depend on cars for transportation
have reduced physical activity and increased obesity
rates.
Planning decisions that influence the location
of supermarkets, fast-food eateries, farmers markets,
and convenience stores can profoundly affect peoples
diets and their health. People who live in a
neighbourhood with a supermarket are more likely to
Dr. Vanmala R. Tadvi Dr. Vanmala R. Tadvi Dr. Vanmala R. Tadvi Dr. Vanmala R. Tadvi
Milind College of Arts, Aurangabad, Maharashtra

Effect of Built Environment on Childrens Health
eat the recommended amount of fruits and vegetables.
Further, wealthier neighbourhoods have more
supermarkets than do poorer neighbourhoods, and
poor communities have more places to buy and drink
alcohol.
The characteristics and quality of housing
directly affect peoples physical and mental health. A
home that is cold and damp or has allergens may
cause respiratory illnesses and asthma in the residents
(Shaw, 2004; Wigle, 2003). The height and size of
housing also has health effects on residentshigh-rise
housing is associated with psychological stress,
particularly among low-income mothers of young
children (Evans, et al., 2003). Children who lived in 14-
story public housing were found to have greater
behavioral problems than children living in three-story
public housing (Saegert, 1982). Social isolation may
be one reason for this, because parents are less likely
to let their kids play outside if they live high up in a
large building (Kim, 1997). And, finally, crowding has
detrimental effects on both mental and physical health
(Evans, 2001).
Although the natural environments effect on
the mental health of adults has been well documented,
Wells suspected that natures moderating influence on
stress might be even stronger in children. Her research
has shown that having nature close to a home protects
the psychological well-being of children. And the
impact is strongest for children with the highest levels
of stressful life events. In addition, having green space
around the home boosts their cognitive functioning.
In a study of 337 children in five rural upstate New
York communities in grades 3 through 5, Wells and
Evans (2003) found that the impact of life stress and
adversity was lower among children who lived close to
nature and vegetation than among those with little
access to natural settings. To gauge how the children
were dealing with stress, Wells used parents reports
of their childrens psychological distress and childrens
own ratings of their feelings of self-worth, using
standard measurement tools.
RECOMMENDATIONS:
o Give children plenty of opportunities to play
outside in natural settings.
o Landscape your yard to enhance natural window
views.
o Position your childs (and your) desk to face a
natural window view.
o Take family outings to natural areas.
o If possible, choose a house or apartment with
access to nearby nature or at least views of
nature.
o Walk more and increase outdoor physical activity.
o Consider health implications and employ
evidence when making planning decisions.
o Plan space for parks and natural areas in
residential areas.
o Keep building heights low.
o Build child care centres, schools, nursing homes,
and hospitals in natural settings.
o Landscape existing child care centres, schools,
nursing homes, and hospitals with as many
natural elements as possible.
o Plan new neighborhoods with walk able,
intersecting streets rather than loops and
lollipops patterns.

REFERENCES

Health Impact Assessment, World Health Organization (WHO): http://www.who.int/hia/en
Wells, N.M., and Evans, G.W. (2003). Nearby Nature: A Buffer of Life Stress among Rural Children,
Environment and Behavior, 35(3), 311330.
Wells, N.M., Evans, G.W. and Yang, Y. (2010). Environments and Health: Planning Decisions as Public-Health
Decisions, Journal of Architectural and Planning Research, 27(2), 124143.
Evans, G.W. (2001). Environmental stress and health. In A. Baum, T. Revenson, and J.E. Singer (Eds.),
Handbook of Health Psychology (365385). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Saegert, S. (1982). Environments and childrens mental health: Residential density and low income children.
Research Paper Zoology

ABSTRACT Although it is difficult to tell why breast cancer develops, according to the present study it can be
attributed to a combination of genetic and environmental factors. The present study emphasizes on treatment-focused genetic
counseling and testing and also cumulative risk assessment to offer complete counseling. Therefore we conclude that for
proper management of breast cancer genetic counseling is very essential and the type of counseling will differ if the
individual is gene mutation carrier, or has a positive family history but negative for gene mutation test or has no family
history but has increased risk on account of lifestyle or if they are detected with breast cancer. With proper genetic
counseling, breast cancer patients will be able to take the right and informed decision for treatment.

INTRODUCTION:
Worldwide, breast cancer comprises 22.9% of
all in women. In 2008, breast cancer caused 458,503
deaths worldwide (13.7% of cancer deaths in women)
(World Cancer Report, 2008). Breast cancer is more
than 100 times more common in women than breast
cancer in men, although males tend to have poorer
outcomes due to delays in diagnosis (National Cancer
Institute, 2013). Prognosis and survival rate varies
greatly depending on cancer type, staging and
treatment. However, survival rates across the world
are generally good. Overall more than 8 out of 10
women (84%) diagnosed with the disease survive it for
at least 5 years (Office for National Statistics, 2013).
Genetic counseling is a process by which patients or
relatives, at risk of an inherited disorder, are advised of
the consequences and nature of the disorder, the
probability of developing or transmitting it and of the
ways, in which this may be prevented, avoided or
ameliorated. The causes of breast cancer are not yet
definitively known. However, extensive research efforts
have uncovered various risk factors that are
associated with increased incidence of breast cancer
in women. There is no way to pre-determine whether a
person will get breast cancer until they have either
been diagnosed with it or they have lived a breast-
cancer free lifetime. Counseling of breast cancer
patients is difficult because some people may possess
certain risk factors and never develop the disease,
while others may develop the disease in the absence
of any known risk factors. Therefore this study was
undertaken to formulate a proper genetic counseling
strategy for BC patients or women, after analysis of the
genetic and environmental factors.
SUBJECT AND METHODS:
Sample population of 58 individuals was
studied for this research. Of these 29 were Breast
cancer patients and 29 were control group individuals.
The control group consisted of individuals which were
within the same age group as that of the patients but
were not having any history of cancer. For achieving
the objective of the study, a proformas was prepared
to elicit the information about other risk factors. The
Performa was designed using the Royal College of
Pathologists' minimum dataset for breast cancer
reports and the national histopathology reporting form
of the National Health Service breast screening
program (Mathers M, 2001). Pedigree was also drawn
for three generations. Information of environmental
factors and genetic factors which can influence the
incidence of BC was also collected. Pedigrees were
constructed for all the patients to evaluate the
prevalence of hereditary factor in Goa. These
pedigrees were analyzed for determining the mode of
inheritance. The information collected was tabulated
and analyzed. Mean and standard deviation (SD) were
computed for quantitative data. The statistical
significance of associations between the various
qualitative parameters was evaluated through Fisher's
exact test. Online calculators of statistics were used for
standard deviation at www.easycalculation.com and
fishers test at www.graphpad.com. After analysis of
the data, steps for genetic counseling were suggested
to achieve the objective of this study.
RESULT AND DISCUSSION:
The survey revealed that frequency of patients
having sibling history of breast cancer was 3.44%. This
is another factor indicating the hereditary factor
Dr. Nandini Vaz Fernandes Dr. Nandini Vaz Fernandes Dr. Nandini Vaz Fernandes Dr. Nandini Vaz Fernandes
Ms. Regina Fernandes Ms. Regina Fernandes Ms. Regina Fernandes Ms. Regina Fernandes
Human Genetic Research Lab, Parvatibai Chowgule College,
Gogol Margao Goa
Genetic Counseling for Breast Cancer
involved in BC in the sample population. Family history
was evident in 5/29 cases giving a frequency of
17.24%. This gives a high incidence of 172 / 1000
individuals in the population. This reflects contribution
of hereditary factor in increasing the BC frequency in
the studied sample population. No family history was
observed in 24/29 cases studies. Pedigree analysis
shows that there is a great influence of hereditary
factor in increasing the frequency of BC in the
population studied. One of the explanations for familial
aspects of breast cancer is germ line mutation in
BRCA1, BRCA2, p53 and other genes. There might be
considerable underestimation of hereditary breast
cancers and therefore mutation studies of these genes
are essential for risk calculation of the females to BC.
Various factors are reported to have influence over
increasing the risk of BC in women (Breakthrough
Breast cancer, 2012). The present study revealed that
the factors which acted as potential risk factors for
breast cancer in the sample population studied are
religion, regionality, age of menarche, age of marriage,
age of having first child, age of menopause, marital
status, breast feeding duration, hormonal problems,
family history, food habits and exposure to radiations.
Factors which did not influence the frequency of BC in
the sample population includes Parity, oral
contraceptives, other cancers, alcohol consumption,
occupation, exercise and nutritional supplement.
Based on the hereditary factors and the environmental
risk factors analyzed, the following Genetic counseling
was formulated to either reduce the risk or delaying the
onset of BC or reduce the risk of attaining BC in those
who have increased risk of hereditary breast cancer.
For preparing a proper genetic counseling for the
patients, the counseling can be divided into two
sessions viz. Pretest counseling and Post test
counseling.
1) Pretest Counseling: Pretest counseling include the
counseling offered to the counselee during the initial
appointment for collection of data to evaluate the
family history and environmental factors which can
either increase or decrease the risk of Breast cancer
and subsequently recommend the required tests to be
done.
a) Collection of data by interrogation: To
assess the risk for an inherited condition like breast
cancer, a genetic counselor needs to know medical
information about the proband / counselee and his/her
family. For this the genetic counselor should take more
detailed family medical history and use this information
to generate a family tree (pedigree), which shows all of
the relatives, their relationship, and history of diseases
in their family. The next step in genetic counseling
should be specific for the counselee for individual risk
assessment. After evaluation of the risk factors, the
genetic counselor will now have a clear picture of the
inheritance if BC in the family of the counselee and
also the possible factors that may increase or
decrease the risk of onset of BC in the counselee if
there is a family history. So the next step of counseling
should be suggestion of tests or screening of BC.
b) Recommendation of tests: After the initial
session of pretest counseling, screening or genetic
testing can be recommended. This can be offered in
counseling given on the same day or on second
appointment. The tests can be classified as Screening
tests and Gene mutation tests.
i) Screening tests: If the counselee is not
detected with BC but has a positive family history then
she can be directed to do the screening tests. There
are several methods of screening women for breast
cancer. These include Clinical Breast Examination,
Mammogram, Auxiliary Dissection and Biopsy,
Hormone receptor testing and Breast self
examinations. If the counselee has BC then the
following tests and procedures may be used in the
staging process. TNM (Tumor, Node, Metastasis) is a
staging system used to provide more details about
how the cancer looks and behaves. Staging can be
done by the following methods: Chest x-ray, CT scan,
Bone scan, PET scan.
ii) Gene Mutation Tests: For women who have a
strong family history of breast cancer and/or for
women who have a personal history of breast cancer
diagnosed at a young age, identifying a BRCA gene
(BRCA1 and BRCA2) mutation through genetic testing
can have a major impact on how they manage their
health. Gene mutation tests though available may not
be opted for by financially backward females. Thus
there is delay in detection of familial breast cancer
(Kathryn J, et al., 2013). Recent studies of Y. Li et al.,
2013, have indicated that breast cancer can be
detected earlier by blood tests which emphasize on
checking Circulating Proteolytic Products of
Carboxypeptidase N.
2. Post Test Counseling:
The first step in post test counseling should be
discussion for interpretation of the screening tests and
genetic tests. The counselee needs to be advised in
the following manner:
a) If genetic test is positive: A positive result
means that a woman has a BRCA mutation that is
known to increase the risk of developing breast or
ovarian cancer. However, a positive result does not
mean that a woman will definitely develop breast or
ovarian cancer. Women with BRCA1 mutation on
chromosome 17q carry a 56-87% lifetime risk of breast
cancer those with BRCA2 mutation on chromosome
13q have 37-85% lifetime risk of breast cancer. So the
counselee can be advised Increase screening -
frequent mammograms, breast examinations,
Preventive drug therapy - take drugs that are known to
reduce the risk , lifestyle choices - physical activity and
other lifestyle factors, Prophylactic surgery - more
drastic option.
b) If genetic test is negative: A negative result
usually means that a woman does not have a known
BRCA mutation but does not mean that a woman will
never get breast cancer. Therefore for reducing the
incidence of breast cancer in the community,
comprehensive risk assessment services should be
offered in this post test genetic counseling. This will
be based on the results of the screening test, genetic
tests and individual risk assessment. Only after
studying these factors, medical management and
recommendations should be offered, and it should be
tailored to each individual based on the patient's level
of risk. This is a step for Risk Reduction of breast
cancer.
CONCLUSION: Counseling offered should also be
stepwise and has to consider the emotional distress
which the counselee may undergo. This will be based
on the results of the screening test, genetic tests and
individual risk assessment. Only after studying these
factors, medical management and recommendations
should be offered, and it should be tailored to each
individual based on the patient's level of risk.
Conflict of Interest: None.

REFERENCES

1. Breakthrough Breast cancer (2012). Breast cancer risk factors Edition 2, Retrieved from
http://www.breakthrough.org.uk on 20
th
Nov 2013.
2. Kathryn, J., Ruddy, Shari G., Rulla M., Tamimi, Lidia S., Steven E., Come, Meghan E., Meyer, Eric P., Winer and Ann H
P (2013). Cancer presentation and diagnostic delays in young women. Cancer, DOI: 10.1002/cncr.28287.
3. Mathers M (2001): National Burden Of Disease Studies: A Practical Guide, Edition 2.0, World Health Organization
Global Program, WHO, Geneva.
4. National Cancer Institute (2013). "Male Breast Cancer Treatment"2011. Retrieved from http://www.cancer.gov on 20
th

Nov 2013.
5. Office for National Statistics (2009), Cancer Survival in England patients diagnosed 2004-08, followed up to retrieved
from http://www.ons.gov.uk on 20
th
Nov 2013.
6. Li Y., Chen T., Kuklina AS., Bernard P., Esteva FJ., Shen H., Ferrari M and Hu Y (2013). Circulating Proteolytic
Products of Carboxypeptidase N for Early Detection of Breast Cancer. Clinical Chemistry, DOI:
10.1373/clinchem.2013.211953.


ABSTRACT TB has for centuries, continues & remain a public health problem of enormous importance, particularly in
the developing world, taking a heavy toll of those at their prime of life. Developing countries including India have for
centuries borne the heavy burden of TB . 40% of the Indian population is infected with the TB bacillus. Untreated pulmonary
TB cases spread infection to others in the community - each infection patient can infect 10-15 persons in a year unless
effectively treated for anti TB medicines. It is no surprise that even today TB is the leading infectious cause of mortality
among adults. In the present study the area of Washim Tuberculosis unit was selected for research purpose. TU Washim
contain approximately 5 lac population in 3 tahsils i.e. Washim, Risod, Malegaon. In this study the diagnosis of TB in HIV
infected patient done as per RNTCP guidline.
2 3
It was also found that large no. of patients adheres to alcoholism i.e. 17.5 %
male patients in research area are found alcoholic. And it was found that out of total 51 Defaulted TB cases, 21 cases get
default only due to alcoholism (In defaulted cases 41 % cases have not took full course of medicine regularly due to heavy
alcoholic habit) In present work it has also found that approx 60 % of TB patients were from below poverty line. So in present
study alcoholism and poverty is found big constrains in tuberculosis control, extra efforts should be make to aware the people
affected with TB.
.
INTRODUCTION:
Tuberculosis (TB) has, for centuries, continued
to remain a public health problem of enormous
importance, particularly in the developing countries,
taking a heavy toll of those at their prime of life.

Developing countries including India have for centuries
borne the heavy burden of TB. It is no surprise that
even today TB is the leading infectious cause of
mortality among adults.
Magnitude of TB in India
India accounts for nearly one-third of the
global TB burden. TB is a common infection in our
country. 40% of the Indian population has tuberculosis
infection. Every day more than 20,000 people become
infected with the TB bacillus and more than 5,000
people develop the disease. Every year 20 lakh people
develop TB, of which at least 8 lakh are infectious
(sputum positive).
Every year, nearly 5 lakh die of TB 1,000
deaths per day, one death every minute. Untreated TB
cases spread the infection to others in the community.
Each infectious patient can infect 10-15 individuals in a
year unless effectively treated.
Material and Methods
Patients with tuberculosis diagnosed in study
area that is tuberculosis unit washim, Dist Washim,
Maharastra with five lakh population containing 2
urban units and 12 primary health centers were treated
according to the RNTCP guidelines.
1-2
The treatment
was decentralized taking patients convenience in
taking treatment into consideration. Patients reporting
at any one of these health facilities with symptoms
suggestive of tuberculosis were diagnosed based on
sputum microscopy for acid-fast bacilli (AFB). Cases of
tuberculosis were also diagnosed from a community
survey that was simultaneously being carried out in the
same area to assess the epidemiological impact of
DOTS (Directly Observed Treatment Shortcource
Chemotheropy). Information on the date of starting
treatment, name of patients sex, age, treatment
category, address, sputum smear results initially and
the during treatment, and the treatment outcome at the
end of treatment were available from tuberculosis
register (TB Register) maintained in the Tuberculosis
Unit Area. The RNTCP definitions of terms such as
cure, Treatment completed, default, failure, and
transferred out were used for assessing treatment
outcomes of the patients. The patients registered from
January 2004 to December 2004, from the study
population were interviewed at there residence using
questionnaires. Information on their socioeconomic
and demography profile, literacy status and drinking
habit. The treatment cards maintained for each
patients registered under this programme provided
details about regularity and consumption of the drugs.
Separately visited all defaulters at their residences to
elicit reasons for default, the reasons were elicited and
recorded.
Data entry and analysis:
Pathan T.D. Pathan T.D. Pathan T.D. Pathan T.D.
Charjan A.P. Charjan A.P. Charjan A.P. Charjan A.P.
Jadhav T.J. Jadhav T.J. Jadhav T.J. Jadhav T.J.
Kohinoor Arts commerce and Science College, Khuldabad, Dist Aurangabad (MS)
Gopikabai Gawande College Umarkhed, Dist.Yeotmal. (MS)
Shivaji Arts Commerce and Science College, Kannad, Dist Aurangabad (MS)
Poverty and Alcoholism a Big Constrains in Tuberculosis
Control.
The data, were entered and verified.
Subsequently the data was edited and corrected for
discrepancy and missing information. The distribution
of patients according to treatment outcomes was used
to assess the potential risk factors affecting as
constrains to Treatment and Tuberculosis control.
Observation
During the period from January 2004 to
December 2004 in Washim Tuberculosis Unit, total
814 (573 male+ 241 female) patients were registered
under RNTCP for treatment in all category ( cat I= 342,
cat II =164, cat III =308 ) with free of cost diagnosis
and treatment (DOTS- Directly Observed Short course
treatment chemotherapy , Funded by world Health
Organization) . Out of which 680 (83.53%) patients
were cured and treatment completed successfully, 51
patients get defaulted, 46 patients died, 32 found
failure and 5 patients transferred out. In present study
following sociodemographic characteristics were
observed and analyzed.

S
N

FACTORS
TOTAL
PATIENT
S UNDER
STUDY
CURED
/Treatme
nt
complete
d
DEFAU
-
LTED
DIE
D
FAILUR
E
TRANSFE
R
ED OUT

1 Age in years (15-70)

(18-75)

(17-65)

(15-
70)

(22-65)

(15-45)

M

573

467 40 35 28 3
F

241 213 11 11 4 2

2

Se
x

Tota
l

814 680 51 46 32 5

3
Alcoholic
(YES)
Out of
total 814
patients
57 21 10 12 0

4
Knowledge
about
Disease
(NO)
Out of
total 814
patients
136 24 5 4 0

5
Per capita
income
(Below
poverty line)
Out of
total 814
patients
401 34 31 22 0
Table : Socio-Demographic characteristics in TB
patients in TB unit area Washim.
In present study it has observed that 100 male
patients out of total 573 male patients registered for
treatment found with habit of alcoholism and also
alcoholism has found major factor/ constrain in
Tuberculosis control, because it makes default 41.17%
patients default out of total default 51 patients. Due to
heavy alcoholic habit such patients found with low
quality inoculation of drugs. Also it was observed that
due to this habit generally dot providers (Anganwadi
sevikas ) avoid to take retrieval action if patient missed
the doses. Also it was observed that such patients had
not responded to retrieval action and get defaulted.
Out of total 814 patients 169 patients (20.76%) has no
knowledge about causes of diseases that is patients
did not know the exact cause of disease.
Out of total 814 registered patients 488 patients
(59.95%) were found below poverty line. And it also
observed that total 46 TB deaths , 34 patients (67%)
were from below poverty line. some patients found with
very weak economic status that they have no enough
food for two times meals. out of which some patients
said that Government is supplying anti TB medicine
free of cost but how it can be take without food. Some
patients could not approach to DMC on time for follow
up sputum examination during treatment. Many of
such patients found with no balanced proteinaceous
diet.
Discussion
Alcoholism & TB:-
It was also found that large no. of patients adheres to
alcoholism i.e. 17.5 % male patients in research area
are found alcoholic. And it was found that in 51 total
Defaulted TB cases, 21 cases get default due to
alcoholism (In defaulted cases 41 % cases have not
took full course of medicine regularly due to heavy
alcoholic habit)
Poverty & present Disease:-
In present work it has found that approximately
60 % of TB patients were from below poverty line also
TB affects the most productive age grouped people
due to which personal as well as social economical
development get hampered.
Conclusion
Present study concluded that efforts should be
make to aware the people, also efforts should be make
to provide enough guidance to patients. And to control
poverty and alcoholism in the economically poor
people of country by arousing morality in life and by
addressing the social problems of poverty and
alcoholism, which are linked and acts as challenging
constrains to Tuberculosis control..

REFERENCES

1. Technical and Operational Guidelines for Tuberculosis Control, Central TB Division, Directorate General of Health Services,
Ministry of Health and Family Welf are, Nirman Bhavan, New Delhi 110001. Revised National Tuberculosis Control Program
(RNTCP) Manual for Laboratory Technicians, September 1997; 14.
2. Raviglione MC, Narain JP, Kochi A. HIV-associated tuberculosis in developing countries: Clinical diagnosis and treatment. World
Health Organ 1992; 70 : 515-26

ABSTRACT Changes induced in ovary after exposure of fish barbus ticto to 0.13ppm of endosulphan and 2.75 ppm
of thimet 10G were studied. The ovary shows the thin capsule of fibrous connective tissue enclosing the ovary has damaged.
The outer thin epithelium and inner germinative epithelial layers were also damaged. The thin membrane covering the oocytes
was also destructed and the follicle cells were atrophied.Vacuolation and fragmentation in the ooplasem were observed.
Nutritive cells of oocytes were damaged. Endosulphan was found more toxic than thimet

KEY WORDS: Organic Pesticides ,Ovary ,Fish.

INTRODUCTION
The Indian fresh water fishes the ovarian cycle
follows more or less identical pattern of maturation
stages from immature followed by growing ovary in
which vitellogenesis is initiated and completed.On the
basis of histomorphology,the oarian cycle has been
studied and variation number of stages have been
reported (Malhotra et al 1989).Gonadal development
and spawning seasons fall during the summer months
when the day light is slightly longer as compared to
winter months (Guraya,1976).
Breeding seasons in many of the Indian fresh
water fishes have adapted themselves morphologically
as well as physiologically. one of the physiological
adaptations is the maturation of gonads and the
resulting reproductive patterns.
In view of the present study on histological and
histopathological changes the fresh water fish
Barbus ticto is selected from the local dam Daulatabad
area near Aurangabad.
MATERIAL AND METHOD
The fresh water dam near small village
Daulatabad, situated 15 km.North-east of
Aurangabad.Fresh water teleost fish,Barbus ticto
(Hemilton-Buchanan) were selected for the present
study.The local name of fish is Taepli the typical mark
of identification is that a small bright black spot is
present only on dorsal fin and caudal peduncle.
MOPHOLOGY AND HISTOLOGY OF OVARY.
The ovaries of B.ticto are paired elongated sac-lick
structures lying in the abdominal cavity, ventral to the
kidneys. The anterior ends of the two ovaries are free
but their caudal ends may become united into one.
The two oviducts fused and opens to the exterior by
separate genital opening. (Fig-1)
The ovaries of the B. ticto are covered by a thin
layer of peritoneum. The wall of the ovary is fairly thick
during the non-breeding (preparatory phase) season
but become thin and highly vascular during the
spawning period. It consists of three layers:
1) On outer-most thin peritoneum.
2) Thicker tunica albuginea, made up of connective
tissue, muscle fibres and blood capillaries.
3) The innermost layer is the germinal epithelium
which projects into the evocoel in the form of
lamellae.
These ovigerous lamellae are the seat for the
development of oocytes, which are visible in various
stages of development. The germ cells as oogonia are
found in clusters in the lamellae and probably originate
from the germinal epithelium. An oogonium has a large
nucleus, and a thin layer ooplasm which is
chromophobic.Each oogonium passes through a
number of maturation stages to become a ripe ovum.
(Fig-2).
HISTOPHATHOLOGICAL CHANGES
EFFECT OF ENDOSULPHAN ON OVARY:
The fish exposed to 0.13 ppm for 24hr showed that
the wall of ovary consisting of outermost thin layer of
peritoneum, the middle of tunica albuginea and the
innermost layer germinal epithelium was badly
destructed. Due to the destruction of germinal
epithelium the oogonia were desstucted.In the mature
ovary the entire yolk had degenerated and the greater
part of the interior of the ovum had become empty
showing atresia.The premeiotic stages and immature
Jadhav T.J. Jadhav T.J. Jadhav T.J. Jadhav T.J.
Pathan T.D. Pathan T.D. Pathan T.D. Pathan T.D.
Shivaji Arts Commerce and Science College, Kannad, Dist Aurangabad (MS)
Kohinoor Arts commerce and Science College, Khuldabad, Dist Aurangabad (MS

Effect of Organic Pesticides (Endosulphan and Thimet) on
Histological and Histophthological Profile of Ovary of
Fresh Water Fish: Barbus Ticto.
ova were severely damaged showing complete
destruction (Fig-3)

EFFECT OF THIMET ON OVARY:
The fish exposed to 2.75 ppm for 24hr showed that
the wall of ovary consisting of outermost thin layer of
peritoneum, the middle of tunica albuginea and the
innermost layer germinal epithelium was badly
destructed. Due to the destruction of germinal
epithelium the oogonia were desstucted.In the mature
ovary the entire yolk had degenerated and the greater
part of the interior of the ovum had become empty
showing atresia.The premeiotic stages and immature
ova were severely damaged showing complete
destruction (Fig-4).

DISCUSSION:
Various types of pesticides are prove to be harmful
to the fish in freshwater, either directly or indirectly.
Changes in the histological and histopathological
structure are mainly directed to study the effect of
organic pesticides (Endosulphan and Thimet) on the
structural components of cell. The potentially toxic
pollutants induce morphological, behavioural and
physiological changes in the vital organ such as
respiratory, nervous, osmoregulatory and reproductive
etc. (Fingerman, 1982). Several investigations have
examined in the histopathological effects of pesticides
endosulphan and thimet on different organs of fish.
Generally, the organochiorinated pesticides
(Endosulphan) are more toxic than the
organophosphate (Thimet) pesticides for fish Barbus
ticto in present study..

Fig-1.Morphology of ovary Barbus ticto.

Fig-2.Stages of maturation ovary. Barbus ticto.


Fig-3.Exposed 0.13 ppm Endosulphan 24hr. 1.control ovary. 2. And 3.Exprimental ovary Destructed
ovary Barbus ticto.

Fig-4.Exposed 2.75 ppm Thimet. 24hr. 1.control ovary. 2. And 3.Exprimental ovary Destructed ovary.
Barbus ticto.

REFERENCES

1. Fingrman,M.(1982) Key note address:Pollution,our energy,All India symposium on physiological response of animal to
pollutants,December,1982,Marthwada University,Aurangabad,India Proc.Symp.Physiol.Resp.Anim.Pollut.I-VI.
2. Guraya, S.S. (1976) recent advances in the morphology, and histochemistry of steroid synthesizing cellular sites in the
non-mammalian vertebrate ovary, Int.Rev.Cytol.44:365-409.
3. Malhotra, Y.R., JyothiM.K.and Gupta, K. (1989): Reproductive cycles of Indian vertebrates (SaodalirlarS.K.Ed) Allied
Publisher Ltd.New Delhi, pp-58-105.

Research Paper Botany

ABSTRACT This paper reports the results of a literature study into the psychological and physiological effects of plants
on human well being. Different studies from various countries show that there are many direct or indirect therapies in which
human interact with plants. Various research findings and case studies highlight the positive social, physiological and
psychological outcomes of human plant interaction such as increased self-esteem, improved health, and sense of community,
accomplishment and pride.

KEY WORDS-: Human Plant Interaction, Psychological Effects

INTRODUCTION
Being around plants helps people concentrate
better in the home and work place. Most people have a
garden where they nurse their plants and sometimes
grow crops in back gardens. These forms of working
with plants can be beneficial or therapeutic for the
owners but it is not a form of direct therapy and users
are usually not aware of the therapeutic effects.
Healing gardens are mostly designed to support
healing processes and recovery of stress. Healing
gardens are designed for different target groups like
Alzheimer patients, children with learning disabilities
and schizophrenic persons (Elings, 2006).
Lewis (1995) mentioned urban and community
forestry as a form of gardening in cities. Various
studies shown that horticulture, in many different forms
have been used as a therapy or as an adjunct to
therapy in the treatment of diseases (Sempik et al.,
2003). Humans feel better when viewing trees rather
than inanimate objects and the response is magnified
when the tree has a spreading form. Indoor plants
reduce physical discomfort and do more than just give
you something to focus on other than pain. Different
studies show that nature in general can relieve stress
and mental fatigue (Kaplan and Kaplan, 1989; Ulrich,
1983). Lewis (1995) mentioned a study by Owen,
(1994) who found that visiting botanical gardens
lowers blood pressure and reduces heart rate. Various
studies shown that the presence of plant vegetation
improving speed recovery from stress (Ulrich et al.,
1991; Kaplan, 1993). Kidd and Brascamp, 2004 found
no causal relationships between gardening
involvement and psychological well being, but there
were high correlations between gardening and feelings
of autonomy, environmental mastery, positive relations
with others, purpose in life and self acceptance.
The effect of nature in the home and in the
work place serves to stimulate both the senses and the
mind, improving mental cognition and performances.
Sempik et al., (2003) described the horticultural
therapy as the use of plants by a trained professional
as a medium through which certain clinically defined
goals may be met. This is achieved by active or
passive involvement (Growth point, 1999).
Effects of human plant interaction:
The physiological value of people and plant
interaction is one of great benefit to human health.
Therapists and participants in horticultural therapy
programs usually report the positive benefits like social
integration, increase of self confidence, concentration
and learning of practical skills (Gezondheidsraad,
2004). Plants also produce a wide range of intangible
effects on people; for example plants calm us, reduce
stress, increase pain tolerance and speedy recovery
from illnesses. They also improve mental functioning in
children and reduce domestic violence. Plants make
us better, more civil people.
A green environment in general may
encourage people to have physical exercise. Physical
exercise can have positive effects on different health
determinants and reduce the risk of different kinds of
chronic diseases (Gezondheidsraad, 2004). Shrubs,
trees and flowers have a practical application in
hospitals, the presence of plants in patients recovery
rooms greatly reduces the time necessary to heal.
Another technique to decrease recovery time is
horticulture therapy, where patients can nurture plants
themselves. Patients who physically interact with
Dr. Deepak Devilal Pardhe Dr. Deepak Devilal Pardhe Dr. Deepak Devilal Pardhe Dr. Deepak Devilal Pardhe

Sant Dyaneshwar Mahavidyalaya, Tal. Soegaon,
Dist. Aurangabad, Maharashtra

The Psychological and Physiological Effects of
Human-Plant Interaction on Human Well Being
plants experience a significantly reduced recovery time
after medical procedure.
The various studies showed that human plant
interaction responsible for enhanced physical
activities, reduced levels of stress and mental fatigue
and a better social and cultural integration (Armstrong,
2000). Horticultural therapy can increase the feeling of
value and worth and causes people with learning
disabilities to consider they more desirable than
before, thus influencing them positively (Smith and
Aldous, 1994).
Conclusion
The interactions between humans and plants
have been shown to result in reduced and rapid
recovery from stress, lower blood pressure and
reduced muscle tension. Similarly, the psychological
worth of people and plant interactions is also extremely
beneficial as it allows individual to escape from the
demands of everyday life by permitting them to think
about less stressful things, imagine fewer
psychological boundaries and recover from the
repeated focused attention required when completing
stressful work. The people actively participating in an
experience that allows for direct interaction related to
plants, such as gardening for example, both of these
psychological and physiological benefits can be
increased even further. Different studies show that
people plant interactions promote human well being of
different target groups, not only curative but also as a
preventive treatment for individuals as well as groups.

REFERENCES

Elings M., 2006. The physiological, psychological and sociological eff ects of plants on people. Jan Hassink and Majken van Kijk (eds.),
Farming f or Health, 45-55
Lewis C.A., 1995. Human health and well-being: the psychological, physiological, and sociological effects of plants on people. In:
Matsuo, E. and Relf, P.D. eds. Horticulture in human life, culture and environment: international symposium 22 August 1994. ISHS,
Leuven, 31-39. ISHS Acta Horticulturae no.391
Sempik J., Aldridge J. and Becker S., 2003. Social and therapeutic horticulture: evidence and messages from research. Thrive with the
Centre f or Child and Family Research, Loughborough University, Reading.
Kaplan R. and Kaplan S., 1989. The experience of nature: a psychological perspective. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Ulrich R.S., 1983. Aesthetic and affective response to natural environment. In: Altman I. and Wohlwill J.F. eds. Behavior and the natural
environment. Plenum, New York, 85-125.
Owen P.J., 1994. Influence of botanic garden experience on human health. Master Thesis Kansas State University, Department of
Horticulture, Forestry and Recreation Resources, Manhattan.
Ulrich R.S., Simons R.F., Losito B.D., et al., 1991. Stress recovery during exposure to natural and urban environments. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 11 (3), 201-230.
Kaplan R., 1993. The role of nature in the context of the workplace. Landscape and Urban Planning, 26 (1/4), 193-201.
Kidd J.L. and Brascamp W., 2004. Benefits of gardening and the well being of New-Zeland gardeners. In: Relf, D., Kwack, B.H. and
Hicklenton, P. eds. expanding roles for horticulture in improving human well-being and life quality. ISHS, Leuven, 103-112. Acta
Horticultura no. 639.
Growth Point, 1999. Your future starts here: practitioners determine the way ahead. Growth Point, 79, 4-5.
Gezondheidsraad, 2004. Natuur en gezondheid: invloed van natuur op sociaal, psychisch en lichamelijk welbevinden (Deel 1 van een
tweeluik: verkenning van de stand der wetenschap). Gezondheidsraad, Den Haag. GR no. 2004/09. [http://www.gr.nl/pdf.php?ID=1018]
Armstrong, D., 2000. A survey of community gardens in upstate New York: implications for health promotion and community
development. Health and Place, 6 (4), 319-327.
Smith, V.D. and Aldous, D.E., 1994. Effect of therapeutic horticulture on the self concept of the mildly intellectually disabled student. In:
Francis, M., Lindsey, P. and Rice, J.C. eds. The healing dimensions of people-plant relations. Center for Design Research, UC Davis.
Research Paper Physics

ABSTRACT The purpose of this paper is to discuss the effect of music and noise, on human mind. The human ear is able
to hear frequencies of 20 to 20,000 hertz. When a source vibrates, it actually vibrates with many frequencies at the same time.
Each of those frequencies produces a wave. Sound is a sensation in the ear by the vibration of the surrounding air. Sound
quality depends on the combination of different frequencies of sound waves. Musical sound is characterized by regular
fluctuations of vibrations differing to noise which is characterized by irregular fluctuation of vibrations. Musical sound is
desired whereas noise is undesired...

Keywords: Musical sound, Noise, human mind

INTRODUCTION
There are many different sounds. Both music and
noise are sounds. Audible sounds are classified into
two groups, namely musical sounds and noise. A
musical sound is that in which the vibrations of the
sounding body are periodic, follow each other regularly
and rapidly, so as to produce a pleasing effect on the
ear without any sudden change in loudness.
The waveform of musical sounds is smooth as
shown in figure (a). Musical sounds can be produced
using a flute, a Veena, sitar, harmonium, etc.
periodicity, regularity and continuity. The waveform of
noise, on the other hand, is irregular as shown in figure
(b) [1].

Figure (a). Musical sounds b) Noise
Music produces a pleasing effect on our ears and
mind as its frequency is high and produces a regular
waveform and no sudden changes of amplitude or
wavelength representing a musical sound. Noise is
rather unpleasant since its frequency is low and has an
irregular waveform and there are sudden changes in
amplitude or wavelength. Music must have an
identifiable pitch, a good or pleasing quality of tone,
and repeating pattern or rhythm to be music. Noise on
the other hand has no identifiable pitch, no pleasing
tone, and no steady rhythm. Music produces a
pleasing effect on our ears and mind, as its frequency
is high and produces a regular waveform and no
sudden changes of amplitude or wavelength
representing a musical sound. Noise is rather
unpleasant since its frequency is low and has an
irregular waveform and there are sudden changes in
amplitude or wavelength .Noise is defined as
unwanted sound.
Sound is a wave and waves have amplitude.
Amplitude is a measure of energy. The more energy a
wave has, the higher its amplitude. As amplitude
increases, intensity also increases. Intensity is the
amount of energy a sound has over an area. The
same sound is more intense if you hear it in a smaller
area. In general, we call sounds with a higher intensity
louder. Pitch helps us distinguish between low and
high sounds. Pitch depends on the frequency of a
sound wave. Frequency is the number of wavelengths
that fit into one unit of time. High sounds have high
frequencies and low sounds have low frequencies. The
human ear is more sensitive to high sounds, so they
may seem louder than a low noise of the same
intensity.
P.R.Maheshmalkar P.R.Maheshmalkar P.R.Maheshmalkar P.R.Maheshmalkar
S. V. S. V. S. V. S. V. K KK Kshirsagar shirsagar shirsagar shirsagar

Saw. K.S.K.College, Dist. Beed, Maharashtra.

Correlations between Music, Noise and Human
Mind
DISCUSSION:
To tell the difference between noise and music,
everyones opinion would be different.
Music is powerful. It has the potential to remind
emotions and personality. Music helps concentration
and work efficiency. If we are able to come to a
conclusion, we will have a study skill that will help
college students perform better on tests and with
homework [2]. Ayca Berfu nal and Co-authers [3]
found that listening to music increased mental effort
while driving, irrespective of the driving situation being
complex or monotonous, providing support to the
general assumption that music can be a distracting
auditory stimulus while driving. However, drivers who
listened to music performed as well as the drivers who
did not listen to music, indicating that music did not
impair their driving performance. Importantly, the
increases in mental effort while listening to music
pointed out those drivers try to regulate their mental
effort as a cognitive compensatory strategy to deal
with task demands, interestingly; they observed
significant improvements in driving performance in two
of the driving situations. It seems like mental effort
might mediate the effect of music on driving
performance in situations requiring sustained attention.
Researchers found that people could make accurate
judgments about an individual's levels of extraversion,
creativity and open-mindedness after listening their
favorite songs [4]. The sound of your friend shouting is
loud, while the sound of your own breathing is very
soft. The effects of sound in the brain include evoking
emotions, triggering the release of stress chemicals
and impacting the development of new neural
pathways in the brain [5]. The
Rapidly increasing population followed by large
number of vehicles gives rise to unrestrained noise
pollution and its associated health effects and can
cause both short-term as well as long-term
psychological and physiological disorders [6]. Noise
pollution has adverse impacts on human health. It also
causes annoyance, nausea, insomnia, thus affecting
the working efficiency [7, 8] .Adverse effects on
exposure to noise may include interference with
speech communication and decreasing childrens
learning skills. [9]

CONCLUSION
Psychology contributes to the understanding
of music which affects the listener. The difference
between sounds is noticed that some sounds are
pleasant while some are unpleasant. Noise harms our
natural abilities. Noise levels can create Stress. There
is a role of musical sound in forming personal and
group identities of humans.

REFERENCES

1. http://www.tutorvista.com/content/physics/physics-iii/waves/musical-sounds-and-noise.php
2. Meg Rebholz, Katie Kean, Wiley Curran, Andrew Hagan 10/21/05, How Music affects Concentration and Work Efficiency-
Lab Packet, [Section: McCollum]
3. The influence of music on mental effort and driving performance
A. Ayca Berfu nal, Linda Steg, Kai Epstude, 2012 , Elsevier Ltd.
4. Kendra Cherry, Music and Personality, What Does Your Taste In Music Reveal About Your Personality?
5. Gae-Lynn Woods, Jun 22, 2010, The Effects of Sound in the Human Brain
6. B. J. Bhosale, Amul Late, P. M. Nalawade, S. P. Chavan, M. B. Mule,Jul Sept 2010, Noise and Health,An Inter-
disciplinary International Journal Vol.12,(48), 195-198
7. NHC, Netherlands Health Council: Committee on a Uniform Environmental Noise Exposure Metric, 1995: Assessing Noise
Exposure for Public Health Purposes, Report; 1997/23E.
8. Morrell S, Taylor R, Lyle D. A review of health effects of aircraft noise. Aust N Z J Public Health 1997;21:221-36.
9. Mato RR, Mufuruki TS. Noise pollution associated with the operation of the Dar Salaam International Airport. Transp Res 1999
Part D:81-
Research Paper Physics

Psychophysics is the scientific study of the
relationship between stimuli and the sensations and
perceptions evoked by these stimuli. The term
psychophysics is used to denote both the substantive
study of stimulus-response relationships and the
methodologies used for this study.
We use psychophysics for a variety of different
purposes. We have subjects judge the magnitude of
colour differences against a standard colour difference
in order to derive colour tolerances for industrial
purposes. We have subjects perform colour matching
experiments to understand the variability in colour
differences between individuals. Many times we have
subjects make judgment on images to see how
different displays or imaging devices and techniques
affect image quality.
Psychophysicists usually employ experimental
stimuli that can be objectively measured, such as pure
tones varying in intensity, or lights varying in
luminance. All the senses have been studied: vision,
hearing, touch (including skin enteric perception),
taste, smell and the sense of time. Regardless of the
sensory domain, there are three main areas of
investigation: absolute thresholds, discrimination
thresholds and scaling.
A threshold (or limen), is the point of intensity
at which the participant can just detect the presence of,
or difference in, a stimulus. Stimuli with intensities
below the threshold are considered not detectable
(hence: sub-liminal). Stimuli at values close enough to
a threshold will often be detectable some proportion of
occasions; therefore, a threshold is considered to be
the point at which a stimulus, or change in a stimulus,
is detected some proportion p of occasions. There are
two kinds of thresholds: absolute and difference.
Absolute Thresholds:
An absolute threshold is the level of intensity of
a stimulus at which the subject is able to detect the
presence of the stimulus some proportion of the time
(a p level of 50% is often used). An example of an
absolute threshold is the number of hairs on the back
of one's hand that must be touched before it can be felt
a participant may be unable to feel a single hair being
touched, but may be able to feel two or three as this
exceeds the threshold. Absolute threshold is also often
referred to as detection threshold.
Difference Thresholds: (Discrimination)
A difference threshold (just-noticeable
difference) is the magnitude of the smallest difference
between two stimuli of differing intensities that the
participant is able to detect some proportion of the time
(50% is often used). To test this threshold, several
different methods are used. The subject may be asked
to adjust one stimulus until it is perceived as the same
as the other, may be asked to describe the magnitude
of the difference between two stimuli, or may be asked
to detect a stimulus against a background. The just-
noticeable difference is not a fixed quantity, rather it
depends on how intense the stimuli being measured
are and the particular sense being measured Weber's
Law states that the just-noticeable difference of a
stimulus is a constant proportion despite variation in
intensity.
In discrimination experiments, the
experimenter seeks to determine at what point the
difference between two stimuli, such as two weights or
two sounds, is detectable. The subject is presented
with one stimulus, for example a weight, and is asked
to say whether another weight is heavier or lighter (in
some experiments, the subject may also say the two
weights are the same). At the point of subjective
equality (PSE), the subject perceives the two weights
to be the same. The just-noticeable difference (JND),
or difference limen (DL), is the magnitude of the
difference in stimuli that the subject notices some
proportion p of the time (50% is usually used for p). In
addition, a Two-alternative forced choice paradigm can
be used to assess the point at which performance
reduces to chance on discrimination between two
alternatives.
Absolute and difference thresholds are
sometimes considered similar because there is always
background noise interfering with our ability to detect
stimuli, however study of difference thresholds still
occurs, for example in pitch discrimination tasks.
SCALING
Measurement theory, is concerned with
properties (formulated as axioms in the mathematical
model) of an empirical structure that allow
measurement scales to be constructed. Scaling, on the
other hand, is concerned with the process of assigning
numbers to objects subject to certain structural
Mohd. Khizar Syed Mohd. Khizar Syed Mohd. Khizar Syed Mohd. Khizar Syed
Dr.Chishty Syed Qadeeruddin Dr.Chishty Syed Qadeeruddin Dr.Chishty Syed Qadeeruddin Dr.Chishty Syed Qadeeruddin
Dr. Afzal Hussain Dr. Afzal Hussain Dr. Afzal Hussain Dr. Afzal Hussain

Kohinoor Arts Commerce and Science College Khuldabad (MS)
Dr.Rafeeq Zakariya College for Women, Aurangabad (MS)
Arkay College of Engineering and technology Bodhan Dist.
Nizamabad. (AP)

Psychophysics
constraints so as to reflect, as well as possible, the
regularities exhibited by a set of empirical
observations. The structural constraints are imposed
by the particular class of models being applied to the
data. In other words, the scaling problem is on of
finding how best to recast a set of (usually fallible) data
into a particular numerical representation within a
chosen class of representations. Although some
scaling techniques have arisen whom axiomatic
treatments of a measurement problem for many scaling
techniques the measurement problem either has not
been solved or has been treated only incompletely. For
this reason, we elect to discuss scaling as a separate
topic, as is done generally in psychology
Fechners Scaling
S = k log R, where S is the psychological
sensation as shown by the response, k is a constant
determined by the person and the type of stimulus,
and R is the stimulus intensity.
Logarithms
NumberLog
10
Log to the base 10
1 0
10 1
100 2
1,000 3
10,000 4
Example of Fechners Scaling
Lifted weight in grams Response
1 . 01
10 01
100 01
1000 10
Stevens Scaling
Magnitude estimation consists of first
experiencing a value of stimulus on the scale. The
experimenter assigns it a value and you are to accept
that value as the magnitude of the stimulus.
Subsequent stimuli are assigned a value by you.
Stevens Scaling Formula
S = a I
n
where S is the persons magnitude
estimation response, a is a constant
dependent upon the person, I is the stimulus
intensity, and n is a constant dependent upon
the type of stimulus.
For example: for brightness, n = .33
For loudness, n = .67
For line length, n = 1
For electric shock, n = 3.5
Classical psychophysical methods
Psychophysical experiments have traditionally used
three methods for testing subjects perception in
stimulus detection and difference detection
experiments: They are the method of limits, the method
of constant stimuli and the method of adjustment.
Method of limits
In ascending method of limits, some property
of the stimulus starts out at a level so low that the
stimulus could not be detected, then this level is
gradually increased until the participant reports that
they are aware of it. For example, if the experiment is
testing the minimum amplitude of sound that can be
detected, the sound begins too quietly to be perceived,
and is made gradually louder. In the descending
method of limits, this is reversed. In each case, the
threshold is considered to be the level of the stimulus
property at which the stimuli are just detected.
In experiments, the ascending and descending
methods are used alternately and the thresholds are
averaged. A possible disadvantage of these methods is
that the subject may become accustomed to reporting
that they perceive a stimulus and may continue
reporting the same way even beyond the threshold (i.e.
the error of habituation). Conversely, the subject may
also anticipate that the stimulus is about to become
detectable or undetectable and may make a premature
judgment (the error of anticipation).
To avoid these potential pitfalls, Georg von
Bekesy introduced the staircase procedure in 1960 in
his study of auditory perception. In this method, the
sound starts out audible and gets quieter after each of
the subject's responses, until the subject does not
report hearing it. At that point, the sound is made
louder at each step, until the subject reports hearing it,
at which point it is made quieter in steps again. This
way the experimenter is able to "zero in" on the
threshold.
Method of constant stimuli
Instead of being presented in ascending or
descending order, in the method of constant stimuli the
levels of a certain property of the stimulus are not
related from one trial to the next, but presented
randomly. This prevents the subject from being able to
predict the level of the next stimulus, and therefore
reduces errors of habituation and expectation. For
'absolute thresholds' again the subject reports whether
he or she is able to detect the stimulus. For 'difference
thresholds' there has to be a constant comparison
stimulus with each of the varied levels. Friedrich
Hegelmaier described the method of constant stimuli in
a 1852 paper. This method allows for full sampling of
the psychometric function, but can result in a lot of
trials when several conditions are interleaved.
Method of adjustment
The method of adjustment asks the subject to
control the level of the stimulus, instructs them to alter
it until it is just barely detectable against the
background noise, or is the same as the level of
another stimulus. This is repeated many times. This is
also called the method of average error. In this method
the observer himself controls the magnitude of the
variable stimulus beginning with a variable that is
distinctly greater or lesser than a standard one and he
varies it until he is satisfied by the subjectivity of two.
The difference between the variable stimuli and the
standard one is recorded after each adjustment and
the error is tabulated for a considerable series. At the
end mean is calculated giving the average error which
can be taken as the measure of sensitivity
Research Paper Chemistry

Dopamine is a chemical, functions as a
neurotransmitter in the brain. It is a chemical
messenger which is released by the nerve cells to send
signals to other nerve cells. Its name is derived from its
chemical structure as it is an amine formed by
removing a carboxyl group from a molecule of L-
DOPA. In the brain, neurons produce about more than
0.3% of dopamine. These neurons are responsible for
many of our behaviors. Dopamine affects brain
processes that control movement, emotional response,
and ability to experience pleasure and pain. Regulation
of dopamine plays a crucial role in our mental and
physical health. Dopamine plays a critical role in the
way our brain controls our movements.
Shortage of dopamine causes Parkinsons
disease. It is a disease in which a person loses the
ability to execute smooth, controlled movements. In the
frontal lobes of brain, dopamine plays a role in
controlling the flow of information from other areas of
the brain. Dopamine is released by naturally rewarding
experiences such as food, sex, abuse of drugs and
neutral stimuli that become associated with them.
Outside the nervous system, dopamine functions in
several parts of the body as a local chemical
messenger. In the blood vessels, it inhibits
norepinephrine release and acts as a vasodilator, in
the kidneys, it increases sodium excretion and urine
output, in the pancreas, it reduces insulin production, in
the digestive system , it reduces gastrointestinal
motility and protects intestinal mucosa, and in the
immune system, it reduces the activity of lymphocytes.
It is synthesized locally and exerts its effects on cells
that are located near the cells that release it.
INCREASE DOPAMINE LEVEL: If a person is
feeling a little low level of dopamine some different
methods can be used to boost dopamine level.
For dopamine the body needs tyrosine. Almonds,
avocados, bananas, low-fat dairy, meat and
poultry, lima beans, sesame and pumpkin seeds
may help body to produce more dopamine from
these one can get tyrosine.
Dopamine is easy to oxidize, and antioxidants may
reduce free radical damage to the brain cells that
produce dopamine. Many fruits and vegetables are
rich in antioxidants, including beta-carotene and
carotenoids: greens, orange vegetables and fruits,
asparagus, broccoli, beets, vitamin C: peppers,
oranges, strawberries, cauliflower, Brussels
sprouts vitamin E: nuts and sunflower seeds,
greens, broccoli, carrots.
Avoid food that inhibits brain function such foods
may include refined packaged foods, refined white
flour, cholesterol, caffeine, and saturated fats.
Exercise regularly. It increases blood calcium,
which stimulates dopamine production and uptake
in brain. Try 30 to 60 minutes of walking, swimming
or jogging to jump-start dopamine levels.
Get plenty of sleep. One of the best ways to feel
energized and ready to tackle the day is to get
plenty of sleep. Dopamine has been tied to feelings
of wakefulness, so in order to get that wakeful
feeling, get 7 to 8 hour of sleep a night.
Some physicians recommend vitamin B
6

supplements and L-Phenylalanine to elevate
dopamine in the brain. One can find either of these
at local drugstore. Similarly, Phenylethylamine, an
ingredient found in chocolate, elevates dopamine.
Depending on the symptoms a physician can
prescribe medication that will increase dopamine
level.
If one is struggling to focus on tasks and
experiencing hyperactivity, doctor can prescribe
psychostimulants like Ritalin to stimulate dopamine
production in brain.
Low dopamine levels are sometimes associated
with depression. One can talk to doctor about
starting an antidepressant if natural methods do
not work to relieve symptoms of low energy.
A person suffering from Parkinsons disease
experience involuntary bodily movement. A
dopamine booster called levadopa is often
prescribed for Parkinsons patient.
There are more serious strategies one can undertake
to increase dopamine levels which are under the care
of a psychological professional. ECT (electro-
convulsive therapy) has shown to be effective in raising
dopamine levels.

Syed Yousuf Hussain Syed Yousuf Hussain Syed Yousuf Hussain Syed Yousuf Hussain
Kohinoor Arts, Commerce & Science College Khultabad,
Maharashtra
Dopamine : A Neurotransmitter
Research Paper Mathematics

ABSTRACT This research has been done to study the effects of some psychological methods in better learning and
Educational progress of mathematical problem solving , metacognitive and cognition method play an essential role in
mathematical problem solving over the past 20 years, a great deal of cognition and metacognition research has focused on
mathematics learning. The majority of the research has examined basic capabilities such as counting understanding of
numerical magnitudes, Arithmetics (both word problems and purely numerical problem) and pre algebra. In addition the
paper review studies aiming to improve the learning process through metacognition.

INTRODUCTION
Cognition and metacognition is recognized as an
important mediating variable for learning. However,
Since Flavell introduced the term in the nineteen
seventies. Metacognitive knowledge was defined as the
knowledge one has about interplay between personal
characteristics, task characteristics and available
strategies in a learning situation. At this knowledge level
two components can be differentiate from one another 1)
Declarative metacognitive knowledge(What) 2)procedural
metacognitive knowledge(How) cognitive strategy might
be first try to picturize or imagine the mathematical
problem and picture or imagine several solution. There
are many cognitive strategies used by good thinkers to
solve the problems we believe that educational research
is undergoing a major advance that will further deepen
our theoretical understanding of fundamental process of
cognition, learning and teaching and further strengthen
our abilities to contribute mathematical problem solving.
What is Metacognition? Flavell (1979) first presented
the concept of metacognition. It could be interpreted as
cognition about cognition, which means knowledge of
thinking and regulation of learning processes. (Weinert,
1987; Biehler & Snowman, 1997.) Flavell (1979) defined
the concept for metacognitive knowledge and
metacognitive experience. Metacognitive knowledge
includes knowledge of cognitive structure and beliefs
about learning and cognition. Metacognitive experiences
influence on cognitive processes being conscious
affective or cognitive events that lead one's own thinking
or ongoing cognitive processes in situations which
demand highly conscious thinking. (Flavell, 1979.)
MATHEMATICS AND METACOGNITION
Mathematics problem solving process begins
wards with understanding the problem and requires all
the time concourse concentration and orientation and
orientation to achieve the desired solution. A student
interprets the problem and compares the situation to his
earlier experience of the same kind of problems and
existing resources he has to determine what is known
what is unknown in order to reflect what is really asked.
Metacognitive knowledge helps the student to represent
the mental model of a problem and the relation of the
concepts. Matacognitive method also guides this goal
oriented thinking and procedure towards the solution.
After forming mental model of a problem student has to
decide what heuristic or algorithms to use in the particular
context. This is what the metacognitive knowledge plays
a big role it affects to the conscious choice made these
made choice contribution to sub solution during the
problem solving process.
AIMS OF THE STUDY The purpose of this study is to
examine students' metacognitive processes in
mathematical problem solving in CSCL. The main focus
of the study is to characterize what kind of metacognitive
processes do appear in computer supported collaborative
learning environment while the students construct
solutions together, argument mathematical problems as
well as negotiate and explain mathematical concepts.
PROCEDURE This presentation is about the study that
was implemented with 14-year-old local level secondary
school students (N=16) who generally perform better in
Mathematics in comparison to their peers in average in
Aurangabad. The average grade of mathematics was 9
(in scale 4-10) in the student group. They used
Knowledge Forum learning environment in geometry and
probability courses. The Geometry project lasted 20 days
and included 4 lessons of which during 2 lessons the
students worked with Knowledge Forum. One lesson
lasted for 60 minutes. The Probability project included
also 4 lessons and 2 of them working with Knowledge
Forum . The data of students' computer notes and
portfolio materials was collected in order to analyze the
metacognitive processes of collaborative mathematical
problem solving process and socially shared discussion.
DESCRIPTION OF GEOMETRY - Several working
methods were used for utilizing networked environment in
mathematical problem solving. In geometry the students
made a project work of a given polygon to the Knowledge
Forum database and they were asked to discuss with the
other students about the results. The students were
especially encouraged to discuss for alternative ways to
solve a problem and ask help for their project works. In
the Probability course the students were working in pairs
and they were asked to investigate the probability of the
given tasks: marbles, tossing a number cube and lottery.
Mohmed Zafar Mohmed Zafar Mohmed Zafar Mohmed Zafar
Mohmed Saber Mohmed Saber Mohmed Saber Mohmed Saber
Kohinoor Arts, Commerce & Science College, Khultabad, Dist.

The Effects of Psychological Methods to Develop the
Mathematical Problem Solving
The summary of the contents in projects is presented in
Table 1.
Geometry project included altogether 2 lessons
of which in 9 the students worked with Knowledge Forum
and 2 lessons were traditional instruction. In the first
lessons the student pairs wrote notes of their project work
about quadrilaterals and triangles to the Knowledge
Forum database and discussed and commented the other
students notes. The following part of the lessons dealt
with geometrical construction. The students solved given
geometrical construction problems with paper and pencil.
Knowledge Forum was used to elaborate their problems:
provide explanations and decision-making guidelines,
asking for help and searching for alternative ways to
solve the given problems. In the last lessons in geometry
the students invented their own mathematical word
problems and wrote them down as notes to the
Knowledge Forum.

PROJECT LESSONS SUBSTANCE
Geometry 1 n=2 Quadrilaterals and triangles.
Save your project work as note
and discuss about the others
notes.
Geometry 2 n=2 Geometrical construction. Find
a solution with paper and
pencil. Write the solution path
down to the database.
Table 1. The content of the lessons.
DATA COLLECTION AND ANALYSIS The data was
collected from students notes and portfolio materials in
order to analyze the met cognitive processes of the
students mathematical problem solving. The summary of
the data collection and analysis is presented in Table 2.
The data of the Knowledge Forum notes was analyzed
following the three stages:
1) General content analysis of students Knowledge
Forum notes in Geometry and Probability
2) Detailed content analysis of collaborative
mathematical problem solving process
3) Detailed content analysis of metacognitive processes
in socially shared discussion
In the first stage of the analysis the students
notes in the database were classified for four categories:
knowledge, question, significant note and insignificant
note. The category of knowledge included notes like, The
marks of the angles [in the case of all the quadrilaterals
and triangles] are always inside the figure. The questions
were, for example, Is the sum of the angles 180
degrees? [In the case of triangle] or How do you get a
straight angle? The category of significant notes included
notes like, It stood there in the Maths book but Im not
sure if it is right. There is two alternative ways to count
[the area of the triangle], isnt there. The insignificant
notes were, for example, Your note is the best one in this
database.
The detailed content analysis of collaborative
mathematical problem solving process is based on
Schoenfelds studies on mathematical problem solving.
The notes were classified for joint resources, strategies
and heuristics, peer-regulation and beliefs in order to
characterize collaborative features in network-based
problem solving process in mathematics. The joint
resources were composed of the notes that brought
mathematical knowledge to the discussion, for example,
Yes, the area of the triangle is the base multiplied by the
height and then divided with 2. The strategies and
heuristics were, for example, A little bit more about the
total number of tossing a number cube. It doesnt matter if
you throw one number cube twice or use two different
number cubes. The peer-regulation included notes like,
A little correction. These particular straight lines, the
perpendicular bisectors to each side of the triangle do not
necessarily intersect inside the triangle. It is possible that
they intersect outside the triangle. The notes of beliefs
were for, example, All the fun stuffs are in the picture,
really cool and those leaves [in the picture cheer me up.
The detailed content analysis of metacognitive
processes is based on Browns (1987) and Schoenfelds
studies of metacognition. The categories were preparing,
participating and responding in order to describe what
kind of metacognitive processes exists in socially shared
discussion. The preparing was about reading and
understanding the problem or analyzing the needed
knowledge (both procedural knowledge and concepts).
The category of participating included the notes that
provided a solution effort or knowledge and the notes that
explored the used procedural knowledge and the logical
path of given thoughts, explanations and solutions.
Responding is about implementing the ideas that are
found in the discussions and verifying the results.

Data collection Data analysis
The
project
Students
notes in
database
Portfolio
materials
The
content
analysis
Analysis
of
problem
solving
Analysis
of
meta-
cognitive
processes
Geometr
y 1
X - X X X
Geometr
y 2
X X X X X
Table 2. The data collection and the data analysis
INTERPRETATION - "One student needed to find out
whether the sum of the angles in triangle is 180 degrees.
He has been reading the teacher's instruction in the
Knowledge Forum database and he is analyzing the
problem in order to find out what kind of knowledge he
need. He obviously has a clue but he is uncertain of his
idea. The girls are encouraged to bring their thinking
visible and ask help from the other students. The boys
think that the girls have forgotten the examples and by
saying, "Where are the examples" they give feedback
on the girls activity and operations indirectly. The girls
respond by explaining the model of their operations in
their next note. In the data analysis this note was
analyzed as a significant note. In this note they explain to
the boys the procedure of their operations and, thus,
provided a model for boys.
The detailed content analysis of collaborative
problem solving process in Geometry 1 follows the results
of the content analysis. The students shared they
knowledge and made their thinking visible, for example,
they produced lots of notes of knowledge that was
needed in the beginning the problem solving process
(e.g. Tinas and Helens first comment in the students
notes about equilateral triangle). Also, the students
asked for each other to clarify their actions (e.g. the
researchers interpretation of Peters and Jakes comment
in example 1.) and though processes. The results of the
detailed analysis of the metacognitive processes were
encouraging in terms of the role of metacognition in
mathematics learning. The metacognitive actions in
students networked discussion focused on the needed
knowledge, for example, the Tinas and Helens first
comment in Example 1. The majority of the metacognitive
processes were in a category of participating, for
example, Peters and Jakes operations in Example 1.
Instead, only few notes were in a category of responding.
These notes manifested implementing the ideas and
verifying the results of the discussion.
In the Geometry 2 project the students produced
very different notes from the first geometry project. The
students had to solve as many as possible of the given 15
problems in geometrical construction (See results in
Table 3). Some of the students produced notes on how
to solve the problem that effected on the amount of the
strategies and heuristics applied in resulting discussions.
In the Geometry 2 the students were more engaged in
their working what is seen in their metacognitive efforts in
participation and responding.
The content analysis The detailed content
analysis of collaborative
problem solving
processes
The detailed
content analysis
of metacognitive
processes
Not
es

Qu
esti
on
%
Kno
wle
dge
%
Sig
nify
Not
e
%
Insi
gn.
Not
e
%
Joi
nt
res
our.
%
Str
at.
He
ur.
%
Pee
r-
reg
ulat
.
%
Beli
efs

%
Pre
par
atio
n
%
Par
ticip
atio
n
%
Res
pon
din
g
%
Ge
om.
1
(n=
85)
14,
1
(n=
12)
25,
9
(n=
22)
25,
9
(n=
22)
34,
1
(n=
27)
21,
2
(n=
18)
16,
5
(n=
14)
24,
7
(n=
21)
2,6
(n=
2)
17,
6
(n=
15)
42,
4
(n=
36)
7,1
(n=
6)
Ge
om.
2
(
n=3
9)
7,7
(n=
3)
71,
8
(n=
28)
2,1
(n=
8)
0
(n=
0)
25,
6
(n=
10)
66,
7
(n=
26)
0
(n=
0)
5,1
(n=
2)
12,
8
(n=
5)
64,
1
(n=
25)
23,
1
(n=
9)
Table 3. The results of the Geometry
CONCLUSION
The results of this study point out that we are able to
reveal metacognitive processes in socially shared
discussions in collaborative mathematical problem
solving. Majority of the metacognitive processes focused
on providing solution efforts, exploring the used
procedural knowledge and logical paths of written
thought. There were a few amounts of notes that expose
verifying the results of a discussion in the students' own
action.
In the next phase of the study a more detailed research
setting is needed including experimental and control
groups. The results of this study confirm that in further
studies with more diverse research methods it is possible
to reveal the particular features of metacognition that are
distinctive in Mathematics in collaborative inquiry
processes supported by the networked technology.
In summary the results of this study confirm that
metacognition is a component of joint problem solving.
Also the further studies are needed in order characterize
the special features of metacognition in socially shared
discussions in Mathematics. Utilizing networked
technology provides scaffolding for developing
metacognitive skills as joint knowledge resources and
enables the students to review their thought processes
and discussions. Apparently the students benefit of
computer supported collaboration and use more
consciously their metacognitive knowledge to become
aware of their thinking.

REFERENCES

Bereiter, C. & Scardamalia, M. 1993. Surpassing ourselves: An inquiry into nature and implications of expertise. Chicago and La Salle, IL: Open Court.
Biehler R.F. & Snowman J. 1997. Psychology applied to teaching. Eight editi on.New York: Houghton Mifflin Company.
Brown, A. 1987. Metacognition, executive control, self-regulation and other more mysterious mechanisms. In F. Weinert & R. Kluwe (Eds.)
Metacognition, motivation and understandi ng, (pp.65-116). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Chi, M. & Bassok, M. 1989. Learning from examples via self-explanations. In L.B. Resnick (Ed.) Knowing, learning and i nstruction: Essays in Honor of
Robert Glaser, (pp.251-282). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Davidson, J.E. & Sternberg, R.J. 1998. Smart problem solving: How metacognition helps. In D. Hacker, J. Dunlosky & A. Graesser (Eds.) Metacognition in
Educational theory and practise, (pp.47-68). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Publishers.
DeCorte, E. 2000. Marrying theory building and the improvement of school practice: a permanent challenge for instructional psychology. Learning and
Instructi on, 10, 249-266.
Edelson, D.C., Gordin, D. N. & Pea, R.D.1999. Addressing the challenges of inquiry-based learning through technology and curriculum desingn. The
Journal of the Learning Sciences, 8(3&4), 451-493.
Flavell, J.H. 1979. Metacognition and cognitive monitoring. A new area of cognitive-developmental inquiry. American Psy. Vol. 34, No. 10, 906-911.
Hakkarainen, K., Lipponen, L. & Jrvel, S. 2000. Epistemology of inquiry and computer-supported collaborative learning. A cross-cultural comparison.
An article to appear in T. Koschmann, & N. Miyake. (Eds.), New Perspectives on Computer-supported Collaborative Learning.
Jrvel, S., Hakkarainen, K., Lehtinen, E. & Lipponen, L. 2000. Creating Computer Supported Collaborative Learning (CSCL) Culture in Finnish
Schools: Research Perspectives on Sociocognitive Effects. International Journal of Continuing Engineering Education and Life-Long learning.
Schoenfeld, A.H. 1985. Mathematical problem solving. Orlando: Academic Press, Inc.
Schoenfeld, A.H. 1987. What's all the fuss about metacognition? In A.H. Schoenfeld (Ed.) Cognitive Sci ence and mathematics education,(pp.189-215).
Hillsdale, NJ: Earlbaum Associates.
Schoenfeld, A.H. 1992. Learning to think mathematically: Problem solvi ng, metacognition, and sense-making in mathematics. In D.Grouws (Ed.)
Handbook for research on mathematics teachi ng and learning, (pp.334-370). New York: Macmillan.

Multidisciplinary Discourses and Psychology

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Multidisciplinary Discourses and Psychology

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Multidisciplinary Discourses

S-ar putea să vă placă și